Examination Paper of CBSE CLass XII

CHEMISTRY
Examination Papers
2008–2014
CONTENT
n CBSE Examination Paper–2008 (Delhi) 3
n CBSE Examination Paper–2008 (All India) 23
n CBSE Examination Paper–2009 (Foreign) 92
CBSE EXAMINATION PAPERS
DELHI—2008
Time allowed: 3 hours Maximum marks: 70
General Instructions:
(i) All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Question nos. 1 to 8 are very short answer questions and carry 1 mark each.
(iii) Question nos. 9 to 18 are short answer questions and carry 2 marks each.
(iv) Question nos. 19 to 27 are also short answer questions and carry 3 marks each.
(v) Question nos. 28 to 30 are long answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
(vi) Use log tables if necessary, use of calculators is not allowed.
CBSE (Delhi) SET–I

1. What is the coordination number of each type of ions in a rock-salt type crystal structure?
2. Define the term ‘order of reaction’ for chemical reactions.
3. What causes Brownian movement in a colloidal solution?
4. In which one of the two structures, NO+2 and NO-2 , the bond angle has a higher value?
5. Write the IUPAC name of the following compound:
H3 C ¾ CH ¾ CH2 ¾ CH ¾ CH ¾ CH2 OH
½ ½ ½
CH3 OH CH3
6. Arrange the following compounds in an increasing order of their acid strengths:
(CH3 ) 2 CHCOOH, CH3 CH2 CH(Br)COOH, CH3 CH (Br) CH2 COOH
7. Write a chemical reaction in which the iodide ion replaces the diazonium group in a diazonium salt.
8. Name a substance that can be used as an antiseptic as well as a disinfectant.
9. Explain as to why haloarenes are much less reactive than haloalkanes towards nucleophilic
substitution reactions.
OR
Which compound in each of the following pairs will react faster in SN2 reaction with —OH? Why?
(i) CH3 Br or CH3 I (ii) (CH3 ) 3 CCl or CH3 Cl
10. (a) State the IUPAC name of the following compound:
H3C H
H
H Br
H
(b) Complete the following chemical equation:
peroxide
CH3 CH2 CH = CH2 + HBr ¾¾¾¾® ¼¼
11. State Henry’s law correlating the pressure of a gas and its solubility in a solvent and mention two
applications of the law.
12. A first order decomposition reaction takes 40 minutes for 30% decomposition. Calculate its t 1/ 2
value.
4 | Xam idea Chemistry–XII
13. What is meant by the ‘rate constant, k’ of a reaction? If the concentration is expressed in mol L-1
units and time in seconds, what would be the units for k (i) for a zero order reaction and (ii) for a
first order reaction?
14. Define the following terms in relation to proteins:
(i) Peptide linkage (ii) Denaturation
15. List the reactions of glucose which cannot be explained by its open chain structure.
16. Assign a reason for each of the following statements:
(i) Ammonia is a stronger base than phosphine.
(ii) Sulphur in vapour state exhibits a paramagnetic behaviour.
17. Draw the structure of the following molecules:
(i) SF4 (ii) XeF4
18. What are biodegradable and non-biodegradable detergents? Give one example of each class.
19. What is a semiconductor? Describe the two main types of semiconductors and explain mechanisms
for their conduction.
20. Calculate the temperature at which a solution containing 54 g of glucose, (C 6 H12 O6 ), in 250 g of
water will freeze. (K f for water = 1.86 K mol -1 kg)
21. What are lyophilic and lyophobic sols? Give one example of each type. Which one of these two
types of sols is easily coagulated and why?
22. State briefly the principles which serve as basis for the following operations in metallurgy:
(i) Froth floatation process
(ii) Zone refining
(iii) Refining by liquation
23. Write chemical equations for the following processes:
(i) Chlorine reacts with a hot concentrated solution of sodium hydroxide.
(ii) Orthophosphorous acid is heated
(iii) PtF6 and xenon are mixed together.
OR
Complete the following chemical equations:
(i) Ca 3 P2 ( s) + H2 O (l) ¾¾® ¼
(ii) Cu 2+ ( aq) + NH3 ( aq) ¾¾® ¼
(excess)
(iii) F2 ( g) + H2 O (l) ¾¾® ¼
24. (a) What is a ligand? Give an example of a bidentate ligand.
(b) Explain as to how the two complexes of nickel, [Ni (CN) 4 ] 2- and Ni (CO) 4 , have different
structures but do not differ in their magnetic behaviour. (Ni = 28)
25. Name the reagents which are used in the following conversions:
(i) A primary alcohol to an aldehyde
(ii) Butan-2-one to butan-2-ol
(iii) Phenol to 2, 4, 6-tribromophenol
26. Account for the following observations:
(i) pK b for aniline is more than that for methylamine.
(ii) Methylamine solution in water reacts with ferric chloride solution to give a precipitate of ferric
hydroxide.
(iii) Aniline does not undergo Friedel-Crafts reaction.
Examination Papers | 5
27. Write the names and structure of the monomers of the following polymers:
(i) Buna-S (ii) Neoprene (iii) Nylon-6
28. Conductivity of 0.00241 M acetic acid solution is 7.896 ´ 10 -5 S cm -1 . Calculate its molar
conductivity in this solution. If L°m for acetic acid is 390.5 S cm 2 mol -1 , what would be its
dissociation constant?
OR
Three electrolytic cells A, B and C containing solutions of zinc sulphate, silver nitrate and copper
sulphate, respectively are connected in series. A steady current of 1.5 ampere was passed through
them until 1.45 g of silver were deposited at the cathode of cell B. How long did the current flow?
What mass of copper and what mass of zinc were deposited in the concerned cells? (Atomic
masses of Ag = 108, Zn = 65.4, Cu = 63.5)
29. Assign reasons for the following:
(i) The enthalpies of atomisation of transition elements are high.
(ii) The transition metals and many of their compounds act as good catalysts.
(iii) From element to element the actinoid contraction is greater than the lanthanoid contraction.
(iv) The E° value for the Mn 3+ / Mn 2+ couple is much more positive than that of Cr 3+ / Cr 2+ .
(v) Scandium ( Z = 21) does not exhibit variable oxidation states and yet it is regarded as a
transition element.
OR
(a) What may be the possible oxidation states of the transition metals with the following d
electronic configurations in the ground state of their atoms:
3d 3 4s 2 , 3d 5 4s 2 and 3d 6 4s 2 . Indicate relative stability of oxidation states in each case.
(b) Write steps involved in the preparation of (i) Na 2 CrO4 from chromite ore and (ii) K 2 MnO4
from pyrolusite ore.
30. (a) Complete the following reaction statements by giving the missing starting material, reagent or
product as required:
O2
(i) ........... ¾¾¾¾¾® 2 O
Zn ¾ H 2 O
.............
(ii) CH2 ¾¾¾¾® ¾ CHO
CH2 CH3 KMnO4

(iii) ¾¾¾¾® ...........
KOH, heat
(b) Describe the following reactions:

(i) Cannizaro reaction (ii) Cross aldol condensation
OR
(a) How would you account for the following:
(i) Aldehydes are more reactive than ketones towards nucelophiles.
(ii) The boiling points of aldehydes and ketones are lower than of the corresponding acids.
(iii) The aldehydes and ketones undergo a number of addition reactions.
(b) Give chemical tests to distinguish between:
(i) Acetaldehyde and benzaldehyde
(ii) Propanone and propanol.
CBSE (Delhi) SET–II

Questions Uncommon to Set-I
1. What is the total number of atoms per unit cell in a face-centred cubic (fcc) structure?
2. What is primary cell? Give an example.
CH3 COCH2 COCH3
9. State Raoult’s law for solutions of volatile liquids. Taking suitable examples explain the meaning
of positive and negative deviations from Raoult’s law.
OR
Define the term osmotic pressure. Describe how the molecular mass of a substance can be
determined by a method based on measurement of osmotic pressure?
10. The conductivity of a 0.20 M solution of KCl at 298 K is 0.0248 S cm -1 . Calculate its molar
conductivity.
11. Formulate the galvanic cell in which the following reaction takes place:
Zn(s) + 2Ag + (aq) ¾¾® Zn 2+ (aq) + 2Ag(s)
State:
(i) Which one of its electrodes is negatively charged?
(ii) The reaction taking place at each of its electrode.
(iii) The carriers of current within this cell.
14. Complete the following reaction equations:
(i) C 6 H5 N2 Cl + KI ¾¾® ¼
H H CCl 4
(ii) C=C + Br2 ¾¾¾® ¼
H H
15. (i) Why is it that haloalkanes are more reactive than haloarenes towards nucleophiles.
(ii) Which one of the following reacts faster in an SN1 reaction and why?
Cl
Or
Cl
28. (a) Derive the general form of the expression for the half-life of a first order reaction.
(b) The decomposition of NH3 on platinum surface is a zero order reaction. What are the rates of
production of N2 and H2 if k = 2.5 ´ 10 -4 mol -1 L s -1 ?
OR
(a) List the factors on which the rate of a chemical reaction depends.
(b) The half-life for decay of radioactive 14 C is 5730 years. An archaeological artefact containing
wood has only 80% of the 14 C activity as found in living trees. Calculate the age of the artefact.
29. (a) How will you bring about the following conversions?
(i) Ethanol to acetone (ii) Benzene to acetophenone
(iii) Benzoic acid to benzaldehyde
(b) Describe the following giving a suitable example in each case:
(i) Decarboxylation (ii) Cannizaro’s reaction
OR
(a) An organic compound contains 69.77% carbon, 11.63% hydrogen and the rest is oxygen. The
molecular mass of the compound is 86. It does not reduce Tollens’ reagent but forms an
addition compound with sodium hydrogen sulphite and gives positive iodoform test. On
vigorous oxidation it gives ethanoic and propanoic acids. Deduce the possible structure of the
organic compound.
(b) State reasons for the following:
(i) Monochloroethanoic acid has a higher pKa value than dichloroethanoic acid.
(ii) Ethanoic acid is a weaker acid than benzoic acid.
CBSE (Delhi) SET–III

Questions Uncommon to Set-I and Set–II
1. What type of substances exhibit antiferromagnetism?
2. Express the relation between conductivity and molar conductivity of a solution.
3. Which has a higher enthalpy of adsorption, physisorption or chemisorption?
10. The resistance of a conductivity cell containing 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K is 1500 W . What is
the cell constant if the conductivity of 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K is 0.146 ´ 10 -3 S cm -1 ?
19. How would you account for the following?
(i) Frenkel defects are not found in alkali metal halides.
(ii) Schottky defects lower the density of related solids.
(iii) Impurity doped silicon is a semiconductor.
OR
Explain the following properties giving suitable examples:
(i) Ferromagnetism
(ii) Paramagnetism
(iii) Ferrimagnetism
21. Explain the basic principles of following metallurgical operations:
(i) Zone refining
(ii) Vapour phase refining
(iii) Electrolytic refining
22. Explain what is observed when
(i) an electrolyte, KCl, is added to a hydrated ferric oxide sol.
(ii) an electric current is passed through a colloidal solution.
(iii) a beam of strong light is passed through a colloidal solution.
SOLUTIONS
1. Coordination number of Na + ion = 6
Coordination number of Cl - ion = 6
2. The sum of powers of the concentrations of the reactants in the rate law expression is called the
order of reaction.
3. This is due to the unequal bombardment of colloidal particles by the molecules of dispersion
medium.
4. NO+2 has higher bond angle as the central atom nitrogen in NO-2 has a lone pair of electrons.
5. 2, 5-Dimethyl hexane-1, 3-diol.
6. (CH3 ) 2 CHCOOH < CH3 ¾ CH ¾ CH2 ¾ COOH < CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH ¾ COOH
½ ½
Br Br
+
N2 Cl I
½ ½
D
7. + KI ¾¾¾® + KCl + N2
Benzene Iodobenzene
diazonium chloride
8. Phenol, 0.2% solution of phenol acts as antiseptic where as 1% solution acts as disinfectant.
9. In haloarenes C—X bond acquires a partial double bond character due to resonance. As a result
the bond cleavage in haloarenes is difficult than haloalkanes and therefore, they are less reactive
towards nucleophilic substitution reaction.
X +X +X + X X
| |
OR
(i) CH3–I reacts faster than CH3–Br as iodine is a better leaving group because of its larger size.
(ii) CH3–Cl (1° halide) reacts faster than (CH3 ) 3 CCl (3° halide) since in case tertiary butyl
chloride three bulky methyl group hinder the approaching nucleophile.
10. (a) 1-Bromo but-2-ene.
Peroxide
(b) CH3 - CH2 - CH = CH2 + H - Br ¾¾¾® CH3 - CH2 - CH2 - CH2 - Br
But-1-ene 1-bromo butane
11. It states that at constant temperature the mass of a gas(m) dissolved in a given volume of the
liquid is directly proportional to the pressure of the gas ( P) present in equilibrium with the liquid.
Mathematically, m µ P
or m = KH P
where K H is the Henry’s law constant.
Applications of Henry’s law are
(i) To increase the solubility of CO2 in soft drinks and soda water, the bottle is sealed under high
pressure.
(ii) To minimize the painful effects accompanying the decompression of deep sea divers, oxygen
diluted with less soluble helium gas is used as breathing gas.
12. For a first order reaction
2.303 [R ]0
K= log
t [R ]
[R ]0 100 10
when t = 40 minutes, = =
[ R ] 100 - 30 7
2.303 10 2.303 2.303
K= log = log 1.428 = ´ 0.1548
40 7 40 40
K = 8.91 ´ 10 - 3 min - 1
0.693 0.693
t 1/ 2 = =
K 8.91 ´ 10 -3
t 1/ 2 = 77.78 min.
13. Rate constant is the rate of the reaction when the concentration of each reactant is taken as unity.
Q rate = K [ A ] n
1- n
æ mol. ö
\ General unit of K = ç ÷ s -1
è lit. ø
(i) For a zero order reaction n = 0
\ Unit of K = mol lit -1 sec -1
(iii) For a first order reaction n = 1
\ Unit of K = sec - 1
14. (i) Peptide linkage: A peptide linkage is an amide linkage ( ¾ CONH ¾ ) formed between
¾ COOH group of one a-amino acid and NH2 group of the other amino acid by the elimination
of a water molecule.
O
½½ - H2O
H2 N ¾ CH2 ¾ C ¾ OH + H NH ¾ CH ¾ COOH ¾¾¾®
½
CH3
O
½½
H2 NCH2 ¾ C ¾ NH ¾ CH ¾ COOH
½
CH3
Peptide linkage
(Gly -Ala)
(ii) Denaturation: When a protein in its native form is subjected to physical change like change in
temperature or chemical change like change in pH, the hydrogen bonds are disturbed. Due to
this, globules unfold and helix get uncoiled and proteins loses its biological activity. During
denaturation 2° and 3° structures of proteins are destroyed but 1° structure remains intact, e.g.,
coagulation of egg white on boiling.
15. The following reactions of glucose cannot be explained by its open chain structure.
(i) Despite having the aldehyde group glucose does not give 2, 4-DNP test, Schiffs test and it does
not form the hydrogen sulphite addition product with NaHSO3 .
(ii) The pentacetate of glucose does not react with hydroxylamine indicating the absence of free
—CHO group.
(iii) When D-glucose is treated with methanol in the presence of dry hydrogen chloride gas, it gives
two isomeric mono methyl derivatives known as a-D glucoside and methyl b-D glucoside.
These glucosides do not react with hydrogen cyanide or with hydroxylamine.
16. (i) As the atomic size of nitrogen is smaller than phosphorus, therefore electron density on
nitrogen atom is higher than that on phosphorus atom. Consequently the tendency of N in NH3
to donate its lone pair of electrons is much higher than that of P in PH3 . Thus, ammonia is
stronger base than phosphine.
(ii) In vapour state sulphur partly exists as S 2 molecule which has two unpaired electrons in the
antibonding p * orbitals like O2 and, hence exhibits paramagnetic behaviour.
17. (i) sp 3 d hybridisation. F
b. p. = 4
5e pairs S
l. p. = 1
F
See-saw shape
F
(ii) sp 3 d 2 hybridisation
F F
b. p. = 4 Xe
6e pairs
l. p. = 2 F F
Square planar
18. Biodegradable detergents: Detergents having straight hydrocarbon chains are easily degraded by
micro-organism and hence called biodegradable detergents, e.g., sodium–4–(1-dodecyl) benzene
sulphonate.
CH3 ¾ (CH2 ) 11 ¾ ¾ SO-3 Na +
Non-biodegradable detergents: Detergents having branched hydrocarbon chains are not easily
degraded by micro-organisms and hence are called non-biodegradable detergents, e.g., sodium-4-
(1, 3, 5, 7-tetramethyl octyl) benzenesulphonate.
CH3 CH3
½ ½
CH3 ¾ ( CH ¾ CH2 ¾ ) 3 ¾ CH ¾ ¾ SO-3 Na +
Non-biodegradable detergents accumulate in rivers and waterways thereby causing water pollution.
19. Semiconductor: These are the solids with conductivities in the intermediate range from 10 -6 to
10 4 ohm -1 m -1 .
Semiconductors are of two types
(i) n-type of semiconductors (ii) p-type of semiconductors
n-type semiconductor: When a silicon or germanium crystal is doped with group 15 element like
P or As, the dopant atom forms four covalent bonds like a Si or Ge atom but the fifth electron, not
used in bonding, becomes delocalised and contribute its share towards electrical conduction. Thus
silicon or germanium doped with P or As is called n-type semiconductor, n indicative of negative,
since it is the electron that conducts electricity.
p-type semiconductor: When silicon or germanium is doped with group 13 element like B or Al,
the dopant has only with three, valence electrons. An electron vacancy or a hole is created at the
place of the missing fourth electron. Here, this hole moves through the crystal like a positive
charge giving rise to electrical conductivity. Thus Si or Ge doped with B or Al is called p type of
semiconductor, (P stands for positive hole) since it is the positive hole that is responsible for
conduction.
Silicon atom Mobile electron Positive hole
(no electron)
As B
Perfect crystal n-type p-type
20. Mass of glucose (WB ) = 54 g

Molecular mass of glucose ( M B ) = 180
Mass of water (WB ) = 250 g
K f for water = 1.86 k mol - 1 kg
K f ´ WB ´ 1000
Applying the formula, D Tf =
M B ´ WA
1.86 ´ 54 ´ 1000
DTf = = 2.23
180 ´ 250
Tf = T ° f - DTf = 0 - ( 2.23)
Tf = - 2.23° C
21. Lyophilic sols: Lyophilic sols are those sols in which the particles of dispersed phase have great
affinity for the dispersion medium, e.g., sols of gum, gelatine, starch, etc.
Lyophobic sols: In this type of sols the particles of dispersed phase have little or no affinity for
the dispersion medium, e.g., gold sol, Fe (OH) 3 sol, As 2 O3 sol., etc.
Lyophobic sols easily coagulate on the addition of small amount of electrolyte because these are
not stable. The stability of Lyophobic sols is only due to the presence of charge on the colloidal
particles, on the other hand stability of lyophilic sol. is due to charge as well as solvation of
colloidal particles.
22. (i) The principle of froth floatation process is that sulphide ore particle are preferentially wetted by
pine oil, whereas the gangue particles are wetted by water.
(ii) Zone refining is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in (liquid state) than
in the solid state of the metal.
(iii) The principle of refining by liquation is that the impurities whose melting points are higher than
the metal are left behind on melting the impure metal. Hence pure metal separates out.
23. (i) 3Cl 2 + 6NaOH ¾¾® 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2 O
(Hot & conc.)
D
(ii) 4H3 PO3 ¾¾® 3H3 PO4 + PH3
(iii) PtF6 + Xe ¾¾® Xe + [PtF6 ] -
OR
(i) Ca 3 P2 (s) + 6H2 O(l) ¾¾® 2PH3 + 3Ca (OH) 2
(ii) Cu 2+ (aq) + 4NH3 (aq) r [Cu(NH3 ) 4 ] 2+ (aq)
(blue) (excess) (deep blue)
(iii) 2F2 (g) + 2H2 O (l) ¾¾® 4H (aq) + 4F - (aq) + O2 (g)

+
24. (a) The ion, atom or molecule bound to the central atom/ion in the coordination entity is called
ligand. A ligand should have lone pair of electrons in their valence orbital which can be donated
to central metal atom/ion.
·· ··
Bidentate ligand: H2 N ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ N H2
(Ethylene diamine)
(b)
3d 4s 4p
Orbital of
Ni2+ ion
dsp 2 hybridised
orbitals of Ni2+
dsp 2 hybrid
[Ni(CN)4 ]2-
(Low spin complex)
Four pairs of
electrons from
4CN- group.
Structure: Square planar.

Magnetic behaviour: Diamagnetic due to the absence of unpaired electrons.
Orbital of
Ni (O)
3d 4s 4p
sp 3 hybridised
orbitals of Ni
3d sp 3 hybrid
Ni(CO) 4
(Low spin complex)
3d Four pairs of electrons from
four CO molecules
Structure: Tetrahedral
Magnetic behaviour: Diamagnetic due to the absence of unpaired electrons.
+
25. (i) Pyridinium chlorochromate (C5 H5 N HCrO3 Cl - ) or Cu/573 K
(ii) LiAlH4 / ether (iii) Br2 / H2 O
26. (i) In aniline due to resonance the lone pair of electrons on the nitrogen atom are delocalized over
the benzene ring. As a result, the electron density on the nitrogen decreases. On the other hand,
in methyl amine +I effect of CH3 increases the electron density on the nitrogen atom. Therefore
aniline is a weaker base than methyl amine and hence its pK b value is higher than that of
methyl amine.
CH3 ¾ NH2 + H2 O r CH3 N H3 + OH–
+
(ii)
Due to alkaline nature of solution of methylamine precipitation of Fe(OH) 3 occurs.
FeCl 3 + 3OH– ¾¾® Fe (OH) 3 ¯ + 3Cl -
Ferric hydroxide
(Brown ppt)
(iii) Aniline being a Lewis base, reacts with lewis acid AlCl 3 to form a salt. Due to this N atom of
aniline acquires positive charge and hence acts as a strong deactivation group for further
reaction.
27.
Polymer Monomer Structure of Monomer
(i) Buna-S Buta-1, 3-diene CH2 = CH ¾ CH = CH2
CH = CH2
and styrene ½
(ii) Neoprene Chloroprene H2 C = C ¾ CH = CH2

½
Cl
O
(iii) Nylon-6 Caprolactum
C— NH
CH2 CH2
CH2 CH2
CH2
28. c = 0.00241 M, K = 7.896 ´ 10 -5 S cm -1 , l¥m = 390.5 S cm 2 mol - 1

K ´ 1000
lm =
c
Substituting the values
7.896 ´ 10 -5 ´ 1000
lm = = 32.76 S cm 2 mol -1
0.002
lc 32.76
a= m = = 0.084
¥
l m 390.5
a = 8.4%
CH3 ¾ COOH r CH3 ¾ COO- + H+
c 0 0
c(1 - a ) ca ca
[ CH3 ¾ COO- ] [ H+ ] ca . ca ca 2
Ka = = =
[ CH3 ¾ COOH] c (1 - a ) 1 - a
0.0241(0.084) 2
Ka = = 1.86 ´ 10 -5
(1 - 0.084)
OR
Ag + + e - ¾® Ag
108 g of Ag are deposited by 96500 C
96500
\ 1.45 g of Ag will be deposited by = ´ 1.45 C
108
= 1295.6 C
Q 1295.6
t= = = 863.7 s.
I 1.50
Cu 2+ + 2e - ¾¾® Cu
2 ´ 96500 C deposit Cu = 63.5 g
63.5
\ 1295.6 C deposit Cu = ´ 1295.6 = 0.426 g
2 ´ 96500
Zn 2+ + 2e - ¾¾® Zn
2 ´ 96500 C deposits Zn = 65.3 g
65.3
\ 1295.6 C deposit Zn = ´ 1295.6 = 0.438 g
2 ´ 96500
29. (i) This is because transition metals have strong metallic bonds as they have a large number of
unpaired electrons.
(ii) The catalytic activity of transition metals is attributed to the following reasons:
(a) Because of their variable oxidation states transition metals form unstable intermediate
compounds and provide a new path with lower activation energy for the reaction.
(b) In some cases, the transition metal provides a suitable large surface area with free valencies
on which reactants are adsorbed.
(iii) This is due to poorer shielding by 5f electrons in actinoids than that by 4f electron in the
lanthanoids.
(iv) This is because half filled d-subshell (3d 5 ) in Mn 2+ is more stable.

(v) This is because scandium has partially filled d orbitals in the ground state (3d 1 4s 2 ).
OR
(a)
Electronic Element Possible O.S. More stable O.S.
Configuration
3d 2 4s 2 Vanadium + 2, + 3, + 4, + 5 +5
5 2 Manganese + 2, + 3, + 4, + 5, + 6, + 7 + 2, + 7
3d 4s
3d 6 4s 2 Iron + 2, + 3, + 4, + 6 + 2, + 3
(b) (i) Chromite ore is fused with sodium carbonate in excess of air.
4FeCr2 O4 + 8Na 2 CO3 + 7O2 ¾® 8Na 2 CrO4 + 2Fe 2 O3 + 8CO2
Chromite ore Sod. chromate
(ii) Pyrolusite ore (MnO2 ) is fused with KOH in the presence of O2 or oxidising agent
such as KNO3 .
2MnO2 + 4KOH + O2 ¾® 2K 2 MnO4 + 2H2 O
Pyrolusite ore Potassium maganate
30. (a) (i)
(ii) BH3 / THF, H2 O2 / OH– ,

PCC or Cu, 573 K.
COO- K +
(iii)
(b) (i) Cannizzaro reaction: Aldehydes which do not have an a-hydrogen, undergo self
oxidation and reduction (disproportionation) reaction on treatment with concentrated
alkali. In this reaction one molecule of the aldehyde is reduced to alcohol while another is
oxidised to carboxylic acid salt.
conc. KOH
2HCHO ¾¾¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ OH + HCOO- K +
Formaldehyde Methyl alcohol Potasium formate
(ii) Cross aldol condensation: When aldol condensation is carried out between two different
aldehydes and/or ketones, it is called cross aldol condensation.
O O
½½ OH – ½½
¾ CHO + ¾ C ¾ CH3 ¾¾¾® ¾ CH = CH ¾ C ¾
293 K
Benzaldehyde Acetophenone Benzal acetophenone

If both of them contain a-hydrogen atoms. It gives a mixture of four products.
OR
(a) (i) This is due to steric and electronic reasons. Sterically, the presence of two relatively large
substituents in ketones hinders the approach of nucleophile to carbonyl carbon than in
aldehydes having only one such substituent. Electronically two alkyl groups reduce the
positivity of the carbonyl carbon more effectively in ketones than in aldehydes.
(ii) This is due to intermolecular hydrogen bonding in carboxylic acids.
(iii) Due to greater electronegativity of oxygen than carbon the C atom of the C = O bond
acquires a partial positive charge in aldehydes and ketones and hence readily undergo
nucleophilic addition reactions.
(b) (i) Acetaldehyde reacts with NaOI (I 2 / NaOH) to form yellow ppt of iodoform while
benzaldehyde does not give this test.
CH3 ¾ CHO + 3NaOI ¾® HCOO- Na + + CHI 3 + 2NaOH
Iodoform
(yellow ppt)
CHO
½
NaOI
¾¾¾¾® No reaction
(ii) Propanone give orange-red ppt with 2, 4-DNP reagent and yellow ppt of iodoform with
sodium hypoiodite, whereas 1-propanol does not give these tests.
CH3 ¾ COCH3 + 3NaOI ¾® CHI 3 + CH3 ¾ COO- Na + + 2NaOH
Iodoform
yellow ppt.
NaOI
CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ OH ¾ ¾¾® No yellow ppt. of iodoform

1 1
1. 8 (corner atoms) ´ atom per unit cell + 6 (face atoms) ´ atom per unit cell = 1 + 3 = 4
8 2
2. A primary cell is one in which the redox reaction occurs only once and the cell becomes dead after
some time and cannot be used again, e.g., dry cell.
6. Pentane-2, 4-dione.
9. Raoult’s law: It states that for a solution of volatile liquids the partial pressure of each component
is directly proportional to its mole fraction.
Mathematically
PA µ x A PB µ x B
PA = PAo x A PB = PBo x B
Positive deviation from Raoult’s law: In this type of deviation the partial pressure of each
component of solution is greater than that calculated from Raoult’s law, i.e., PA > PAo x A &
PB > PBo x B . Example: A solution of water and ethanol.
Negative deviation from Raoult’s: In this type of deviation the partial pressure of each component
of solution is less than that expected from Raoult’s law, i.e., PA < PAo x A & PB < PBo x B .
Example: A solution of acetone and chloroform.
OR
Osmotic pressure ( p) is defined as the extra pressure that must be applied to the solution side in
order to prevent the flow of solvent molecules into it through a semipermeable membrane.
n
p = B RT = CRT
V
where V is the volume of solution in litres containing n B moles of the solute.
If WB grams of the solute whose molecular mass M B is present in the solution then
W RT
p= B
M B RT
W RT
MB = B
pV
Thus, knowing WB , T , p and V molecular mass of the solute, M B can be calculated.
10. k = 0.0248 S cm -1 , M = 0.2 mol L-1
k ´ 1000 0.0248 ´ 1000
Lm = =
M 0.2
L m = 1248 cm 2 mol -1
11. Zn Zn 2+ (conc.) Ag + (conc) Ag
(i) Zn electrode is negatively charged.
(ii) At anode Zn ¾¾® Zn 2+ + 2e -
At cathode 2Ag + + e - ¾® 2Ag
(iii) Current carriers of cell are
* electrons in external wire.
* Zn 2+ ions in anodic half cell.
* Ag + ions in cathodic half cell.
* Ions of salt bridge, i.e., K + and Cl - .
14. (i) C 6 H5 N2 Cl + KI ¾® C 6 H5 I + KCl + N2
Iodobenzene
H H CCl 4 H H
(ii) C=C + Br2 ¾¾¾® C¾ C
H H H ½ ½ H
Br Br
1, 2-Dibromoethane
15. (i) In haloarenes C—X bond acquires a partial double bond character due to resonance. As a result
the bond cleavage in haloarenes is difficult than haloalkanes and therefore, they are less reactive
towards nucleophilic substitution reaction.
X +X +X + X X
| |
Cl
(ii) Or
Cl
I II
Compound (I) reacts faster in SN1 reaction as it is a 2° alkyl halide.
28. (a) Consider the first order reaction
R ¾¾® P
d [R ]
Rate = - = K [R ]
dt
d [R ]
or = - K dt
[R ]
Integrating both the sides we get
ln [ R ] = - Kt + C …(i)
when t = 0, R = [ R ] 0 where [ R ] 0 is the initial concentration of the reactant.
Therefore equation (i) can be written as
ln [ R ] 0 = - K ´ 0 + C
ln [ R ] 0 = C
Substituting the value of C in equation (i)
ln [ R ] = - Kt + ln [ R ] 0
Kt = ln [ R ] 0 - ln [ R ]
ln [ R ] 0
Kt =
[R ]
[R ]0 2.303 [R ]0
Kt = 2.303 log Þ t= log
[R ] K [R ]
[R ]0
when t = t 1/ 2 [R ] =
2
2.303 [R ]0
\ t 1/ 2 = log
K [R ]0
2
2.303 2.303
t 1/ 2 = log 2 = ´ 0.3010
K K
0.693
\ t 1/ 2 =
K
(b) 2NH3 ¾¾® N2 + 3H2
For a zero order reaction
Rate = K [ NH3 ] 0
Rate = K = 2.5 ´ 10 -4
1 d [ NH3 ] d [ N2 ] 1 d [ H2 ]
Rate = - = =
2 dt dt 3 dt
d [ N2 ] -4 -1 -1
\ = 2.5 ´ 10 mol L S
dt
d [ H2 ] 3d [ N2 ]
= = 3 ´ 2.5 ´ 10 -4 mol L-1 S -1
dt dt
d [ H2 ]
= 7.5 ´ 10 -4 mol L-1 S -1
dt
OR
(a) Rate of reaction depends on
(i) Concentration (ii) Temperature
(iii) Nature of reactant (iv) Pressure of the gaseous reactant
(v) Surface area (vi) Catalyst
(b) t 1/ 2 = 5730 years
0.693 0.693
\ K= = = 1.209 ´ 10 -4 year -1
t 1/ 2 5730
2.303 [R ]0 2.303 100
t= log = log
K [ R ] 1.2 ´ 10 -4 80
2.303 ´ 10 4 2.303 ´ 10 4
t= (log 10 - log 8) = (1 - 3 log 2)
1.2 1.2
2.303 2.303 ´ 0.097 ´ 10 4
t= ´ 10 4 (1 - 3 ´ 0.3010) =
1.2 1.209
t = 1847.7 years
K 2 Cr2 O7 /H 2 SO4 (O)
29. (a) (i) CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ OH ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ CHO ¾® CH3 ¾ COOH
Ethyl alcohol (O) Acetic acid
O
½½ O
Ca (OH) 2 O ¾ C ¾ CH3 Dry distill ½½
¾¾¾® Ca ¾¾¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ C ¾ CH3
O ¾ C ¾ CH3 Acetone
½½
O
Calcium acetate
O
½½
C ¾ CH3
O ½
½½ anhyd. AlCl 3
(ii) + CH3 ¾ C ¾ Cl ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® + HCl
Acetyl chloride Friedel craft acylation
Benzene Acetophenone
O O O
½½ ½½ ½½
C ¾ OH C ¾ Cl C¾ H
½ ½ ½
PCl5 + H2
(iii) ¾¾¾® ¾¾¾¾®
Pd/BaSO4
Benzoic acid Benzoyl chloride Benzaldehyde

(b) (i) Decarboxylation: Carboxylic acids lose CO2 to form hydrocarbons when their sodium salts are
heated with soda lime (NaOH and CaO in the ratio 3: 1).
NaOH and CaO
R ¾ COONa ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® R ¾ H + Na 2 CO3
D
COONa
½
NaOH /CaO
¾¾¾¾® + Na 2 CO3
D
Sodium benzoate Benzene

(ii) Cannizzaro Reaction: Aldehydes which do not have an a-hydrogen atom, undergo
disproportionation reaction on treatment. In this reaction, one molecule of the aldehyde is
reduced to alcohol while the other is oxidised to carboxylic acid.
conc. NaOH –+
2HCHO ¾¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ OH + HCOO Na
Formaldehyde Methyl alcohol Sodium formate
OR
(a) % C = 69.77%, %H = 11.63%
%O = 100 - (69.77 + 11.63) = 18.6%
69.77 11.63 18.6
C : H: O = : = = 5.81:11.63 :1.16
12 1 16
\ C : H : O = 5 :10 :1
The empirical formula of the given compound is C5 H10 O.
molecular mass
n=
Empirical formula mass
Molecular mass = 86
Empirical formula mass = 5 ´ 12 + 10 ´ 1 + 1 ´ 16 = 86
86
n= =1
81
\ Molecular formula = n ( Empirical formula)
= C5 H10 O
The (forms addition compound with NaHSO3 ) given organic compound is methyl ketone as it
gives positive iodoform test and also does not reduce Tollen’s reagent.
Since on oxidation it gives ethanoic and propanoic acid its possible structural formula is
O
½½
CH3 ¾ C ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH3
Reactions involved:
O
½½ CH3 CH2 ¾ CH2 SO-3 Na +
CH3 ¾ C ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH3 + NaHSO3 ¾® C
Pentan -2-one CH3 OH
addition compound
O
½½ Iodoform
CH3 ¾ C ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH3 + 3I 2 + 4NaOH ¾¾¾¾¾® CHI 3
reaction Iodoform
Yellow ppt.
- +
+ CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ CO O Na + 3NaI + 3H2 O
O
½½ : K 2 Cr2 O7 /H 2 SO4
CH3 ¾ C ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH3 ¾¾¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ COOH + CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ COOH
: (O) Ethanoic acid Propanoic acid
(b) (i) This is because dichloroethanoic acid is a stronger acid than monochloroethanoic acid.
(ii) This is because methyl group due to its positive inductive effect destabilize the acetate
anion by intensifying the negative charge.

1. Substance in which domains are oppositely oriented and cancel out each other magnetic moments.
k ´ 1000
2. lm =
c
where, L m = Molar conductivity
k = Conductivity
c = Molar concentration
3. Chemisorption
1
10. k = ´ cell constant
R
k = 0.146 ´ 10 -3 S cm -1 , R = 1500 ohm
1
0.146 ´ 10 -3 = ´ cell constant
1500
cell constant = 0.146 ´ 10 -3 ´ 1500 = 219 ´ 10 -3 = 0.219 cm -1
19. (i) This is because alkali metal ions have larger size which cannot fit into interstitial sites.
(ii) As the number of ions decreases as a result of Schottky defect, the mass decreases whereas the
volume remains the same.
(iii) This is due to additional electron or creation of hole on dopping with impurity.
Creation of hole causes p-type semiconductor and creation of electron causes n-type semiconductor.
OR
(i) Ferromagnetism: Ferromagnetic substances are those substance which are strongly attracted
by external magnetic fielding, e.g., (iron, cobalt, nickle and CrO2 , etc.] Ferromagnetism arises
due to spontaneous alignment of magnetic moments in the same direction.
Alignment of magnetic moments in ferromagnetic substance.

(ii) Paramagnetism: Paramagnetic substances are those substances which are weakly attracted by
magnetic field. It is due to the presence of one or more unpaired electrons, e.g.,O2 , Fe 3+ , Cr 3+ ,
etc.
(iii) Ferrimagnetism: Ferrimagnetism is observed when the magnetic moments of the domains in
the substance are aligned in parallel and antiparallel directions in unequal number resulting in
some net magnetic moment, e.g., Fe 3 O4 (magnetite) and ferrites like MgFe 2 O4 , etc.
21. (i) Zone refining is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in the melt in than
solid state of metal.
(ii) Vapour phase refining.
In this, metal is converted into its volatile compound and collected elsewhere. It is the
decomposed to give pure metal. So, the two requirements are:
(a) the metal should form a volatile compound with an available reagent.
(b) the volatile compound should be easily decomposable, so that the recovery is easy.
(iii) In electrolytic refining impure metal is made to act as anode. A strip of the same metal in pure
form is used as cathode. They are put in a suitable electrolytic bath containing soluble salt of the
same metal. When electric current is passed, impure metal forms metal ions which are
discharged at cathode forming pure metal.
Anode: M ¾® M n + + ne -
Cathode: M n + + ne - ¾® M
22. (i) The positively charged colloidal particles of Fe(OH) 3 get coagulated by the oppositely charged
Cl - ions provided by KCl.
(ii) On passing direct current, colloidal particles move towards the oppositely charged electrode
where they lose their charge and get coagulated.
(iii) Scattering of light by the colloidal particles takes place and the path of light becomes visible
(Tyndall effect).
ALL INDIA—2008
CBSE (All India) SET–I

1. Define the ‘forbidden zone’ of an insulator.
2. Mention two ways by which lyophilic colloids can be coagulated.
3. Mention all the oxidation states exhibited by chlorine in its compounds.
4. Why are lower members of aldehydes easily miscible with water?
5. Why do amines behave as nucleophiles?
6. What are disaccharides? Give an example.
7. Define the term ‘polymerisation’.
8. What is understood by ‘chemotherapy’?
9. Define osmotic pressure. How is it that measurement of osmotic pressures is more widely used for
determining molar masses of macromolecules than the rise in boiling point or fall in freezing point
of their solutions?
OR
Derive an equation to express that relative lowering of vapour pressure for a solution is equal to
the mole fraction of the solute in it when the solvent alone is volatile.
10. The conductivity of 0.20 M solution of KCl at 298 K is 0.0248 S cm -1 . Calculate its molar
conductivity in this solution.
11. Assign reasons for the following :
(i) In liquid state, hydrogen chloride is a stronger acid than hydrogen fluoride.
(ii) Phosphorus (P4 ) is much more reactive than nitrogen (N2 ).
12. Discuss the relative stability in aqueous solutions of +2 oxidation state among the elements : Cr,
Mn, Fe and Co. How would you justify this situation?
(At. Nos. Cr = 24, Mn = 25, Fe = 26, Co = 27)
13. What happens when bromine reacts with CH3 ¾ C º CH? How would you justify this reaction?
14. Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds :
(i) (CH3 ) 3 CCH2 Br
CH2 Cl
(ii)
15. Alcohols react both as nucleophiles as well as electrophiles. Write one reaction of each type and
describe its mechanism.
16. How would you carry out the following conversions?
(i) Ethyl magnesium chloride to propan-1-ol
(ii) Benzyl chloride to benzyl alcohol
17. Write the structures of the monomers of the following polymers :

(i) PVC
(ii) Polypropene
18. What are biodegradable and non-biodegradable detergents? Give one example of each type.
19. Niobium (Nb) crystallises in a body-centred cubic (bcc) structure. If its density is 8.55 g cm -3 ,
calculate the atomic radius of niobium.
(Atomic mass of Nb = 93 u; NA = 6.02 ´ 10 23 mol -1 )
OR
Explain with suitable examples the following :
(a) n-type and p-type semiconductors
(b) F-centres
(c) Ferromagnetism
20. Calculate the amount of KCl which must be added to 1 kg of water so that its freezing point is
depressed by 2 K.
(K f for water = 1.86 K kg mol -1 , Atomic mass K = 39, Cl = 35.5)
21. In the button cells widely used in watches and other devices the following reaction takes place :
Zn(s) + Ag 2 O + H2 O (l) ¾® Zn 2+ (aq) + 2 Ag(s) + 2OH- (aq)
Determine D r G° for the reaction.
(Given : E° Zn 2 + /Zn = - 0.76 V and E° Ag + Ag = + 0 . 34 V)
22. Explain what is observed when
(i) a beam of light is passed through a colloidal solution.
(ii) an electrolyte NaCl, is added to hydrated ferric oxide sol.
(iii) an electric current is passed through a colloidal sol.
23. Write the chemical reactions which take place in the following operations :
(i) Electrolytic reduction of Al 2 O3 .
(ii) Isolation of zinc from zinc blende.
(iii) Mond’s process for refining nickel.
24. Compare actinoids and lanthanoids with reference to their :
(i) electronic configurations of atoms
(ii) oxidation states of elements
(iii) general chemical reactivity of elements.
25. Write the IUPAC name and describe the magnetic behaviour (diamagnetic or paramagnetic) of the
following coordination entities:
(i) [Cr (H2 O) 2 (C 2 O4 ) 2 ] -
(ii) [Co (NH3 ) 5 Cl] 2+

(iii) [NiCl 4 ] 2-
(At. Nos. : Cr = 24, Co = 27, Ni = 28)
26. Account for the following :
(i) pK b of methylamine is less than that of aniline.
(ii) Aniline does not undergo Friedel–Crafts reaction.
(iii) Ethylamine is freely soluble in water whereas aniline is only slightly soluble.
27. Define the following in relation to proteins :
(i) Primary structure
(ii) Denaturation
(iii) Peptide linkage
28. (a) A reaction is of first order in A and of second order in B. Write the differential rate equation
for this reaction.
How will its initial rate be affected if the concentration of both A and B are together
doubled?
(b) The rate constant k of a reaction increases four fold when the temperature changes from 300 K
to 320 K. Calculate the activation energy for the reaction. (R = 8.314 J mol -1 K -1 )
OR
(a) List the factor which affect the rate of a chemical reaction.
(b) The half-life for radioactive 14 C is 5730 years. The wooden part of an archaeological artefact
has only 80% of the 14 C activity found in fresh wood. Calculate the age of the artefact.
29. (a) Assign reasons for the following :
(i) Bi (V) is a stronger oxidising agent than Sb (V).
(ii) Of the noble gases only xenon is known to form established chemical compounds.
(b) Draw the structures of the following molecules :
(i) H2 S 2 O7 (ii) BrF3 (iii) XeF2
OR
(a) Complete the following chemical reaction equations :
(i) Ca 3 P2 + H2 O ¾®
(ii) XeF4 + H2 O ¾®
(b) How would you account for the following observations :
(i) NH3 is a stronger base than PH3 .
(ii) Sulphur in vapour state exhibits paramagnetism.
(iii) Hydrogen fluoride has a higher boiling point than hydrogen chloride.
30. (a) Illustrate the following reactions giving one example for each :
(i) Cannizzaro reaction
(ii) Decarboxylation
(b) Complete the following reaction equations by giving the indicated missing substances :
H 2 NCONHNH 2
(i) CH3 CHO ¾¾¾¾¾¾® .......... (?)
(i) O3
(ii) (?) ........... ¾¾¾¾¾¾® 2 O
(ii) Zn - H 2 O
.................. (?)
(iii) CH2 ¾¾¾¾¾® ¾ CHO
OR
(a) State tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds :
(i) Propanal and propanone
(ii) Phenol and benzoic acid
(b) How will you bring about the following conversions :
(i) Propanone to propene
(ii) Benzaldehyde to benzophenone
(iii) Ethanol to 3-hydroxybutanal
CBSE (All India) SET–II

1. Which crystal defect lowers the density of a solid?
6. What are reducing sugars? Give one example.
8. What is tincture of iodine?
10. Define the following terms giving an example for each:
(i) The order of a reaction
(ii) The molecularity of a reaction
18. Why do soaps not function in hard water, for washing clothes? How are synthetic detergents better
than soaps for this purpose?
21. The rate constant for a first order reaction is 60 s -1 . How much time will it take to reduce the
initial concentration of the reactant to 1/16 th of its initial value?
23. Describe the principle involved in the following metallurgical operations:
(i) Zone refining
(ii) Electrolytic refining
(iii) Froth-floatation process of concentrating sulphide ores
27. What happens when D-glucose is treated with the following reagents?
(i) HNO3
(ii) Bromine water
(iii) HI
Indicate the products formed.
28. (a) Depict the galvanic cell in which the following reaction takes place:
Zn (s) + 2Ag + (aq) ¾® Zn 2+ (aq) + 2Ag (s)
Also indicate that in this cell
(i) which electrode is negatively charged.
(ii) what are the carrier of the current in the cell.
(iii) what is the individual reaction at each electrode.
(b) Write the Nernst equation and determine the e.m.f. of the following cell at 298 K:
Mg (s) | Mg 2+ (0.001 M) || Cu 2+ (0.0001 M) | Cu (s)
(Given : E° Mg 2 + /Mg = - 2.375 V, E° Cu 2 + /Cu = + 0.34 V)
OR
(a) Define conductivity and molar conductivity for the solution of an electrolyte. How do they vary
when the concentration of electrolyte in the solution increases?
(b) Three conductivity cells A, B and C containing solutions of zinc sulphate, silver nitrate and
copper sulphate respectively are connected in series. A steady current of 1.5 amperes is passed
through them until 1.45 g of silver is deposited at the cathode of cell B. How long did the
current flow? What mass of copper and what mass of zinc got deposited in their respective
cells?
(Atomic mass : Zn = 65.4 u, Ag = 108 u, Cu = 63.5 u)
CBSE (All India) SET–III

Questions Uncommon to Set-I and Set–II.
1. Name an element with which silicon may be doped to give a p-type semiconductor.
10. What is meant by a pseudo first order reaction? Give an example of a pseudo first order reaction
and write the rate equation for the same.
12. Assign a reason for each of the following:
(i) The third ionization energy of Mn (Z = 25) is higher than that of either Cr ( Z = 24) or Fe
( Z = 26).
(ii) Simple copper (I) salts are not stable in aqueous solutions.
18. What are artificial sweetening agents? Give two examples.
21. The rate constant for a first order reaction is 60 s -1 . How much time will it take to reduce the
initial concentration of reactant to 1/10 th of its value?
24. Describe the trends in the following properties of the first series of the transition elements :
(i) Oxidation states
(ii) Atomic sizes
(iii) Magnetic behaviour of dipositive gaseous ions (M 2+ )
SOLUTIONS
1. The difference of energy between conduction band and valence band is called forbidden zone and
for insulator its value is averaging between 3–6 eV.
2. This can be done
(i) by adding an electrolyte.
(ii) by adding a suitable solvent.
3. Cl 2 exhibits - 1, + 1, + 3, + 5, + 7 oxidation states in its compounds.
4. Lower members aldehydes are able to form intermolecular hydrogen bonds with water molecules.
Hence, they are easily miscible with water.
5. Due to the presence of a lone pair of electrons on nitrogen atom.
6. Carbohydrates that yield two monosaccharide units, on hydrolysis are called disaccharides, e.g.,
sucrose.
7. The process of formation of polymers from respective monomers is called polymerisation.
O2 , 350K -570 K
1000-2000 atm
nCH2 = CH2 ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® ¾
( CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾
)n
Ethene Polymerisation Polyethene (LDP)
(monomer) (polymer)
8. Chemotherapy: It is the branch of chemistry which deals with the treatment of diseases using
suitable chemicals.
9. Osmotic pressure ( p) may be defined as the extra pressure that must be applied to the solution to
prevent the flow of solvent molecules into it through a semipermeable membrane.
n
p = B RT = CRT
V
WB . R. T
p=
M B .V
where V is the volume of solution in litre containing n B moles of solute of molecular mass M B .
Thus knowing p, WB , T and V molecular mass of the solute M B can be calculated.
The osmotic pressure method has the advantage over rise in boiling point or fall in freezing point
for determining molar masses of macromolecules because
(i) Osmotic pressure is measured at the room temperature and the molarity of solution is used
instead of molality.
(ii) Compared to other colligative properties, its magnitude is large even for very dilute solutions.
OR
For a solution of volatile liquids Raoult’s law, is given as
P = PA + PB
If solute (component B) is non-volatile then
P = PA = PAo x A
P = PAo (1 - x B ) (Q x A + x B = 1)
P= PAo - PAo x B
PAo x B = PAo - P
PAo - P
= xB
PAo
Thus, relative lowering of vapour pressure is equal to the mole fraction of non-volatile solute.
10. K = 0.0248 S cm -1
M = 0.2 mol L-1
K ´ 1000 0.0248 ´ 1000
lm = =
M 0.2
l m = 124 S cm 2 mol -1
11. (i) It is due to
(a) Intermolecular hydrogen bonding in HF.
(b) Higher H—F bond dissociation enthalpy than H—Cl.
(ii) As P—P single bond (213 kJ mol -1 ) in P4 is much weaker than N º N triple bond
(941.4 kJ mol -1 ) in N2 .
12. On the basis of electrochemical series the standard electrode potential shows the following order
E° Mn 2 + /Mn < E° Cr 2 + /Cr < E° Fe2 + /Fe < E° Co 2 + /Co
Therefore, Co 2+ gets easily reduced to metallic cobalt while it is difficult to reduce Mn 2+ . Hence
Mn 2+ will be most stable and the increasing stability order will be
Co 2+ < Fe 2+ < Cr 2+ < Mn 2+
13. When bromine reacts with propyne, the reddish brown colour of bromine is discharged as long as
propyne is present in excess.
Br Br Br
CCl 4 ½ + Br2 ½ ½
CH3 ¾ C º CH + Br2 ¾® CH3 ¾ C = C ¾ H ¾¾® CH3 ¾ C ¾ C ¾ H
Propyne ½ ½ ½
Br Br Br
1, 1, 2, 2, Tetra Bromo propane
(colourless)
This is due to the formation of 1, 1, 2, 2-tetrabromo propane which is colourless.
CH3
½ ¾ CH2 ¾ Cl
14. (i) CH3 ¾ C ¾ CH2 ¾ Br (ii)
½
CH3 Phenyl chloromethane
1-Bromo-2, 2-dimethyl propane
15. Alcohols as nucleophile:
The bond between O—H is broken when an alcohol reacts as a nucleophile.
H+
R ¾ COOH + R¢¾ OH r R ¾ COOR¢ + H2 O
Carboxylic acid Alcohol Ester
Mechanism:
··
·· + ·
·· OH
·
O OH R¢ ¾ O ¾ H
·· H+ ·· ½ +
r r
··
R¾ C R¾ C R ¾ C ¾ O· ¾ R¢
·
·· OH ½ ½
O¾H
·· · OH H
···
Tetrahedral intermediate
··
·· + Proton transfer ·
OH
·
O ·· O¾H
- H+ ·· -H2O
½
R¾ C r R¾ C r R ¾ C ¾ O ¾ R¢
·· ·· ½
O ¾ R¢ O ¾ R¢ +
·· ·· ·
Ester · O¾ H
½
H
Tetrahedral intermediate
Alcohols as electrophile:
The bond between C—O is broken when alcohols react as electrophiles.
R ¾ CH2 ¾ O ¾ H + HCl ¾¾® R ¾ CH2 ¾ Cl + H2 O
Alcohol
Mechanism
·· +
R ¾ CH2 ¾ O ¾ H + H+ ¾¾® R ¾ CH2 ¾ O H2
·· ··
- +
Cl + CH2 ¾ O H2 ¾¾® Cl ¾ CH2 + H2 O
½ ·· ½
R R
é OMgCl ù
O
ê ½ ú
½½ d- d+ ê ú
16. (i) H ¾ C ¾ H + CH3 ¾ CH2 Mg Cl ¾¾® ê H ¾ C ¾ H ú
Formaldehyde Ethyl magnesium
chloride ê ½ ú
ê CH2 ¾ CH3 úû
ë
H2O OH
¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ OH + Mg
Propan -1-ol Cl
CH2 ¾ Cl CH2 ¾ OH
½ ½
D
(ii) + KOH (aq) ¾¾¾® + KCl
Benzyl chloride Benzyl alcohol

17. Polymer Monomer Structure of the monomer

(i) PVC Vinyl chloride CH2 = CH ¾ Cl
(ii) Polypropene Propene CH3 ¾ CH = CH2
sulphonate.
+
CH3 ¾ (CH2 ) 11 ¾ ¾ SO-3 Na
degraded by the micro-organism and hence are called non-biodegradable detergents, e.g.,
sodium-4-(1, 3, 5, 7-tetramethyl octyl) benzenesulphonate.
CH3 CH3
½ ½ +
CH3 ¾ ( CH ¾ CH2 ¾ ) 3 ¾ CH ¾ ¾ SO-3 Na
19. d = 8.55 g / cm 3 , M = 93 g / mol
For bcc, z = 2, a = ? N A = 6.02 ´ 10 23
z´M
d=
a3 ´ NA
2 ´ 93
8.55 =
a ´ 6.02 ´ 10 23
3
2 ´ 93
a3 =
8.55 ´ 6.02 ´ 10 23
1/ 3
æ 930 ö
a=ç ÷ 10 -8
è 8.55 ´ 3.01 ø
1/ 3
æ 930 ö
Let x =ç ÷
è 8.55 ´ 3.01 ø
1/ 3
æ 930 ö
\ log x = log ç ÷
è 8.55 ´ 3.01 ø
1
= (log 930 - log 8.55 - log 3.01)
3
1
= ( 2.9685 - 0.9320 - 0.4786)
3
1
log x = (1.5579) = 0.5193
3
x = Antilog ( 0.5193)
x = 3.306
\ a = 3.306 ´ 10 -8 cm
3
Now r= a
4
3 1.732 ´ 3.306 ´ 10 -8
\ r= ´ 3.306 ´ 10 -8 =
4 4
r = 1.4315 ´ 10 cm = 143.15 ´ 10 - 10 cm
-8
r = 143.15 pm
OR
(a) n-type semiconductor: When a silicon or germanium crystal is doped with group 15 element
like P or As, the dopant atom forms four covalent bonds like a Si or Ge atom but the fifth
electron, not used in bonding, becomes delocalised and contribute its share towards electrical
conduction. Thus silicon or germanium doped with P or As is called n-type semiconductor, n
indicative of negative, since it is the electron that conducts electricity.
p-type semiconductor: When silicon or germanium is doped with group 13 element like B or
Al, the dopant has only with three, valence electrons. An electron vacancy or a hole is created
at the place of the missing fourth electron. Here, this hole moves through the crystal like a
positive charge giving rise to electrical conductivity. Thus Si or Ge doped with B or Al is
called p type of semiconductor, (P stands for positive hole) since it is the positive hole that is
responsible for conduction.
(b) F-centres: Electrons trapped in anion vacancies are called F-centres. They impart characteristic
colour to the compound and increase electrical conductivity.
(c) Ferromagnetism: Ferromagnetic substances are those substances which are strongly attracted
by external magnetic field, e.g., (iron, cobalt, nickle and CrO2 etc.] Ferromagnetism arises due
to spontaneous alignment of magnetic moments in the same direction.
Alignment of magnetic moments in ferromagnetic substance.

20. Assuming 100% dissociation of KCl, i = 2, DTf = 2 K, K f = 1.86 K kg mol -1 , WB = ?
M B = 74.5 g mol -1 , WA = 1000 g
i ´ K f ´ WB ´ 1000
DTf =
M B ´ WA
2 ´ 1.86 ´ WB ´ 1000
2=
74.5 ´ 1000
74.5
\ WB = = 40.05 g
1.86
21. Zn ¾® Zn 2+ + 2e -
Ag 2 O + H2 O + 2e - ¾® 2Ag + + 2OH–
Zn + Ag 2 O + H2 O ¾® Zn 2+ + 2Ag + 2OH–
E° cell = E° cathode - E° anode
= E° Ag + /Ag - E° Zn 2 + /Zn
E° cell = 0.34 - ( - 0.76)
= 1.10 V
also n=2
DG ° = - nFE° cell
DG° = - 2 ´ 96500 ´ 1.10
DG° = 2.123 ´ 105 J
22. (i) Scattering of light by the colloidal particles takes place and the path of light becomes visible
(Tyndall effect).
(ii) The positively charged colloidal particles of Fe(OH) 3 get coagulated by the oppositely charged
Cl - ions provided by NaCl.
(iii) On passing direct current, colloidal particles move towards the oppositely charged electrode
23. (i) Electrolytic reduction of Al 2 O 3 :
Cathode: Al 3+ (melt) + 3e - ¾® Al
Anode: C(s) + O2 - (melt) ¾® CO(g) + 2e -
C(s) + 2O2 - (melt) ¾® CO2 (g) + 4e -
(ii) Isolation of zinc from zinc blende:
D
Roasting: 2 ZnS + 3O2 ¾¾® 2 ZnO + 2 SO2
Zinc blende
1673 K
Reduction: ZnO + C ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® Zn + CO
(iii) Mond’s process for refining nickel:
330-350 K
Ni + 4CO ¾¾¾¾® Ni(CO) 4
450-470 K
Ni(CO) 4 ¾¾¾¾¾® Ni + 4CO
24.
Characteristics Lanthanoids Actinoids
1-14 0 -1 1-14
(i) Electronic configuration [Xe] 4f 5d 2
6s [Rn] 5f 6d 0 -17 s2
(ii) Oxidation states Besides + 3 O.S. lanthanoids Besides +3 O.S. actinoids show
show +2 and +3 O.S. only in a higher O.S. of +4, +5, +6, +7
few cases. also because of smaller energy
gap between 5f , 6d and 7s
subshell.
(iii) General chemical reactivity of These are less reactive metals These are highly reactive
elements metals.
Lesser tendency towards Greater tendency towards
complex formation. complex formation.
Do not form oxocation Form oxocation
Compounds are less basic. Compounds are more basic.
25. (i) [Cr(H2 O) 2 (C 2 O4 ) 2 ] -

Diaquadioxalatochromate (III) ion
O.S. of Cr = x + 0.2 + ( -2).2 = - 1, x = + 3
Electronic configuration of Cr 3+ = 3d 3 4s 0 = t 23g e g0
Unpaired electrons ( n) = 3, Paramagnetic.
(ii) [Co(NH3 ) 5 Cl] 2+
Pentaamminechloro cobalt (III) ion
O.S. of Co = x + 0.5 + ( - 1) . 1 = 2, x = 3
Electronic configuration of Co 3+ = 3d 6 4s 0 = t 26g e g0
Unpaired electrons ( n) = 0, Diamagnetic.
(iii) [NiCl 4 ] 2-
Tetrachloronickelate (II) ion
O.S. of Ni = x + ( -1) 4 = - 2, x = + 2
Electronic configuration of Ni 2+ = 3d 8 4s 0 = t 82 g e g0
Unpaired electrons ( n) = 2, Paramagnetic.
26. (i) In aniline, due to resonance, the lone pair of electrons on the nitrogen atom are delocalized over
the benzene ring. As a result, the electron density on the nitrogen decreases. On the other hand,
in methyl amine +ve I effect of CH3 increases the electrondensity on the nitrogen atom.
Therefore aniline is a weaker base than methyl amine and hence its pK b value is higher than
that of methyl amine.
(ii) Aniline being a Lewis base reacts with lewis acid AlCl 3 to form a salt. Due to this, N atom of
aniline acquires positive charge and hence acts as a strong deactivation group for further
reaction.
(iii) Ethyl amine is freely soluble in water because it forms hydrogen bonds with water molecules.
½
H H
½ d- d+ d- d+ ½ d- d+
...... H ¾ N ........ H ¾ O ....... H ¾ N ........ H ¾ O.....
½ ½ ½ ½
C 2 H5 H C 2 H5 H
On the other hand in aniline due to large, hydrocarbon part, the extent of hydrogen bonding
decreases considerably and hence aniline is slightly soluble.
27. (i) Primary structure of proteins: The sequence in which various amino acids are arranged in a
protein is called its primary structure. Any change in the sequence of amino acids creates
different protein which alters biological functions.
(ii) Denaturation: When a protein in its native form is subjected to physical change like change in
temperature or chemical change like change in pH, the hydrogen bonds are disturbed. Due to
this, globules unfold and helix get uncoiled and proteins lose its biological activity. During
denaturation 2° and 3° structures of proteins are destroyed but 1° structure remains intact, e.g.,
coagulation of egg white on boiling.
(iii) Peptide linkage: A peptide linkage is an amide linkage ( ¾ CONH ¾ ) formed between
¾ COOH group of one a-amino acid and NH2 group of the other amino acid by the elimination
of a water molecule.
O
½½ - H2O
H2 N ¾ CH2 ¾ C ¾ OH + H NH ¾ CH ¾ COOH ¾¾¾®
½
CH3
O
½½
H2 NCH2 ¾ C ¾ NH ¾ CH ¾ COOH
½
CH3
Peptide linkage
(Gly -Ala)
dx
28. (a) Rate = = K [A ] [B ]2
dt
If concentration of both A and B are doubled, then
Rate = K [ 2A ] [ 2B ] 2
= 8K [ A ] [ B ] 2
i.e., the rate of reaction becomes 8 times.
K2
(b) K 2 = 4K1 i.e., =4
K1
T1 = 300 K T2 = 320 K
K2 E a æ T2 - T1 ö
log = ç ÷
K1 2.303 R è T1T2 ø
Ea æ 320 - 300 ö
log 4 = ç ÷
2.303 ´ 8.314 è 300 ´ 320 ø
Ea æ 20 ö
2 log 2 = ç ÷
19.147 è 300 ´ 320 ø
2 ´ 0.3010 ´ 19.147 ´ 300 ´ 320
Ea = = 55327 J
20
E a = 55.327 kJ
OR
(a) Rate of reaction depends on
(i) Concentration
(ii) Temperature
(iii) Nature of reactant
(iv) Pressure of the gaseous reactant
(v) Surface area
(vi) Catalyst
(b) t 1/ 2 = 5730 years
0.693 0.693
\ K= = = 1.209 ´ 10 -4 year -1
t 1/ 2 5730
2.303 [R ]0 2.303 100
t= log = log
K [ R ] 1.2 ´ 10 - 4 80
2.303 ´ 10 4 2.303 ´ 10 4
t= (log 10 - log 8) = (1 - 3 log 2)
1.2 1.2
2.303 2.303 ´ 0.097 ´ 10 4
t= ´ 10 4 (1 - 3 ´ 0.3010) =
1.2 1.209
t = 1847.7 years
29. (a) (i) Due to stronger inert pair effect Bi (V) gets readily reduced to Bi (III) therefore, Bi (V) is a
stronger oxidising agent than Sb (V).
(ii) Xe has least ionization enthalpy among noble gases and hence it readily forms chemical
compounds particularly with O2 and F2 .
O O
½½ ½½
(b) (i) S S
O
O O
OH OH
H2 S 2 O7 (Pyrosulphuric acid) F
(ii) BrF3 b. p. = 3
sp 3 d 5e Br F
hybridisation l. p. = 2 bent T
shaped
F
F
(iii) XeF2 b.p. = 2

sp 3 d 5e Xe
Shape
hybridisation l.p. = 3 Linear
OR F
(a) (i) Ca 3 P2 + 6H2 O ¾¾® PH3 + 3 Ca (OH) 2

Phosphine
(ii) 6XeF4 + 12H2 O ¾® 2XeO3 + 24HF + 4Xe + 3O2
(b) (i) As the atomic size of nitrogen is smaller than phosphorus, electron density on nitrogen
atom is higher than that on phosphorus atom. Consequently, the tendency of N in NH3 to
denote its lone pair of electrons is much higher than that of P in PH3 . Thus NH3 is a
stronger base than PH3 .
(ii) In vapour state sulphur partly exists as S 2 molecule which has two unpaired electrons in
the antibonding p * orbital like O2 and hence exhibits paramagnetic behaviour.
(iii) Because of hydrogen bonding HF exists as associated molecules in a liquid and therefore
has high boiling point. Due to large size and low electronegativity of chlorine no hydrogen
bonding is present in HCl, only Vander Waal forces are present. The boiling of HCl is
therefore low.
30. (a) (i) Cannizzaro reaction:
O O
½½ conc. KOH ½½ - +
2 H ¾ C ¾ H ¾¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ OH + H ¾ C ¾ O K
Formaldehyde Methyl alcohol Potassium formate
R ¾ COOH + NaOH ¾¾® R ¾ COONa + H2 O
Sodium carboxylate
NaOH /CaO
R ¾ COONa ¾¾¾¾® R¾ H + Na 2 CO3
D Hydrocarbon
O O
CH3 ½½ CH3 ½½
(b) (i) C = O + H2 N NH ¾ C ¾ NH2 ¾
¾® C = NNH ¾ C ¾ NH2 + H2 O
H Semi carbazide H Ethanal semicarbazone
Ethanal
O3
(ii) ¾¾¾® 2 O
Zn /H 2 O
(i) BH 3 /THF
(iii) CH2 ¾¾¾¾¾¾® —CHO
(ii) H 2 O2 / OH
(iii) PCC
OR
(a) (i) Propanone on treatment with I 2 / NaOH (NaOI) undergoes iodoform reaction to give yellow
ppt of iodoform but propanal does not.
CH3 COCH3 + 3NaOI ¾® CHI 3 ¯ + CH3 ¾ COONa + 2NaOH
Iodoform
(Yellow ppt)
CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ CHO ¾¾¾¾® No yellow ppt. of Iodoform
Propanal
Tollen’s test: Propanal being an aldehyde reduces Tollen’s reagent to silver mirror but
propanone being a ketone does not.
CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ CHO + 2 [Ag(NH3 ) 2 ] + + 3OH ¾¾® CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ COO-
Propanal Tollen’s reagent
+ 2Ag ¯ + 4NH3 + 2H2 O
Silver mirror
(ii) FeCl 3 test: Phenol gives a violet colouration with neutral FeCl 3 solution while benzoic
acid gives buff coloured ppt.
6 C 6 H5 OH + FeCl 3 ¾¾® [Fe(OC 6 H5 ) 6 ] -3 + 3H+ + 3HCl
Violet complex
NaHCO 3 test: Benzoic acid being a stronger acid than phenol decomposes NaHCO3 to evolve
CO2 but phenol does not.
- +
C 6 H5 ¾ COOH + NaHCO3 ¾¾® C 6 H5 ¾ CO O Na + H2 O + CO2
Benzoic acid Sodium benzoate
O OH
½½ LiAlH 4 ½ conc. H 2 SO4
(b) (i) CH3 ¾ C ¾ CH3 ¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ CH ¾ CH3 ¾¾¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ CH = CH2
Propanone 443 K Propene
38 | Xam Idea Chemistry–XII
O
CHO COOH COCl
+ C
KMnO4 /OH PCl5
(ii) (O) anhyd. AlCl3
Benzaldehyde Benzoyl chloride Benzophenone
OH
PCC ½ NaOH (dil.)
(iii) CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ OH ¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ CHO ¾¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ CH ¾ CH2 ¾ CHO
Ethanol Acetaldehyde 3-Hydroxybutanal

1. Schottky defect.
6. All carbohydrates which reduce Tollen’s reagent and Fehling’s solution are referred to as reducing
sugars, e.g., glucose.
8. A 2-3 per cent solution of iodine in alcohol water mixture is known as tincture of iodine. It is used
as an antiseptic.
10. (i) Order of reaction may be defined as the sum of powers of the concentration of the reactants in
the rate law expression.
For example consider the reaction
NH4 NO2 ¾¾® N2 + 2H2 O
Experimentally, it is observed that the rate law for this reaction is
Rate = K [NH4 NO2 ]
Hence, the order of reaction is 1.
(ii) Molecularity of a reaction may be defined as the number of reacting species (atoms, ions or
molecules) taking part in an elementary reaction which must collide simultaneously in order to
bring about a chemical reaction.
For example molecularity of the reaction
2HI ¾® H2 + I 2 is 2 as it involves.
Simultaneous collision between two HI molecules.
18. Hard water contains calcium and magnesium ions. Therefore in hard water soap get precipitated as
calcium and magnesium soap which being insoluble stick to the cloth as gummy mass. Hence
soap cannot be used with hard water.
2C17 H35 COO- Na + + CaCl 2 ¾® 2NaCl + (C17 H35 COO) 2 Ca
Soap insoluble calcium
stearate (Soap)
On the other hand calcium and magnesium salts of detergents are soluble in water so they easily
form lather with hard water.
[R ]0
21. K = 60 s -1 , [R ] =
16
t =?
2.303 [R ]0
t= log
K [R ]

2.303 [R ]0
t= log
60 [R ]0
16
2.303 2.303
t= log 16 = . 4 log 2
60 60
2.303 0.6932
t= ´ 0.3010 =
15 15
t = 4.62 ´ 10 -2 s.
23. (i) Zone refining is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in the liquid state
than in the solid state of metal.
(ii) In electrolytic refining the impure metal is made to act as anode. A strip of the same metal in
pure form is used as cathode. They are put in a suitable electrolytic bath containing soluble salt
of the same metal. When electric current is passed, impure metal forms metal ions which are
discharged at cathode forming pure metal.
Anode: M ¾¾® M n + + ne -
Cathode: M n + + ne - ¾® M
(iii) The principle of refining by froth floatation process is that sulphide particles are preferentially
wetted by pine oil, whereas the gangue particles are wetted by water.
CHO COOH
½ HNO3 ½
27. (i) (CHOH) 4 ¾¾¾¾¾® (CHOH) 4
(oxidation)
½ ½
CH2 ¾ OH COOH
Glucose Saccharic acid
CHO COOH
½ Br2 water ½
(ii) (CHOH) 4 ¾¾¾¾¾® (CHOH) 4
½ ½
CH2 ¾ OH CH2 ¾ OH
Glucose Gluconic acid
CHO
½ HI
(iii) (CHOH) 4 ¾¾¾¾¾® CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH3
D n -Hexane
½
CH2 ¾ OH
Glucose
2+
28. (a) Zn Zn (conc.) Ag + (conc) Ag
(i) Zn electrode is negatively charged.
(ii) Current carriers of cell are
· electrons in external wire.
· Zn 2+ ions in anodic half cell.
· Ag + ions in cathodic half cell.

· Ions of salt bridge, i.e., K + and Cl - .
(iii) At anode Zn ¾¾® Zn 2+ + 2e -
At cathode 2Ag + + e - ¾® 2Ag
(b) Mg ¾¾® Mg 2+ + 2e -
Cu 2+ + 2e - ¾¾® Cu
Mg + Cu 2+ ¾¾® Cu + Mg 2+
n=2
According to Nernst equation,
0.059 [ Cu ] [ Mg 2+ ]
E cell = E° cell - log
n [ Mg] [ Cu 2+ ]
0.059 [ Mg 2+ ]
E cell = ( E° Cu 2 + /Cu - E° Mg 2 + /Mg ) - log
2 [ Cu 2+ ]
0.059 10 - 3
= 0.34 - ( -2.375) - log
2 10 - 4
= 0.34 + 2.375 - 0.0295 log10
E cell = 2.6855 V
E cell = 2.685 V
OR
(a) The conductivity of a solution at any given concentration is the conductance of one unit volume
of solution kept between two platinum electrodes with unit area of cross section at a distance of
unit length.
On increasing the concentration of solution, the number of ions per unit volume of solution
increases and thus its conductivity increases.
Molar conductivity ( L m ) of a solution at a given concentration is the conductance of the
volume V of solution containing one mole of electrolyte kept between two electrodes with area
of cross section A and distance of unit length. Therefore
kA
Lm = =k
l
Since l = 1 and A = V (volume containing 1 gram mole of electrolyte)
L m = kV
Molar conductivity increases with decrease in concentration. This is because the total volume,
V of solution containing one mole of electrolyte also increases. It has been found that decrease
in K on dilution of solution is more than compensated by increase in its volume.
(b) Ag + + e - ¾® Ag
108 g of Ag are deposited by 96500 C
96500
\ 1.45 g of Ag will be deposited by = ´ 1.45 C
108
= 1295.6 C
Q 1295.6
t= = = 863.7 s.
I 1.50
Cu 2+ + 2e - ¾¾® Cu
2 ´ 96500 C deposit Cu = 63.5 g
63.5
\ 1295.6 C deposit Cu = ´ 1295.6 = 0.426 g
2 ´ 96500
Zn 2+ + 2e - ¾¾® Zn
2 ´ 96500 C deposit Zn = 65.3 g
65.3
\ 1295.6 C deposit Zn = ´ 1295.6 = 0.438 g
2 ´ 96500
1. Boron or Aluminium.
10. A reaction which is of higher order but follows the kinetics of first order under special conditions
is called a pseudo first order reaction.
Example, Acid hydrolysis of ethyl acetate.
H+
CH3 ¾ COOC 2 H5 + H2 O ¾¾® CH3 ¾ COOH + C 2 H5 ¾ OH
Here, the rate law is given by expression
Rate = K [ CH3 ¾ COOC 2 H5 ]
The concentration of H2 O is so large that it hardly undergoes any change during the reaction,
therefore, it does not appear in the rate law.
12. (i) This is because Mn 2+ is more stable as it has exactly half filled configuration 3d 5 4s 0 .
(ii) Cu 2+ (aq) is much more stable than Cu + (aq). This is because, although second ionization
enthalpy of copper is large but for Cu 2+ (aq) is much more negative than that of Cu + (aq) and
therefore, it more than compensates for the second ionisation enthalpy of copper. Therefore,
Cu + ion aqueous solution undergoes disproportionation.
2Cu + (aq) ¾® Cu 2+ (aq) + Cu(s)
18. Artificial sweetening agents: These are the substances which are non-nutritive in nature and used
as substitutes for sugar in foods and beverages.
Examples:
Aspartame: Aspartame is 100 times as sweet as cane sugar. Its use is limited to cold foods and
soft drinks because it is unstable at cooking temperature.
Saccharin: It is about 550 times as sweet as cane sugar. Its use is of great value to diabetic
persons and people who need to control intake of calories.
21. K = 60 s -1
2.303 [R ]0
t= log
K [R ]
2.303 [ R ] 0 2.303
t= log = log 10 = 0.038 ´ 1
60 [R ]0 60
10
t = 0.038 s
24. (i) As there is very little energy difference between 4s and 3d orbitals, electrons from both energy
levels can be used for chemical bond formation. Therefore all elements except Sc and Zn, of the
first transition series show a number of oxidation states as shown in table.
Oxidation states of the first series transition elements (the most common ones are in bold letter)
Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn
+2 +2 +2 +2 +2 +2 +2 +1
+3 +3 +3 +3 +3 +3 +3 +3 +2 +2
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
+5 +5 +5
+6 +6 +6
+7
(ii) Atomic radii of the first transition series decreases from Sc to Cr, then remains almost constant
till Ni and then increases from Cu to Zn.
The reason of this variation in atomic radii has been attributed to the increase in nuclear charge
in the beginning of the series. But as the electrons continue to be filled in d-orbitals, they screen
the outer 4s electrons from the influence of nuclear charge. When the increased nuclear charge
and the increased screening effect balance each other in the middle of transition series, the
atomic radii becomes almost constant (Mn to Fe). Towards the end of the series, the repulsive
interaction between electrons in d orbitals become very dominant. As a result there is an
expansion of the electron cloud; consequently, the atomic size increases.
(iii) Except Zn 2+ , all other divalent gaseous ions of the first series of the transition elements contain
unpaired electrons in their 3d subshell and are therefore paramagnetic in nature.
The magnetic moment (m) of the elements of the first transition series can be calculated with the
unpaired electrons ( n) by the spin-only formula
m = n ( n + 2) B. M.
Ion Configuration Unpaired electrons Magnetic moment (m )

calculated
Mn 2+ 3d5 4s0 5 5 (5 + 2) = 5.92 B.M.
Cu 2+ 3d 9 4s0 1 1 (1 + 2) = 1.73 B.M.
Zn 2+ 3d10 4s0 0 0 ( 0 + 3) = 0
DELHI–2009
Time allowed : 3 hours Maximum marks : 70

1. Which point defect in crystals does not alter the density of the relevant solid? 1
2. Define the term ‘Tyndall effect’. 1
3. Why is the froth floatation method selected for the concentration of sulphide ores? 1
4. Why is Bi (V) a stronger oxidant than Sb (V)? 1
5. Give the IUPAC name of the following compound: 1
CH3—C C—CH2OH
CH3 Br
6. Write the structure of 3-oxopentanal. 1
7. Why is an alkylamine more basic than ammonia? 1
8. Give an example of elastomers. 1
9. A reaction is of second order with respect to a reactant. How will the rate of reaction be affected if the
concentration of this reactant is 2
(i) doubled (ii) reduced to half?
10. Explain the role of 2
(i) Cryolite in the electrolytic reduction of alumina.
(ii) Carbon monooxide in the purification of nickel.
11. Draw the structures of the following molecules: 2
(i) XeF4 (ii) BrF3
12. Complete the following chemical reaction equations: 2
(i) P4( s) + NaOH (aq ) + H2 O( l ) ¾¾®
(ii) I - ( aq ) + H2 O( l ) + O3( g ) ¾¾®

13. Differentiate between molality and molarity of a solution. What is the effect of change in temperature
of a solution on its molality and molarity? 2
14. Which ones in the following pairs of substances undergoes SN2 substitution reaction faster and why? 2
(i) —CH2Cl or —Cl
(ii) I or Cl
15. Complete the following reaction equations: 2
(i) —OH + SOCl2
CH2OH
(ii) + HCl
OH
16. Explain what is meant by 2

(i) a peptide linkage (ii) a glycosidic linkage
17. Name two water soluble vitamins, their sources and the diseases caused due to their deficiency in diet.
2
18. Draw the structures of the monomers of the following polymers: 2
(i) Teflon (ii) Polythene
OR
What is the repeating unit in the condensation polymer obtained by combining HO2 CCH2 CH2 CO2 H
(succinic acid) and H2 NCH2 CH2 NH2 (ethylene diamine).
19. Iron has a body-centred cubic unit cell with a cell edge of 286.65 pm. The density of iron is 7.87g cm–3.
Use this information to calculate Avogadro’s number (At. mass of Fe = 56g mol–1). 3
20. 100 mg of a protein is dissolved in just enough water to make 10.0 mL of solution. If this solution has
an osmotic pressure of 13.3 mm Hg at 25oC, what is the molar mass of the protein? 3
(R = 0.0821 L atm mol–1 K–1 and 760 mm Hg = 1 atm.)
21. A first order reaction has a rate constant of 0.0051 min–1. If we begin with 0.10M concentration of the
reactant, what concentration of reactant will remain in solution after 3 hours? 3
22. How are the following colloids different from each other in respect of dispersion medium and
dispersed phase? Give one example of each type. 3
(i) An aerosol
(ii) A hydrosol
(iii) An emulsion
23. Account for the following: 3

(i) NH3 is a stronger base than PH3.
(ii) Sulphur has a greater tendency for catenation than oxygen.
(iii) Bond dissociation energy of F2 is less than that of Cl2.
OR
Explain the following situations:
(i) In the structure of HNO3 molecule, the N—O bond (121 pm) is shorter than N—OH bond
(140 pm).
(ii) SF4 is easily hydrolysed whereas SF6 is not easily hydrolysed.
(iii) XeF2 has a straight linear structure and not a bent angular structure.
24. For the complex [Fe(en)2Cl2]Cl, (en = ethylene diamine), identify 3
(i) the oxidation number of iron.
(ii) the hybrid orbitals and the shape of the complex.
(iii) the magnetic behaviour of the complex.
(iv) the number of geometrical isomers.
(v) whether there is an optical isomer also, and
(vi) name of the complex. (At. no. of Fe = 26)
25. Explain the mechanism of the following reactions: 3
(i) Addition of Grignard’s reagent to the carbonyl group of a compound forming an adduct followed
by hydrolysis.
(ii) Acid catalysed dehydration of an alcohol forming an alkene.
(iii) Acid catalysed hydration of an alkene forming an alcohol.
26. Giving an example for each, describe the following reactions: 3
(i) Hofmann’s bromamide reaction
(ii) Gatterman reaction
(iii) A coupling reaction
27. Explain the following types of substance with one suitable example, for each case: 3
(i) Cationic detergents
(ii) Food preservatives
(iii) Analgesics
28. (a) Define molar conductivity of a substance and describe how for weak and strong electrolytes,
molar conductivity changes with concentration of solute. How is such change explained? 5
(b) A voltaic cell is set up at 25 oC with the following half cells:
Ag+ (0.001 M) | Ag and Cu2+ (0.10 M) | Cu
What would be the voltage of this cell? (Eocell = 0.46 V)
OR
(a) State the relationship amongst cell constant of a cell, resistance of the solution in the cell and
conductivity of the solution. How is molar conductivity of a solute related to conductivity of its
solution?
(b) A voltaic cell is set up at 25oC with the following half-cells:
Al | Al3+ (0.001 M) and Ni | Ni2+ (0.50 M)
Calculate the cell voltage [EoNi2+/Ni = – 0.25 V, EoAl/Al3+ = – 1.66 V]
29. (a) Complete the following chemical reaction equations: 5
(i) MnO–4( aq ) + C 2 O2–
4 ( aq ) + H +
( aq ) ¾¾®
2– 2+ +
(ii) Cr2 O7( aq ) + F ( aq ) + H ( aq ) ¾¾®
(b) Explain the following observations about the transition/inner transition elements:
(i) There is in general an increase in density of element from titanium (Z = 22) to copper (Z = 29).
(ii) There occurs much more frequent metal-metal bonding in compounds of heavy transition
elements (3rd series).
(iii) The members in the actinoid series exhibit a large number of oxidation states than the
corresponding members in the lanthanoid series.
OR
(a) Complete the following chemical equations for reactions:
(i) MnO4–(aq) + S2O32–(aq) + H2O(l) ¾¾®
(ii) CrO7–(aq) + H2S(g) + H+(aq) ¾¾®
(b) Give an explanation for each of the following observations:

(i) The gradual decrease in size (actinoid contraction) from element to element is greater
among the actinoids than that among the lanthanoids (lanthanoid contraction).
(ii) The greatest number of oxidation states are exhibited by the members in the middle of a
transition series.
(iii) With the same d-orbital configuration (d4) Cr2+ ion is a reducing agent but Mn3+ ion is an
oxidising agent.
30. (a) Illustrate the following name reactions by giving example: 5
(i) Cannizzaro’s reaction
(ii) Clemmensen reduction
(b) An organic compound A contain 69.77% carbon, 11.63% hydrogen and rest oxygen. The
molecular mass of the compound is 86. It does not reduce Tollen’s reagent but forms an
addition compound with sodium hydrogen sulphite and gives positive iodoform test. On
vigorous oxidation it gives ethanoic and propanoic acids. Derive the possible structure of
compound ‘A’.
OR
(a) How are the following obtained?
(i) Benzoic acid from ethyl benzene.
(ii) Benzaldehyde from toluene.
(b) Complete each synthesis by giving the missing material, reagent or products:
H2
(i) C6H5COCl Pd-BaSO4
................
O
C
(ii) + .............. Anhydrous AlCl3 CH3
O
C
+ .............. ..............
(iii)

Questions different from Set-I
1. Which point defect in its crystal units alters the density of a solid?
4. Which is a stronger oxidising agent Bi(V) or Sb(V)?
21. What is the difference between multimolecular and macromolecular colloids? Give one example of
each. How are associated colloids different from these two types of colloids?
24. Explain the following observations:
(i) Fluorine does not exhibit any positive oxidation state.
(ii) The majority of known noble gas compounds are those of Xenon.
(iii) Phosphorus is much more reactive than nitrogen.
27. How do antisepitcs differ from disinfectants? Give one example of each type.
28. (a) Complete the following chemical reaction equations:
2+
(i) Fe ( aq ) MnO–4( aq ) + H+ ( aq ) ¾¾®
(ii) Cr2 O72–

(aq) + I
-
(aq) + H+ (aq) ¾¾®
(b) Explain the following observations:

(i) Transition elements are known to form many interstitial compounds.
(ii) With the same d4 d-orbital configuration Cr2+ ion is reducing while Mn3+ ion is oxidising.
(iii) The enthalpies of atomisation of the transition elements are quite high.
OR
(a) Complete the following chemical reaction equations:
(i) CrO72–(aq) + H2S(g) + H+(aq) ¾¾®
(ii) MnO2(s) + KOH (aq) + O(2) ¾¾®
(i) Transition metals form compounds which are usually coloured.
(ii) Transition metals exhibit variable oxidation states.
(iii) The actinoids exhibit a greater range of oxidation states than the lanthanoids.
29. (a) What type of a cell is the lead storage battery? Write the anode and the cathode reactions and
the overall reaction occurring in a lead storage battery while operating.
(b) A voltaic cell is set up at 25°C with the half-cells Al | Al3+ (0.001 M) and Ni | Ni2+ (0.50 M).
Write the equation for the reaction that occurs when the cell generates an electric current and
determine the cell potential.
(Given: E oNi 2 + Ni
= –0.25V, E oAl 3+ Al
= –1.66V).
OR
(a) Express the relationship amongst cell constant, resistance of the solution in the cell and
conductivity of the solution. How is molar conductivity of a solute related to conductivity of its
solution.
(b) Calculate the equilibrium constant for the reaction.
Fe( s) + Cd 2 + ( aq) ® Fe 2 + (aq ) + Cd( s)
(Given: E oCd 2 + Cd
= – 0.40 V, E oFe 2 + Fe
= – 0.44 V).

Questions different from Set-I and Set–II
1. Which point defect in its crystal units increases the density of a solid?
8. What does the part ‘6, 6’ mean in the name nylon-6,6?
19. Calculate the freezing point depression expected for 0.0711m aqueous solution of Na 2 SO4 . If this
solution actually Freezes at -0.320°C, what would be the value of van't Hoff factor? (K f for water is
1.86°C mol -1 ).
24. Compare the following complexes with respect to their shape, magnetic behaviour and the hybrid
orbitals involved:
(i) [CoF4]2– (ii) [Cr(H2O)2(C2O4)2]–
(iii) [Ni(CO)4]
(Atomic number: Co = 27, Cr = 24, Ni = 28)
27. What are the following substances? Give one example of each type.
(i) Antacid (ii) Nonionic detergents (iii) Antiseptics
(i) Cr2O 72- (aq) + I - (aq) + H + (aq) ¾¾®
(ii) MnO -4 (aq) + Fe2+(aq) + H + (aq) ¾¾®

(i) In general the atomic radii of transition elements decrease with atomic number in a given
series.
(ii) The E oM 2 + M
for copper is positive (+ 0.34 V). It is the only metal in the first series of
transition elements showing this type of behaviour.
(iii) The Eo value for Mn3+ | Mn2+ couple is much more positive than for Cr3+ | Cr2+ or Fe3+ | Fe2+
couple.
OR
(a) What is meant by the term lanthanoid contraction? What is it due to and what consequences
does it have on the chemistry of elements following lanthanoids in the periodic table?
(i) Cu+ ion is unstable in aqueous solutions.
(ii) Although Co2+ ion appears to be stable, it is easily oxidised to Co3+ ion in the presence of
a strong ligand.
(iii) The E oMn 2 + Mn
value for manganese is much more than expected from the trend for other
elements in the series.
29. (a) Define the term molar conductivity. How is it related to conductivity of the related solution?
(b) One half-cell in a voltaic cell is constructed from a silver wire dipped in silver nitrate solution
of unknown concentration. Its other half-cell consists of a zinc electrode dipping in 1.0 M
solution of Zn(NO3)2. A voltage of 1.48 V is measured for this cell. Use this information to
calculate the concentration of silver nitrate solution used.
(E o = - 0 × 76V, Eo = + 0 × 80V)
Zn 2 + /Zn Ag 2 + /Ag
OR
(a) Corrosion is essentially an electrochemical phenomenon. Explain the reactions occurring
during corrosion of iron kept in an open atmosphere.
(b) Calculate the equilibrium constant for the equilibrium reaction.
Fe( s) + Cd 2(+aq ) l Fe 2(+aq ) + Cd( s)
(Given: E o = - 0 × 40V, Eo = - 0 × 44V)

Cd 2 + /Cd Fe2 + /Fe
SOLUTIONS

1. Frenkel defect.
2. The scattering of light by colloidal particles is known as Tyndall effect.
3. As only sulphide ore particles are wetted by oil while gangue particles are wet by water.
4. Because Bi (V) is more stable than Sb (V) due to inert pair effect.
5. 2-Bromo-3-methyl but-2-en-1-ol.
O O
|| ||
6. 3-Oxopentanal: CH3 — CH2 — C — CH2 — C — H
7. Alkyl amine is more basic than ammonia because the + I effect or electron donating nature of alkyl
group increases electron density on ‘N’ atom in alkyl amine.
8. Buna–S, neoprene
9. Let the rate law be, r1 = k [A]2
(i) If [A] is doubled than rate r2 = k(2A)2 = 4k [A]2 = 4r1, i.e., rate becomes 4 times.
2
éA ù 1 1 1
(ii) If [A] is reduced to half then rate, r 3 = k ê ú = k [ A ] 2 = r1 , i.e., rate becomes times
ë2û 4 4 4
10. (i) Role of cryolite
· It lowers the melting point of the mixture.
· It makes alumina a good conductor of electricity.
(ii) When nickel is heated with carbon monoxide it forms a volatile complex nickel tetracarbonyl
which on further heating at higher temperature decomposes to give pure nickel.
330 - 350 K 450 - 470 K
Ni + 4 CO ¾ ¾¾¾¾® Ni(CO) 4 ¾ ¾¾¾¾® Ni + 4CO
F F
b.p. = 4
11. (i) No. of electron pairs around central atom (Xe) = 6
l.p. = 2 Xe
The shape would be square planar.

F F
b.p. = 3
(ii) No. of electron pairs around central atom (Br) = 5 F
l.p. = 2
The shape would be slightly bent T. Br F
12. (i) P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2 O ¾¾® PH3 + 3NaH2 PO2
Phosphine
F
(ii) 2I - ( aq) + H2 O(l) + O3 (g) ¾¾® 2OH– ( aq) + I 2 ( s) + O2 ( g)
13. Molality is the number of moles of solute per thousand grams of solvent whereas molarity is the
number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of solution.
Molality is independent of temperature whereas molarity changes with change in temperature as
volume changes with temperature.
14. (i) —CH2Cl : It is primary halide therefore undergoes SN2 reaction faster.
(ii) : As iodine is a better leaving group because of its large size, it will
I be released at a faster rate in the presence of incoming nucleophile
15. (i) OH + SOCl 2 ¾

¾® Cl + SO2 + HCl
CH2—OH CH2—Cl
(ii) + HCl ¾¾® + H2 O
HO HO
O
||
16. (i) The — C— NH — bond formed between two amino acid molecules with loss of water in a
polypeptide is called peptide linkage.
(ii) The linkage between two monosaccharides molecules through oxygen atom in a disaccharide
or polysaccharide is known as glycosidic linkage.
17. B group vitamins and vitamins C are soluble in water.
Name of Vitamins Sources Deficiency diseases
(i) Vitamin B12 Meat, fish, egg and curd Pernicious anaemia
(ii) Vitamin C Citrus fruits and amla Scurvy
18.
Polymer Monomer Structure
(i) Teflon Tetrafluoroethene F F
| |
F - C = C- F
(ii) Polyethene Ethene H H
| |
H - C = C- H
OR
O O
|| ||
n HO — C — CH2 — CH2 — C— OH + n H2 N — CH2 — CH2 — NH2
¯
é O O ù
ê || || ú
ê C— CH2 — CH2 — C — HN — CH2 — CH2 — NH ú + 2nH2 O
ê ú
ê ú
ë ûn
52 | Xam Idea Chemistry–XII
19. d = 7.87 g cm–3, For bcc, z = 2, M = 56 g mol–1

a = 286.65pm = 286.65 × 10–10cm, NA = ?
z´ M
d=
a3 ´ NA
2 ´ 56 g mol -1
7.87g cm–3 =
(286.65 ´ 10 -3 cm) 3 ´ NA
2 ´ 56 g mol -1
NA =
(2.8665 ´ 10 -8 cm) 3 ´ 7.87 g cm -3
2 ´ 56 g mol -1
=
23.553 ´ 10 -24 cm 3 ´ 7.87 g cm -3
112 mol -1
= = 0.604 × 1024 mol–1
185.366 ´ 10 -24
= 6.024 × 1023 mol–1
W ´ R ´T
20. p = B
MB ´V
WB ´ R ´ T
MB =
p´ V
Here
WB = 100 mg = 100 × 100–3g
R = 0.0821 L atm K–1 mol–1
T = 25°C = (25 + 273) K = 298K
V = 10 mL = 10 × 10–3L
13.3
p = 13.3 mm Hg = atm
760
100 ´ 10 -3 g ´ 0.0821 L atm K -1 mol -1 ´ 298K
MB =
13.3
atm ´ 10 ´ 10 -3 L
760
100 ´ 10 -3 ´ 0.0821 ´ 298 ´ 760 g mol -1 18594 g mol -1
MB = =
13.3 ´ 10 ´ 10 -3 133
MB = 13980.45 g mol–1
2.303 [R] o
t = log
k [R]
Here
t = 3 h = 3 × 60 min = 180 min

k = 0.0051min–1, [R]o = 0.10 M, [R] = ?
2.303 0.10
180 min = log
-1 [R]
0.0051 min
0.1 180 min ´ 0 × 0051 min -1 918

Log = =
[R] 2 × 303 2303
0.1
log = 0.3986
[R]
0.1
= Anti log (0.3986) = 2.503
[R]
01
.
[R] = = 0.03995 M
2.503
[R] = 0.04M
22.
Type of Colloid Dispersed Phase Dispersion medium Example
Aerosol Solid or liquid Gas Smoke, Fog, Cloud
Hydrosol Solid Water Starch sol, Protein sol
Emulsion Liquid Liquid Milk, hair cream
23. (i) NH3 is stronger base than PH3. This is because the lone pair of electrons on N atom in NH3 is
directed and not diffused as it is in PH3 due to larger size of phosphorus and hence more
available for donation.
(ii) Sulphur has a greater tendency for catenation than oxygen because S-S bond is stronger than
O – O bond due to less interelectronic repulsions.
(iii) Bond dissociation energy of F2 is less than Cl2 this is due to relatively large electron – electron
repulsion among the lone pairs in F2 molecule where they are much closer to each other than in
case of Cl2.
OR
–
O
–
–– + –O
+–
(i) H—O—N – HO—N –
O O
As a result of resonance, N–O bond length is average of single bond and double bond whereas
N–OH bond has purely single bond character. Therefore, N–O bond is shorter than N–OH
bond in HNO3.
(ii) S atom in SF4 is not sterically protected as it is surrounded by only four F atoms, so attack of
H2O molecules can take place easily and hence hydrolysis takes place easily. In contract, in
SF6, S is sterically protected by six F atoms. Therefore does not allow H2O molecules to attack
S atoms. As a result of this, SF6 does not undergo hydrolysis.
(iii) In XeF2, Xe is sp3d hybridised having 2 bond pair and 3 lone pair of electrons. The presence of
3 lone pair of electrons in Xe F2 at equidistance to have minimum repulsion is responsible for
its linear structure.
24. Given complex is [Fe (en) 2 Cl 2 ]Cl
(i) Let the oxidation number of iron be x.
\ x + 2 ´ 0 + 2(–1) + 1( -1) = 0
Þ x =3
3d 4s 4p
(ii) Orbitals of Fe (III)

3d Six d2sp 3 hybridised orbitals
d2 sp3 hybridised orbitals of Fe (III)

Thus, hybridisation: d2 sp3
Shape of the complex: Octahedral
(iii) Paramagnetic due to presence of three unpaired electrons
(iv) Two, cis and trans isomers
(v) Yes, cis isomer will also show optical isomerism
(vi) Dichlorido bis (ethane-1, 2 diamine) iron (III) chloride or Dichloro bis (ethylenediamine)
iron (III) chloride.
25. (i) Step I: Nucleophilic addition of Grignard reagent to Carbonyl group.
–+ H 2O
C OMg — X C OH + Mg(OH)X
R R
Step II: Hydrolysis
d+ d– d– d+ –+
C O + R — Mg — X C OMg — X
R
Adduct
+
(ii) CH3 — CH2 — OH ¾H¾
¾® CH2 CH2 + H2 O
D
Mechanism
Step I: Formation of protonated alcohols
H H H H H
+ Fast +
H— C— C — O — H + H H— C— C — O — H
H H H H
Ethyl alcohol Ethyl oxonium ion
Step II: Formation of carbocation: It is the slowest step and hence, the rate determining step.
H H H H H
+ Slow +
H— C — C — O — H H— C — C + H2O
H H H H
Ethyl oxonium ion Ethyl carbocation
Step III: Formation of ethylene by elimination of a proton

H H
+ H H +
H— C — C C——C + H
H H
H H
Ethylene
Ethyl carbocation
To drive the equilibrium to the right, ethylene is removed as it is formed.

+
l
H
(iii) —C
C— + H2O —C
C—
Alkene H OH
Mechanism
Step I: Protonation of alkene to form carbocation by electrophilic attack of H3O+.
+
H2O + H H3O +
H H
+ +
—C
C— + H—O—H —C—C + H2O
Step II: Nucleophilic attack of water on carbocation.

H H H
l
+ +
—C—C + H2O —C—C—O—H
Step III: Deprotonation to form an alchohol

H H H OH
+
— C— C — O — H + H2O —C—C— + H3O +
26. (i) Hoffman’s bromamide reaction: When a primary acidamide is heated with bromine in an
aqueous or ethanolic solution of sodium hydroxide, it gives a primary amine with one carbon
atom less. In this degradation reaction, migration of an alkyl or aryl group takes place from
carbonyl carbon of the amide to the nitrogen atom.
O
R — C — NH2 + Br2 + 4NaOH R — NH2 + Na2CO3 + 2NaBr + 2H2O

1° acid amide 1° amine
(ii) Gattermann reaction: Chlorine or bromine can be introduced in benzene ring by treating the
diazonium salt solution with corresponding halogen acid in the presence of copper powder.
Cl
+ – Cu / HCl
N2Cl + N2 + CuCl
Chlorobenzene
Br
Benzene diazonium
chloride Cu / HBr
+ N2 + CuCl
Bromobenzene
(iii) Coupling reaction: Diazonium salts react with aromatic amines in weakly acidic medium and
with phenols in weakly alkaline medium to form coloured compounds called azo dyes by
coupling at para position of amines or phenols. The mechanism is basically that of electrophilic
aromatic substitution where the diazonium ion is electrophile.
+ – H
+ –
N NCl + H— — NH 2 N N— — NH 2 + Cl + H 2O
(pH 4-5)
Benzene diazonium Aniline p-Aminoazobenzene (Yellow dye)

chloride
+ – –
OH –
N NCl + H — — OH N N— — OH + Cl + H 2O
(pH 9-10)
Benzene diazonium Phenol p-Hydroxyazobenzene (Orange dye)

chloride
27. (i) Cationic Detergents : Cationic detergents are quarternary ammonium salts of amines with
acetates, chlorides or bromides as anions. Cationic part possess a long hydrocarbon chain and a
positive charge on nitrogen atom. Hence, these are called cationic detergents. Cetyltrimethylammonium
bromide is a popular cationic detergent and is used in hair conditioners.
+
é CH3 ù
ê ½ ú
ê ú
êCH3 (CH2 ) 15 ¾ N ¾ CH3 ú Br -
ê ½ ú
êë CH3 úû
Cetyltrimethyl ammonium bromide
Cationic detergents have germicidal properties and are expensive, therefore, these are of
limited use.
(ii) Food Preservatives: These are the chemical substances which are added to the food materials
to prevent their spoilage due to microbial growth and to retain their nutritive value for long
periods.
Preservatives prevent the rancidity of food and inhibit growth or kill the microganisms.
The most-common preservations used are, sugar table salt, sodium benzoate, Sodium
metabisulphite sorbic acid and propanoic acid.
(iii) Analgesics: Drugs which reduce or abolish pain without causing impairment of consciousness,
mental confusion, incoordination or paralysis or some other disturbances of nervous system.
These are classified as follow.
(a) Non-narcotic (non-addictive) analgesics: Aspirin, paracetamol etc.
(b) Narcotic drugs: These are known to be habit forming, e.g., morphine, Codeine, Heroin
etc.
28. (a) Molar Conductivity (Lm): It may be
defined as the conductance of a solution
containing 1 mole of electrolyte such that 400
the entire solution is placed is between two CH3COOH
Lm / (S cm mol )
–1
electrodes one centimeter apart.
2
Lm = k × v
or 200
k ´ 1000
Lm = KCl
M
Molar conductivity increases with decrease
in concentration or increase in dilution as
0 0.2 0.4
number of ions as well as mobility of ions 1/2 l/2
c / (mol / L)
increased with dilution.
For strong electrolytes the number of ions do not increase appreciably on dilution and only
mobility of ions increases due to decrease in inter-ionic attractions. Therefore L m increases a
little as shown in graph by a straight line.
For weak electrolyte the number of ions as well as mobility of ions increases on dilution as
shown by curve in the figure.
(b) At anode: Cu( s) ¾¾® Cu 2 + ( aq) + 2 e
At cathode: 2Ag + ( aq) + 2e ¾¾® 2Ag( s)

Cu( s) + 2Ag + ( aq) ¾¾® Cu 2 + ( aq) + 2Ag( s)
0 × 0591 [Cu 2 + ]
Here E cell = E ocell - log
n [Ag + ] 2
Here E ocell = 0. 46 V, n = 2
[Ag + ] = 0 × 001M = 1´ 10 –3 M, [Cu 2+ ] = 0.1M

0 × 0591 0 ×1
E cell = 0 × 46 - log
2 (10 -3 ) 2
0 × 0591 0.0591
E cell = 0 × 46 - log 105 = 0 × 46 - ´ 5 log 10
2 2
E cell = 0 × 46 - 0 × 0591 ´ 2 × 5 ´ 1 = 0 × 46 - 0 ×14775 = 0 × 31225V
E cell = 0.312 V
OR
1 æl ö
(a) k = ´ç ÷
R èAø
Where k = Conductivity
l
= Cell Constant
A
R = Resistance
k ´ 1000
Lm =
M
Where L m = Molar conductivity
k = Conductivity
M = Molarity of Solution
(b) At anode: Al( s) ¾¾®Al 3 + ( aq) + 3e ] ´ 2
At cathode: Ni 2 + ( aq) + 2e ¾¾® Ni ( s)] ´ 3
2Al ( s) + 3Ni 2 + ( aq) ¾¾® 2Al 3 + ( aq) + Ni( s)
0.0591 [Al 3 + ] 2
E cell = E ocell - log
n [ Ni 2 + ] 3
Here n = 6, [Al3+] = 0.001M = 1× 10–3M, [Ni2+] = 0.5M
E ocell = E o -Eo = - 0.25V - (-1.66V )
Ni 2 + / Ni Al 3+ / Al
E ocell = 1.41V
2
E ocell = 1.41 -
0.0591
log
10 -3 ( ) = 1.41 -
0.0591
log
10 -6
6 (0.5) 3 6 0.125
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 -
6
(
log 10 –6 ´ 8 =1.41 – ) 6
(
log10 –6 + log 2 3 )
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 - log (– 6 log 10 + 3 log2) = 1.41 – (– 6 + 3 ´ 0.3010 )
6 6
0.0591 0.3012
= 1.41 - ( -5.097) = 1.41 +
6 6
= 1.41 + 0.0502 = 1.4602V
E cell = 1.46 V
29. (a) (i) In acidic medium:

Mn O-4 + 8H+ + 5e ¾¾® Mn 2 + + 4H2 O] ´ 2
C 2 O24 - ¾¾® 2CO2 + 2e ] ´ 5

2MnO-4 + 5C 2 O24 - + 16H+ ¾¾® 2Mn 2 + + 10CO2 + 8H2 O
(ii) In acidic medium:

Cr2 O72– + 14H+ + 6e ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 7H2 O
Fe 2 + ¾¾® Fe 3 + + e ] ´ 6
Cr2 O72– + 6Fe 2+ +14H+ ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 6Fe 3+ + 7H2 O

(b) (i) On moving from titanium to copper in general atomic mass increases where as atomic size
decreases, therefore density increases in general.
(ii) The frequent metal-metal bonding in compounds of heavy transition elements is due to their
high enthalpy of atomization.
(iii) This is due to very small energy gap between 5f , 6d and 7s orbitals in the actinoid series.
OR
(a) (i) In neutral or faintly alkaline solutions
MnO-4 + 2H2 O + 3e - ¾ ¾
¾® MnO2 + 4OH– ] ´ 8
-
S 2 O23 - + 10 O H ¾ ¾
¾® 2 SO24 - + 5 H2 O + 8e - ] ´ 3
-
8MnO-4 + 3S 2 O23 - + H2 O ¾ ¾
¾® 8MnO2 + 6SO24 - + 2 O H
(ii) In acidic solutions
Cr2 O72 - + 14H+ + 6e - ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 7H2 O
H2 S ¾¾® S + 2H+ + 2e - ] ´ 3
Cr2 O72 - + 3H2 S + 8H+ ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 3S + 7H2 O
(b) Fe( s) + Cd 2 + ( aq) l Fe 2 + ( aq) + Cd( s)

o
E cell
log k c = n
0. 059
Here, n = 2
o o o
E cell = E cathode - E anode = Eo -Eo
= – 40 – (– 0.44) = 0.04V
2 ´ 0. 04 0. 08
log kc = =
0. 059 0. 059
log kc = 1.3536 Þ kc = Antilog 1.3536 = 22.57
30. (a) (i) Cannizzaro reaction: Aldehyde which do not have an a - hydrogen atom, undergo
disproportionation reaction on treatment with concentrated alkali, In this reaction, one
molecule of aldehyde is reduced to alcohol while other is oxidised to carboxylic acid salt.
O
||
Conc.KOH
2H — C— H ¾ ¾¾¾¾® CH3 — OH + HCOOK +
Formaldehyde Methyl alcohol Potassiumformate
(ii) Clemmensen reduction: The carbonyl group of aldehyde and ketones is reduced to CH2
group on treatment with zinc amalgam and concentrated hydrochloric acid.
—O Zn/conc. HCl
C— + 4[H] CH2 + H2O
Aldehyde or Hydrocarbon
ketone
(b)
Element Percentage Atomic mass No. of moles Simplest molar
ratio
C 69.77 12 69 × 77 5 × 81
= 5 × 81 =5
12 1 ×16
H 11.63 1 11 × 63 11 × 63
= 11 × 63 = 10
1 1 ×16
O (100 – 81.4) = 18.60 16 18 × 60 1 ×16
= 1 ×16 =1
16 1 ×16
Empirical formula of the compound A = C5 H10 O

Molecular formula of the compound A = n (Empirical formula)
Molecular mass of compound A
n=
Empirical formula mass of compound A
Molecular mass of compound A = 86
Empirical formula mass of compound A = 5 ´ 12 + 1´ 10 + 1´ 16
= 60 + 10 + 16
= 86
86
n = =1
86
Molecular formula of the compound A = 1(C5 H10 O)
= C5 H10 O
l As the compound A forms addition compound with NaHSO3 therefore it must be either an
aldehyde or ketone.
l As it does not reduce Tollens reagent and give positive Iodoform test therefore it must be a methyl
ketone.
l As on oxidation the compound A gives a mixture of ethanoic acid and propanoic acid, therefore
compound A is
O
||
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3
Pentan -2-one
The chemical reactions are:

O OH
|| |
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3 + NaHSO3 ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 — C — CH2 — CH2 — CH3
Pentan -2-one |
+
SO-3 N a
Sodium hydrogen sulphite addition product
O
||
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3 + 3I 2 + 4NaOH
Pentan - 2 - one
- +
Iodoform
¾ ¾¾¾
¾® CHI 3 ¯ + CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CO O Na + 3NaI + 3H2 O
reaction (Iodoform yellow ppt)
O
||
K 2 Cr2 O7
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3 ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾® CH3 — COOH + CH3 — CH2 — COOH
Pentan - 2 - one H 2 SO4 Ethanoic acid Propanoic acid
OR
–+
CH2—CH3 COOK COOH
+
KMnO4 – KOH H3 O
(a) (i)
D
O Benzoic acid
–
–
CH3 HC – OO —
– C — CH3
— C — CH
CHO
3
–
–
CrO3 O H3 O
+
(ii) O D
–
–
CH3 – C –
O Benzylidene Benzaldehyde
CH3 – C – diacetate
–
–
O
OR
CH3 CH(OCrOHCl2)2 CHO
CS2 +
H3 O
+ CrO2Cl2
Chromium complex Benzaldehyde

–
–
C — Cl CHO
H2
(b) (i) Pd – BaSO4
+ HCl
Benzoyl chloride Benzaldehyde
–
–
O
— C — CH3
–
–
anhyd. AlCl3
(ii) + CH3 — C — Cl
Acetyl chloride
O
O
–
–
–
–
C
— C — Cl
+ anhyd. AlCl3 + HCl
(iii)
Benzene Benzoyl chloride Benzophenone

1. Schottky defect
21. Multimolecular colloids: In this type of colloids, colloidal particles are aggregates of atoms or
molecules each having size less than 1nm, e.g., sulphur sol, gold sol.
Macromolecular colloids: In this type of colloids, colloidal particles are themselves large molecules
of colloidal dimensions, e.g., starch, proteins, polyethene, etc.
Associated colloids: There are certain substances which at low concentrations behave as normal
electrolyte, but at higher concentrations exhibit colloidal behaviour due to the formation of
aggregates. Such colloids are known as associated colloids, e.g., soaps and detergents.
24. (i) Fluorine does not exhibit any positive oxidation state as it is the most electro-negative element
and does not have d orbitals in its valance shell.
(ii) This is due to low ionization enthalpy of xenon.
(iii) Phosphorus is much more reactive than nitrogen as the P–P single bond (213 kJ mol -1 ) is
much weaker than N º N triple bond (941.4 kJ mol -1 ).
27. Difference between antiseptics and disinfectants.
l Antiseptics are chemical substances which prevent the growth of micro-organisms and may even
kill them but are not harmful to living tissues.
l Antiseptics are generally applied to living tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers and diseased skin
surfaces.
l Dettol, furacine, soframicine are antiseptics.
l Disinfectants are chemical substances which kill micro-organisms or stop their growth but are
harmful to human tissues.
l Disinfectants are applied to inanimate objects such as floor, drainage system, instrument, etc.
l Chlorine in the concentration of 0.2 to 0.4 ppm in aqueous solution and SO2 in very low
concentration are disinfectants.
28. (a) (i) MnO-4 + 8H+ + 5e - ¾ ¾¾® Mn 2 + + 4H2 O
Fe 2 + ¾ ¾¾® Fe 3 + + e - ] ´ 5
MnO-4 + 5Fe 2 + + 8H+ ¾ ¾¾® Mn 2 + + 5Fe 3 + + 4H2 O
(ii) Cr2 O72 - + 14H+ + 6e - ¾ ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 7H2 O
2I - ¾ ¾¾® I 2 + 2e - ] ´ 3
Cr2 O72 - + 6I - + 14H+ ¾ ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 3I 2 + 7H2 O

(b) (i) Transition elements form many interstitial compounds as they are capable of entrapping
small atoms like H, C or N in the interstitial sites in their crystal lattice.
(ii) Cr 2+ is reducing as its configuration changes from d 4 to d 3 , the latter having a half
filled t2g configuration. On the other hand, the change from Mn 3+ to Mn 2+ results in the
half-filled d 5 configuration which has extra stability therefore Mn 3+ is oxidising.
(iii) This is because transition metals have strong metallic bonds as they have a large number
of unpaired electrons.
OR
(a) (i) Cr2 O72 - +
+ 14H + 6e -
¾ ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 7H2 O
H2 S ¾ ¾¾® S + 2H+ + 2e - ] ´ 3
Cr2 O72 - + 3H2 S + 8H+ ¾ ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 3S + 7H2 O
(ii) 2MnO2 + 4KOH + O2 ¾ ¾¾® 2K 2 MnO4 + 2H2 O

(b) (i) This is due to d – d transition as the energy of excitation of d orbital electrons from lower
energy to higher energy level lies in the visible region.
(ii) The variable oxidation states of transition metals are due to the participation of ns and
( n -1) d electrons in bonding as energy difference between ns and ( n -1) d orbitals is small.
(iii) This is due to comparable energies of 5f , 6d and 7s orbitals of actinoids.
29. (a) The lead storage battery is a secondary cell
The cell reactions when the battery is in use are given below
At anode : Pb( s) + SO24 - ( aq) ¾ ¾
¾® PbSO4 ( s) + 2e -
At cathode : PbO2 ( s) + SO24 - ( aq) + 4H+ ( aq) + 2e - ¾ ¾
¾® PbSO4 ( s) + 2H2 O(l)
Overall cell reaction : Pb( s) + PbO2 ( s) + 2H2 SO4 ( aq) ¾ ¾
¾® 2PbSO4 ( s) + 2H2 O(l)
2Al ( s) + 3Ni 2 + ( aq) ¾¾® 2Al 3 + ( aq) + Ni( s)
0.0591 [Al 3 + ] 2
n [ Ni 2 + ] 3
Here n = 6, [Al3+] = 0.001M = 1× 10–3M, [Ni2+] = 0.5M
E ocell = E o Ni 2 + / Ni -Eo Al
3+
/ Al = - 0.25V - (-1.66V )
E ocell = 1.41V
2
E ocell = 1.41 -
0.0591
log
10 -3 ( ) = 1.41 -
0.0591
log
10 -6
6 (0.5) 3 6 0.125
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 -
6
(
log 10 –6 ´ 8 =1.41 –
6
)log10 –6 + log 2 3 ( )
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 - log (– 6 log 10 + 3 log2) = 1.41 – (– 6 + 3 ´ 0.3010 )
6 6
0.0591 0.3012
= 1.41 - ( -5.097) = 1.41 +
6 6
= 1.41 + 0.0502 = 1.4602V
E cell = 1.46 V
OR
1 æl ö
(a) k= ´ç ÷
R èAø
l
= Cell Constant
A
R = Resistance
k ´ 1000
Lm =
M
Where L m = Molar conductivity
k = Conductivity
M = Molarity of Solution
(b) Fe( s) + Cd ( aq) l
2+
Fe 2 + ( aq) + Cd( s)
E ° cell
log k c = n
0.059
Here, n = 2
E° cell = E°cathode — E°anode

= E°Cd 2 + /Cd – E°Fe 2 + /Fe = – 0.40 – (– 0.44)
E°cell = 0.04 V
2 ´ 0 × 04 0 × 08
log kc = =
0 × 059 0 × 059
log kc = 1.3536
kc = Antilog 1.3536
kc = 22.57

1. Interstitial defect increases the density of a solid.
8. It means the two monomers combine to make nylon 6,6, contain six carbon atoms each.
19. DTf = [ 273 ×15 - ( - 0 × 320 + 273 ×15)]K = 0 × 320 K
DTf = K f . m
= 1.86 K kg mol -1 × 0.0711 mol kg -1
= 0.132 K
Observed value of DTf 0.320K
i = =
Calculated value of DTf 0132
. K
i = 2.42
24.
S. Complex Central Configuration Hybridisation Geometry Number of Magnetic
No. metal ion of metal ion of metal ion of the unpaired behaviour
complex electrons
(i) [ CoF4 ]2- Co 2+ d7 sp 3 Tetrahedral 3 Paramagnetic
(ii) [Cr(H2O)2 Cr 3+ 3d 3 d 2sp 3 Octahedral 3 Paramagnetic

(C2O4 )2 ]
(iii) Ni(CO)4 Ni 3d8 4s2 sp 3 Tetrahedral 0 Diamagnetic
27. (i) Antacids: Chemical substances which removes the excess acid in the stomach & raise the pH
to appropriate level, e.g., sodium hydrogen carbonate, a mixture of aluminium and magnesium
hydroxide, ranitidine, etc.
(ii) Non-ionic Detergents: Non-ionic detergents do not contain any ion in their constitution. One
such detergent is formed when stearic acid reacts with polyethylene glycol.
(iii) Antiseptics: These are the chemical substances which prevent the growth of micro-organisms
and may even kill them but are not harmful to living tissues. Antiseptics are applied to living
tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers. Dettol, soframicine are antiseptics.
28. (a) (i) Cr2 O72 - + 14H+ + 6e - ¾ ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 7H2 O

2I - ¾ ¾¾® I 2 + 2e - ] ´ 3
Cr2 O72 - + 6 I - + 14H+ ¾ ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 3I 2 + 7H2 O
(ii) MnO-4 + 8H+ + 5e - ¾ ¾¾® Mn 2 + + 4H2 O

Fe 2 + ¾ ¾¾® Fe 3 + + e - ] ´ 5
MnO-4 + 5Fe 2 + + 8H+ ¾ ¾¾® Mn 2 + + 5Fe 3 + + 4H2 O
(b) (i) The atomic radii of transition metals decreases with atomic number in a series as the
nuclear charge increases due to poor shielding effect of d orbitals.
(ii) This is due to its high enthalpy of atomization and low hydration enthalpy.
(iii) This is due to much large third ionisation energy of Mn as Mn 2+ is very stable on
account of stable d 5 configuration.
OR
(a) Lanthanoid contraction: The steady decrease in the atomic and ionic radii of lanthanoids
with increase in atomic number is known as lanthanoid contraction.
Cause of lanthanoid contraction: As we move along the lanthanoid series, for every
additional proton in the nucleus, the corresponding electron goes into 4f -subshell, there is poor
shielding of one electron by another in this subshell due to the shapes of these f-orbitals. The
imperfect shielding is not able to counterbalance the effect of the increased nuclear charge.
Thus the net result is decrease in size with increase in atomic number.
Consequences:
(i) 5d series elements have nearly same radii as that of 4d-series.
(ii) The basic strength of hydroxides decreases from La(OH) 3 to Lu(OH) 3 .
(b) (i) Because the high hydration enthalpy of Cu 2+ easily compensates the second ionization
enthalpy of Cu.
(ii) Because strong ligand cause spin pairing giving rise to diamagnetic octahedral complex
which are very stable and have very large crystalfield stabilization energy. This splitting
energy overcomes the ionization enthalpy.
(iii) This is due to stability of Mn 2+ as it has half filled d 5 configuration.
29. (a) Molar conductivity ( L m ): It may be defined as the conductivity of one molar electrolytic
solution placed between two electrodes one centimeter apart and have enough area of cross
section to hold entire volume.
k
Lm =
c
c = Concentration of solution in mol L -1
(b) At anode : Zn( s) ¾ ¾¾® Zn 2 + ( aq) + 2e -
At cathode : Ag + ( aq) + e - ¾ ¾
¾®Ag( s)] ´ 2
Zn( s) + 2Ag + ( aq) ¾¾® Zn 2 + + 2Ag( s)

0 × 0591 [ Zn 2 + ]
Ecell = E°cell - log
n [ Ag + ] 2
Here, n = 2, [ Zn 2 + ] = 1 M
E°cell = E ° Ag + / Ag -E °zn 2 + /zn = 0 × 80 V - ( -0 × 76V )
E°cell = 1×56V
0 × 0591 1
1.48 = 1.56 - log
2 [ Ag + ] 2
0 × 0591 1
- 0 × 08 = - log
2 [ Ag + ] 2
1 0 ×16
log = = 2 × 7072
+ 2 0 × 0591
[ Ag ]
log1 - log[ Ag + ] 2 = 2 × 7072
0 - 2 log[ Ag + ] = 2 × 7072
log[ Ag + ] = -1× 3536 = 2 × 6464
[Ag + ] = Anti log( 2 × 6464) = 4 × 43 ´ 10 -2 M
[Ag + ] = 0 × 044 M
OR
(a) At anode : Oxidation of Fe atoms takes place
¾® Fe 2 + + 2e -
Fe ¾ ¾ E ° Fe2 + / Fe = - 0 × 44V
At cathode : Reduction of oxygen in the presence of H+ ions. The H+ ions are produced by
either H2 O or H2 CO3 (formed by dissolution of CO2 in moisture)
2H+ ( aq) + 2e - ¾ ¾¾® 2H
1
2H + O2 ( g) ¾ ¾¾® H2 O
2
Net reaction at cathodic area
1
2H+ ( aq) + O2 + 2e - ¾¾® H2 O E° H + /O /H O = 1.23V
2 2 2
The overall reaction

1
Fe( s) + 2H+ ( aq) + O2 ( g) ¾¾® Fe 2 + ( aq) + H2 O(l) E°cell = 1.67V
2
The ferrous ions are further oxidised by atmospheric oxygen to ferric ions which come out as
rust in the form of hydrated ferric oxide (Fe 2 O3 . xH2 O).
2Al ( s) + 3Ni 2 + ( aq) ¾¾® 2Al 3 + ( aq) + Ni( s)

0.0591 [Al 3 + ] 2
n [ Ni 2 + ] 3
Here n = 6, [Al3+] = 0.001M = 1× 10–3M, [Ni2+] = 0.5M
3+
/ Al = - 0.25V - (-1.66V )
E ocell = 1.41V
2
E ocell = 1.41 -
0.0591
log
10 -3 ( ) = 1.41 -
0.0591
log
10 -6
6 (0.5) 3 6 0.125
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 -
6
(
log 10 –6 ´ 8 =1.41 –
6
)
log10 –6 + log 2 3 ( )
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 - log (– 6 log 10 + 3 log2) = 1.41 – (– 6 + 3 ´ 0.3010 )
6 6
0.0591 0.3012
= 1.41 - ( -5.097) = 1.41 +
6 6
= 1.41 + 0.0502 = 1.4602V
E cell = 1.46 V
ALL INDIA–2009
Time allowed : 3 hours] [Maximum marks : 70

1. How do metallic and ionic substances differ in conducting electricity? 1
2. What is the ‘coagulation’ process? 1
3. What is meant by the term ‘pyrometallurgy’? 1
4. Why is red phosphorus less reactive than white phosphorus? 1
H2C CH—CH—CH2—CH2—CH3
OH
6. Write the structural formula of 1-phenylpentan-1-one. 1
7. Arrange the following compounds in an increasing order of basic strengths in their aqueous
solutions: 1
NH3, CH3NH2, (CH3)2NH, (CH3)3N
8. What does ‘6, 6’ indicate in the name nylon-6,6? 1
9. What type of cell is a lead storage battery? Write the anode and the cathode reactions and the overall
cell reaction occurring in the use of a lead storage battery. 2
OR
Two half cell reactions of an electrochemical cell are given below:
MnO-4 ( aq) + 8H+ ( aq) + 5e - ® Mn 2 + ( aq) + 4H2 O(l), E° = 1.51V
Sn 2 + ( aq) ® Sn 4 + ( aq) + 2e - , E° = + 0.15 V

Construct the redox equation from the two half cell reactions and predict if this reaction favours
formation of reactants or product shown in the equation.
10. Define the following: 2
(i) Elementary step in a reaction
(ii) Rate of a reaction
11. Describe the underlying principle of each of the following metal refining methods: 2
(i) Electrolytic refining of metals
(ii) Vapour phase refining of metals.
(i) XeF2 + H2O ¾
¾®
(ii) PH3 + HgCl2 ¾
¾®
(i) MnO -4 (aq) + C2O 2- +
4 (aq) + H (aq) ¾
¾®
(ii) Cr2O 72- (aq) + Fe 2+ (aq) + H+(aq) ¾

¾®
14. Which one in the following pairs undergoes S N 1 substitution reaction faster and why? 2
Cl Cl
(i) or
Cl
(ii) or Cl

CH3
(i) + HI
(ii) CH3 CH2 CH = CH2 + HBr ®

16. Name the four bases present in DNA. Which one of these is not present in RNA? 2
17. Name two fat soluble vitamins, their sources and the diseases caused due to their deficiency in diet. 2
18. Differentiate between molecular structures and behaviours of thermoplastic and thermosetting
polymers. Give one example of each type. 2
19. A first order reaction has a rate constant of 0.0051 min -1 . If we begin with 0.10 M concentration of the
reactant, what concentration of the reactant will be left after 3 hours? 3
20. Silver crystallises with face-centred cubic unit cells. Each side of the unit cell has a length of 409 pm.
What is the radius of an atom of silver? (Assume that each face atom is touching the four corner
atoms.) 3
21. A copper-silver cell is set up. The copper ion concentration in it is 0.10 M. The concentration of silver
ion is not known. The cell potential measured 0.422 V. Determine the concentration of silver ion in the
cell. 3
(Given: E o = +0.80V, E o = +0.34 V)
Ag + /Ag Cu 2 + /Cu
22. What happens in the following activities and why? 3

(i) An electrolyte is added to a hydrated ferric oxide sol in water.
(ii) A beam of light is passed through a colloidal solution.
(iii) An electric current is passed through a colloidal solution.
23. Giving a suitable example for each, explain the following: 3
(i) Crystal field splitting
(ii) Linkage isomerism
(iii) Ambidentate ligand.
OR
Compare the following complexes with respect to structural shapes of units, magnetic behaviour and
hybrid orbitals involved in units:
[Co(NH3 ) 6 ] 3 + , [Cr(NH3 ) 6 ] 3 + , Ni(CO) 4
(At No.: Co = 27, Cr = 24, Ni = 28)
24. Explain the following observations: 3
(i) The boiling point of ethanol is higher than that of methoxymethane.
(ii) Phenol is more acidic than ethanol.
(iii) o-and p-nitrophenols are more acidic than phenol.
25. How would you account for the following: 3
(i) Many of the transition elements and their compounds can act as good catalysts.
(ii) The metallic radii of the third (5d) series of transition elements are virtually the same as those
of the corresponding members of the second series.
(iii) There is a greater range of oxidation states among the actinoids than among the lanthanoids.
O
||
(i) R - C- NH2 ¾LiAlH
¾¾ ¾4
®
H2O
(ii) C6H5N2Cl + H3PO2+H2O ¾

¾®
(iii) C6H5NH2 + Br2 (aq) ¾
¾®
27. Describe the following substances with one suitable example of each type: 3
(i) Non-ionic detergents
(iii) Disinfectants
28. (a) Define the following terms: 5
(i) Mole fraction
(ii) Van’t Hoff factor
(b) 100 mg of a protein is dissolved in enough water to make 100 mL of a solution. If this solution
has an osmotic pressure 13.3 mm Hg at 25° C, what is the molar mass of protein?
(R = 0.0821 L atm mol–1 K–1 and 760 mm Hg = 1 atm.)
OR
What is meant by:
(i) Colligative properties
(ii) Molality of a solution.
(b) What concentration of nitrogen should be present in a glass of water at room temperature?
Assume a temperature of 25° C, total pressure of 1 atmosphere and mole fraction of nitrogen in
air of 0.78. [KH for nitrogen = 8.42 × 10–7 M/mm Hg] 5
29. (a) Draw the structures of the following:
(i) H2S2O8
(ii) HClO4
(b) How would you account for the following:
(i) NH3 is a stronger base than PH3.
(ii) Sulphur has a greater tendency for catenation than oxygen.
(iii) F2 is a stronger oxidising agent than Cl2. 5
OR
(a) Draw the structures of the following:
(i) H2S2O7
(ii) HClO3
(b) Give an explanation for each of the following observations:
(i) In the structure of HNO3, the N – O bond
(121 pm) is shorter than the N – OH bond (140 pm)
(ii) All the P – Cl bonds in PCl5 are not equivalent.
(iii) ICI is more reactive than I2.
30. (a) Write chemical equations to illustrate the following name bearing reactions:
(ii) Hell-Volhard-Zelinsky reaction
(b) Give chemical tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds: 5
(i) Propanal and Propanone
(ii) Acetophenone and Benzophenone
(iii) Phenol and Benzoic acid
OR
(a) How will you bring about the following conversions:
(i) Ethanol to 3-hydroxybutanal
(ii) Benzaldehyde to Benzophenone.
(b) An organic compound A has the molecular formula C8H16O2. It gets hydrolysed with dilute
sulphuric acid and gives a carboxylic acid B and an alcohol C. Oxidation of C with chromic
acid also produced B. C on dehydration reaction gives but-1-ene. Write equations for the
reactions involved.

[Questions different from Set–I]
1. Which point defect of its crystals decrease the density of a solid? 1
8. What is the primary structural feature necessary for a molecule to make it useful in a condensation
polymerisation reaction? 1
20. For a decomposition reaction the values of rate constant k at two different temperatures are given
below: 3
k1 = 2.15 × 10–8 L mol–1 s–1 at 650 K
k2 = 2.39 × 10–7 L mol–1 s–1 at 700 K
Calculate the value of activation energy for this reaction.
(R = 8.314 J K–1 mol–1)
(i) C6H5N2Cl + CH3COCl ¾
¾®
(ii) C2H5NH2 + C6H5SO2Cl ¾
¾®
(iii) C2H5NH2 + HNO2 ¾
¾®
28. (a) Give chemical tests to distinguish between compounds in the following pairs of substances:
(i) Ethanal and Propanal
(ii) Benzoic acid and Ethyl benzoate
(b) An organic compound contains 69.77% carbon, 11.63% hydrogen and rest oxygen. The
molecular mass of the compound is 86. It does not reduce Tollen’s reagent but forms an addition
compound with sodium hydrogensulphite and gives positive iodoform test. On vigorous
addition, it gives ethanoic and propanoic acids. Derive the structure of the compound ‘A’. 5
OR
(a) Arrange the following compounds in an increasing order of their indicated property:
(i) Benzoic acid, 4-Nitrobenzoic acid, 3,4-Dinitrobenzoic acid, 4-Methoxybenzoic acid (acid
strength)
(ii) CH3CH2CH(Br)COOH, CH3CH(Br) CH2COOH,
(CH3)2CHCOOH, CH3CH2CH2COOH (acid strength)
(b) How would you bring about the following conversions:

(i) Propanone to Propene
(ii) Benzoic acid to Benzaldehyde
(iii) Bromobenzene to 1-phenylethanol
29. (a) Draw the structure of the following:
(i) H3PO2
(ii) BrF3
(b) How would you account for the following observations:
(i) Phosphorus has a greater tendency for catenation than nitrogen.
(ii) Bond dissociation energy of fluorine is less than that of chlorine.
(iii) No chemical compound of helium is known. 5
OR
(i) N2O5
(ii) XeOF4
(i) The electron gain enthalpy of sulphur atom has a greater negative value than that of
oxygen atom.
(ii) Nitrogen does not form pentahalides.
(iii) In aqueous solutions HI is a stronger acid than HCl.

[Questions different from Set–I and Set–II]
1. What is the number of atoms in a unit cell of a face-centred cubic crystal? 1
13. Describe the role of the following: 2
(i) NaCN in the extraction of silver from a silver ore.
(ii) Cryolite in the extraction of aluminium from pure alumina.
14. Define the following: 2
(i) Order of a reaction
(ii) Activation energy of a reaction
17. Differentiate between condensation and addition polymerisations. Give one example each of the
resulting polymers. 2
21. A voltaic cell is set up 25° C with the following half-cells: 3
3+ 2+
Al | Al (0.0010 M) and Ni | Ni (0.50 M).
Write the equation for the cell reaction that occurs when the cell generates an electric current and
(Given : E o = -0.25V, E o = -1.66V)
Ni 2 + /Ni Al 3+ /Al
23. Explain the following: 3

(i) Low spin octahedral complexes of nickel are not known.
(ii) The p -complexes are known for transition elements only.
(iii) CO is a stronger ligand than NH3 for many metals.
OR
Compare the following complexes with respect to structural shapes of units, magnetic behaviour and
hybrid orbitals involved in units:
(i) [Ni(CN) 4 ] 2-
(ii) [NiCl 4 ] 2-
(iii) [CoFe 6 ] 3-
[At. Nos,: Ni = 28; Co = 27]
27. What are the following substances? Give one example of each of them. 3
(ii) Enzymes
(iii) Sweetening agents
(i) XeF4
(ii) H2S2O7
(ii) The negative value of electron gain enthalpy is less for fluorine than that for chlorine.
(iii) Hydrogen fluoride has a much higher boiling point than hydrogen chloride. 5
OR
(i) PCl5(s)
(ii) SO2-
3

(i) Ammonia has a higher boiling point than phosphine.
(ii) Helium does not form any chemical compound.
(iii) Bi(V) is a stronger oxidising agent than Sb(V).
SOLUTIONS
1. Metallic substances conduct electricity through electrons while ionic substances conduct electricity in
molten state or in solution through ions.
2. The process of settling of colloidal particles is called coagulation.
3. It is a thermal process of extracting a metal from its ore.
4. This is due to polymeric structure of red phosphorus or angular strain in P4 molecule of white
phosphorus where the angle is only 60°.
5. H2C = CH – CH – CH2 – CH2 – CH3 Hex-l-en-3-ol.
|
OH
O
||
6. 1-Phenyl pentan-1-one CH3—CH2—CH2—CH2—C—
7. NH3 < (CH3)3N < CH3—NH2 < (CH3)2 NH.

8. The two monomers (adipic acid and hexamethylene diamine) contain 6 carbon atoms each.
9. Lead storage battery is a secondary cell.
At anode: Pb( s) + SO24 - ( aq) ¾
¾® PbSO4 ( s) + 2e -
At cathode: PbO2 ( s) + SO24 - ( aq) + 4H+ ( aq) + 2e - ¾

¾® PbSO4 ( s) + 2H2 O(l)
Overall reactions: Pb( s) + PbO2 ( s) + 2H2 SO4 ( aq) ¾

¾® 2PbSO4 ( s) + 2H2 O(l)
OR
At cathode: MnO-4 ( aq) + 8H+ + 5e -
¾® Mn 2+ ( aq) + 4H2 O(l)] ´ 2
¾ E° = + 1.51 V
At anode: Sn 2 + ¾
¾® Sn 4 + ( aq) + 2e - ] ´ 5 E° = + 0.15 V
Overall reaction: 2MnO-4 ( aq) + 5Sn 2 + ( aq) + 16H+ ( aq) ¾

¾® 2Mn 2+ ( aq) + 5Sn 4+ ( aq) + 8H2 O(l)
Eo = -E o = -0.15 V
Sn 4 + /Sn 2 + Sn 2 + /Sn 4 +
E ocell = E ocathode - E oanode = E o - Eo

MnO-4 /Mn 2 + Sn 4 + /Sn 2 +
= 1.51 – (– 0.15)
E oCell = 1 . 66V
As E ocell is +ve therefore the reaction will take place in forward direction, i.e., favours the formation of
products.
10. (i) Elementary step: Each step of a complex reaction is called an elementary step.
(ii) Rate of reaction: It is the change in the concentration of any of the reactants or products per
unit time.
11. (i) Electrolytic refining: In this method, the impure metal is made to act as anode. A strip of
same metal in pure form is used as cathode. They are put in a suitable electrolytic bath
containing soluble salt of same metal. When electric current is passed, the metal from the
anode goes into solution as ions due to oxidation while pure metal gets deposited at the
cathode due to reduction of metal ions. The less electropositive impurities settle down below
the anode as anode mud.
¾® M n + + ne -
At anode: M ¾
At cathode: M n + + ne - ¾
¾® M
(ii) Vapour phase refining of metals: In this method, crude metal is freed from impurities by first
converting it into volatile compound and collected elsewhere. It is then decomposed to give
pure metal. For example refining of nickel by Mond process.
330 - 350K
Ni + 4CO ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® Ni(CO) 4
impure Tetracarbonyl nickel (volatile)
450 - 470K
Ni(CO) 4 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® Ni + 4CO
Pure
12. (i) 2XeF2 + 2H2O ¾

¾® 2Xe + 4HF + O2
(ii) 2PH3 + 3HgCl 2 ¾
¾® Hg 3 P2 ¯ +6HCl
Mercuric chloride Mercuric phosphide
13. (i) MnO-4 +

+ 8H + 5e -
¾® Mn 2 + + 4H2 O] ´ 2
¾
C 2 O24 - ¾® 2CO2 + 2e - ] ´ 5
¾
2MnO–4 + 5C 2 O24 - + 16H+ ¾

¾® 2Mn 2 + + 10CO2 + 8H2 O
(ii) Cr2 O72 - + 14H+ + 6e - ¾® 2Cr 3 + + 7H2 O

¾
Fe 2 + ¾® Fe 3 + + e - ] ´ 6
¾
Cr2 O72 - + 6Fe 2 + + 14H+ ¾
¾® 2Cr 3 + + 6Fe 3 + + 7H2 O
14. (i) Cl 3° halide reacts faster than 2° halide because of the greater stability of tertiary carbocation.
tert-Butyl
chloride
Cl
(ii) 2° halide reacts faster than 1° halide because of the greater stability of
sec-Hexyl chloride secondary carbocation than primary.
CH3 CH3
15. (i) I
+ HI
I–lodo–1–methyl cyclohexane
(ii) CH3—CH2—CH= CH2 + H—Br ¾

¾® CH3 — CH2 — CH — CH3
|
Br
2 - Bromo butane
16. The four bases present in DNA are adenine (A), guanine (G), cytosine(C) and thymine (T).
Thymine(T) is not present in RNA.
17.
Fat soluble vitamins Sources Deficiency diseases
Vitamin A Fish liver oil, carrots, milk Xerophthalmia, Night blindness.
Vitamin D Exposure to sunlight, fish and egg. Rickets and osteomalacia.
Vitamin E Vegetable oils like wheat germ oil, Sterility and muscular atrophy
sunflower oil, etc.
Vitamin K Green leafy vegetables Haemorrhages and increased blood
clotting time.
18.
Thermoplastics Thermosetting plastics
(i) These polymer are linear or slightly branched (i) These polymers are cross linked or heavily
chain molecules branched molecules
(ii) Soften on heating and harden on cooling and (ii) On heating undergo extensive cross linking in
can be remoulded. moulds and become infusible.
(iii) Some common examples are polyethene, (iii) Some common examples are bakelite,
PVC, polystyrene, etc. urea-formaldehyde resins, terylene, etc.

2.303 [R] o
t= log
k [R]
Here
t = 3 h = 3 × 60 min = 180 min
k = 0.0051min–1, [R]o = 0.10 M, [R] = ?
2.303 0.10
180 min = log
-1 [R]
0.0051 min
0.1 180 min ´ 0 × 0051 min -1 918

Log = =
[R] 2 × 303 2303
0.1
log = 0.3986
[R]
0.1
= Anti log (0.3986) = 2.503
[R]
01
.
[R] = = 0.03995 M
2.503
[R] = 0.04M
20. For fcc unit cell

a
r=
2 2
Given a = 409 pm
409 409 2
\ r= =
2 2 4
r = 144.58 pm
¾® Cu 2 + ( aq) + 2e –
21. At anode: Cu( s) ¾
At cathode: 2Ag + ( aq) + e – ¾

¾® 2Ag( s)
Overall reaction: Cu( s) + 2Ag + ( aq) ¾

¾® Cu 2 + ( aq) + 2Ag( s)
n = 2, [ Ag + ] = ?
Given, E cell = 4.22 V [Cu 2+ ] = 0.1 M
Eo = 0.80 V Eo = 0.34 V
Ag + /Ag Cu 2 + /Cu
E ocell = E ocathode - E oanode = E o - Eo

Ag + /Ag Cu 2 + /Cu
E ocell = 0.80 – 0.34 = 0.46 V
0.0591 [Cu 2 + ]
n [Ag + ]
0 . 0591 0 .1
0.422 = 0.46 – log
2 [Ag + ] 2
10 -1
0.422 – 0.46 = – 0.0295 log
[ Ag + ] 2
10 -1
– 0.038 = – 0.0295 log
[ Ag + ] 2
0.038
= log10 -1 - log[ Ag + ] 2
0.0295
1.2881 = – log 10 – 2 log [Ag+]
1.2881 = – 1 – 2 log [Ag+]
2 log [Ag +] = 2.2881
log [Ag +] = – 1.144
[Ag+] = Antilog 2.856
[Ag+] = 7.178 × 10–2 M
22. (i) The positively charged colloidal particles of Fe(OH)3 get coagulated by the negatively charged
ions provided by electrolyte.
(ii) The path of light becomes visible due to scattering of light by colloidal particles (Tyndall
effect).
(iii) Electrophoresis takes place in which colloidal particles move towards the oppositely charged
electrode where they lose their charge and get coagulated.
23. (i) Crystal field spliting: When the ligands approach the central metal ion, the electrons in the
d-orbitals of central metal ion will be repelled by the lone pairs of the ligands. Because of these
interactions the degeneracy of d orbitals of the metal ion is lost and these split into two sets of
orbitals having different energies. This is known as crystal field splitting, e.g., for d4,
configuration is t32g e1g in the presence of weak field ligand.
(ii) Linkage isomerism: The isomers which have same molecular formula but differ in the linkage
of ligand atom to the central metal atom are called linkage isomers, e.g.,
[Co(NH3 ) 5 NO2 ]Cl 2 and [Co(NH3)5ONO]Cl2
Pentaamminenitrito–N–Cobalt (III) chloride, pentaamminenitrito–O–Cobalt(III) chloride
(iii) Ambidentate ligand: A ligand which can bind to the central metal atom through any of the
two donor atoms present in it is called ambidentate ligand, e.g., NO2 can bind to metal either
O
through nitrogen, i.e., as nitrito-N ( N ) or through oxygen atom, i.e., as nitrito –O
O
(¬ O—N=O)
OR
Complex/Ion Central Configu- Hybri- Geometry Number Magnetic
metal ration of disation of of the of behaviour
ion/atom metal ion metal ion complex unpaired
involved electrons
[Co(NH3)6]3+ Co3+ d64s0 d2sp3 octahedral 0 Diamagnetic
3+ 3+ 3 0
[Cr(NH3)6] Cr 3d 4s d2sp3 octahedral 3 Paramagnetic
3 2 3
[Ni(CO)4] Ni 3d 4s sp Tetrahedral 0 Diamagnetic
24. (i) Ethanol undergoes intermolecular hydrogen bonding due to the presence of a hydrogen
attached to oxygen atom. As a result, ethanol exist as associated molecules and hence it has
higher boiling point than methoxy ethane which does not form hydrogen bonds.
(ii) Phenol is stronger acid than ethanol because the phenoxide ion left after the release of proton is
stabilized by resonance but ethoxide ion is not. Moreover, ethoxide ion is destabilised by +I
effect of ethyl group.
(iii) Due to –I effect or –R effect of –NO2 group, the resulting phenolate ion is more stable than
phenoxide ion. Therefore o- and p--nitrophenols are more acidic than phenol.
25. (i) The catalytic activity of transition metals is attributed to the following reasons:
(a) Because of their variable oxidation states transition metals form unstable intermediate
compounds and provide a new path with lower activation energy for the reaction.
(b) In some cases, the transition metal provides a suitable large surface area with free
vacancies on which reactants are adsorbed.
(ii) This due to filling of 4f orbitals which have poor shielding effect or due to lanthanoid contraction.
(iii) This is due to comparable energies of 5f, 6d and 7s orbital in actinoids.
O
||
26. (i) R — C— NH2 ¾LiAlH ¾¾ ¾4
® R — CH2 — NH2
H2O 1°amine
+ –
N2Cl
(ii) + H3PO2 + H2O + N2 + H3PO3 + HCl
Benzene Benzene
diazonium chloride
NH2 NH2
Br Br
+ 3Br2(aq) + 3HBr
Aniline
Br
2, 4, 6 – Tribromo aniline
27. (i) Non-ionic detergents: These are the esters of high molecular mass alcohols with fatty acids.
These are named so because they do not contain any ion in their constitution, e.g.,
polyethylene glycol stearate.
(ii) Food preservatives: These are the substances which prevent spoilage of food due to microbial
growth, e.g., sodium benzoate, potassium metabisulphite, salts of sorbic acid and propanoic
acid, etc.
(iii) Disinfectants: These are the chemical substances which kill micro-organisms or stop their
growth but are harmful to human tissues, e.g., phenol (1%), chlorine in concentration of 0.2 to
0.4 pm in aqueous solution, SO2, etc.
28. (a) (i) Mole fraction: It may be defined as the ratio of number of moles of one component to the total
number of moles of all the components present in the solution.
(ii) Van’t Hoff factor (i): It may be defined as the ratio of normal molar mass to the observed
molar mass, i.e., Van’t Hoff factor
Normal molar mass
i=
Observed molar mass
OR
Observed colligative property
i=
Calculated colligative property
WB ´ R ´ T
(b) p =
M B ´V
WB ´ R ´ T
MB=
p´ V
Here
WB = 100 mg = 100 × 10–3 g
R = 0.0821 L atm K–1 mol–1
T = 25°C = (25 + 273) K = 298K
V = 100 mL = 10 × 10–3 L
13.3
p = 13.3 mm Hg = atm
760
100 ´ 10 -3 g ´ 0.0821 L atm K -1 mol -1 ´ 298K
MB =
13.3
atm ´ 100 ´ 10 -3 L
760
100 ´ 10 -3 ´ 0.0821 ´ 298 ´ 760 g mol -1 18594 g mol -1
MB = =
13.3 ´ 10 ´ 10 -3 133
M B = 1398.286 g mol–1
OR
(i) Colligative properties: Those properties which depend on the number of solute particles
irrespective of their nature relative to the total number of particles present in the solution are
called colligative properties of solutions.
(ii) Molality (m): It is the number of moles of the solute per kilogram of the solvent and is
expressed as
Moles of solute
Molality =
Mass of solvent in kg
(b) PN 2 = 0.78 atm = 0.78 × 760 mm Hg
= 592.8 mm Hg
KH = 8.42 × 10–7 M/mmHg
X N2 = ?
X N 2 = KH × PN 2
= 8.42 × 10–7 M/mmHg × 592.8 mmHg = 4991.376 × 10–7
X N 2 = 4.99 × 10 -4
X N2 X N2
X N2 = =
X N2 + X H2O X H2O
1000
X N2 = X H2O ´ X N2 = ´ 4.99 ´ 10 -4 = 0.0277
18
X N 2 = 2.77 × 10–2 = 2.77 × 10–2M
O O
29. (a) ( i) S S
O O
O OH O
HO
Peroxodisulphuric acid
(H2S2O8)
H
O
(ii) Cl
O
O
O
Perchloric acid
(HClO4)
(b) (i) This is because the lone pair of electrons on N atom in NH3 is directed and not delocalised as it
in PH3 due to larger size of P.
(ii) This is because S-S single bond is stronger O—O single bond.
(iii) Due to small size of fluorine atom there are strong interelectric repulsions in the relatively
small size 2p orbitals of fluorine and thus, the incoming electron does not experience much
attraction.
OR
H
O O O
(a) ( i) S S (ii) Cl
O
O O O
OH HO O
Pyrosulphuric acid (Oleum) Chloric acid

(HClO4)
(H2S2O7)
(i) Due to resonance, N—O bond length is the average of single and double bond whereas
N—OH bond is purely single bond.
(ii) PCl5 has trigonal bipyramidal structure in which the three equatorial P—Cl bonds are
equivalent, while the two axial bonds are longer than equational bonds. This is due to the
fact that axial bond pairs suffer more repulsion as compared to equatorial bond pairs.
(iii) This is because I—Cl bond has lower bond dissociation enthalpy than Cl—Cl bond.
30. (a) (i) Cannizzaro Reaction:

CH3 CH3 CH3
| | | – +
Conc.NaOH
2CH3 — C — CHO ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — C — CH2 — OH+ CH3 — C — CO O N a
| | |
CH3 CH3 CH3
2,2 - Dimethyl 2,2 - Dimethyl Sodium
propanal propanol 2,2 - dimethyl
propanoate
(ii) Hell-Volhald-Zelinsky reaction:

a (i) X 2 /P(red)
R — CH2 — COOH ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® R — C H — COOH
(ii) H 2 O |
X X = Cl, Br
a — Halocarboxylic acid
(b) ( i) Propanal and Propanone:
Tollen’s reagent test: Propanal being an aldehyde reduces Tollens reagent to silver mirror but
-
CH3 — CH2 — CHO + 2[Ag(NH3 ) 2 ] + + 3 O H
Tollens reagent
-
¾
¾® CH3 — CH2 — CO O+ 2Ag + 4NH3 + 2H2 O
Propanoate ion
Tollens reagent
¾® No silver mirror
CH3 – COCH3 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
Propanone
(ii) Benzophenone and Acetophenone:

Iodoform test: Acetophenone being a methyl ketone on treatment with NaOI (I2/NaOH) gives
yellow ppt of iodoform but benzophenone does not.
C 6 H5 COCH3 + 3NaOI ¾ ¾® C 6 H5 - COONa + CHI 3 ¯ + 2NaOH
Aceto phenone iodoform
(Yellow ppt.)
(iii) Phenol and Benzoic acid:
FeCl3 test: Phenol gives a violet colouration with neutral FeCl3 solution while benzoic acid
gives buff coloured ppt ferric benzoate.
¾® [Fe(OC 6 H5 ) 6 ] 3 - + 3H+ + 3HCl
6C6H5—OH + FeCl3 ¾
Violet colouration
3C 6 H5 COOH + FeCl 3 ¾
¾® (C 6 H5 — COO) 3 Fe + 3HCl
Ferric benzoate
(Buff coloured ppt)
OR
OH
|
(i) CH3 — CH2 — OH ¾PCC dil NaOH
¾
¾® CH3 — CHO ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — CH— CH2 — CHO
Ethanal Ethanol 2 - Hydroxy butanal
(ii) O OMgBr O
C—H H—C—CH3 CH—CH3
+ CH3—MgBr H2O/H+ K2Cr2O7/H2SO4

(O)
Benzal dehyde
O
C—CH3
Aceto phenon
(b) A = Butyl butanoate B = Butanoic acid
C = Butanol D = But–1–ene
Reactions involved:
O
||
H 2 SO4
CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — C— O — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — CH3 + H2 O ¾ ¾ ¾
¾®
Butylbutanoate(A)
O
||
CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — C— OH + CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — OH
Butanoic acid(B) Butanol(C)
(O) (O)
CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — OH ¾ ¾® CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CHO ¾ ¾®
Butanol(C) H 2 CrO4
CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — COOH
Butanolic acid (B)
conc.H SO
CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — OH ¾ ¾ ¾2¾¾
4
® CH3 — CH2 — CH = CH2 + H2 O
Butan –1– ol Heat But–1– ene.

1. Schottky defect.
8. The monomers must be bifunctional.
19. Here, z = 2, M = 56 g mol–1, d = 7.87 g cm–3
a = 286.65 pm = 286 .65 × 10–10 cm = 2.8
Substituting the values in the expression,
z´ M
NA = , we get
a3 ´ d
2 ´ 56 g mol –1
NA =
( 286.65 ´ 10 -10 cm) 3 ´ 7.87 g cm –3
= 6.042 × 1023 mol–1
k2 E a æ T2 - T1 ö
20. log = ç ÷
k1 2.303R çè T1 T2 ÷ø
2.303 ´ R ´ T1 ´ T2 k
Ea = log 2
T2 – T1 k1
2.303 ´ 8.314J mol -1 K -1 ´ 650 K ´ 700 K 2.39 ´ 10 -7

Ea = log
700 K – 650 K . ´ 10 -8
215
19147
. ´ 650 ´ 700
Ea = log (23.9 – log 2.15)J mol–1
50
E a = 174237.7(13783
. – 0.3324)J mol -1
E a = 174237.7 ´ 1.0459 J mol–1 = 182235.2 J mol–1
E a =182.24 kJ mol–1.
+ – + –
N2Cl N2Cl
O
27. (i) + CH3—C—Cl
COCH3
(ii) C 2 H5 NH2 + C 6 H5 SO2 Cl ¾

¾® C 6 H5 SO2 NHC 2 H5
(iii) C 2 H5 — NH2 + HNO2 ¾

¾® C 2 H5 — OH + H2 O + N2
28. (i) Ethanol, when warmed with NaOI (I2/NaOH) gives yellow ppt of Iodoform while propanal
does not
+
Heat
CH3 — CHO+ 3I 2 + 4NaOH ¾ ¾
¾® HCOO N a + CHI 3 ¯ + 3NaI + 3H2 O
Ethanol lodoform (yellow ppt)
(ii) Benzoic acid being an acid, decomposes NaHCO3 to produce brisk effervescence due to
evolution of CO2 while ethyl benzoate does not.
– +
C 6 H5 — COOH+ NaHCO3 ¾
¾® C 6 H5 — CO O N a + CO2 + H2 O
¾® No evolution of CO2 gas

C 6 H5 — COOC 2 H5 + NaHCO3 ¾
Ethyl benzoate
(b)
Element Percentage Atomic mass No. of moles Simplest
molar ratio
C 69.77 12 69 × 77 5 × 81
= 5 × 81 =5
12 1×16
H 11.63 1 11× 63 11× 63
= 11× 63 = 10
1 1×16
O (100 – 81.4) = 18.60 16 18 × 60 1×16
= 1×16 =1
16 1×16
n=
= 60 + 10 + 16
= 86
86
n= =1
86
= C5 H10 O
As the compound A forms addition compound with NaHSO3 therefore it must be either an
aldehyde or ketone.
As it does not reduce Tollens reagent and give positive Iodoform test therefore it must be a
methyl ketone.
As on oxidation the compound A gives a mixture of ethanoic acid and propanoic acid,
therefore compound A is
O
||
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3
Pentan -2-one
O OH
|| |
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3 + NaHSO3 ¾ ¾® CH3 — C — CH2 — CH2 — CH3
Pentan -2-one |
+
SO-3 N a
O
||
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3 + 3I 2 + 4NaOH
Pentan - 2 - one
- +
Iodoform
¾ ¾ ¾¾® CHI 3 ¯ + CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CO O Na + 3NaI + 3H2 O
O
||
K 2 Cr2 O7
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3 ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — COOH + CH3 — CH2 — COOH
OR
(a) (i) Acid strength: 4-Methoxy benzoic acid <Benzoic acid < 4-Nitrobenzoic acid
< 3, 4-Dinitrobenzoic acid.
(ii) Acid strength: (CH3)2CHCOOH < CH3CH2CH2COOH < CH3CH(Br)CH2COOH
< CH3CH2CH(Br)COOH
O OH
|| |
LiAlH 4 Conc.H SO4
(b) (i) CH3 — C— CH3 ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — CH — CH3 ¾ ¾ ¾ 2¾¾ ® CH3 — CH = CH2
Propanone Propan - 2 - ol Heat Propene
COOH COCl CHO
PCl5 H2
(ii) Pd/BaSO4,S
Benzoic acid Benzoyl chloride Benzaldehyde
OH
Br MgBr CH—CH3
O
Mg (i) CH3—C—H
(iii) dry ether (ii) H2O
Bromobenzene 1-phenyl ethanol

O F
29. (a) (i) P (ii) Br F

H OH
H F
H3PO2 BrF3: Bent “T”
(b) (i) Due to greater bond strength of P—P single than N—N single bond.
(ii) Due to large electron-electron repulsion among the lone pairs in F2 as fluorine has very
small size.
(iii) Due to very high ionization enthalpy of helium.
OR
O
O O O O O O F F
(a) (i) N N N N (ii) XeOF4:
O O O O
Xe
(N2O5)
F F
Square pyramidal
(b) (i) Due to small size of oxygen atom there will be greater interelectronic repulsions in oxygen.
(ii) Due to non-availability of d orbitals in valence shell nitrogen does not form pentahalide.
(iii) Due to low bond dissociation enthalpy of H-I as compared to H—Cl.

1 1
1. (8 corner atoms) ´ + (6 face centre atoms) ´ = 1 + 3 = 4
8 2
13. (i) Dilute NaCN forms a soluble complex with Ag or Ag2S while the impurities remain unaffected
which are filtered off.
4Ag + 8NaCN + O2 + 2H2O ¾
¾® 4Na[Ag(CN2)] + 4NaOH
Or Ag2S + 4NaCN ¾
¾® 2Na[Ag(CN) 2 ] + Na 2 S
Sodium dicyanoargentate(I)
(Soluble complex)
(ii) The role of cryolite is two fold.

l It lowers the melting point of the mixture to about 1140K.
l It increase the electrical conductivity of the mixture.
14. (i) Order of a reaction: It may be defined as the sum of exponents of the concentration terms in
the rate law expression.
(ii) Activation energy of a reaction: It may be defined as the extra amount of energy over and
above the average energy of reactants which must be supplied to them to undergo a chemical
reaction.
17.
Addition Polymerisation Condensation Polymerisation
(i) Monomers are unsaturated molecules (i) Monomers have di or polyfunctional groups.
(ii) Involves chain reaction (ii) Does not involve chain reaction.
(iii) Formed by adding monomers to a growing (iii) Monomers combine together with the loss of
chain without loss of any molecules. molecules like H2O, NH3, etc.
Examples: Polyethene, Polystyrene, Teflon Examples: Terylene, Bakelite, Nylon-66, etc.
etc.
21. At anode: ¾® Al 3 + ( aq) + 3e ] ´ 2

Al( s) ¾
At cathode: Ni 2 + ( aq) + 2e ¾
¾® Ni ( s)] ´ 3
2Al ( s) + 3Ni 2 + ( aq) ¾

¾® 2Al 3 + ( aq) + Ni( s)
0.0591 [ Al 3 + ] 2
n [ Ni 2 + ] 3
Here n = 6, [Al3+] = 0.001M = 1× 10–3M, [Ni2+] = 0.5M
3+
/ Al = - 0.25V - (-1.66V )
E ocell = 1.41V
2
E ocell = 1.41 -
0.0591
log
10 -3 ( ) = 1.41 -
0.0591
log
10 -6
6 (0.5) 3 6 0.125
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 -
6
(
log 10 –6 ´ 8 =1.41 –
6
)
log10 –6 + log 2 3 ( )
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 - log (– 6 log 10 + 3 log2) = 1.41 – (– 6 + 3 ´ 0.3010 )
6 6
0.0591 0.3012
= 1.41 - ( -5.097) = 1.41 +
6 6
= 1.41 + 0.0502 = 1.4602V
E cell = 1.46 V
23. (i) Ni in its atomic ionic state can not afford two vacant 3d orbitals hence d 2 sp 3 hybridisation is
not possible.
(ii) Transition metals have vacant d orbitals in their atoms or ions into which the electron pairs can
be donated by ligands containing p electrons, e.g., C6H6, CH2 = CH2, etc. Thus dp - Pp
bonding is possible.
(iii) Because in case of CO back bonding takes place in which the central metal uses its filled d
orbital with empty anti bonding p* molecular orbital of CO.
OR
Complex Central Configuration Hybridisation Geometry of Number of Magnetic

ion metal ion of metal ion of metal ion complex ion unpaired behaviour
involved electrons
[Ni(CN)4]2 Ni2+ d8 dsp2 Square planar 0 Diamagnetic
[Ni(Cl)4]2– Ni2+ d8 sp3 Tetrahedral 2 Paramagnetic
[CoF6]3– Co3+ d6 sp3d2 Octahedral 4 Paramagnetic

27. (i) Cationic detergents: These are quarternary ammonium salts of amines with acetates,
chlorides or bromides as anions, e.g., cetyltrimethylammonium bromide.
(ii) Enzymes: Enzymes are globular proteins with high molecular mass ranging from 15,000 to
1,000,000 g mol–1, and form colloidal solution in water. A number of reactions that occur in
the body of animals and plants to maintain the life process are catalysed by enzymes therefore
enzymes are termed as biochemical catalysts.
(b) Sweetening agents: These are non-nutritive substances which are used as substitute of sugar
in food and beverages, e.g., ortho-sulphobenzimide (saccharin), sucrolose, aspartame, etc.
F F O O
30. (a) (i) Xe (ii) S S
O O
O OH
F F OH
Pyrosulphuric acid
Square planar
(XeF4) (H2S2O7)
(b) (i) This is because P–P single bond is stronger than the N–N single bond.
(ii) Due to extremely small size of F atom, interelectronic repulsions are more in fluorine.
(iii) There is H-bonding in HF molecules due to high electronegativity and small size of
fluorine atom but there is no H-bonding in HCl.
OR
Cl + Cl –
Cl Cl
P
(a) (i) Cl Cl P (ii) S –
O
O –
Cl Cl
O
Cl Cl (SO32– )
PCl5(s)
(b) (i) Due to small size and high electronegativity of nitrogen, molecules of ammonia are
highly associated through hydrogen bonding.
(ii) This is due to small size and high ionization enthalpy of helium.
(iii) As Bi(V) is more stable than Sb(V) due to inert pair effect.
FOREIGN–2009
CBSE (Foreign) SET–I

1. What is the number of atoms in a body-centred cubic unit cell of a crystal? 1
2. What is an emulsion? 1
3. Which one has higher electron gain enthalpy with negative sign, sulphur or oxygen? 1
H3C CH3
H
H
CH3 Br
5. Write the structural formula of 3-oxopentanal. 1

6. Name two metals which occur in nature as oxides. 1
7. Arrange the following compounds in an increasing order of their basic strength in aqueous solutions:
NH3 , RNH2 , R 2 NH, R 3 N 1
8. Write the name of an antacid which is often used as a medicine. 1
9. Differentiate between molality and molarity of a solution. What is the effect of rise in temperature on
molality and molarity of the solution? 2
10. Describe the role of the following: 2
(i) NaCN in the extraction of silver
(ii) CO in the purification of nickel
11. Corrosion is essentially an electrochemical phenomenon. With the help of a diagram explain the
reactions occurring during the corrosion of iron kept in open atmosphere. 2
OR
Define the term molar conductivity and indicate how molar conductivity of a substance changes with
change in concentration of a weak electrolyte and a strong electrolyte in its solution. 2
12. Draw the structures of the following molecules: 2

(i) BrF3 (ii) H2 S 2 O7
13. State reasons for the following observations: 2
(i) The enthalpies of atomisation of transition elements are quite high.
(ii) There is a greater horizontal similarity in the properties of the transition elements than of the
main group elements.
14. Give a chemical equation for each of the following reactions: 2
(i) Williamson’s synthesis
(ii) Reimer-Tiemann reaction
15. Explain the mechanism of each of the following processes: 2
(i) Acid catalysed dehydration of an alcohol
(ii) Hydration of ethene to yield ethanol.
16. Name two water soluble vitamins, state their sources and the diseases caused due to their deficiency in
diet. 2
17. What are the following substances? 2
(i) Invert sugar (ii) Polypeptides
18. State reasons for the following occurrences: 2
(i) Soaps do not do the cleansing in hard water.
(ii) Synthetic detergents are preferred to soaps in washing machines.
OR
What is the repeating unit in the condensation polymer obtained by combining HO2 CCH2 CH2 CO2 H
(succinic acid) and H2 NCH2 CH2 NH2 (ethylenediamine).
19. Silver crystallises in face-centred cubic unit cells. Each side of the unit cell has a length of 409 pm. What
is the radius of silver atom? (Assume that each face atom is touching the four corner atoms in the unit
cell.) 3
20. Calculate the equilibrium constant for the reaction equilibrium
Fe(s) + Cd2+(aq) l Fe2+(aq) + Cd(s)
Given: Eo = -0.40V;E o = -0.44V 3
21. Calculate the freezing point depression for 0.0711 m aqueous solution of sodium sulphate, if it is
completely ionised in solution. If this solution actually freezes at – 0.320 °C, what is the value of Van’t
Hoff factor for it at the freezing point? (Kf for water is 1.86°C mol–1) 3
22. Describe what is observed when 3
(i) an electric current is passed through a colloidal solution.
(ii) a beam of light is passed through a colloidal solution.
(iii) an electrolyte such as NaCl, is added to hydrated ferric oxide sol.
23. Explain the following observations: 3

4 2+ 3+
(i) With the same d-orbital configuration (d ) Cr ion is a reducing agent while Mn ion is an
oxidising agent.
(ii) Cu+ ion is not stable in aqueous solutions.
(iii) Among the 3d series of transition elements, the largest number of oxidation states are exhibited
by manganese.
24. Three geometrical isomers are possible for [Co(en)(H2O)2(NH3)2]3+. Draw molecular structure of
these three isomers and indicate which one of them is chiral. 3
25. Complete the equations for the following reactions: 3
H
(i)
+ HBr
H H
CH3
(ii) + HI
(iii) —OH + SOCl2
26. How are the following conversions carried out: 3

(i) Aniline to nitrobenzene
(ii) Ethanamine to N-ethylethanamide
(iii) Chloroethane to propan-1-amine
OR
Give one chemical test each to distinguish between the compounds in the following pairs:
(i) Methylamine and dimethylamine
(ii) Aniline and benzylamine
(iii) Ethylamine and aniline
27. Differentiate between the modes of formation of an addition polymer and a condensation polymer.
Give one example of each of these formations. 3
28. (a) How are the following obtained:
(i) Benzoic acid from ethylbenzene
(ii) Benzaldehyde from toluene
(b) Complete each of the following reactions by giving the missing reactant, reagent or product:
(i) C6H5COCl ¾ ¾H¾
2
¾® ......................
Pd– BaSO4
O
C
Anhydrous AlCl3 Ar/R
+ ........
(ii)
O
C
.............
(iii) + ........ 5
OR
(a) How will you bring about the following conversions:
(ii) Benzaldehyde to benzophenone
(b) An organic compound A contains 69.77% carbon, 11.63% hydrogen and the rest oxygen. The
molecular mass of the compound is 86. It does not react with Tollen’s reagent but forms an
addition compound with sodium hydrogen sulphite and gives a positive iodoform test. On
vigorous oxidation it gives a mixture of ethanoic and propanoic acids. Derive the structure of
compound A.
29. (a) Complete the following reaction equations:
(i) XeF2 + PF5 ¾
¾®
(ii) Cl 2 ( g) + NaOH( aq) ¾

¾®
( hot and conc. )

(i) +3 oxidation state becomes more and more stable from As to Bi in the group.
(ii) Sulphur in vapour state exhibits paramagnetism.
(iii) Fluorine does not exhibit any positive oxidation state. 5
OR
(a) Complete the following reaction equations:
(i) PCl5 + H2O (excess) ¾
¾®
(ii) F2 + H2O ¾
¾®
(i) No distinct chemical compound of helium is known.
(ii) Phosphorus has a greater tendency for catenation than nitrogen.
(iii) In solutions of H2SO4 in water, the second dissociation constant K a 2 , is less than the first
dissociation constant K a1 .
30. (a) A reaction is of second order with respect to a reactant. How is the rate of reaction affected if
the concentration of this reactant is
(i) doubled, (ii) reduced to half?
(b) A first order reaction has a rate constant of 0.0051 min–1. If we begin with 0.10 M
concentration of the reactant, what will be the concentration of the reactant left after 3 hours? 5
OR
(a) Define the following:
(i) Rate of reaction. (ii) Elementary step in a reaction
(b) For a decomposition reaction, the values of rate constant k at two different temperature are
given below:
k1 = 2.15 × 10–8 L mol–1 s–1 at 650 K
k2 = 2.39 × 10–7 L mol–1 s–1 at 700 K
Calculate the value of activation energy (Ea) for this reaction. (R = 8.314 J K–1 mol–1)
CBSE (Foreign) SET–II

[Questions different from Set–I]
2. What is ‘reverse osmosis’? 1
6. Why is it that sulphide ores are concentrated by the ‘froth floatation process’? 1
8. What is meant by the ‘broad spectrum antibiotics’? 1
13. Complete the following chemical equations: 2
(i) C 2 O72 - ( aq) + C 2 O24 - ( aq) + H+ ( aq) ¾
¾®
(ii) MnO-4 ( aq) + Fe 2 + ( aq) + H+ ( aq) ¾

¾®
17. Describe the following types of substances giving one example of each: 2
19. Iron has a body-centred cubic unit cell with a cell edge of 286.65 pm. The density of iron is 7.87 g cm–3.
Use this information to calculate Avogadro’s number. (At. mass of Fe = 56 g mol–1) 3
22. Write three special features of chemisorption which are not found in physisorption. 3
24. Compare the following complexes with respect to their molecular shape and magnetic behaviour: 3
3+ 4– 2–
(i) [Cr(NH3)6] (ii) [Fe(CN)6] (iii) [NiCl4]
(At. No. Cr = 24, Fe = 26, Ni = 28)
30. Decomposition of phosphine (PH3) at 120°C proceeds according to the equation:
4PH3(g) ¾
¾® P4(g) + 6H2(g)
It is found that this reaction follows the following rate equation:
Rate = k[PH3]
The half-life of PH3 is 37.9 s at 120°C.
(i) How much time will be required for 3/4 of PH3 to decompose?
(ii) What fraction of the original amount of PH3 will remain undecomposed after 1 minute? 5
OR
Hydrogen peroxide, H2O2 (aq) decomposes to H2O(l) and O2(g) in a reaction that is of first order in
H2O2 and has a rate constant, k = 1.06 × 10–3 min–1.
(i) How long will it take 15% of a sample of H2O2 to decompose?
(ii) How long will it take 85% of a sample of H2O2 to decompose?
CBSE (Foreign) SET–III

[Questions different from Set–I and Set–II]
1. Which point defect in its crystal unit cells decreases the density of a solid? 1
2. Write the structure of pent-2-enal. 1
9. State the principles on which the following operations are based:
(i) Zone refining (ii) Vapour phase refining. 2
12. Draw the structures of the following molecules:
(i) XeF4 (ii) H2S2O7 2
16. Name two fat soluble vitamins. State their sources and the diseases caused due to their deficiency in
diet. 2
18. State what the following are and how they differ from each other:
(i) a nucleotide, and (ii) a nucleoside. 2
24. Explain the following giving an example in each case:
(i) Linkage isomerism (ii) An outer orbital complex
(iii) A bidentate ligand 3
27. Draw the structures of the monomers of the following materials: 3
(i) PVC (ii) Teflon (iii) Neoprene
30. (a) Complete the following reaction equations:
(i) SO2 + MnO -4 + H2O ¾
¾®
(ii) HgCl2 + PH3 ¾
¾®
(i) Sulphur has a greater tendency for catenation than oxygen.
(ii) Fluorine is a stronger oxidising agent than chlorine.
(iii) The +5 oxidation state becomes less stable down the group in group 15 of the periodic
table. 5
OR
(a) Complete the following reaction equations:
(i) P4 + NaOH + H2O ¾
¾®
(ii) Cu + HNO3 (dilute) ¾
¾®
(b) Explain why
(i) H2O is a liquid while, inspite of a higher molecular mass, H2S is a gas.
(ii) iron dissolves in HCl to form FeCl2 and not FeCl3.
(iii) helium is used in diving equipment
SOLUTIONS
1
1. 8 (Corner atoms) × + 1 (body centre atom) × 1 = 1 + 1 = 2
8
2. Emulsion is a colloidal solution in which both the dispersed phase and dispersion medium are liquids
e.g. milk, cod liver oil, etc.
3. Sulphur.
CH3Br
4. CH3—CH = C—CH—CH3 : 4–Bromo–3–methylpent–2–ene.
O O
|| ||
5. 3–oxopentanal: CH3 — CH2 — C— CH2 — C— H
6. Aluminium occurs as Al2O3.2H2O
Iron occurs as Fe2O3
7. NH3 < R–NH2 < R3N < R2NH
8. Ranitidine (zantac).
9. Molality is the number of moles of solute per thousand grams of solvent whereas molarity is the
number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of solution.
Molality is independent of temperature whereas molarity changes with change in temperature as
volume changes with temperature.
10. (i) Dilute NaCN forms a soluble complex with Ag or Ag2S while the impurities remain unaffected
which are filtered off.
4Ag + 8NaCN + O2 + 2H2O ¾
¾® 4Na[Ag(CN2)] + 4NaOH
Or Ag2S + 4NaCN ¾
¾® 2Na[Ag(CN) 2 ] + Na 2 S
Sodium dicyanoargentate(I)
(Soluble complex)
(ii) Carbon monoxide forms a volatile complex, nickel tetracarbonyl with nickel which on
decomposition gives pure nickel.
330– 350K
Ni + 4CO ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® Ni(CO) 4
Impure Nickel tetracarbonyl
450 - 470K
Ni(CO) 4 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® Ni + 4CO
Pure
11. At anode : Oxidation of Fe atoms takes place

¾® Fe 2 + + 2e -
Fe ¾ ¾ E ° Fe2 + / Fe = - 0 × 44V
At cathode : Reduction of oxygen in the presence of H+ ions. The H+ ions are produced by
either H2 O or H2 CO3 (formed by dissolution of CO2 in moisture)
2H+ ( aq) + 2e - ¾ ¾
¾® 2H
1
2H + O ( g) ¾ ¾¾® H2 O
2 2
Net reaction at cathodic area
1
2H+ ( aq) + O2 + 2e - ¾¾® H2 O E° H + /O /H O = 1.23V
2 2 2
The overall reaction

1
Fe( s) + 2H+ ( aq) + O2 ( g) ¾
¾® Fe 2 + ( aq) + H2 O(l) E°cell = 1.67V
2
The ferrous ions are further oxidised by atmospheric oxygen to ferric ions which come out as rust in
the form of hydrated ferric oxide (Fe 2 O3 . xH2 O).
OR
Molar Conductivity (Lm): It may be defined as the conductance of a solution containing 1 mole of
electrolyte such that the entire solution is placed is between two electrodes one centimeter apart.
Lm = k × v
or
k ´ 1000
Lm =
M 400
CH3COOH
Lm / (S cm mol )
Molar conductivity increases with decrease in

–1
concentration or increase in dilution as number

2
of ions as well as mobility of ions increased

with dilution. 200
For strong electrolytes the number of ions do not
increase appreciably on dilution and only KCl
mobility or ions increases due to decrease in
inter-ionic attractions. Therefore L m increases a
little as shown in graph by a straight line. 0 0.2 0.4
1/2 l/2
For weak electrolyte the number of ions as well c / (mol / L)
as mobility of ions increases on dilution as shown by curve in the figure.
F
b.p. = 3
12. (i) No. of electron pairs around central atom (Br) = 5
Br F
l.p. = 2
The shape would be slightly bent T.
O O F
(ii) S S O
O
O OH
OH
Pyrosulphuric acid
(H2S2O7)
13. (i) This is because, transition elements have strong metallic bonds due to presence of large
number of unpaired electrons.
(ii) This is because in transition elements incoming electron goes into d-orbitals of inner shell
whereas in main group elements, the incoming electron goes to outermost shell.
14. (i) Williamson’s Synthesis:
CH3 CH3
CH3—C—ONa+CH3—Br CH3—C—O—CH3+NaBr
CH3 CH3
Sodium tert-butoxide Methyl tert-butyl (ether)
H H H H H
+ Fast +
H— C — C — O — H + H H— C — C — O — H
H H H H
Ethyl alcohol Ethyl oxonium ion
(ii) Reimer-Tiemann reaction:

– + – +
OH ONa ONa OH
CHO CHO
CHCl3+NaOH(aq)
CHCl2 NaOH H+
Phenol Salicyl aldehyde
15. H+
(i) CH3 — CH2 — OH ¾ ¾® CH2 CH2 + H2 O
D
Mechanism
Step I: Formation of carbocation: It is the slowest step and hence, the rate determining step.
H H H H H
+ Slow +
H— C — C — O — H H— C — C + H2O
H H H H
Ethyl oxonium ion Ethyl carbocation
Step II: Formation of protonated alcohols

Step III: Formation of ethylene by elimination of a proton
H H
+ H H +
H— C — C C——C + H
H H
H H
Ethylene
Ethyl carbocation
To drive the equilibrium to the right, ethylene is removed as it is formed.

+
l
H
(ii) —C
C— + H2O C—C
Alkene H OH
Mechanism
Step I: Protonation of alkene to form carbocation by electrophilic attack of H3O+.
+
H2O + H H3O +
H H
+ +
—C
C— + H—O—H —C—C + H2O
Step II: Nucleophilic attack of water on carbocation.

H H H
l
+ +
Step III: Deprotonation to form an alchohol

H H H OH
+
— C— C — O — H + H2O —C—C— + H3O +
16. B group vitamin and vitamin C are soluble in water.
Name of Vitamins Sources Deficiency

diseases
(i) Vitamin B12 Meat, fish, egg and curd Pernicious anaemia
(ii) Vitamin C Citrus fruits and amla Scurvy
17. (i) Invert Sugar: Sucrose is dextrorotatory, on hydrolysis in the presence of HCl or enzyme
invertase, it produces a mixture of D–C(+)–glucose and D–(–)–fructose which is laevorotatory
called invert sugar.
(ii) Polypeptide: If more than ten a-amino acids are joined together by peptide bond (–CONH–)
the polyamide thus formed is called polypeptide.
18. (i) This is because the Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions present in hard water get precipitated as calcium and
magnesium soap which being insoluble stick to the clothes as gummy mass.
(ii) This is because detergents can be used in hard water as well as in acidic solutions, as sulphuric
acid and their calcium and magnesium salts are soluble in water but the fatty acids and their
calcium and magnesium salts are insoluble.
OR
O O
|| ||
n HO — C — CH2 — CH2 — C— OH + n H2 N — CH2 — CH2 — NH2
¯
éO O ù
ê| | || ú
—êC— CH2 — CH2 — C — HN — CH2 — CH2 — NHú— + 2nH2 O
ê ú
êë úû n
19. For fcc unit cell

a
r=
2 2
Given a = 409 pm
409 409 2
\ r= =
2 2 4
r = 144.58 pm
20. Fe( s) + Cd 2 + ( aq) l Fe 2 + ( aq) + Cd( s)
E ° cell
log k c = n
0.059
Here, n = 2
E° cell = E°cathode — E°anode
= E°Cd 2+ /Cd – E°Fe 2+ /Fe = – 0.40 – (– 0.44)
E°cell = 0.04V
2 ´ 0 × 04 0 × 08
log kc = =
0 × 059 0 × 059
log kc = 1.3536
kc = Antilog 1.3536
kc = 22.57
21. DTf = [ 273 ×15 - ( - 0 × 320 + 273 ×15)]K = 0 × 320 K
DTf = K f . m
= 1.86 K kg mol -1 × 0.0711 mol kg -1
= 0.132 K
Observed value of DTf 0 × 320K
i = =
Calculated value of DTf 0 ×132K
i = 2 × 42
22. (i) Electrophoresis takes place in which colloidal particles move towards the oppositely charged
electrode where they lose their charge and get coagulated.
(ii) The path of light becomes visible due to scattering of light by colloidal particles (Tyndall
effect).
(iii) The positively charged colloidal particles of Fe(OH)3 get coagulated by the negatively charged
ions provided by electrolyte.
23. (i) Cr 2+ is reducing as its configuration changes from d 4 to d 3 , the latter having a half filled t2g
configuration. On the other hand, the change from Mn 3+ to Mn 2+ results in the half-filled d 5
configuration which has extra stability therefore Mn 3+ is oxidising.
(ii) Because the high hydration enthalpy of Cu 2+ easily compensates the second ionization
enthalpy of Cu.
(iii) This is because manganese has electronic configuration [Ar]3d54s2, with five unpaired
electrons in 3d orbitals.
24. NH3 3+ NH3 3+ 3+
H 2N H 3N en
H 2O
CO en CO en CO
H 2O H 2O H 3N OH2
H 2O NH3 OH2
Chiral Chiral Chiral
(i) (ii) (iii)
H +H—Br Br H
25. (i)
H H
H H H
1–Bromo–1–phenyl–ethane
CH3 CH3
I
(ii) + HI
1–Iodo–1–methyl cyclohexane
(iii) —OH + SOCl2 —Cl + SO2 + HCl
Chlorocylohexane
+ — + –
NH2 N2Cl N2BF4 NO2
NaNO2/HCl HBF4 NaNO2

26. (i) 273–278K Cu, D
Aniline Nitrobenzene
O O
|| ||
(ii) CH3 — CH2 — NH2 + CH3 — C— Cl ¾
¾® CH3 — C— NH — CH2 — CH3 + HCl
Ethanamine Ethanoyl chloride N – Ethyl ethanamine
(iii) CH3 — CH2 — Cl ¾alc.KCN LiAlH 4

¾ ¾¾® CH3 — CH2 — CN ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — NH2
Chloroethane or Propan –1– amine
Na /C2 H5 – OH
OR
(i) Methylamine on treatment with alcoholic KOH and CHCl3 gives offensive smell of methyl
isocyanide but dimethyl amine does not.
CH3 — NH2 + CHCl 3 + 3KOH ¾
¾® CH3 — CH2 — NC + 3KCl + 3H2 O
Methyl amine (alc) Ethyl isocyanide
(1°amine) (Offensive smell)
CHCl /KOH
(CH3 ) 2 NH ¾ ¾ ¾3 ¾¾® No reaction.
Dimethyl amine D
(2 °amine)
(ii) Aniline on treatment with NaNO2/HCl (HNO2) at 0–5°C followed by treatment with an
alkaline solution of b -naphthol gives an orange coloured azodye while benzylamine does not
give this test.
OH
NaNO2/HCl + – b-Naphthol
NH2 N = NCl dil NaOH N = N—
0–5°C
Aniline
Orange dye
(iii) Add Br2(aq), aniline forms white ppt while ethyl amine does not form such ppt.
NH2 NH2
Br Br
+3Br2(aq) +3HBr
Aniline
Br
2, 4, 6–Tribromo aniline
(white ppt)
27.
Addition Polymerisation Condensation Polymerisation
(i) Monomers are unsaturated molecules (i) Monomers have di or polyfunctional groups.
(ii) Involves chain reaction (ii) Does not involve chain reaction.
(iii) Formed by adding monomers to a growing (iii) Monomers combine together with the loss of
chain without loss of any molecules. molecules like H2O, NH3, etc.
Examples: Polyethene, Polystyrene, Teflon Examples: Terylene, Bakelite, Nylon-66, etc.
etc.
28. (a) (i)

–+
CH2—CH3 COOK COOH
+
KMnO4 – KOH H3 O
D
Benzoic acid
O
(ii)
–
–
CH3 HC – OO —
– C — CH3
— C — CH
CHO
3
–
–
CrO3 O H3 O
+
O D
–
–
CH3 – C –
O Benzylideue Benzaldehyde
CH3 – C – diacetate
–
–
O
OR
CH3 CH(OCrOHCl2)2 CHO
CS2 +
H3 O
+ CrO2Cl2
Chromium complex Benzaldehyde

O
–
–
C — Cl CHO
H2
(b) (i) Pd – BaSO4
+ HCl
O
–
–
O
— C — CH3
–
–
anhyd. AlCl3
(ii) + Ar/R — C — Cl
Acetyl chloride
O
O
–
–
–
–
C
— C — Cl
+ anhyd. AlCl3 + HCl
(iii)
Benzene Benzoyl chloride Benzophenone

OR
OH
|
PCC dil NaOH
(a) (i) CH3 — CH2 — OH ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 — CHO ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — CH— CH2 — CH3
Ethanol Ethanol 2 - Hydroxy
butanol
(ii) O OMgBr OH
C—H H—C—C6H5 CH—C6H5
+ C6H5—MgBr H2O/H+
Benzaldehyde
(O) K2Cr2O7/H2SO4
O
C—C6H5
Benzophenone
(b)
Element Percentage Atomic mass No. of moles Simplest molar
ratio
C 69.77 12 69 × 77 5 × 81
= 5 × 81 =5
12 1 ×16
H 11.63 1 11 × 63 11 × 63
= 11 × 63 = 10
1 1 ×16
O (100 – 81.4) = 18.60 16 18 × 60 1 ×16
= 1 ×16 =1
16 1 ×16

n=
= 60 + 10 + 16
= 86
86
n = =1
86
= C5 H10 O
As the compound A forms addition compound with NaHSO3 therefore it must be either an
aldehyde or ketone.
As it does not reduce Tollens reagent and give positive iodoform test therefore it must be a methyl
ketone.
As on oxidation the compound A gives a mixture of ethanoic acid and propanoic acid,
therefore compound A is
O
||
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3
Pentan -2-one

O OH
|| |
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3 + NaHSO3 ¾ ¾® CH3 — C — CH2 — CH2 — CH3
Pentan -2-one |
+
SO-3 N a
O
||
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3 + 3I 2 + 4NaOH
Pentan - 2 - one
- +
Iodoform
¾ ¾ ¾¾® CHI 3 ¯ + CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CO O Na + 3NaI + 3H2 O
O
||
K Cr2 O7
CH3 — C— CH2 — CH2 — CH3 ¾ ¾2 ¾¾ ® CH3 — COOH + CH3 — CH2 — COOH
29. (a) ¾® [XeF] + [PF6 ] -

(i) XeF2 + PF5 ¾
(ii) 3 Cl 2 ( g) + 6NaOH( aq) ¾

¾® 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2 O
(Hot and conc.)
(b) (i) This is due to inert pair effect.

(ii) In vapour state sulphur partly exists as S2 molecule having two unpaired electrons in the
anti bonding p* orbitals like O2 and, hence exhibits paramagnetism.
(iii) This is because fluorine is the most electronegative element and does not have d orbitals
in its valence shell.
OR
(a) (i) PCl5 + 4H2O (excess) ¾
¾® H3PO4 + 5HCl
¾® 4H+(aq) + 4F–(aq) + O2(g)
(ii) 2F2(g) + 2H2O(l) ¾
(b) (i) This is due to small size, high ionisation enthalpy and stable electronic configuration of
helium.
(ii) This is because P–P single bond is stronger than N–N single bond.
(iii) Ka2 << Ka1, because HSO -4 ion has much less tendency to donate a proton to H2O as
compared to H2SO4.
30. (a) Let the rate law be, r1 = k [A]2
(i) If [A] is doubled than rate r2 = k(2A)2 = 4k [A]2 = 4r1, i.e., rate becomes 4 times.
2
A 1 1 1
(ii) If [A] is reduced to half then rate, r 3 = k é ù = k [ A ] 2 = r1 , i.e., rate becomes
êë 2 úû 4 4 4
times
(b) For a first order reaction
2.303 [R] o
t= log
k [R]
Here, t = 3 h = 3 × 60 min = 180 min
k = 0.0051min–1, [R]o = 0.10 M, [R] = ?
2.303 0.10
180 min = log
-1 [R]
0.0051min
0.1 180 min ´ 0 × 0051 min -1 918

Log = =
[R] 2 × 303 2303
0.1
log = 0.3986
[R]
0.1
= Anti log (0.3986) = 2.503
[R]
01
.
[R]= = 0.03995 M
2.503
[R] = 0.04M
OR
(a) (i) Elementary step: Each step of a complex reaction is called an elementary step.
(ii) Rate of reaction: It is the change in the concentration of any of the reactants or products
per unit time.
k2 E a æ T2 - T1 ö
(b) log = ç ÷
k1 2.303R çè T1 T2 ÷ø
2.303 ´ R ´ T1 ´ T2 k
Ea = log 2
T2 – T1 k1
2.303 ´ 8.314J mol -1 K -1 ´ 650 K ´ 700 K 2.39 ´ 10 -7

Ea = log
700 K – 650 K . ´ 10 -8
215
19147
. ´ 650 ´ 700
Ea = log (23.9 – log 2.15)J mol–1
50
E a = 174237.7(13783
. – 0.3324)J mol -1
E a = 174237.7 ´ 1.0459 J mol–1 = 182235.2 J mol–1
E a =182.24 kJ mol–1.

2. Reverse osmosis: If the pressure applied on the solution is greater than the osmotic pressure then the
solvent molecules start to move from solution into solvent through semipermeable membrane. This
process is called reverse osmosis.
6. As only sulphide ore particles are wet by oil while gangue particles are wet by water.
8. Broad spectrum antibiotic: Antibiotics which kill or inhibit a wide range of Gram-positive and
Gram-negative bacteria are known as broad spectrum antibiotics, e.g., chloramphenicol, ofloxacin,
vancomycin, etc.
13. (i) Cr2 O72 - ( aq) + 14H+ ( aq) + 6e – ¾® 2Cr 3 + ( aq) + 7H2 O
¾
C 2 O24 - ( aq) ¾® 2CO2 + 2e – ] ´ 3

¾
Cr2 O72 - ( aq) + 3(C 2 O24 - ( aq) + 14H+ ( aq) ¾
¾® 2Cr 3 + ( aq) + 6CO2 + 7H2 O
(ii) MnO-4 ( aq) + 8H+ ( aq) + 5e – ¾® Mn 2 + ( aq) + 4H2 O

¾
Fe 2+ ( aq) ¾® Fe 3 + ( aq) + e – ] ´ 5
¾
MnO-4 ( aq) + 5Fe 2 + ( aq) + 8H+ ( aq) ¾

¾® Mn 2 + ( aq) + 5Fe 3 + ( aq) + 4H2 O
17. (i) Cationic Detergents: Cationic detergents are quaternary ammonium salts of amines with
acetates, chlorides or bromides as anions. Cationic part possess a long hydrocarbon chain and a
positive charge on nitrogen atom. Hence, these are called cationic detergents. Cetyltrimethylammonium
bromide is a popular cationic detergent and is used in hair conditioners.
+
é CH3 ù
ê ½ ú
êCH (CH ) ¾ N ¾ CH ú Br -
ê 3 2 15
½
3
ú
ê ú
êë CH3 úû
Cetyltrimethyl ammonium bromide
Cationic detergents have germicidal properties and are expensive, therefore, these are of
limited use.
periods.
Preservatives prevent the rancidity of food and inhibit growth or kill the microorganisms.
The most-common preservations used are, sugar table salt, sodium benzoate, Sodium
metabisulphite sorbic acid and propanoic acid.
19. d = 7.87 g cm–3, For bcc, Z = 2, M = 56 g mol–1
a = 286.65pm = 286.65 × 10–10cm, NA = ?
Z´ M
d=
a 3 ´ NA
2 ´ 56 g mol -1
7.87g cm–3 =
(286.65 ´ 10 -3 cm) 3 ´ NA
2 ´ 56 g mol -1
NA =
(2.8665 ´ 10 -8 cm) 3 ´ 7.87 g cm -3
2 ´ 56 g mol -1
=
23.553 ´ 10 -24 cm 3 ´ 7.87 g cm -3
112 mol -1
= = 0.604 × 1024 mol–1
-24
185.366 ´ 10
= 6.024 × 1023 mol–1.
22. (i) Chemisorption is caused by chemical bond formation where as physisorption arises due to Van
der Waals’ forces.
(ii) Chemisorption is highly specific in nature whereas physisorption is not specific.
(iii) Chemisorption results into unimolecular layer whereas physisorption results into
multimolecular layers.
(iv) Chemisorption is irreversible in nature whereas physisorption is reversible in nature.
(v) Chemisorption first increases with increase in temperature, then decreases while physisorption
decreases with increase in temperature.
24.
(i) Orbitals of Cr3+ ion
3d 4s 4p
d2sp3 hybridised orbitals of Cr3+

3d d 2sp 3hybrid
[Co(NH3)6]3+
3d Six pairs of electrons
Shape: Octahedral from six NH3 molecules
Magnetic behaviour: Paramagnetic.
(ii) Orbitals of Fe2+ ion

3d 4s 4p
d2sp3 hybridised orbitals of Fe2+
3d d 2sp 3hybrid
[Fe(CN)6]4–
3d Six pairs of electrons
Shape: Octahedral from six CN–ions
Magnetic behaviour: Diamagnetic
(iii) Orbitals of Ni2+ ions

3d 4s 4p
sp3 hybridised orbitals of Ni2+
3d sp 3hybrid
[Ni(Cl)4]2–
3d Four pairs of electrons
Shape: Tetrahedral from four Cl–ions
Magnetic behaviour: Paramagnetic
30. (i) Given t1/2 = 37.95
0.693 0.693
t1/2 = , k= = 1.83 × 10–2 s–1
k t 1/ 2
0.693 -1 2.303 [A ]0
k= s , t= log
37.9 k [A ]
2.303 [ A ] 0 2.303
t 3/ 4 = log = ´ 100 log 2 2 s
–2 –1 [ A ] 183
.
183
. ´ 10 s 0
4
2.303 ´ 100 ´ 2 ´ 0.30105 138.64
t 3/ 4 = = s
183
. 183
.
t 3 / 4 = 75.76s
0.693 0.693 -1
(ii) k = = . ´ 10 –2 s -1
s = 183
t 1/ 2 37.9
t = 1 minute = 60 s
2.303 [A ]0
t= log
k [A ]
2.303 [A ]0
60 s = log
–2 -1 [A ]
183
. ´ 10 s
. ´ 10 -2
[ A ] 0 60 ´ 183
log = = 0.4768
[A ] 2.303
[A ] -
log = -0.4768 = 1.5232
[A ]0
[A ] -
= Anti log 1.5232 = 0.3336
[A ]0
[A ]
= 0.334
[A ]0
OR
2.303 [A ]0
(i) t = log
k [A ]
[ A ] 0 100
Given: k = 1.06 ´ 10 -3 min -1 , =
[A ] 85
2.303 100 2303
t= log = [ 2 log10 - log 85] min
-3 -1 85 1.06
1.06 ´ 10 min
2303 2303 ´ 0.0706
t= [ 2 ´ 1 -1.9294] = = 153.39 min
1.06 1.06
t =153.4 min.
[ A ] 0 100
(ii) Given: k = 1.06 × 10–3 mm–1, =
[A ] 15
2.303 100 2303
t= , log = [ 2 log10 - log15] min
-3 -1 15 1.06
1.06 ´ 10 min
2303 2303 ´ 0.8239
= [ 2 ´ 1 -11761
. ]= min
1.06 1.06
t =1790 min.

1. Schottky defect.
O
||
2. Pent–2–enol: CH3—CH2—CH = CH—C—H
9. (i) Zone refining based on the principle that impurities are more soluble in the melt than in the
solid state of the metal.
(ii) Vapour phase refining of metals: In this method, crude metal is freed from impurities by first
converting it into volatile compound and collected elsewhere. It is then decomposed to give
pure metal. For example refining of nickel by Mond process.
330 - 350K
Ni + 4CO ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® Ni(CO) 4
impure Tetracarbonyl nickel (volatile)
450 - 470K
Ni(CO) 4 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® Ni + 4CO
Pure
b.p. = 4
12. (i) No. of electron pairs around central atom (Xe) = 6 F F
l.p. = 2
The shape would be square planar. Xe
F F
O O
½½ ½½
(ii) S S
O
O O
OH OH
H2 S 2 O7 (Pyrosulphuric acid)
16.
Fat soluble vitamins Sources Deficiency diseases
Vitamin A Fish liver oil, carrots, milk Xerophthalmia, Night blindness.
Vitamin D Exposure to sunlight, fish and egg. Rickets and osteomalacia.
Vitamin E Vegetable oils like wheat germ oil, Sterility and muscular atrophy
sunflower oil, etc.
Vitamin K Green leafy vegetables Haemorrhages and increased blood
clotting time.
18. (i) Nucleotides: The monomeric unit of nucleic acid is called nucleotide. When a nucleoside is
linked to phosphoric acid at 5’ position of sugar moiety, we get nucleotide.
(ii) Nucleoside: A nucleoside is the condensation product of purine or pyrimidine base with
pentose sugar.
O
5¢ 5¢
HO—H2C Base O—P—O—H2C Base
4¢H H1¢ O– 4¢H H1¢
3¢ 2¢
H H H 3¢ 2¢
H
OH OH OH OH
Nucleoside Nucleotide
24. (i) Linkage isomerism: The isomers which have same molecular formula but differ in the linkage
of ligand atom to the central metal atom are called linkage isomers, e.g.,
[Co(NH3 ) 5 NO2 ]Cl 2 and [Co(NH3)5ONO]Cl2
Pentaamminenitrito–N–Cobalt (III) chloride pentaamminenitrito–O–Cobalt (III) chloride
(ii) Outer orbital complex: When ns, np and nd orbitals are involved in hybridisation, outer
orbital complex is formed, e.g., [CoF6 ] 2- in which cobalt is sp 3 d 2 hybridised.
(iii) Bidentate ligand: When a ligand is bound to a metal ion through two donor atoms it is said to be
&& — CH — CH — NH
bidentate ligand, e.g., H2 N && 2-
2 2 2 (ethane–1, 2–diamine, C 2 O 4 (oxalate), etc.
27. Polymer Monomer Structure

PVC Vinyl chloride CH2 = CH–Cl
Teflon Tetrafluro ethene CF2 = CF2
Neoprene Chloroprene CH2 = C — CH = CH2
|
Cl
30. (a) (i) SO2 + 2H2 O ¾® SO24 -
¾ + 4H+ + 2e - ] ´ 5
MnO-4 + 8H+ + 5 -e ¾® Mn 2 + + 4H2 O] ´ 2

¾
2MnO-4 + 5SO2 + 2H2 O ¾
¾® 2Mn 2 + + 5SO24 - + 4H+
(ii) 3HgCl 2 + 2PH3 ¾

¾® Hg 3 P2 + 6HCl
(b) (i) Sulphur has a greater tendency for catenation than oxygen because S-S bond is stronger than
O – O bond due to less interelectronic repulsions.
(ii) It is due to
l low enthalpy of dissociation of F–F bond.
l high hydration enthalpy of F–.
(iii) This is due to inert pair effect.
OR
(a) ( i) P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2O ¾
¾® PH3 + 3NaH2PO2
(ii) 3Cu + 8HNO3 (dilute) ¾ ¾® 3Cu(NO3)2 + 2NO + 4H2O
(b) (i) Because of small size and high electro negativity of oxygen, molecules of water are highly
associated through H-bonding resulting in its liquid state.
(ii) Its reaction with iron produces H2
Fe + 2HCl ¾ ¾® FeCl2 + H2
Liberation of hydrogen prevents the formation of ferric chloride.
(iii) Because of its very low solubility in blood it prevents ‘bends’.
DELHI–2010

1. Write a feature which will distinguish a metallic solid from an ionic solid.
2. Define 'order of a reaction'.
3. What is an emulsion?
4. Why does NO2 dimerise?
5. Give an example of linkage isomerism.
6. A solution of KOH hydrolyses CH3CHClCH2CH3 and CH3CH2CH2CH2Cl. Which one of these is
more easily hydrolysed?
7. Draw the structural formula of 1-phenylpropan-1-one molecule.
8. Give the IUPAC name of H2N – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH2.
9. Non-ideal solutions exhibit either positive or negative deviations from Raoult's law. What are these
deviations and why are they caused? Explain with one example for each type.
10. A reaction is of first order in reactant A and of second order in reactant B. How is the rate of this
reaction affected when (i) the concentration of B alone is increased to three times (ii) the
concentrations of A as well as B are doubled?
11. The rate constant for a reaction of zero order in A is 0.0030 mol L–1 s–1. How long will it take for the
initial concentration of A to fall from 0.10 M to 0.075M?
12. Draw the structures of white phosphorus and red phosphorus. Which one of these two types of
phosphorus is more reactive and why?
(i) Generally there is an increase in density of elements from titanium (Z = 22) to copper (Z = 29)
in the first series of transition elements.
(ii) Transition elements and their compounds are generally found to be good catalysts in chemical
reactions.
Examination Papers 117
14. Name the following coordination compounds according to IUPAC system of nomenclature:
(i) [Co(NH3)4 (H2O) Cl]Cl2
(ii) [CrCl2(en)2]Cl, (en = ethane –1, 2 – diamine)
15. Illustrate the following reactions giving a chemical equation for each:
(i) Kolbe's reaction, (ii) Williamson synthesis.
16. How are the following conversions carried out?
(i) Benzyl chloride to benzyl alcohol,
(ii) Methyl magnesium bromide to 2-methylpropan-2-ol.
17. Explain the following terms:
(i) Invert sugar (ii) Polypeptides
OR
Name the products of hydrolysis of sucrose. Why is sucrose not a reducing sugar?
18. What are essential and non-essential amino acids in human food? Give one example of each type.
19. The well known mineral fluorite is chemically calcium fluoride. It is known that in one unit cell of this
mineral there are 4 Ca2+ ions and 8 F– ions and that Ca2+ ions are arranged in a fcc lattice. The F– ions
fill all the tetrahedral holes in the face centred cubic lattice of Ca2+ ions. The edge of the unit cell is
5.46 × 10–8 cm in length. The density of the solid is 3.18 g cm–3. Use this information to calculate
Avogadro's number (Molar mass of CaF2 = 78.08 g mol–1)
20. A solution prepared by dissolving 1.25 g of oil of winter green (methyl salicylate) in 99.0 g of benzene
has a boiling point of 80.31°C. Determine the molar mass of this compound. (B.P. of pure Benzene =
80.10°C and Kb for benzene = 2.53°C kg mol–1)
each type. How are associated colloids different from these two types of colloids?
22. Describe how the following changes are brought about:
(i) Pig iron into steel.
(ii) Zinc oxide into metallic zinc.
(iii) Impure titanium into pure titanium.
OR
Describe the role of
(i) NaCN in the extraction of gold from gold ore.
(ii) SiO2 in the extraction of copper from copper matte
(iii) Iodine in the refining of Zirconium
Write chemical equations for the involved reactions.
(i) The atomic radii of the metals of the third (5d) series of transition elements are virtually the
same as those of the corresponding members of the second (4d) series.
118 Xam idea Chemistry—XII
(ii) The E° value for the Mn 3 + / Mn 2 + couple is much more positive than that for Cr 3 + / Cr 2 +
couple or Fe 3 + / Fe 2 + couple.
(iii) The highest oxidation state of a metal is exhibited in its oxide or fluoride.
24. (i) State one use each of DDT and iodoform.
(ii) Which compound in the following couples will react faster in S N 2 displacement and why?
(a) 1-Bromopentane or 2-bromopentane
(b) 1-Bromo-2-methylbutane or 2-bromo-2-methylbutane.
25. In the following cases rearrange the compounds as directed:
(i) In an increasing order of basic strength:
C 6 H5 NH2 , C 6 H5 N(CH3 ) 2 , (C 2 H5 ) 2 NH and CH3 NH2
(ii) In a decreasing order of basic strength:
Aniline, p-nitroaniline and p-toluidine
(iii) In an increasing order of pKb values:
C 2 H5 NH2 , C 6 H5 NHCH3 , ( C 2 H5 ) 2 NH and C 6 H5 NH2
26. Give one example each of
(i) addition polymers, (ii) condensation polymers,
(iii) copolymers.
27. What are analgesic medicines? How are they classified and when are they commonly recommended
for use?
28. (a) State Kohlrausch law of independent migration of ions. Write an expression for the molar
conductivity of acetic acid at infinite dilution according to Kohlrausch law.
(b) Calculate L°m for acetic acid.
Given that L°m (HCl) = 426 S cm2 mol–1
L°m (NaCl) = 126 S cm2 mol–1
L°m (CH3COONa) = 91 S cm2 mol–1

OR
(a) Write the anode and cathode reactions and the overall reaction occurring in a lead storage
battery.
(b) A copper-silver cell is set up. The copper ion concentration is 0.10 M. The concentration of
silver ion is not known. The cell potential when measured was 0.422 V. Determine the
concentration of silver ions in the cell. (Given E°Ag + /Ag = +0.80V, E° Cu 2 + /Cu = 0.34 V)
29. (a) Complete the following chemical equations:
(i) NaOH(aq) + Cl 2(g) ¾
¾®
(Hot and conc.)
(ii) XeF6 ( s) + H2 O(l) ¾

¾®
(b) How would you account for the following?

(i) The value of electron gain enthalpy with negative sign for sulphur is higher than that for
oxygen.
(ii) NF3 is an exothermic compound but NCl3 is endothermic compound.
(iii) ClF3 molecule has a T-shaped structure and not a trigonal planar one.
OR
(a) Complete the following chemical reaction equations::
(i) P4 + SO2 Cl 2 ¾
¾®
(ii) XeF4 + H2 O ¾
¾®
(b) Explain the following observations giving appropriate reasons:
(i) The stability of +5 oxidation state decreases down the group in group 15 of the periodic table.
(ii) Solid phosphorus pentachloride behaves as an ionic compound.
(iii) Halogens are strong oxidizing agents.
30. (a) Explain the mechanism of a nucleophilic attack on the carbonyl group of an aldehyde or a ketone.
(b) An organic compound (A) (molecular formula C8 H16 O2 ) was hydrolysed with dilute
sulphuric acid to give a carboxylic acid (B) and an alcohol (C). Oxidation of (C) with chromic
acid also produced (B). On dehydration (C) gives but-1-ene. Write the equations for the
reactions involved.
OR
(a) Give chemical tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds:
(i) Ethanal and propanal
(ii) Phenol and Benzoic acid
(b) How will you bring about the following conversions?
(i) Benzoic acid to benzaldehyde
(ii) Ethanal to but-2-enal
(iii) Propanone to propene
Give complete reaction in each case.

1. Which point defect in crystals of a solid does not change the density of the solid?
4. What is the oxidation number of phosphorus in H3 PO2 molecule?
5. Give an example of coordination isomerism.
12. Draw the structural formulae of molecules of following compounds:
(i) BrF3 and (ii) XeF4
14. Describe the shape and magnetic behaviour of following complexes:

(i) [Co(NH3)6] 3+
(ii) [Ni(CN4)] 2- , (At. No. Co = 27, Ni = 28)
15. Explain the following reactions with an example for each:
(i) Reimer-Tiemann reaction
(ii) Friedel-Crafts reaction.
(i) Propene to propan-2-ol
(ii) Ethylmagnesium chloride to propan-1-ol.
22. A solution of glycerol (C3H8O3; molar mass = 92 g mol -1 ) in water was prepared by dissolving some
glycerol in 500 g of water. This solution has a boiling point of 100.42°C. What mass of glycerol was
dissolved to make this solution? K b for water = 0.512 K kg mol -1 .
24. Complete the following chemical equations:
-
(i) C6H5N2Cl + C6H5NH2 ¾OH
¾¾®
(ii) C6H5N2Cl + CH3CH2OH ¾ ¾
¾®
(iii) RNH2 + CHCl3 + KOH ¾ ¾ ¾®
25. Write the name and structure of the monomer of each of the following polymers:
(i) Neoprene
(ii) Buna-S
(iii) Teflon

Questions Uncommon to Set-I and Set–II.
1. Which point defect in crystals of a solid decreases the density of the solid?
2. Define ‘rate of a reaction’.
3. Give an example of ‘shape-selective catalyst’.
4. Draw the structure of O3 molecule.
5. Give an example of ionization isomerism.
(i) Transition elements generally form coloured compounds.
(ii) Zinc is not regarded as a transition element.
18. State clearly what are known as nucleosides and nucleotides.
19. The density of copper metal is 8.95 g cm -3 . If the radius of copper atom is 127.8 pm, is the copper
unit cell a simple cubic, a body-centred cubic or a face-centred cubic structure? (Given: At. mass of
Cu=63.54 g mol -1 and NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol -1 )
20. How are the following colloids different from each other in respect of their dispersion medium and
dispersed phase? Give one example of each.
(i) Aerosol (ii) Emulsion
(iii) Hydrosol
26. Differentiate between thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers. Give one example of each.
27. Explain the following terms with one suitable example in each case.
(i) Cationic detergents (ii) Enzymes
(iii) Antifertility drugs
Solutions
1. Metals are malleable and ductile whereas ionic solids are hard and brittle.
2. The order of a reaction can be defined as the sum of the powers of the concentration terms as
expressed in rate law.
3. An emulsion is a colloidal dispersion of one liquid in another liquid. For example, cod liver oil, milk
etc.
4. The dimerisation of NO2 is because of unpaired electron on nitrogen atom to form N2O4 molecule
with even number of electrons.
l
262 K
2NO2 N2 O4
Paramagnetic Colourless and diamagnetic
5. The example of linkage isomerism: [Co(NH3 ) 5 NO2 ] 2+ and [Co(NH3 ) 5 ONO] 2+ .

6. CH3CH2ClCHCH3
O
–
–
7. CH3 — CH2 — C —
8. But-3-en-1-amine.
9. When the vapour pressure of a solution is either higher or lower than that predicted by Raoult’s law
then the solution exhibits deviation from Raoult’s law.
These deviation are caused when solute-solvent molecular interactions ( A - B) are either weak or
stronger than solvent-solvent ( A - A) or solute-solute ( B - B) molecular interactions.
Positive Deviation: When ( A - B) molecular interactions are weaker than ( A - A) and ( B - B)
molecular interactions. For example a mixture of ethanol and acetone.
Negative deviation: When ( A - B) molecular interactions are stronger than ( A - A) and ( B - B)
molecular interactions. For example a mixture of chloroform and acetone.
Cl
H3C
C O H C Cl
H3C
Cl
Hydrogen bond
10. According to the given reaction:

Rate = k [A] [B]2
(i) When the concentration of reactant ‘B’ is increased three times the rate of reaction becomes 9
times.
i.e., Rate = k [A] [3B]2 = 9k[A] [B]2
(ii) When the concentration of reactants A and B are doubled, then rate becomes 8 times.
i.e., Rate = k [2A]1 [2B]2 = 8k[A] [B]2
11. According to available data:
k = 0.0030 mol L–1s–1, [R]0 = 0.10 M, [R] = 0.075 M
We know that
[R] = – kt + [R]0
0.075 = – 0.0030 t + 0.10
Þ 3t = 100 - 75 Þ t = 8.33 second
12. White phosphorus is more reactive due to its discrete tetrahedral structure and angular strain.
or
Red phosphorus is less reactive due to its polymeric structure.
(i) White phosphorus (ii) Red phosphorus
13. (i) The density of elements from titanium to copper increase in the first series of transition
elements. This is due to decrease in metallic radius coupled with increase in atomic mass
results in a general increase in the density.
(ii) Many transition metals and their components show catalytic properties. This property is due to
their ability to exhibit variable oxidation states (incomplete d-orbitals) which enable them to
form unstable intermediates.
14. (i) Tetraammineaquachloridocobalt (III) chloride
(ii) Dichlorido-bis (ethane-1, 2-diamine) chromium(III)chloride
15. (i) Kolbe’s reaction

OH ONa OH OH
½ ½ ½ ½
400 K COONa COOH
+
NaOH 4-7 atm. H
¾¾® ¾¾¾® ¾¾®
+ CO2
Sodium Sodium salicylate Salicylic acid

phenoxide (2-Hydroxybenzoic acid)
Major product
(ii) Williamson synthesis

C 2 H5 ONa + ICH3 ¾ ¾¾® C 2 H5 OCH3 + NaI
Sod. ethoxide Methyl iodide Methyl ethyl ether
16. (i)
CH2 Cl CH2 OH
½ ½
KOH (aq), heat
¾¾¾¾®
– KCl
Benzyl chloride Benzyl alcohol

(ii)
O é OMgBr ù OH
|| d+ d+ dry ether ê | ú HOH |
CH 3 ¾ C ¾ CH 3 + CH 3 ¾ Mg Br ¾¾® êCH 3 ¾ C ¾ CH 3 ú ¾® CH 3 ¾ C ¾ CH 3
Methyl ê | ú |
Acetone magnesium ê
ë CH 3 ú
û CH 3
bromide 2 -Methyl propan-2-ol
17. (i) Invert Sugar: The dextrorotatory sucrose when hydrolysed by boiling with mineral acid
produces an equal number of molecules of dextrorotatory fructose. The resulting mixture is
laevorotatory and termed as invert sugar.
H+
C12 H22 OH + H2O ¾ ¾ ¾® C6H12O6 + C6H12O6
Sucrose Glucose Fructose
[a]D = 66.5° [a]D = 52.5° [a]D = – 93°
Invert sugar
(ii) Polypeptides: Polypeptides are polymers formed by condensation of more than ten amino
acids. They have large number of peptides bonds in them. Polypeptides are amphoteric
because of the presence of terminal-ammonium and carboxylate ions as well as the ionized
side chains of amino acid residues
OR
Sucrose gives glucose and fructose on hydrolysis. It is a non-reducing sugar as it does not contain
free ketone or aldehyde group in its ring form.
18. Essential amino acids: Amino acids which cannot be synthesized in the body but must be obtained
through diet, are called essential amino acids. For example: valine, leucine.
Non-essential amino acids: The amino acids, which can be synthesized in the body are known as
non-essential amino acids. For example: Glycine, Alanine.
19. Given: d = 3.18 g cm–3, Z = 4, a = 5.46 × 10–8 cm
M = 78.08 g mol–1 NA = ?
Z´M
d=
a3 ´ NA
Z´M
\ NA =
a3 ´ P
Substituting the given values, we get
4 ´ 78.08
NA =
(5.46 ´ 10 -8 ) -3 ´ 318
.
313 × 32 ´ 10 24
NA =
517 × 61
NA = 6.035 × 1023 mol -1
20. Given DTB = 80.31 – 80.10 = 0.21 °C or 0.21 K
WB = 1.25g, Kb = 2.53°C kg mol–1
MB = ?
WA = 99g
K ´ WB
MB = b ´ 1000
DTb ´ WA
2 × 53 ´ 1× 25 ´ 1000 3162.5
= =
0 × 21´ 99 20.79
\ MB = 152 g/mol
21. Multimolecular colloids: In this type of colloids, colloidal particles are aggregates of atoms or
molecules each having size less than 1nm, e.g., sulphur sol, gold sol.
Macromolecular colloids: In this type of colloids, colloidal particles are themselves large molecules
of colloidal dimensions, e.g., starch, proteins, polyethene, etc.
Associated colloids: There are certain substances which at low concentrations behave as normal
electrolyte, but at higher concentrations exhibit colloidal behaviour due to the formation of
aggregates. Such colloids are known as associated colloids, e.g., soaps and detergents.
22. (i) Pig iron into steel: Pig iron is converted into steel by heating in a converter. A blast of oxygen
diluted with carbon dioxide is blown through the converter. Oxygen reacts with impurities and
raised the temperature to 2173K. Carbon gets oxidised to CO which burns off at the mouth of
the converter. Oxides of silicon and Mg form slag. When the flame is stopped, slag is tapped
off and other metals like Mn, Cr, Ni, W may be added in the end.
(ii) Metallic zinc can be obtained from zinc oxide. At first calcination of ZnO is done and
converted into sinters of oxide.
D
ZnO + C ¾¾® Zn + CO
The oxide is then made into brickettes with coke and clay and heated by producer gas in
vertical retorts at 1673 K, zinc, boiling point is 1183 K, distills off and is collected by rapid
chilling.
(iii) Impure Titanium into pure Titanium: Impure Titanium is heated with I2 to form volatile
complex (TiI4), which on heating at higher temperature decomposes to give pure titanium.
D
Ti (impure) + 2 I2 ¾® TiI4
¾¾ ¾ ¾¾® Ti (pure) + I2
OR
(i) Role of NaCN in the extraction of gold is to do the leaching of gold ore in the presence of air
from which the gold is obtained later by replacement.
4Au(s) + 8NaCN(aq) + 2H2O + O2 ¾
¾® 4Na[Au(CN)2] + 4KOH
(ii) SiO2 is added to copper matte to convert the leftout FeS, FeO into slag.
FeO + SiO2 ¾¾® FeSiO3 (Slag)
(iii) Iodine is heated with impure Zr to form volatile compound which on further heating
decomposes to give pure zirconium.
D D
Zr (Impure) + I2 ¾ ¾¾® ZrI4 ¾ ¾¾® Zr (pure) + 2I2
23. (i) This is due to lanthanide contraction.

or
This is due to filling of 4f orbitals which have poor shielding effect.
(ii) The E° value for the Mn3+/Mn2+ couple is much positive than Cr3+/Cr2+ couple or Fe3+/Fe2+
couple because Mn3+ ion receiving an electron gets d-subshell half-filled which is highly
stable. While in case of Fe3+ d-sub shell is already half-filled, so it does not receive electron
easily.
(iii) This is because fluorine and oxygen are highly electronegative elements and have small size.
24. (i) DDT: It is used as insecticide to control flies, mosquitoes, etc.
Iodoform: Iodoform is used as an antiseptic.
(ii) 1-Bromopentane, as it is a primary alkyl halide. and
(b) 1-Bromo-2-methyl butane, as it is a primary alkylhalide.
25. (i) Increasing order of basic strength is:
C6H5NH2 < C6H5N(CH3)2 < CH3NH2 < (C2H5)2NH
(ii) p-Toluidine > Aniline > tr-nitroaniline
(iii) (C2H5)2 NH2 < C2H5NH2 < C6H5NHCH3 < C6H5NH2
26. (i) Polythene, PVC.
(ii) Nylon 6, Nylon 6,6.
(iii) Buna-S, Buna-N.
27. Analgesics: They are the drugs used for relieving pain. Analgesics are classified into two categories:
(a) Narcotics (addictive) drugs (b) Non-narcotics (non-addictive) drugs
(a) Narcotics: Narcotic drugs are recommended for cardiac pain, post operative pains, terminal
cancer and in child birth.
(b) Non-narcotics: Non-narcotic drugs are effective in relieving skeletal pain, reducing fever,
preventing heart attack.
28. (a) Kohlrausch Law: “The molar conductance of an electrolyte at infinite dilution is equal to the
sum of the molar conductances of the two ions, i.e., the cation and the anion.”
Mathematically, Lom = Lo+ + Lo-
Expression for the molar conductivity of acetic acid:
Lom CH3 COOH = Lom CH3 COO- + Lo
H+
or Lom CH3 COOH = Lom (CH3 COO- ) + Lo

H+
(b) Given Lom ( HCl) = 426 S cm 2 mol -1
Lom ( NaCl) = 126 S cm 2 mol -1
Lom ( CH3 COONa) = 91S cm 2 mol -1
Lom ( CH3 COOH) = Lom ( CH3 COO- ) + Lom ( H+ )
Lom ( CH3 COONA) = Lom ( CH3 COO- ) + Lom ( Na + ) ...(1)
Lom ( NaCl) = Lom ( Na + ) + Lom ( Cl + ) ...(2)
Lom ( HCl) = Lom ( H+ ) + Lom ( Cl + ) ...(3)

Subtracting (2) from the sum of (1) and (3), we get:
Lom ( CH3 COO- ) + Lom ( Na + ) + Lom ( H+ ) + Lom ( Cl - ) - Lom (( Na + ) + Lom Cl - )
= Lom (CH3 COO- ) + Lom (H+ ) = Lom (CH3 COOH)
\ Lom ( CH3 COOH) = 91.0 + 426 -126 S cm 2 mol -1

= 391.0 S cm2 mol–1
OR
(a) When lead battery operates, the following cell reactions occur:
Anode half cell reaction:
Pb (s) + SO2-
4 (aq) ¾
¾® PbSO4 (s) + 2e–
Cathode half cell reaction:
PbO2 (s) + 4 H+ (aq) + SO2- –
4 + 2e ¾¾® PbSO4 (s) + 2H2O (l)
Net reaction, Pb(s) + PbO2 + 2H2SO4 (aq) ¾

¾® 2PbSO4 (s) + 2H2O (l)
(b) Given EoAg+/Ag = 0.80V, Eo Cu 2 + /Cu = + 0.34V

[Cu2+] = 0.10 M [Ag+] = ?
Eocell = EoR – EoL = 0.80 – 0.34V = 0.46V
From Nernst Equation:
0.0591 [ Cu 2 + ]
Ecell = Eocell - log
2 [Ag + ] 2
0.591 [ 010
. ]
0.422 = 0.46 - log
2 [Ag + ] 2
010
.
log = 1.2881
[Ag + ] 2
[Ag+]2 = 0.0051
\ [Ag+] = 7.1× 10–2 M
29. (i) 6 NaOH + 3Cl2 ¾¾® 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2O
(ii) XeF6 + 3H2O ¾¾® XeO3 + 6HF
or
XeF6 + H2O ¾¾® XeOF4 + 2HF
(i) Due to smaller size of oxygen the electron cloud is distributed over a small region of space,
making electron density high which repels the incoming electrons.
(ii) This is due to lower bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 than Cl2 and comparable size of fluorine
and nitrogen.
(iii) ClF3 molecule has a T-shaped structure. This is due to presence of two lone pairs in the outer
shell of chlorine in ClF3 molecule which repel the bond pairs.
OR
(i) P4 + 8SO2Cl2 ¾
¾® 4PCl3 + 4SO2 + 2S2Cl2
(ii) 6XeF4 + 12H2O ¾
¾® 4Xe + 2XeO3 + 24HF + 3O2
(b) (i) The stability of +5 oxidation state decreases down the group in group 15 of the periodic
table. The + 3 oxidation state becomes more and more common on moving down the group
from N to Bi. This is because of inert pair effect.
(ii) Solid PCl5 behaves as an ionic compound because it is a salt containing the tetrahedral
cation [PCl4]+ and octahedral anion [PCl6]–.
(iii) Halogens are strong oxidising agents because they have high electron affinities, so, they
pick up electrons from other substances.
30. (a) Mechanism of nucleophilic addition reactions:
A nucleophile attacks the electrophilic carbon atom of the polar carbonyl group from a
direction approximately perpendicular to the plane of sp2 hybridized orbitals of carbonyl
carbon. The hybridization of carbon changes from sp2 to sp3 in this process and a tetrahedral
intermediate is produced. The intermediate captures a proton from the medium to give the
neutral product.
Nu Nu
l lfast
d+ d– slow – H
+
C O + Nu C O C O H
step-1
Aldehyde or ketone Tetrahedral step-2 Addition product
(Planar) intermediate
(b) The hydrolysis of the given compound with dil H2SO4 to give a carboxylic acid and an alcohol
suggests that the compound is an ester.
O O
|| ||
dil. H SO4
R — C— OR' ¾ ¾ ¾2 ¾ ¾® R — C— OH + R — OH
( B) ( C)
So, the possible structure of ‘A’ is
O
||
CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — C— O — CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3
Butyl butanoate
O
||
(i) CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — C— O — CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3
(A) dil. H SO
¾ ¾ ¾2 ¾
¾4
® CH3 CH2 CH2 COOH + CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2 OH
Butanoic acid Butanol
(B) (C)
chromic acid
(ii) CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2 OH ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 CH2 CH2 COOH
Butanol oxidation Butanoic acid
(C) (B)
(iii) CH3 — CH2 CH2 CH2 OH ¾dehydration

¾¾¾ ¾® CH3 — CH2 — CH CH2
Butanol But-1-ene
OR
(a) Chemical tests to distinguish between ethanal and propanal
Iodoform Test: Ethanol gives iodoform test positive while propanal does not give this test.
CH3CHO + 3I2 + 4 NaOH ¾® CHI3 ¯ + HCOONa + 3NaI + 3H2O
¾
(yellow)
(b) Phenol and benzoic acid:

Phenol gives violet colour with neutral FeCl3 solution. Benzoic acid does not give violet colour
with FeCl3.
OH
3– +
6 + FeCl3 [Fe(OC6H5)6] + 3H + HCl
Violet complex
Phenol
COOH CH2OH CHO
LiAlH4 P.C.C
(i)
Benzoic acid Benzyl alcohol Benzaldehyde
(ii) Ethanal to but-2-enal

OH
|
dil. NaOH D
CH3 CHO ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3 — CH— CH2 — CHO ¾¾® CH3 — CH CH — CHO
aldol -H2O But - 2-en - al
(iii) Propanone to propane

CH3 Zn–Hg/HCl(conc.)
C O + 4[H] CH3 — CH2 — CH3 + H2O
CH3
Propane
Propanone

1. Frankel defects do not change the density of the solids.
4. Oxidation number of phosphorous in H3PO2 is +1.
5. Example of coordination isomerism.
[Co(NH3)6][Cr(CN)6] and [Cr(NH3 ) 6 ][Co(CN) 6 ]
12. (i) Structure of BrF3
F
Br F
Bent T-shaped
(ii) Structure of XeF4 molecule
F F
Xe
F F
Square planar
14. Co 3+
l
l
(i) \
3d6 4s 4p
Pairing of electrons takes place against the Hund’s role
\ Co 3+
l
l
l
3d 4s 4p
2 3
d sp hybridization
Thus, the complex will be octahedral and diamagnetic.
(ii) [Ni(CN)4] 2-
The electronic configuration of the nickel atom and Ni 2+ ion are depicted below:
Ni (atom number 28)

l
l
l
l
3d2 4s2 4p0
Since coordination number in the complex is 4. It shows that complex is formed by sp 3 or

dsp 2 hybridization.
However, experiments show that the complex is diamagnetic.
\ Ni 2+ (after rearrangement)
l
l
l
l
dsp2 hybridization
The resulting complex is square planar and diamagnetic as it has no unpaired electrons.
15. (i) Reimer Tiemann Reaction
OH é ONa ù ONa OH
ê ½ ú
½ ê CHCl 2ú ½ ½
CHO + CHO
CHCl 3 (aq.) NaOH ê ú NaOH H 3O
¾¾¾¾¾® ê ú ¾¾® ¾®
340 K ê ú
ê ú
Salicyladehyde
ê ú (2-Hydroxy benzaldehyde)
êë úû
(ii) Friedel - Craft Reactions
Acylation:
O
||
C— CH3
O ½
||
Anhyd. AlCl
+ CH3 — C— Cl ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾3 ® + HCl
Alkylation:
CH3
½
Anhyd. AlCl
+ CH3 Cl ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾3 ® + HCl
Methyl
chloride
Benzene Toluene
16. OH
|
dil. H SO4
(i) CH3 — CH CH2 ¾ ¾ ¾2 ¾ ¾® CH3 — CH — CH3
Propene Propane-2-ol
( i ) HCHO
(ii) C 2 H5 MgCl ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3 — CH2 — CH2 OH
Ethyl magnesium chloride (ii) H + Propan -1-ol
22. Given MB = 92 g mol -1

WA = 500 g
DTb = 100.42 – 100 = 0.42°C or 0.42 K
WB = ?
\ Kb = 0.512 kg mol -1
W 1000
DTb = K b B ´
M B WA
0.512 ´ WB ´ 1000
or 0.42 =
92 ´ 500
0.42 ´ 92 ´ 500
\ WB =
0.512 ´ 1000
19320
WB = = 37.73 g
512
+ - H+
24. (i) ¾ N º N Cl + H ¾ ¾ NH2 ¾¾¾¾¾®
(pH 4 -5)
Aniline
¾ N = N¾ ¾ NH2 + HCl
p -Amino azobenzene
+ (yellow dye)
(ii) Ar N2 Cl - + CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ OH ¾® ArH + N2 + CH3 ¾ CHO + HCl
D
(iii) R ¾ NH2 + CHCl 3 + 3KOH (alc.) ¾¾¾® R ¾ NC + 3KCl + 3H2 O
1° amine Alkyl isocyanide
25. (i) The monomer of neoprone is chloroprene.

Cl
|
CH2 CH — C CH2
chloroprene
(ii) The monomer of Buna-S is Buta-1,3-diene and styrene.

CH2 CH — CH CH2 and C 6 H5 CH CH2
Buta -1,3 - diene Styrene
(iii) The monomer of teflon is Tetrafluoroethene.

F F
| |
F— C C— F
Tetrafluoroethene

1. Schottky defect.
2. Rate may be defined as the decrease in the concentration of reactant per unit time or increase in the
concentration of product per unit time.
3. The example of shape selective catalyst is ZSM–5.
4.
O O
12
O
7.8
pm
116.8°
O O O O O
O
5. Example of ionisation isomerism is –

[Pt(NH3)4Cl2]Br2 and [Pt(NH3)4Br2]Cl2
13. (i) This is due to d-d transition. When visible (white) light falls on a compound, it absorbs certain
radiations of white light and transmit the remaining ones. The transmitted light has the
complementary colour to that of the absorbed light.
(ii) Because the atoms or simple ions of zinc never have partially filled d orbitals.
18. (i) Nucleoside: A nucleoside is the condensation product of purine or pyrimidine base with
pentose sugar.
(ii) Nucleotides: The monomeric unit of nucleic acid is called nucleotide. When a nucleoside is
linked to phosphoric acid at 5’ position of sugar moiety, we get nucleotide.
O
5¢ 5¢
HO—H2C Base O—P—O—H2C Base
4¢H H1¢ O– 4¢H H1¢
3¢ 2¢
H H H 3¢ 2¢
H
OH OH OH OH
19. Given, Radius (r) = 127.8 pm

For fcc a = 2 2 r
\ a 3 = ( 2 2r ) 3 = 4.723 ´ 10 -23 cm 3
Atomic mass of Cu = 63.54 g mol -1
NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol -1
Density = 8.95 g cm -3
Z´M
d=
NA ´ a3
Z ´ 63.54
Þ 8.95 =
6.023 ´ 10 23 ´ 4.723 ´ 10 -23
8.95 ´ 6.022 ´ 4.723
\ Z= Þ Z = 4.00
63.54
Thus copper has fcc structure.
20.
Aerosol Emulsion Hydrosol
1. Sols in which the 1. A colloidal system in which 1. Sols in which the dispersed
dispersion medium is gas dispersion medium and phase is solid and
and dispersed phase is solid dispersed phase both are dispersion medium is
or liquid. liquids. For example: water.
For example: Smoke, dust Milk, cod liver oil. For example: gum sol.
26. Differences between thermosetting and thermoplastic polymers.
(i) These polymer are linear or slightly (i) These polymers are cross linked or heavily
branched chain molecules branched molecules
(ii) Soften on heating and harden on cooling (ii) On heating undergo extensive cross linking
and can be remoulded. in moulds and become infusible.
27. (i) Cationic detergents: Cationic detergents are mostly acetate or chlorides of quaternary amines.
For example: Cetyltrimethyl-ammonium chlorides.
(ii) Enzymes: Enzymes are the essential biological catalysts which catalyse specific biological
reactions at a very high rate under mild conditions of temperature and pH. For example,
invertase, zymase, pepsin, trypsin, etc.
(iii) Antifertility drugs: The drugs which are used to control the birth rate are known as
antifertility drugs. For example, norethindrone, novestrol, etc.
ALL INDIA–2010

1. What type of interactions hold the molecules together in a polar molecular solid?
2. What is meant by ‘limiting molar conductivity’?
3. Fluorine does not exhibit any positive oxidation state. Why?
4. Give the IUPAC name of the following compound:
H3C CH3
H
H
CH3 Br
5. Write the structure of the molecule of a compound whose IUPAC name is
1-phenylpropan-2-ol
6. What is Tollen’s reagent? Write one usefulness of this reagent.
7. What is meant by ‘reducing sugars’?
8. What does the designation ‘6, 6’ mean in the name nylon-6, 6?
9. Define the terms, ‘osmosis’ and ‘osmotic pressure’. What is the advantage of using osmotic pressure
as compared to other colligative properties for the determination of molar masses of solutes in solutions.
10. Express the relation among the cell constant, the resistance of the solution in the cell and the
conductivity of the solution. How is the conductivity of a solution related to its molar conductivity?
11. Given that the standard electrode potential (E°) of metals are:
K + K = – 2.93 V, Ag + / Ag = 0.80V, Cu 2+ Cu = 0.34 V, Mg 2+ / Mg = -2.37V, Cr 3 + / Cr = -0.74V,
Fe 2+ / Fe = - 0. 44V.
Arrange these metals in an increasing order of their reducing power.
OR
Two half-reactions of an electrochemical cell are given below:
MnO–4(aq) + 8H+(aq) + 5e– ¾¾® Mn2+(aq) + 4H2O(l), E° = + 1.51 V

Sn2+(aq) ¾¾® Sn4+(aq) + 2e–, E° = + 0.15V
Construct the redox reaction equation from the two half-reactions and calculate the cell potential from
the standard potentials and predict if the reaction is reactant or product favoured.
12. Describe the following:
(i) Tyndal effect (ii) Shape-selective catalysis
13. What is meant by coagulation of a colloidal solution? Name any method by which coagulation of
lyophobic sols can be carried out.
14. Complete the following chemical reaction equations:
(i) I2 + HNO3 ¾¾® (ii) HgCl2 + PH3 ¾¾®
(conc.)
15. Draw the structural formulae of the following compounds:
(i) H4P2O5 (ii) XeF4
16. Give the chemical tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds:
(i) Ethylamine and Aniline
(ii) Aniline and Benzylamine
17. Identify A and B in each of the following processes:
(i) CH3CH2Cl ¾NaCN Reduction
¾¾ ¾® A ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾® B
Ni/H 2
NaNO2 / HCl
6 5 2 C H NH
(ii) C6H5NH2 ¾ ¾¾¾¾® A ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾ ®B
OH –
18. Draw the molecular structures of the monomers of
(i) PVC (ii) Teflon
19. The density of copper metal is 8.95 g cm–3. If the radius of copper atom be 127.8 pm, is the copper unit
cell simple cubic, body-centred cubic or face-centred cubic?
(Given: atomic mass of Cu = 63.54 g mol–1 and NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol–1)
20. What mass of NaCl (molar mass = 58.5 g mol–1) must be dissolved in 65 g of water to lower the
freezing point by 7.5°C? The freezing point depression constant, Kf , for water is 1.86 K kg mol–1.
Assume van’t Hoff factor for NaCl is 1.87.
21. Describe the role of the following:
(i) NaCN in the extraction of silver from a silver ore
(ii) Iodine in the refining of titanium
(ii) Cryolite in the metallurgy of aluminium
OR
Describe the principle involved in each of the following processes of metallurgy:
(i) Froth floatation method
(ii) Electrolytic refining of metals
(ii) Zone refining of metals
22. Explain the following cases giving appropriate reasons:

(i) Nickel does not form low spin octahedral complexes.
(ii) The p-complexes are known for the transition metals only.
(iii) Co2+ is easily oxidised to Co3+ in the presence of a strong ligand.
23. How would you differentiate between SN1 and SN2 mechanisms of substitution reactions? Give one
example of each.
24. How would you convert the following:
(i) Phenol to benzoquinone
(ii) Propanone to 2-methylpropan-2-ol
(iii) Propene to propan-2-ol
25. How would you account for the following:
(i) NCl3 is an endothermic compound while NF3 is an exothermic one.
(ii) XeF2 is a linear molecule without a bend.
(iii) The electron gain enthalpy with negative sign for fluorine is less than that for chlorine, still
fluorine is a stronger oxidising agent than chlorine.
26. Amino acids may be acidic, alkaline or neutral. How does this happen? What are essential and
non-essential amino acids? Name one of each type.
27. Explain the following terms with one example in each case:
(i) Food preservatives
(ii) Enzymes
(iii) Detergents
28. (a) Explain the following terms:
(i) Rate of a reaction
(b) The decomposition of phosphine, PH3, proceeds according to the following equation:
4PH3(g) ¾¾® P4(g) + 6H2(g)
It is found that the reaction follows the following rate equation:
Rate = k[PH3]
The half-life of PH3 is 37.9 s at 120°C.
(i) How much time is required for 3/4th of PH3 to decompose?
(ii) What fraction of the original sample of PH3 remains behind after 1 minute?
OR
(a) Explain the following terms:
(ii) Molecularity of a reaction
(b) The rate of a reaction increases four times when the temperature changes from 300 K to 320 K.
Calculate the energy of activation of reaction, assuming that it does not change with
temperature. (R = 8.314 J K–1 mol–1)
29. (a) Complete the following chemical equations:
(i) Cr2 O72– (aq) + H2S(g) + H+(aq) ¾¾®
(ii) Cu2+(aq) + I–(aq) ¾¾®

(i) The oxidising power of oxoanions are in the order VO+2 < Cr2 O72– < MnO–4 .
(ii) The third ionization enthalpy of manganese (Z = 25) is exceptionally high.
(iii) Cr2+ is a stronger reducing agent than Fe2+.
OR
(a) Complete the following chemical equations:
(i) MnO–4 ( aq) + S 2 O2–
3 ( aq) + H 2 O(l) ¾¾®
(ii) Cr2 O72– ( aq) + Fe 2+ ( aq) + H+ ( aq) ¾¾®

(i) La3+ (Z = 57) and Lu3+ (Z = 71) do not show any colour in solutions.
(ii) Among the divalent cations in the first series of transition elements, manganese exhibits
the maximum paramagnetism.
(iii) Cu+ ion is not known in aqueous solutions.
30. (a) Illustrate the following name reactions giving a chemical equation in each case:
(i) Clemmensen reaction
(ii) Cannizzaro’s reaction
(b) Describe how the following conversions can be brought about:
(i) Cyclohexanol to cyclohexan-1-one
(ii) Ethylbenzene to benzoic acid
(iii) Bromobenzene to benzoic acid
OR
(a) Illustrate the following name reactions:
(i) Hell–Volhard–Zelinsky reaction
(ii) Wolff–Kishner reduction reaction
(b) How are the following conversions carried out:
(i) Ethylcyanide to ethanoic acid
(ii) Butan-1-ol to butanoic acid
(iii) Methylbenzene to benzoic acid
Write chemical equations for the involved reactions.

Questions uncommon to Set–I
1. What type of semiconductor is obtained when silicon is doped with arsenic?
2. Nitrogen is relatively inert as compared to phosphorus. Why?
6. What are monosaccharides?
8. What is meant by ‘copolymerisation’?
13. Define the following:
(i) Peptization
(ii) Reversible sols
(i) NaOH + Cl2 ¾¾®
(cold and dilute)
(ii) XeF6 + H2O ¾¾®

(excess)
17. Give the chemical tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds:
(i) Methylamine and Dimethylamine
(ii) Aniline and N-methylaniline
18. Draw the structures of the monomers of the following polymers:
(i) Bakelite
(ii) Nylon-6
19. Silver crystalises in face-centred cubic unit cells. Each side of the unit cell has a length of 409 pm.
What is the radius of silver atom?
20. What mass of ethylene glycol (molar mass = 62.0 g mol–1) must be added to 5.50 kg of water to lower
the freezing point of water from 0°C to – 10.0°C? (Kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol–1)
27. What are analgesic drugs? How are they classified and when are they usually recommended for use?

Questions uncommon to Set–I and Set–II
1. Write a distinguishing feature of metallic solids?
3. Differentiate between molarity and molality of a solution.
8. What are the products of hydrolysis of sucrose?
17. Silver crystallises in fcc lattice. If the edge length of the unit cell is 4.07 × 10–8 cm and the density of
the crystal is 10.5 g cm–3, calculate the atomic mass of silver. (NA = 6.02 × 1023 atoms mol–1)
20. 15 g of an unknown molecular substance was dissolved in 450 g of water. The resulting solution
freezes at – 0.34°C. What is the molar mass of the substance? (Kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol–1).

(i) The electron gain enthalpy with negative sign is less for oxygen than that for sulphur.
(ii) Phosphorus shows greater tendency for catenation than nitrogen.
(iii) Fluorine never acts as the central atom in polyatomic interhalogen compounds.
25. Write the name, the state of hybridization, the shape and the magnetic behaviour of the following
complexes:
[CoCl4]2–, [Ni(CN)4]2–, [Cr(H2O)2(C2O4)2]–
(Atomic number: Co = 27, Ni = 28, Cr = 24)
26. Differentiate between fibrous proteins and globular proteins. What is meant by the denaturation of a
protein?
27. Explain the following terms with an example for each:
(i) Antibiotics (ii) Antiseptics
(iii) Analgesics
Solutions
1. The interactions hold the molecules together in a polar molecular solid is dipole-dipole attractions.
2. When concentration of an electrolyte approaches zero, the molar conductivity is known as limiting
molar conductivity (Lom ).
3. Fluorine does not exhibit any positive oxidation state because it is the most electronegative element in
the periodic table.
4. 4–Bromo–3–methyl–pent–2–ene
5.
OH
CH2 CH CH3
6. Tollen’s reagent – A solution of AgNO3 dissolved in NH4OH is known as Tollen’s reagent. This is
used to detect the presence of –CHO group in an organic compound. For example:
RCHO + 2Ag (NH3)2 OH ¾¾® RCOONH4 + 2Ag¯ + H2O + 3NH3.
7. Reducing Sugars: The carbohydrates which reduces Fehling’s Reagent and Tollen’s Reagent are
referred to as reducing sugar. For example, all monosaccharide are reducing sugars.
8. Each monomer of nylon 6, 6 consists of six carbon each.
9. Osmosis: The phenomenon in which solvent molecules flow through a semipermeable membrane
from a solution of low concentration to a solution of higher concentration is termed as osmosis.
Osmotic Pressure: The hydrostatic pressure exerted by the column of the solution which is just
sufficient to prevent the osmosis is called osmotic pressure.
Advantage of using osmotic pressure as compared to other collegative properties:
(i) The equilibrium is established very quickly. Hence, results are obtained in a very short time.
(ii) The concentration of the solution does not change during determination of osmotic pressure.
(iii) This is ideal method for proteins to find their molar mass since it happens at room temperature
and no coagulation occurs.
10. Conductivity (K) = 1
× Cell constant
Resistance ( R)
Conductivity ( k) ´ 1000
Molar Conductivity ( L m ) =
Molarity ( M )
OR
K ´1000 L m ´ M
Lm = =
M 1000
138.95 cm 2 mol –1 ´ 1.5 mol L–1
K = = 0.208355 cm–1
3 –1
1000 cm L
11. Increasing order of reducing power:
Ag < Cu < Fe < Cr < Mg < K
OR
(i) MnO-4 + 8H+ + Se ¾¾® Mn2+ + 4H2O, DE° = + 1.51V (Reduction)
(ii) Sn 2 + ¾¾® Sn 4 + +2e, E° = 0.15V

Multiplying equation (i) by 2 and (ii) by 5 we get:
Sn2+ + 2MnO-4 + 16H+ ¾¾® 5 Sn4+ + 8H2O + 2Mn2+
E °cell = E °R - E °L
= 1.51 – 0.15 = 1.36 V
Since E °cell is positive, therefore it will favour product formation.
12. (i) Tyndall effect: Tyndall (1869) observed that when a beam of light is passed through a
colloidal solution whose particle size is comparable to the wave length of light, the path of the
beam is illuminated. This phenomenon is called Tyndall effect.
(ii) Shape Selective Catalyst: The catalysis reaction which depends upon the pore size of the
catalyst and the size of the reactant and product molecules is called shape-selective catalysis.
Zeolites are good shape-selective catalysts because of their honey comb-like structures. ZSM-5
used in petroleum industry to convert alcohols directly into gasoline by dehydrating them to
give a mixture of hydrocarbons.
ZSM -5
x CH3 — OH ¾ ¾¾
¾® (CH2 ) x + xH2 O
Gasoline
13. The colloidal particles bear similar electric charge and that is why they stay away from each other due
to repulsion. If the charge is removed, they come together and are precipitated.
The precipitation and settling down of the discharged particles is called coagulation or flocculation.
The coagulation of a lyophobic sols can be done by mixing of two opposite charged sols or by
addition of electrolyte.
14. (i) I2 + 10HNO3 ¾¾® 2HIO3 + 10NO2 + 4H2O
(ii) 3HgCl2 + 2PH3 ¾¾® Hg3P2 + 6HCl
15. (i) (ii)
O O
|| || F F
P P
H O H Xe
OH OH
H4P2O5 F F
Xe F4 (Square planar)
16. (i) To distinguish Ethylamine and aniline.
Chemical Test C2H5NH2 C6H5NH2
Azo dye Test: No reaction Yellow orange dye is obtained.
+ –
Add NaNO2 + dil. HCl at 273 - 278K NH2 N –– N–Cl
followed by NaOH and b-naphthol | |
NaNO 2/HCl
+ 2H2O
273–278
+ –
N––
– NCl
|
+b–Napthol orange dye
(ii) Aniline and Benzyl amine

Chemical Test Aniline Benzyl amine
Test: Add nitrous acid No evolution N2 gas is evolved
(NaNO2/HCl) to both the samples. of N2 gas CH2NH2 CH2OH
(i) HONO
+ N2 +HCl
(ii) H2O
(i) CH3 CH2 Cl ¾NaCN

17. reduction
¾¾ ¾® CH3 CH2 CN ¾ ¾¾¾® CH3 CH2 CH2 NH2
Ethyl cyanide Ni/H 2 n -Propyl amine
(A) (B)
+ -
(ii) C 6 H5 NH2 ¾NaNO 2 /HCl C6H5 NH 2 NH2
¾¾¾¾ ® C 6 H5 N º N Cl ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾® C 6 H5 N = N
OH –
Benzene
p-Amino-azobenzene
diazonium chloride
(B)
(A)
18. (i) PVC — structure of monomer: CH2 = CH – Cl (vinylchloride)

(ii) Teflon — structure of monomer:
F F
C C
F F
(Tetrafluoroethylene)
19. Given, Radius (r) = 127.8 pm
For fcc a = 2 2 r
\ a 3 = ( 2 2r ) 3 = 4.723 ´ 10 -23 cm 3
Atomic mass of Cu = 63.54 g mol -1
NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol -1
Density = 8.95 g cm -3
Z´M
d=
NA ´ a3
Z ´ 63.54
Þ 8.95 =
6.023 ´ 10 23 ´ 4.723 ´ 10 -23
8.95 ´ 6.022 ´ 4.723
\ Z= Þ Z = 4.00
63.54
Thus copper has fcc structure.
20. Given: MB = 58.5 g mol–1
WA = 65g, WB = ?
DTf = 7.5°C or 7.5 K,
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol–1
i = 1.87
We know that,
WB 1000
DTf = i Kf × ´
M B WA
WB 1000
7.5 = 1.87 × 1.86 × ´
58 . 5 65
7. 5 ´ 58 . 5 ´ 65
\ WB =
1. 87 ´ 1. 86 ´ 1000
28518.75
WB =
3478.2
WB = 8.199 g.
21. (i) NaCN is used in the leaching of argentite (Ag2S). Argentite is leached with dilute aqueous
solution of NaCN in the presence of air
Ag2S + 4NaCN ¾¾® 2 Na [Ag (CN)2] + Na2S.
(ii) Iodine in the refining of titanium.
The crude metal is heated with iodine in an evacuated vessel to form volatile compound.
Ti (impure) + 2I2 ¾¾® TiI4
Metal iodide decomposes on heating at 1800°C on a tungston filament. The pure metal deposit
on the filament.
1800 °C
TiI 4 ¾ ¾¾
¾® Ti(pure) + 2I 2
(iii) Cryolite in the metallurgy of aluminium: In the metallurgy of Al, purified Al2O3 is mixed
with cryolite (Na3AlF6) which lowers the melting point of the mixture and increase the
conductivity.
OR
(i) Froth floatation method: This method is used to remove gangue from sulphide ores. In this
process a suspension of the powdered ore is made with water, some pine oil (collector) and
stablisers are added. A rotating paddle agitates the mixture and draws air in it. The froth is light
and it skimmed off.
(ii) Electro refining of metals: In this method, the impure metal is made to act as anode. A strip of
the same metal in pure form is used a cathode. They are put in a suitable electrolyte containing
soluble salt of the same metal.
Anode: M ¾¾® M n + + ne –
Cathode: M n + + ne – ¾¾® M (pure metal)

Sb, Ag, Au, Pt, Cu, Zn may be refined by this process.
(iii) Zone refining: This method is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in
the melt than in the solid state of the metal. A circular mobile heater is fixed at one end of a
rod of the impure metal. The molten zone moves along with the heater. The pure metal
crystallises out of the melt and impurities pass on into the adjacent molten zone.
22. (i) Nickel does not form low spin octahedral complexes because ‘Ni’ has electronic configuration
3d8 4s2, in which two inner d-orbitals are not available which are required to form d2sp3
hybridization.
(ii) The p-complexes are known for the transition metals only because they have ‘sandwich’
structure in which the metal ion lies between two planar C5H5 rings. The bonding involves
overlap of p-electrons of the C5H5 rings with unfilled d-orbital of the metal. So that all M–C
bonds are identical for their stability.
(iii) Co2+ is easily oxidised to Co3+ in the presence of a strong ligand because in presence of strong
ligand, the 3d electrons pair up leaving two orbitals empty to be involved in d2sp3
hybridisation.
23. SN1 Reactions: They are substitution nucleophilic unimolecular reactions in which the rate of
the reaction depends on the concentration of only one reactant. Product formation takes place
by the formation of carbo cation as reaction intermediate. For example:
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
–
Slow step OH
CH 3 C Br C+ CH 3 C OH
Fast
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
SN2 reactions they are substitution nucleophilic bimolecular reactions in which rate of the
reaction depends on the concentration of two reactants. For example:
OH -
R — Cl ¾ ¾¾® R — OH + Cl -
Rate µ [R – Cl][OH– ]
The product formation takes place by formation of transition state.
24. (i)
OH O
K2Cr2O7/H2SO4
O
Phenol p-Benzoquinone
(ii)
OMgCl OH
O
CH 3MgCl +
H 2O/H C CH 3
CH 3 C CH 3 CH 3 C CH 3 CH 3
Propanone
CH 3 CH 3
2-Methyl propan-2-ol
OH
dil H2SO 4
(iii) CH3— CH CH2 CH 3—CH—CH 3
Propene Propan-2-ol
25. (i) This is because of (a) bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 is lower than Cl2 and (b) fluorine forms
stronger bond with nitrogen due to comparable size.
(ii) As xenon is sp3 hybridised with three lone pair of electrons.
(iii) This is due to (a) low bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 and (b) high hydration enthalpy of F - .
26. This is due to presence of carboxylic acid as well as amino groups.
O
l Amino acids which contain two —C—O—H group and one —NH2 group are called acidic amino
acid, e.g., aspartic acid.
O
l Amino acids which contain two —NH2 group and one —C—O—H group are called basic amino
acids, e.g., lysine.
O
l Amino acids which contain one —C—O—H and one —NH2 group are called neutral amino
acids, e.g., glycine.
l Amino acids that cannot be synthesized by the body and must be supplied in the diet are called
essential amino acids, e.g., lysine, valine, leucine, etc.
l The amino acids which are synthesized by our body are called non-essential amino acids, e.g.,
alanine, glycine, etc.
27. (i) Food preservatives: Chemical substance which are used to prevent food spoilage due to
microbial growth are called preservative. For example, sodium benzoate, potassium sorbate,
etc.
(ii) Enzymes: Enzymes are the essential biological catalysts which catalyse specific biological
reactions at a very high rate under mild conditions of temperature and pH. For example,
invertase, zymase etc.
(iii) Detergents: They are very similar to the salts of fatty acids found in soap but they are
manufactured from materials other than animal fats. For example: Sodium alkylbenzene
sulphonates are common ingredients of synthetic detergents.
28. (a) (i) Rate of Reaction: It is defined as the decrease in the concentration of reactants per unit time
or increase in the concentration of products per unit time.
For a hypothetical reaction R ® P
– D[R] +D [P]
Rate = Rate =
Dt Dt
(ii) Activation energy: The amount of energy which the reactants must absorb to pass over the
energy barrier between reactants and products is known as the activation energy.
2.303 [A ]o
(b) (i) We know that k = log
t [A ]t
0.693
t1/2 =
k
0.693
\ k=
t1/ 2
0.693
\ k=
37.9
\ k = 0.0183 s–1
2.303 [A] o
k= log
t [A]
2 . 303 1
\ t= log
0 . 0183 14
2.303 2 ´ 2.303
= log 2 2 = log 2
0.0183 0 . 0183
2 ´ 2.303
t= × 0.3010
0.0183
t = 75.8 s.
(ii) 1 minute = 60 second
2.303 [A] o
t= log
k [A]
2.303 [A] o
60 = ´ log
0.0183 [A]
60 ´ 0 . 0183 [A] o
= log
2 . 303 [A]
Taking antilog,
[A] o
0.4767 = log
[A]
[A] o
Antilog (0.4767) =
[A]
[A] o
2.997 =
[A]
[A] 1
= = 0.333 = 0.333%
[A] o 2 . 997
Hence, amount left out = 33.3%
OR
(a) (i) The order of a reaction can be defined as the sum of the powers of the concentration
terms as expressed in rate law.
(ii) Molecularity: It may be defined as the number of reacting species (molecules, atoms or
ions) taking part in an elementary reaction, which must collide simultaneously in order to
bring about a chemical reaction.
(b) (i) Given T1 = 300 K
T2 = 320 K
R = 8.134 JK–1 mol–1
Ea = ?
é TT ù k
We know that, Ea = 2.303 R ê 1 2 ú log 2
ë T2 - T1 û k1
é300 ´ 320 ù
Ea = 2.303 × 8.314 ê ú log 4
ë 20 û
Ea = 19.15 [4800] × 0.602
= 55.32 kJ mol–1.
29. (a) (i) Cr2O72– + 3H2S + 8H+ ¾¾® 2Cr3+ + 3S + 7H2O
(ii) 2Cu2+ + 4I –
¾¾® Cu2I2 + I2
(b) (i) The oxidising power of oxonions are in the order VO2+ < Cr2 O72– < MnO4–, this is due
to increase in the oxidation state of the metal ion.
(ii) The third ionisation enthalpy of manganese (Z = 25) is exceptionally high because Mn2+
ion has 3d5 configuration which is highly stable since it is half-filled.
(iii) Cr2+ stronger reducing agent than Fe2+ as its configuration changes from d4 to d3, a more
stable half filled t2g configuration.
OR
(a) (i) 8Mn O-4 (aq) + 3S 2 O23 - (aq) + H2 O ¾¾® 8MnO2 + 6SO24 - + 2OH-
(ii) Cr2 O7 (aq) + 6Fe 2 + (aq) + 14H+ ¾¾® 2Cr 3 + + 6Fe 3 + + 7H2 O.
(b) (i) La3+ and Lu3+ ions do not show any colour in solution because they do not contain any
unpaired electrons.
(ii) Among the divalent cations in the first series of transition elements, manganese exhibits
the maximum paramagnetism because manganese (Mn2+) ion has maximum number of 5
unpaired electrons.
(iii) Cu+ ion is not known in aqueous solutions because Cu2+ ions are more stable due to more
negative DHhyd of Cu2+ than Cu+, which compensates for the second ionisation enthalpy
of Cu.
30. (a) (i) Clemmensen reaction
O
CH 3—C—CH 3 Zn–Hg/HCl (conc.) CH 3—CH 2—CH 3
Acetone Propane
(ii) Cannizzaro's reaction:

2HCHO + NaOH ¾¾® HCOONa + CH3OH
Formaldehyde (conc.) Sodium formate Methanol
OH O
||
CrO3
(b) (i) or PCC
Cyclohexanol Cyclohexanone
C 2H 5 COOH
–
KMnO4/OH
(ii)
Ethyl benzene Benzoic acid
Br CN COOH
CuCN H2O/H +
(iii) Py,473K
Bromobenzene Benzoic acid

OR
(a) (i) Hell-Volhard-Zelinsky reaction
(i) X 2 /red P
R—CH2—COOH ¾ ¾¾¾¾ ® R—CH—COOH ( X == Cl, Br)
(ii) H 2 O |
X
Carboxylic acid a -Halocarboxylic acid
(ii) Wolf-Kishner reduction
2 2 (i) NH - NH
CH3 COCH 3 ¾ ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾® CH3 CH2 CH3
(ii) KOH, Ethylene glycol, D Propane
Propanone
H+ 2 NaOH /CaO Cl /hv

(b) (i) C 2 H5 CN ¾ ¾
¾® C 2 H5 COOH ¾ ¾¾¾¾® C 2 H6 ¾ ¾¾ ¾® C 2 H5 Cl
Ethyl cyanide D
2 H O/H + alc. KCN

CH3 COOH ¬¾¾¾ ¾ CH3 CN ¬¾¾¾¾
Ethanoic acid
(ii) CH3—CH2—CH2—CH2—OH ¾KMnO

¾¾¾ 4
® CH3CH2CH2COOH
[O]
Butan-l-ol Butanoic acid
CH 3 COOH
–
(i) KMnO4/OH
(iii)
(ii) H +
Methyl benzene Benzoic acid

1. n-type semiconductor.
2. Due to presence of triple bond whose dissociation energy is very high.
6. They are the simplest carbohydrates which do not undergo further hydrolysis, for example: glucose.
13. (i) Peptization: The process of converting a precipitate into colloidal sol by shaking it with
dispersion medium in the presence of a suitable electrolyte.
(ii) Reversible sols: These are the sols in which dispersion medium can be separated from
dispersed phase and reconstituted easily.
15. (i) 2NaOH + Cl 2 ¾¾® NaCl + NaOCl + H2 O
(ii) XeF6 + 3H2 O ¾¾® XeO3 + 6HF

17. (i) To distinguish CH3 NH2 and CH3– NH – CH3
Reaction with HONO
CH3 NH2 gives methyl alcohol and N2 gas.
4 °C
CH3 NH2 + HONO ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 OH + N2 + H2 O
Dimethyl amine forms nitroso amine which is water insoluble yellow oil.
(CH3 ) 2 NH + HONO ¾¾® (CH3 ) 2 N – N = O + H2 O
N-Nitroso
dimethyl amine
(yellow oil)
(iii) Aniline and N-methyl aniline
Test: Carbyl amine test:
Aniline on warming with chloroform and KOH gives offensive smell of carbylamine while
N-methyl aniline does not.
C 6 H5 NH2 + CHCl 3 + 3KOH ¾¾® C 6 H5 NC + 3KCl + 3H2 O
Aniline Phenyl
carbylamine
18. (i) Bakelite
Monomers: Phenol and formaldehyde
Structure:
OH
O
and H—C—H
Phenol Formaldehyde
(ii) Nylon–6
Monomers: Caprolactum
H
½
N
H2 C C=O
½ ½
H2 C CH2
H2 C ¾ CH2
Caprolactum
19. Atomic mass (M) = 108 g mol–1, a = 409 pm
We know that for fcc lattice:
a
r=
2 2
409 409
\ r= =
2 ´ 1.414 2.828
r = 144.62 pm
–1
20. MB = 62.0 g mol , WA = 5.50 kg or 5500 g
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol–1, D Tf = 10 K
We know that,
WB 1000
D Tf = Kf × ´
M B WA
WB 1000
10 = 1.86 × ´
62 5500
62 ´ 5500 ´ 10
WB =
1000 ´ 186
.
3410000
\ WB = = 1833.3 g
1860
27. Analgesics: They are the drugs used for relieving pain. Analgesics are classified into two categories:
(a) Narcotics (addictive) drugs (b) Non-narcotics (non-addictive) drugs
(a) Narcotics: Narcotic drugs are recommended for cardiac pain, post operative pains, terminal
cancer and in child birth.
(b) Non-narcotics: Non-narcotic drugs are effective in relieving skeletal pain, reducing fever,
preventing heart attack.

1. Metallic solids have high melting and boiling points.
3. Molality of a solution does not change on changing the temperature of the solution while molarity
does change.
+
8. C12 H22 O11 + H2 O ¾H¾
¾® C 6 H12 O6 + C 6 H12 O6
(Glucose) (Fructose)
19. For fcc, Z = 4

a = 4.07 × 10–8 cm, d = 10.5 g cm–3, M = atomic mass = ?, NA = 6.02 × 1023
We know that,
Z´ M d ´ NA ´ a 3
d= Þ M=
NA ´ a 3 Z
10 . 5 ´ 6 . 022 ´ 10 23 ´ ( 4 . 07 ´ 10 -8 ) 3
\ M=
4
M = 106.5 g mol–1
20. Given: WB = 15 g, WA = 450 g
D Tf = [273 – (273 – 0.34)]K = 0.34 K
MB = ?, Kf = 1.86 K kg mol–1
W ´ 1000
Þ MB = Kf × B
DTf ´ WA
15 g ´ 1000
= 1.86 K kg mol–1 × = 182.3 g mol–1
0.34 K ´ 450 kg
22. (i) This is due to smaller size of oxygen the electron cloud is distributed over a small region of
space, making electron density high which repels the incoming electrons.
(ii) Because P—P bond is stronger than N—N bond.
(iii) Fluorine never acts as the central atom in polyatomic inter-halogen compounds since it is the
most electronegative element of the group.
25. (i) Tetrachloridocobaltate (II) ion
sp3 hybridisation
Tetrahedral
Paramagnetic
(ii) Tetracyanonickelate (II) ion
dsp2 hybridisation
Square plannar
Diamagnetic.
(iii) Diaquadioxalatochromate (III) ion
d2sp3 hybridisation
Octahedral
Paramagnetic.
26.
Fibrous Proteins Globular Proteins
1. Consist of linear thread-like molecules 1. Polypeptide chain is folded, around itself
which tend to lie side by side to form fibre forming almost spheroidal shape.
like structure.
2. Insoluble in water. 2. Soluble in water.
3. Keratin in hair, fibroin in silk, etc. 3. Albumin in eggs, insulin, etc.
Denaturation of Proteins
When a protein in its native form, is subjected to a change in temperature or change in pH, the hydrogen
bond are disturbed. Due to this, globules unfold and helix get uncoiled and protein loses its biological
activity. This is called denaturation of protein. During denaturation 2° and 3° structures are destroyed but
1° structures remain intact, e.g., coagulation of egg white on boiling, curdling of milk, etc.
27. (i) Antibiotics
The chemical substances produced from some micro-organism and are used to inhibit the
growth of other microorganism or even kill them are called antibiotics. For example, penicillin,
chloramphenicol.
(ii) Antiseptics
Antiseptics are the chemicals which prevent or destroy the growth of the harmful microorganism.
For example: Savlon, dettol.
(iii) Analgesics
These are the substances which are used to get relief from pain. For example: Aspirin.
FOREIGN–2010

1. What is the number of atoms in a unit cell of a simple cubic crystal?
2. Identify the order of reaction from the following unit for its rate constant:
L mol–1s–1
3. Give an example of shape-selective catalyst.
4. Which is a stronger acid in aqueous solution—HCl or HI, and why?
5. What is an ambidentate ligand? Give an example.
6. Draw the structure of the following compound:
4-Bromo-3-methylpent-2-ene
7. Give IUPAC name of the following compound:
(CH3)2C=CHCOCH3
8. What happens when glucose is treated with bromine water?
9. Write the anode and cathode reactions occurring in a commonly used mercury cell. How is the overall
reaction represented?
10. Define:
(i) Elementary reaction in a process
(ii) Rate of a reaction.
11. The rate constant for a zero order reaction is 0.0030 mol L–1 s–1. How long will it take for the initial
concentration of the reactant to fall from 0.10 M to 0.075 M?
(i) BrF3 (ii) XeOF4
13. Describe the preparation of
(i) Potassium dichromate from sodium chromate, and
(ii) KMnO4 from K2MnO4
14. Describe the state of hybridization, the shape and the magnetic behaviour of the following complexes:
(i) [Cr(H2O)2(C2O4)2]–
(ii) [Co(NH3)2(en)2]3+, (en = ethane-1,2-diamine)
(At. Nos : Cr = 24, Co = 27)
OR
Explain the following terms:
(i) Crystal field splitting in an octahedral field
(ii) Spectrochemical series.
15. Write the mechanisms of the following reactions:
(i) Hydration of ethene to ethanol
(ii) Dehydration of ethanol, giving ethene.
16. Illustrate the following name reactions giving chemical equations:
(ii) Williamson synthesis.
17. Explain the following giving a reason in each case:
(i) Why is an alkylamine more basic than ammonia?
(ii) Why do primary amines have higher boiling points than the tertiary amines?
(i) C6H5NH2 + CHCl 3 + KOH (alc) ¾
¾®
(ii) C6H5N2 Cl + H3PO2 + H2O ¾

¾®
19. Iron has a body-centred cubic unit cell with a cell edge of 286.65 pm. The density of iron is
7.874 g cm–3. Use this information to calculate Avogadro’s number. (At. mass of iron = 56 g mol–1)
20. One half-cell in a voltaic cell is constructed from a silver wire dipped in silver nitrate solution
of unknown concentration. The other half-cell consists of a zinc electrode in a 0.10 M solution
of Zn (NO3) 2. A voltage of 1.48 V is measured for this cell. Use this information to calculate the
concentration of silver nitrate solution.
(Given E °Zn 2 + /Zn = – 0.763 V, EA
°
g 2 + /Ag
= + 0.80 V)
each type. How are associated colloids different from the above two types of colloids?
(i) The enthalpies of atomisation of transition metals are quite high.
(ii) There is a close similarity in physical and chemical properties of the 4 d and 5 d series of the
transition elements, much more than expected on the basis of usual family relationship.
(iii) The members in the actinoid series exhibit larger number of oxidation states than the
corresponding members in the lanthanoid series.
23. Answer the following:
(i) Identify chiral in CH3CHOHCH2CH3 and CH3CHOHCH3.
(ii) Among the following compounds, which one is more easily hydrolysed and why?
CH3CHCICH2CH3 or CH3CH2CH2CH2Cl
2
(iii) Which of these will react faster in SN displacement and why?
1-bromopentane or 2-bromopentane
24. Describe how the following changes are brought about:
(i) Pig iron into steel (ii) Bauxite into pure alumina
(iii) Impure copper into pure copper.
25. Explain the meanings of the following terms:
(i) Invert sugar (ii) Peptide linkage
(iii) Denaturation of proteins.
OR
Mention three such facts/reactions about glucose which cannot be explained by its open end structure.
What is meant by pyranose structure of glucose?
26. Identify the four groups into which the polymers are classified on the basis of the magnitude of
intermolecular forces present in them. To which group or groups do polythene and bakelite belong?
27. How do antiseptics differ from disinfectants? Name a substance that can be used as an antiseptic as
well as a disinfectant.
28. (a) Non-ideal solutions exhibit either positive or negative deviations from Raoult's law. What are
these deviations and how are they caused?
(b) What mass of NaCl (molar mass = 58.5 g mol–1) must be dissolved in 65g of water to lower
the freezing point by 7.50°C? The freezing point depression constant, Kf for water is 1.86 K kg
mol–1. Assume van't Hoff factor for NaCl is 1.87.
OR
(a) Define the terms osmosis and osmotic pressure. What is the advantage of using osmotic
pressure as compared to other colligative properties for the determination of molar masses of
solutes in solution?
(b) A solution prepared from 1.25 g of oil of wintergreen (methyl salicylate) in 99.0 g of benzene
has a boiling point of 80.31°C. Determine the molar mass of this compound. (Boiling point of
pure benzene = 80.10°C and Kb for benzene = 2.53°C kg mol–1).
(i) HgCl2(aq) + PH3(g) ¾
¾®
(ii) SiO2(s) + HF(g) ¾
¾®
(i) Sulphur in vapour state exhibits paramagnetic behaviour.
(ii) The stability of +3 state increases down the group in group 15 of the periodic table.
(iii) XeF2 has a linear shape and not a bent structure.
OR
(i) AgCl(s) + NH3(aq) ¾
¾®
(ii) P4(s) + NaOH(aq) + H2O(l) ¾
¾®
(i) H2S is less acidic than H2Te
(ii) Fluorine is a stronger oxidising agent than chlorine
(iii) Noble gases are the least reactive elements.
30. (a) How will you prepare the following compounds starting with benzene?
(i) Benzaldehyde
(ii) Acetophenone.
(b) Give chemical tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds:
(ii) Benzaldehyde and Acetophenone
(iii) Phenol and Benzoic acid.
OR
(a) Explain the mechanism of nucleophilic attack on a carbonyl group of an aldehyde or a ketone.
(b) How would you bring about the following conversions?
(i) Propanone to Propene
(ii) Ethanol to 3-hydroxybutanal
(iii) Benzaldehyde to Benzophenone.

Questions uncommon to Set I
1. State a feature to distinguish a metallic solid from an ionic solid.
2. Which one of these compounds is more easily hydrolysed by KOH solution and why?
CH3 CHCICH2CH3 Or CH3CH2CH2CH2Cl
9. Draw the structures of O3 and S8 molecules.
(i) Propene to Propan-2-ol
(ii) Ethyl magnesium chloride to Propan-1-ol
19. Silver crystallises in a fcc lattice. If the edge length of the unit cell is 4.07 × 10–8 cm and density of
silver is 10.5g cm–3, calculate the atomic mass of silver. (NA = 6.02 × 1023 atoms mol–1)
20. A copper-silver cell is set up. The copper ion concentration is 0.10 M. The concentration of silver
ions is not known. The cell potential was found to be 0.422 V. Determine the concentration of silver
ions in the cell.
(Given E ° Ag + / Ag = + 0.80 V , E °Cu 2 + /Cu = + 0.34 V )
21. State what is observed when

(i) an electrolyte NaCl, is added to hydrated ferric oxide sol.
(ii) an electric current is passed through a colloidal solution.
(iii) a beam of light is passed through a colloidal solution.
26. What are biodegradable and non-biodegradable detergents? Give one example of each. Is there any
structural difference between the two?
27. Write the structure of the monomer of each of the following polymers:
(i) Polyvinyl chloride
(ii) Teflon
(iii) Bakelite.

Questions uncommon to Set I and Set II
2. Identify the order of reaction for which the rate constant is expressed in units of L–1 mol s–1.
3. What is meant by 'reversible sols'?
4. Give an example of coordination isomerism.
8. What happens when glucose reacts with nitric acid?
12. Draw the structure of the following molecules:
(i) XeF2
(ii) HClO4
16. Illustrate the following name reactions giving a chemical reaction equation for each:
(i) Kolbe’s reaction of phenol
(ii) Friedel-Crafts’ acetylation of anisole.
19. The well-known mineral fluorite is calcium fluoride. It is known that in the unit cell of this
mineral there are 4 Ca2+ ions and 8F– ions and the Ca2+ ions are arranged in a face-centred cubic
lattice. The F– ions fill all the tetrahedral holes in the fcc lattice of Ca2+ ions. The edge of the unit cell
is 5.46 × 10–8 cm in length. The density of the mineral is 3.18g cm–3. Use this information to calculate
Avogadro's number. (Molar mass of CaF2 = 78.08 g mol–1)
20. A voltaic cell is set up at 25°C with the following half-cells, Al3+ (0.0010 M) and Ni2+ (0.50 M).
Write an equation for the reaction that occurs in the cell when the cell generates an electric current
and determine the cell potential.
(Given E° Ni 2 + / Ni = -0.25V, E°Al 3+ /Al = -1.66V)
21. Write three features of chemisorption which are not found in physisorptions. Illustrate your answer
with suitable examples.
22. Explain the following:
(i) The transition elements have great tendency for complex formation.
(ii) There is a gradual decrease in the atomic sizes of transition elements in a series with increasing
atomic numbers.
(iii) Lanthanum and Lutetium do not show colouration in solutions. (At. No.: La = 57, Lu = 71)
Solutions
1. One atom.
2. Second order
3. ZSM–5
4. HI is stronger acid then HCl because dissociation energy of H–I bond is less than that of H–Cl.
5. An ambidentate ligand is one which can link through either of the two donor atoms to the central
metal ion. For example: NO–2 and O NO, CN and NC.
Br
|
6. CH3 — CH— CH — CH — CH3
5 4 |3 2 1
CH3
7. 4-Methyl-pent-3-en-2-one
8. When glucose is treated with bromine water it forms gluconic acid.
Br /H O
HOCH2 — (CHOH) 4 — CHO ¾ ¾2 ¾¾
2
® HOCH2 — (CHOH) 4 — COOH
Gluconic acid
9. Chemical reactions of mercury cell

Anode: Zn( s) + 2OH– ¾ ¾® ZnO( s) + H2 O + 2e –
Cathode: HgO + H2 O + 2e – ¾
¾® Hg(l) + 2OH–
The overall reaction is represented by
Zn( s) + HgO( s) ¾
¾® ZnO( s) + Hg(l)
10. (i) Some reactions occur by a series of elementary steps and such simple steps are known as
elementary reactions in a process.
(ii) Rate of a reaction: The change in the concentration of reactants products of or per unit time is
called rate of the reaction.
-D[R ] D[P ]
Rate = or +
Dt Dt
11. Given: [Ro] = 0.10 M [R] = 0.075 M
k = 0.0030 mol L–1 s–1, t = ?
[R ] – [R]
We know that k= o
t
[R o ] - [R] 010
. - 0.075
or t = = = 8.33 s.
k 0.0030
12. (i) Structure of BrF3 molecule

F
Br F
F
Bent T–shaped
(ii) Structure of XeOF4 molecule.

F F
Xe
F F
O
Square pyramidal
13. (i) Preparation of potassium dichromate from sodium chromate
(a) 2Na 2 CrO4 + H2 SO4 ¾
¾® Na 2 Cr2 O7 + Na 2 SO4 + H2 O
(b) Na 2 CrO7 + 2KCl ¾
¾® K 2 Cr2 O7 + 2NaCl
(ii) Preparation of KMnO4 from K2MnO4
2K2MnO4 + Cl2 ¾
¾® 2KMnO4 + 2KCl
OR
2K2MnO4 + H2O + O3 ¾¾® 2KMnO4 + 2KOH + O2
14. (i) [Cr (H2O)2 (C2O4)2]–
(a) Hybridization — d 2 sp 3
(b) Shape — octahedral
(c) Magnetic behaviour — Paramagnetic
(ii) [Co (NH3)2 (en)2]3+
(a) Hybridisation — d 2 sp 3
(b) Shape — Octahedral
(c) Magnetic behaviour — diamagnetic
OR
(i) Crystal field splitting in an octahedral field.
According to C.F.T at first there is an increase in the energy of d-orbitals relative to that of the
free ion just as would be the case in spherical field. The two orbitals lying along the axis get
repelled more strongly than other three (dxy, dyz, dxz). The degenerate set of d-orbitals get split
into two sets: the lower energy t2g set and eg set. The energy separation is denoted by D o . The
actual configuration adopted is decided by the relative values of D o and P. P-represents the
energy required for electron pairing in a single orbital.
(a) If D o < P then fourth electron goes to e g
(b) When D o > P, then fourth electron pairs the t2g orbital.
dx2 – y2, dz2

eg
Energy
Barycentre
DO
Metal
d-orbitals Average energy
of d- orbitals in a t2g
spherical crystal dxy, dyz, dxz
field
dx2 – y2, dz2 dxy, dyz, dxz Splitting of orbitals
in an octahedral
Five degenerate
crystal field.
d-orbitals in free
metal ion
(ii) Spectrochemical Series: It is a series in which ligands can be arranged in the order of
increasing field strength or in order of increasing magnitude of splitting they produce.
The order is
I - < Br - < SCN- < Cl - < S 2 - < F - < OH- < C 2 O24 - < H2 O < NCS < edta 4- < NH3
< en < CN- < CO
15. (i) Mechanism of hydration of ethene to ethanol
Step-I: Protonation of alkene
H H
H H +
+
C C + H O H H C C H + H 2O
H H
H H
Step-II: Nucleophilic attack of water as carbocation
H H H H
+ +
H C C H + HO
2 H C C O H
H H H H
Step-III: Deprotonation of alcohol
H H H H OH
+
+
H C C O H + HO
2 H C C H + H3 O
H H H H
(ii) Mechanism of dehydration of ethanol to ethene.
Step-I: Formation of protonated alcohol
H H H H H
Fast +
H C C O H + H+ H C C O H
H H H H
Ethyloxonium ion
Step–II: Formation of carbocation

H H H H H
| | | Slow | |
H — C— C Å — O Å — H ¾ ¾¾
¬¾ ¾
®
¾ ¾ H — C— C
Å
+ H2 O
| | ·· | |
H H H H
Setp-III. Formation of ethene
H H H H
| | | |
H — C— C Å ¬ ¾¾
¾¾® C —
— C + H+
| | | |
H H H H
ethene
16. (i) Reimer-Tiemann reaction

OH é ONa ù ONa OH
½ ê ½ ú ½ ½
ê CHCl 2ú CHO
CHCl 3 (aq.) NaOH ê H 3O +
CHO
ú NaOH
¾¾¾¾¾® ê ú ¾¾® ¾®
340 K ê ú
ê ú Salicylaldehyde
ê ú (2-Hydroxy benzaldehyde)
êë úû
C2H5ONa + ICH3 ¾ ¾® C2H5OCH3 + NaI
Sodium ethoxide Methyl-ethyl ether
17. (i) Alkylamine is more basic than ammonia because in aliphatic amines, the electron releasing
alkyl group stabilize their ammonium cations by dispersing the positive charge and in parent
amine make the nitrogen unshared electrons more available for sharing with a proton.
H H
+I +
+
R N + H R N H
H H
H H
+ +
H N + H H N H
H H
(ii) The boiling points of primary amine are higher than the tertiary amines because strong
intermolecular hydrogen bonding takes place between the molecules of primary amine.
CH3
H 3C N d– H d+ N d– H d+
H d+ H d+
18. (i) C 6 H5 NH2 + CHCl 3 + 3KOH(alco) ¾

¾® C 6 H5 NC + 3KCl + 3H2 O
Aniline Phenyl isocyanide
(ii) C 6 H5 N2 Cl + H3 PO2 + H2 O ¾
¾® C 6 H6 + N2 + HCl + H3 PO3
Benzene diazonium Benzene
chloride
19. Given: Z = 2
a = 286.65 pm d = 7.874 g cm–3
M = 56 g mol–1 NA = ?
ZM
d=
(a 3 ) ´ N A
2 ´ 56
7.874 =
(286.65) ´ 10 -30 ´ N A
3
2 ´ 56 112 112 ´ 10 23
\ NA = = =
7.874 ´ ( 286.65) 3 ´ 10 -30 18.5 ´ 10 -23 18.5
NA = 6.054 × 1023
20. Electrochemical cell
Zn(s)| Zn2+ (.10 M) | | Ag+ (conc.) | Ag (s)
E ocell = E oR - E oL
= 0.80 (– 0.763)V = 1.563 V
We know that
0.0591 [Zn 2 + ]
E ocell = (E oR - E oL ) - log
n [Ag + ] 2
0.0591 [0.10]
1.48 = 1.563 – log
2 [Ag + ] 2
0.10 0.083
log = = 2.8087
+ 2 0.02955
[Ag ]
0.10
Or = antilog of 2.8087 = 643.7
[Ag + ] 2
010
.
[Ag+]2 = = 1.553 × 10 -4
643.7
\ [Ag+] = 1.247 × 10–2 M
21. (i) Macro molecular colloids: Macromolecules in suitable solvents form solution. Where in size
of the macromolecules may fall within the colloidal range. The system showing such
characteristics are called macromolecular colloids. The colloids are quite stable and in many
respect they resemble true solutions. Examples of naturally occurring macro molecules are
starch, cellulose, proteins and those of manmade macromolecules are nylon, polythene,
polystyrene, synthetic rubber etc.
(ii) Multimolecular colloids: A large number of atoms or smaller molecules (diameter < 1 nm) of
a substance on dissolution aggregate together to form species having size in the colloidal
range. Such species are called multimolecular colloids. Example: A sulphur sol contains
thousands of S8 sulphur molecules, a platinum or gold sol may have particles of various sizes
having many atoms.
(iii) Associated colloides (Micelles): There are certain substances which at low concentrations
behave like normal strong electrolytes but at higher concentration behave as colloidal solutions
due to the formation of aggregated particles. Such colloids are associated colloids and
aggregated particles as micelles. Examples: soaps and detergents.
22. (i) This is because transition metals have strong metallic bonds as they have large number of
unpaired electrons.
(ii) There is a close similarity in physical and chemical properties of the 4d and 5d series of the
transition elements much more than expected on the basis of usual family relationship. This is
because 5d and 4d series elements have virtually the same atomic and ionic radii due to
lanthanide contraction. Due to equality in size of Zr and Hf, Nb and Ta, Mo and W, etc., the
two elements of pair have the same properties.
(iii) The members in the actinoid series exhibit larger number of oxidation states than the
corresponding members in the lanthanide series due to the fact that the 5f, 6d and 7s levels are
of comparable energies.
H H
|
|
23. (i) CH3 —C*— CH2 CH3 CH3 — C — CH3
| |
OH OH
(Chiral) (Non -chiral)
(ii) CH3CHClCH2CH3, in more easily hydrolysed as it forms secondary carbocation which is more
stable than primary carbocation.
(iii) 1–bromopentane will react faster in SN2 displacement reaction as it is a 1° alkyl halide.
24. (i) Pig iron into steel: Pig iron is converted into steel by heating in a converter. A blast of oxygen
diluted with carbon dioxide is blown through the converter. Oxygen reacts with impurities and
raised the temperature to 2173K carbon gets oxidised to CO which burns off at the mouth of
the converter. Oxides of silicon and Mg form slag. When the flame is stopped, slag is tapped
off and other metals like Mn, Cr, Ni, W may be added in the end.
(ii) Bauxite into pure alumina.
(a) Al 2 O3 ( s) + 2NaOH( aq) + 3H2 O(l) ¾
¾® 2Na [Al (OH) 4 ]( aq)
(b) 2Na [Al (OH) 4 ]( aq) + CO2 ( g) ¾

¾® Al 2 O3 . xH2 O( s) + 2NaHCO3 ( aq)
(c) Al 2 O3 . xH2 O ¾1470 K

¾¾ ¾® Al 2 O3 ( s) + xH2 O( g)
(iii) Impure copper into pure copper
Pure copper is obtained by electro-refining process. In this method, the impure metal is made
to act as anode. A strip of the same metal in pure form is used as cathode. They are put in a
suitable electrolyte bath containing soluble salt of the same metal.
Anode: Cu ¾¾® Cu 2 + + 2e
Cathode: Cu 2+ + 2e ¾
¾® Cu (Pure copper)
25. (i) Invert Sugar: The dextrorotatory sucrose when hydrolysed by boiling with mineral acid
produces an equal number of molecules of dextrorotatory fructose. The resulting mixture is
laevorotatory and termed as invert sugar.
H+
C12 H22 OH + H2O ¾¾¾
¾® C6H12O6 + C6H12O6
[a]D = 66.5° [a]D = 52.5° [a]D = – 93°
Invert sugar
O
||
(ii) Peptide linkage: The amide linkage (— C — NH —) formed between two a–amino acid
molecules with the loss of a water molecule in a polypeptide is called a peptide linkage.
(iii) Denaturation of Proteins: When a protein in its native form, it is subjected to a change,
change in temperature or change in pH, the hydrogen bond are disturbed. Due to this, globules
unfold and helix get uncoiled and protein loses its biological activity. This is called
denaturation of protein. During denaturation 2° and 3° structures are destroyed but 1°
structures remain intact, e.g., coagulation of egg white on boiling, curdling of milk, etc.
OR
The following reactions cannot be explained by the open chain structure of glucose.
(i) Despite having the aldehyde group, glucose does not give 2, 4– DNP test, Schiffs test and it
does not form the hydrogensulphite addition product with NaHSO3.
(ii) The penta acetate of glucose does not react with hydroxyl amine indicating the absence of free
—CHO group.
(iii) D–Glucose on treatment of methyl alcohol in the presence of dry HCl gas gives two isomeric
nonomethyl derivatives known as a-D-glucoside and methyl b– D–glucoside. These
glucosides do not reduce fehling solution and also do not react with hydrogen cyanide
indicating the absence of free —CHO group.
A ring structure called pyranose structure (a- or b-) is proposed for the glucose molecule.
26. Polymers are classified into four groups based on the magnitude of intermolecular forces. They are—
(i) Elastomers (ii) Fibers
(iii) Thermoplastic polymers (iv) Thermosetting polymers
Polythene—Polythene is a thermoplastic polymer.
Bakelite— It is a thermosetting polymer.
27. Antiseptics: Antiseptics are the chemicals which prevent the growth of the harmful microorganism.
They do not harm the living tissues. For example dettol.
Disinfectants: These are the chemicals which completely destroy the microorganism: They are toxic
to living tissues. 1% solution of phenol is a disinfectant whereas 0.2% solution of phenol is antiseptic.
28. (a) Positive deviation from Raoult's law: When the partial vapour pressure of each component
(A and B) consequently the total vapour pressure is greater than the pressure expected on the
basis of Raoult's law then the deviation is termed as positive deviation.
Cause of positive deviation: This type of deviation is observed by solution in which the
forces of attraction between A–A molecules and between B–B molecules is greater then the
forces of attraction between A–B molecules.
g A - B < g A -A or g B- B
Negative deviation from Raoult's law: When the partial vapour pressure of each component
of solution is less than the vapour pressure expected on the basis of Raoult's law then the
deviation is called as negative deviation.
Causes of negative deviation: This type of deviation is shown by solutions in which the
forces of attraction between A–A and B–B molecules is less than the forces of attraction
between A and B molecules.
g A - B > g A -A or g B- B
–1
(b) Given: MB = 58.5 g mol
WA = 65g, WB = ?
DTf = 7.5°C or 7.5 K,
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol–1
i = 1.87
We know that,
WB 1000
DTf = iKf × ´
M B WA
WB 1000
7.5 = 1.87 × 1.86 × ´
58 . 5 65
7. 5 ´ 58 . 5 ´ 65
\ WB =
1. 87 ´ 1. 86 ´ 1000
28518.75
WB =
3478.2
WB = 8.199 g.
OR
(a) Osmosis: The phenomenon in which solvent molecules flow through a semipermeable
membrane from a solution of low concentration to a solution of higher concentration is termed
as osmosis.
Osmotic Pressure: The hydrostatic pressure exerted by the column of the solution which is
just sufficient to prevent the osmosis is called osmotic pressure.
Advantage of using osmotic pressure as compared to other collegative properties:
(i) The equilibrium is established very quickly. Hence, results are obtained in a very short
time.
(ii) The concentration of the solution does not change during determination of osmotic
pressure.
(iii) This is ideal method for proteins to find their molar mass since it happens at room
temperature and no coagulation occurs.
(b) Given DTB = 80.31 – 80.10 = 0.21 °C or 0.21 K

WB = 1.25g, Kb = 2.53°C kg mol–1
MB = ?, WA = 99g
K ´ WB
MB = b ´ 1000
DTb ´ WA
2 × 53 ´ 1× 25 ´ 1000 3162.5
= =
0 × 21´ 99 20.79
\ MB = 152 g/mol
29. (a) (i) 3HgCl2 + 2PH3 ¾
¾® Hg3P2 + 6HCl
(ii) SiO2 + 6HF ¾
¾® H2SiF6 + 2H2O
(b) (i) Sulphur in vapour state exhibits paramagnetic behaviour because it forms S2 molecules
like O2 which contains two unpaired electrons.
(ii) The stability of +3 state increases down the group in group 15 due to inert pair effect.
(iii) This is due to presence of two bond pairs and three lone pairs of electrons in XeF2.
OR
¾® [Ag (NH3)2]+ Cl–
(a) (i) AgCl + 2NH3 ¾
(ii) P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2O ¾
¾® PH3 + 3NaH2PO2
(b) (i) This is because bond dissociation enthalpy of H–Te bond is less than H–S as the size of
Te is larger than S.
(ii) Fluorine is a stronger oxidising agent than chlorine due to low dissociation enthalpy of
F–F bond and high hydration enthalpy of F– ions.
(iii) Noble gases are the least reactive elements due to fully filled outermost shells and zero
electron gain enthalpy.
CH3 CHO
30. CH3Cl, Anhy. AlCl3 (i) CrO2Cl2, CS2
(a) (i)
(ii) H3O+
Benzene Toluene Benzaldehyde
COCH3
CH3COCl
Anhy. AlCl3
(ii)
(b) (i) Ethanol and propanal

Iodoform test: Ethanol will give iodoform test positive while propanal will not.
CH3 CHO +3I 2 +4NaOH ¾ ¾® CHI 3 ¯ + HCOONa + 3H2 O + 3NaI
(Yellow ppt.)

Iodoform test: Treat both the compounds with I2 and NaOH. A yellow ppt. of iodoform
will be obtained in acetophenone.
COCH3 COONa
I2, NaOH
CHI3 ¯ + + 3NaI + 3H 2O

Neutral FeCl3 test: Add few drops of FeCl3 solution to both the samples of the
compounds. A violet colouration will be obtained in case of phenol.
OH
3– +
6 + FeCl3 [Fe(C6H5O)6] + 3H + HCl
Violet-complex
OR
(a) Mechanism of nucleophilic addition reactions:
A nucleophile attacks the electrophilic carbon atom of the polar carbonyl group from a
direction approximately perpendicular to the plane of sp2 hybridized orbitals of carbonyl
carbon. The hybridization of carbon changes from sp2 to sp3 in this process and a tetrahedral
intermediate is produced. The intermediate captures a proton from the medium to give the
neutral product.
Nu Nu
l lfast
d+ d– slow – H
+
C O + Nu C O C O H
step-1
Aldehyde or ketone Tetrahedral step-2 Addition product
(Planar) intermediate
O OH
|| |
(i) CH3 — C— CH3 ¾LiAlH 4 conc. H 2 SO4
(b) ¾ ¾¾ ® CH3 — CH — CH3 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 — CH = CH2
Propanone D Propene
OH
|
(ii) C 2 H5 OH ¾PCC dil NaOH
¾¾® CH3 CHO ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3 — CH— CH2 — CHO
Ethanol 3-hydroxy butanal
CHO COOH COCl C O

+
KMnO4/H PCl5 Benzene
(iii) Anh. AlCl3
Benzaldehyde Toluene Benzophenone


1. Metallic solids have high melting and boiling points.
2. CH3 CHCICH2CH3 because it forms secondary carbocation which is more stable.
9. (a) (i) Ozone molecule:
O O
12
O
7.8
pm
116.8°
O O O O O
O
(ii) Structure of S8 molecule

S S S
S S
S
S S
14. (i) Propan-2-ol can be prepared from propene by hydration as shown below:
CH3 — CH = CH2 + conc. H2 SO4 ¾
¾® CH3 — CH — CH3
Propene ½
OSO3 H
Isopropyl hydrogen sulphate
Boiling
CH3 — CH — CH3 + H2 O ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 — CH— CH3 + H2 SO4
½ ½
OSO3 H OH
Propan -2-ol
H
+ d -d -d d+ Dry ether
(ii) C = O + CH3 C H2 — Mg Cl ¾¾¾® [ CH3 CH2 CH2 OMgCl]
Ethylmag. chloride Addition product
H
Methanal
H+, H O
¾ ¾ ¾ 2¾® CH3 CH2 CH2 OH + Mg(OH)Cl
Hydrolysis Propan -1-ol
-3 -8
3
d ´ a ´ NA 10. 5 g cm ´ (4 . 077 ´ 10 cm) ´ (6. 02 ´ 10 23 mol -1 )
3
19. M = =
Z 4
-3 -24
10.5 g cm ´ 67.767 ´ 10 cm ´ 6.02 ´ 10 23 mol -1
3
=
4
–1
= 107.09 g mol
20. Given Eo Ag+/Ag = 0.80V, Eo Cu 2 + /Cu = + 0.34V
[Cu2+] = 0.10 M [Ag+] = ?
Eocell = EoR – EoL = 0.80 – 0.34V = 0.46V
From Nernst Equation:
0.0591 [ Cu 2 + ]
Ecell = Eocell - log
2 [Ag + ] 2
0.591 [ 010
. ]
0.422 = 0.46 - log
2 [Ag + ] 2
010
.
log = 1.2881
[Ag + ] 2
[Ag+]2 = 0.0051
\ [Ag+] = 7.1× 10–2 M
21. (i) The positively charged colloidal particles of Fe(OH) 3 get coagulated by the oppositely
charged Cl– ions provided by NaCl.
(ii) On passing direct current, colloidal particles move towards the oppositely charged electrode
(iii) Scattering of light by the colloidal particles takes place and the path of light becomes visible
(Tyndall effect).
sulphonate.
+
CH3 ¾ (CH2 ) 11 ¾ ¾ SO-3 Na
degraded by micro-organisms and hence are called non-biodegradable detergents, e.g.,
sodium-4-(1, 3, 5, 7-tetramethyl octyl) benzenesulphonate.
CH3 CH3
½ ½ +
CH3 ¾ ( CH ¾ CH2 ¾ ) 3 ¾ CH ¾ ¾ SO-3 Na
27. (i) CH2 = CHCl Vinyl chloride
(ii) CF2 = CF2 Tetrafluoroethene
(iii) Phenol and formaldehyde

1. Second order.
3. Those colloids which can be separated back into dispersed phase and dispersion medium.
4. [Co(NH2)6] [Cr(CN)6] and [Cr(NH2)6] [Co(CN)6]
8. Glucose gets oxidised to succinic acid
HNO3
HOCH2 - (CHOH) 4 - CHO ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ® HOOC - (CHOH) 4 - COOH
succinic acid
F
H
O
12. (i) Xe (ii) Cl
O O O
HClO4 (Perchloric acid)
F
XeF2 (Linear shape)
16. (i) Kolbe’s reaction

OH ONa OH OH
400 K COONa COOH
NaOH 4-7atm. H+
+ CO2
Sodium Sodium Salicylic acid
phenoxide salicylate (2-Hydroxybenzoic acid)
Major product
(ii) Friedel-Crafts’ acetylation of anisole

OCH3 OCH3 OCH3
Anhyd. AlCl3 COCH3
+ CH3COCl +
Ethanoyl 2-Methoxy
chloride acetophenone CH3
(Minor) 4-Methoxy acetophenone
(Major)
19. Given: d = 3.18 g cm–3, Z = 4, a = 5.46 × 10–8 cm

–1
M = 78.08 g mol NA = ?
Z´M
d=
a3 ´ NA
Z´M
\ NA =
a3 ´ P
Substituting the given values, we get
4 ´ 78.08
NA =
(5.46 ´ 10 -8 ) -3 ´ 318
.
313 × 32 ´ 10 24
NA =
517 × 61
NA = 6.035 × 1023 mol -1
20. At anode: ¾® Al 3 + ( aq) + 3e ] ´ 2
Al( s) ¾
2+
At cathode: Ni ( aq) + 2e ¾
¾® Ni ( s)] ´ 3
2Al ( s) + 3Ni 2 + ( aq) ¾
¾® 2Al 3 + ( aq) + Ni( s)
o 0.0591 [Al 3 + ] 2
Ecell = E cell - log
n [ Ni 2 + ] 3
Here, n = 6, [Al3+] = 0.001M = 1× 10–3M, [Ni2+] = 0.5M

o
E cell = E o 2+ - E o 3+ = - 0. 25 V - (-1. 66 V)
Ni /Ni Al /Al
o
E cell = 1.41V
0.0591 (10 -3 ) 2 0.0591 10 -6
Ecell = 1.41 - log = 1.41 - log
6 ( 0.5) 3 6 0.125
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 - log (10 –6 ´ 8) =1.41 – (log10 –6 + log 2 3 )
6 6
0.0591 0.0591
= 1.41 - ( – 6 log 10 + 3 log 2) =1.41 – (– 6 + 3 ´ 0.3010 )
6 6
0.0591 0.3012
= 1.41 - ( -5.097) = 1.41 +
6 6
= 1.41 + 0.0502 = 1.4602V
Ecell = 1.46 V
21. Three features of chemisorption
(i) It is caused by chemical bond formation and enthalpy of adsorption is high (80-240 kJ mol–1)
(ii) It forms unimolecular layer.
(iii) It is highly specific in nature.
22. (i) The transition elements have great tendency for complex formation due to presence of vacant
d-orbitals of suitable energy, small size of cations and higher nuclear charge.
(ii) There is a gradual decrease in the atomic sizes of transition elements in a series with increasing
atomic numbers due to poor shielding effect of d-electrons, the net electrostatic attraction
between the nucleus and the outermost electrons increase.
(iii) Lanthanum and Lutetium do not show colouration in solutions because both the element
exhibit +3 oxidation state in their compound thus their cations do not possess any unpaired
electrons in them.
DELHI–2011
(ii) Question numbers 1 to 8 are very short answer questions and carry 1 mark each.
(iii) Question numbers 9 to 18 are short answer questions and carry 2 marks each.
(iv) Question numbers 19 to 27 are also short answer questions and carry 3 marks each.
(v) Question numbers 28 to 30 are long answer questions and carry 5 marks each.
(vi) Use log tables, if necessary. Use of calculators is not allowed.

1. ‘Crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature.’ What does this statement mean?
2. Express the relation between conductivity and molar conductivity of a solution held in a cell?
3. Define ‘electrophoresis’.
4. Draw the structure of XeF2 molecule.
(CH3)3 CCH2Br
6. Draw the structure of 3-methylbutanal.
7. Arrange the following compounds in an increasing order of their solubility in water:
C6H5NH2, (C2H5)2NH, C2H5NH2
8. What are biodegradable polymers?
9. The chemistry of corrosion of iron is essentially an electrochemical phenomenon. Explain the
reactions occurring during the corrosion of iron in the atmosphere.
10. Determine the values of equilibrium constant (KC) and DG° for the following reaction:
Ni(s) + 2Ag+(aq) ¾ ¾® Ni2+(aq) + 2Ag(s), E° = 1.05 V
–1
(1 F = 96500 C mol )
11. Distinguish between ‘rate expression’ and ‘rate constant’ of a reaction.
12. State reasons for each of the following:
(i) The N–O bond in NO–2 is shorter than the N–O bond in NO–3 .
(ii) SF6 is kinetically an inert substance.
OR
State reasons for each of the following:
(i) All the P—Cl bonds in PCl5 molecule are not equivalent.
(ii) Sulphur has greater tendency for catenation than oxygen.
13. Assign reasons for the following :

(i) Copper (I) ion is not known in aqueous solution.
(ii) Actinoids exhibit greater range of oxidation states than lanthanoids.
14. Explain the following giving one example for each:
(i) Reimer–Tiemann reaction.
(ii) Friedel–Crafts acetylation of anisole.
15. How would you obtain
(i) Picric acid (2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol) from phenol,
(ii) 2-Methylpropene from 2-methylpropanol?
16. What is essentially the difference between a-form of glucose and b-form of glucose? Explain.
17. Describe what you understand by primary structure and secondary structure of proteins.
18. Mention two important uses of each of the following:
(i) Bakelite
(ii) Nylon-6
19. Silver crystallizes in face-centered cubic unit cell. Each side of this unit cell has a length of 400 pm.
Calculate the radius of the silver atom. (Assume the atoms just touch each other on the diagonal across
the face of the unit cell. That is, each face atom is touching the four corner atoms.)
20. Nitrogen pentoxide decomposes according to equation:
2N2O5(g) ¾ ¾® 4NO2(g) + O2(g).
This first order reaction was allowed to proceed at 40°C and the data below were collected:
[N2O5] (M) Time (min)
0.400 0.00
0.289 20.0
0.209 40.0
0.151 60.0
0.109 80.0
(a) Calculate the rate constant. Include units with your answer.
(b) What will be the concentration of N2O5 after 100 minutes?
(c) Calculate the initial rate of reaction.
21. Explain how the phenomenon of adsorption finds application in each of the following processes:
(i) Production of vacuum
(ii) Heterogeneous catalysis
(iii) Froth floatation process
OR
Define each of the following terms:
(i) Micelles
(ii) Peptization
(iii) Desorption
22. Describe the principle behind each of the following processes:

(i) Vapour phase refining of a metal.
(ii) Electrolytic refining of a metal.
(iii) Recovery of silver after silver ore was leached with NaCN.
(i) MnO–4 + C 2 O24- + H+ ¾ ¾®
heated
(ii) KMnO4 ¾¾¾ ¾®
(iii) Cr2 O27- + H2 S + H+ ¾
¾®
24. Write the name, stereochemistry and magnetic behaviour of the following:
(At. nos. Mn = 25, Co = 27, Ni = 28)
(i) K4[Mn(CN)6]
(ii) [Co(NH3)5Cl]Cl2
(iii) K2[Ni(CN)4]
25. Answer the following:
(i) Haloalkanes easily dissolve in organic solvents, why?
(ii) What is known as a racemic mixture? Give an example.
(iii) Of the two bromoderivatives, C6H5CH(CH3)Br and C6H5CH(C6H5)Br, which one is more
reactive in SN1 substitution reaction and why?
26. (a) Explain why an alkylamine is more basic than ammonia.
(b) How would you convert
(i) Aniline to nitrobenzene
(ii) Aniline to iodobenzene?
27. Describe the following giving one example for each:
(i) Detergents
(iii) Antacids
28. (a) Differentiate between molarity and molality for a solution. How does a change in temperature
influence their values?
(b) Calculate the freezing point of an aqueous solution containing 10.50 g of MgBr2 in 200 g of
water. (Molar mass of MgBr2= 184 g)
(K f for water = 1.86 K kg mol–1)
OR
(a) Define the terms osmosis and osmotic pressure. Is the osmotic pressure of a solution a
colligative property? Explain.
(b) Calculate the boiling point of a solution prepared by adding 15.00 g of NaCl to 250.00 g of
water. (Kb for water = 0.512 kg mol–1),
(Molar mass of NaCl = 58.44 g)
29. (a) Give chemical tests to distinguish between

(i) Propanal and propanone,
(ii) Benzaldehyde and acetophenone.
(b) How would you obtain
( i) But-2-enal from ethanal
(ii) Butanoic acid from butanol,
(iii) Benzoic acid from ethylbenzene?
OR
(a) Describe the following giving linked chemical equations:
(b) Complete the following chemical equations:
CH2 CH3
(i) ¾KMnO
¾¾ ¾ 4
®
KOH, heat
COOH
(ii) ¾SoCl
¾¾2 ®
heat
COOH
H3 O+
(iii) C6H5CONH2 ¾ ¾ ¾¾®
heat
30. (a) Explain the following:
(i) NF3 is an exothermic compound whereas NCl3 is not.
(ii) F2 is most reactive of all the four common halogens.
(i) C + H2 SO4 (conc.) ¾ ¾®
(ii) P4 + NaOH + H2O ¾¾®
(iii) Cl 2 + F2 ¾
¾®
(excess)
OR
(a) Account for the following:
(i) The acidic strength decreases in the order HCl > H2S > PH3.
(ii) Tendency to form pentahalides decreases down the group in group 15 of the periodic
table.
(i) P4 + SO2 Cl 2 ¾¾®
(ii) XeF2 + H2 O ¾
¾®
(iii) I 2 + HNO3 ¾
¾®
(conc)
CBSE (Delhi) SET - II

1. Which stoichiometric defect in crystals increases the density of a solid?
3. What is meant by ‘shape-selective catalysis’ of reactions?
4. Draw the structure of XeF4 molecule.
9. Explain what is meant by (i) a peptide linkage, (ii) a glycosidic linkage.
10. Name the bases present in RNA. Which one of these in not present in DNA?
22. Explain the role of each of the following in the extraction of metals from their ores:
(i) CO in the extraction of nickel.
(ii) Zinc in the extraction of silver.
(iii) Silica in the extraction of copper.
24. For the complex [Fe(en)2 Cl2] Cl, identify the following:
(i) Oxidation number of iron.
(ii) Hybrid orbitals and shape of the complex.
(iii) Magnetic behaviour of the complex.
(iv) Number of its geometrical isomers.
(v) Whether there may be optical isomer also.
(vi) Name of the complex.
27. Explain the following terms with one suitable example for each:
(i) A sweetening agent for diabetic patients.
(ii) Enzymes
(iii) Analgesics
28. (a) State the following:
(i) Henry’s law about partial pressure of a gas in a mixture.
(ii) Raoult’s law in its general form in reference to solutions.
(b) A solution prepared by dissolving 8.95 mg of a gene fragment in 35.0 mL of water has an
osmotic pressure of 0.335 torr at 25°C. Assuming the gene fragment is a non-electrolyte,
determine its molar mass.
OR
(a) Differentiate between molarity and molality in a solution. What is the effect of temperature
change on molarity and molality in a solution?
(b) What would be the molar mass of a compound if 6.21g of it dissolved in 24.0 g of chloroform
form a solution that has a boiling point of 68.04°C. The boiling point of pure chloroform is
61.7°C and the boiling point elevation constant, Kb for chloroform is 3.63°C/m.
CBSE (Delhi) SET-III

Questions Uncommon to Set-I and II
2. Express the relation among the conductivity of solution in the cell, the cell constant and the resistance
of solution in the cell.
4. Draw the structure of BrF3 molecule.
8. In nylon-6, 6 what does the designation ‘6, 6’ mean?
9. What type of a battery is lead storage battery? Write the anode and the cathode reactions and the
overall reactions occurring in a lead storage battery.
10. Two half-reactions of an electrochemical cell are given below:
MnO–4 ( aq) + 8H+ (aq) + 5e – ¾¾® Mn 2+ ( aq) + 4H2 O(l ) , E o = + 1.51 V
Sn 2+ ( aq) ¾
¾® Sn 4+ ( aq) + 2e – , E o = + 0.15 V
Construct the redox equation from the standard potential of the cell and predict if the reaction is
reactant favoured or product favoured.
13. Assign reasons for each of the following:
(i) Transition metals generally form coloured compounds.
(ii) Manganese exhibits the highest oxidation state of +7 among the 3d series of transition elements.
18. Name the sub-groups into which polymers are classified on the basis of magnitude of intermolecular
forces.
19. The density of lead is 11.35 g cm–3 and the metal crystallizes with fcc unit cell. Estimate the radius of
lead atom. (At. mass of lead = 207 g mol–1 and NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol –1)
26. Complete the following chemical equations :
NaCN reduction
(i) CH3CH2Cl ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® (A) ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® (B)
Ni / H2
(ii) C6H5N2Cl + H3PO2 + H2O ¾ ¾®
O
|| LiAlH4
(iii) R — C — NH2 ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ®
H2 O
27. Answer the following questions :
(i) Why do soaps not work in hard water ?
(ii) What are the main constituents of dettol?
(iii) How do antiseptics differ from disinfectants?
Solutions
CBSE (Delhi) SET - I
1. Crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature means some of their physical properties like electrical
conductivity, refractive index, etc., are different in different directions.
k ´ 1000
2. l m = , where k is the conductivity and C is the molar concentration.
C
3. The movement of colloidal particles under an applied electric potential is called electrophoresis.
8+2 F
4. Total no. of electron pairs in the valence shell of central Xe atom = =5
2
No. of bond pairs = 2
No. of lone pairs = 3
Therefore, the shape of molecule would be linear. Xe
CH3
5.
|
CH3 — C— CH2 — Br 1- Bromo - 2, 2- dimethyl propane
| F
CH3
CH3 O
6. | ||
CH3 — C H — CH2 — C — H
7. Increasing order of solubility of amines in water
C6H5NH2 < (C2H5)2NH < C2H5NH2
8. Polymers which get disintegrated by themselves in biological systems during a certain period of time
by enzymatic hydrolysis or to some extent by oxidation are called biodegradable polymers. An
example of biodegradable polymer is PHBV, i.e., poly-b-hydroxy butyrate-co-b hydroxyvalerate.
9. According to electrochemical theory of rusting the impure iron surface behaves like small
electrochemical cell in the presence of water containing dissolved oxygen or carbon dioxide. In this
cell pure iron acts as anode and impure iron surface acts as cathode. Moisture having dissolved CO2 or
O2 acts as an electrolyte. The reactions are given below.
At anode: Fe ¾ ¾® Fe 2+ + 2e – ; E o 2+ = - 0.44 V
Fe / Fe
1
At cathode: 2H + O2 + 2e – ¾
+
¾® H2 O; E ° H + / O / H O = 1.23V
2 2 2
1
Overall reaction: Fe + 2H+ + O2 ¾ ¾® Fe 2+ + H2 O; E ° cell = 1.67V
2
The Fe2+ ions are further oxidised by atmospheric oxygen to Fe3+ ions, which comes out in the form of
hydrated ferric oxide (rust).
1
2Fe 2+ + O2 + 2H2 O ¾ ¾® Fe 2 O3 + 4H+
2
Fe2O3 + xH2O ¾ ¾® Fe2O3 xH2O (Rust)
10. Ni(s) + 2Ag+(aq) ¾¾® Ni2+ (aq) + 2Ag(s); E° = 1.05 V

Here, n = 2
n o
log Kc = E cell
0.059
2
log Kc = ´ 1.05 = 39.5932
0 . 059
Kc = antilog 39.5932 = 3.919 × 1039
Kc = 3.92 × 1039
DG o = – nFE cell
o
DG o = – 2 × 96500 × 1.05 = – 202650 J

DG o = – 202.65 kJ
11. Rate expression is an experimentally determined expression which relates the rate of reaction with the
concentration of the reactants whereas rate constant is the rate of reaction when concentration of each
reactant in the reaction is unity.
Consider a general reaction
aA + bB ¾ ¾® c C + dD
The rate expression for this reaction is
Rate = k [A]m [B]n
Where the proportionality constant k is called rate constant.
12. (i) This is because the N—O bond in NO–2 is an average of a single bond and a double bond
whereas the N—O bond in NO–3 is an average of two single bonds and a double bond.
(ii) In SF6, S atom is sterically protected by six F atoms and does not allow water molecules to
attack the S atom. Further, F does not have d-orbitals to accept the electrons denoted by H2O
molecules. Due to these reasons, SF6 is kinetically an inert substance.
OR
(i) In PCl5 the two axial bonds are longer than the three equatorial bonds. This is due to the fact
that the axial bond pairs suffer more repulsion as compared to equatorial bond pairs.
(ii) The property of catenation depends upon bond strength of the element. As S—S bond is much
stronger (213 kJ mol–1) than O—O bond (138 kJ mol–1), sulphur has greater tendency for
catenation than oxygen.
13. (i) In aqueous solution Cu+ undergoes disproportionation to form a more stable Cu2+ ion.
2 Cu+ (aq) ¾ ¾® 2 Cu2+(aq) + Cu(s)
The higher stability of Cu2+ in aqueous solution may be attributed to its greater negative
D hydH° than that of Cu+. It compensates the second ionization enthalpy of Cu involved in the
formation of Cu2+ ions.
(ii) Actinoids exhibit greater range of oxidation states than lanthanoids. This is because there is less
energy difference between 5f and 6d orbitals belonging to actinoids than the energy difference
between 4f and 5d orbitals in case of lanthanoids.
14. (i) Reimer–Tiemann Reaction: Treatment of phenol with chloroform in the presence of aqueous
alkali at 340 K followed by hydrolysis of resulting product gives salicylaldehyde as a major
product.
OH ONa OH
é ONa ù
½ ê ú ½ ½
CHCl 3 + NaOH ê ½ ú NaOH — CHO H O+ — CHO
3
¾¾¾¾¾¾® ê — CHCl 2 ú ¾¾® ¾®
340K ê ú
ê ú Salicyaldehyde
Phenol
êë úû
(ii) Friedel–Crafts acylation of anisole: Anisole on treatment with acylchloride in the presence
of anhydrous AlCl3 undergo electrophilic substitution in the ring at ortho and para positions.
For example,
OCH3 OCH3 OCH3
O
–
–
O
–
–
Anhyd. AlCl3 — C — CH3

+ CH3 — C — Cl +
Ethanoyl chloride
Anisole o-Methoxy
acetophenone C — CH3
–
–
O
p-Methoxy acetophenone
(major product)
OH OH OH
½ ½ ½
H 2 SO4 (conc.) — SO3 H HNO3 (conc.) O2 N — — NO2
15. (i)
¾¾¾¾¾® ¾¾¾¾®
| |
Phenol
SO3 H NO2
Phenol -2,4 Picric acid
disulphonic acid
CH3 CH3 CH3

| | |
(ii) CH3 — CH — CH2 OH ¾+¾
SOCl 2
¾¾® CH3 — CH — CH2 — Cl ¾ale.KOH
¾¾ ¾® CH3 — C — CH2
2-Methyl propanol 2-Methyl propene
16. | |
H — 1 C — OH HO — 1 C — H
| |
2 2
H — C — OH H — C — OH
| |
HO — 3 C — H HO — 3 C — H
O O
| |
4 4
H — C — OH H — C — OH
| |
5
H —5 C — H— C —
| |
6
CH2 OH CH2 — OH
a - D- (+)- Glucose b- D-(+ )- Glucose
In a-D Glucose, the —OH group at C1 is toward right whereas in b-glucose, the -OH group at C1 is
towards left. Such a pair of stereo-isomers which differ in the configuration only around C1 are called
anomers.
17. Primary Structure: The specific sequence in which the various a-amino acids present in a protein
are linked to one another is called its primary structure. Any change in the primary structure creates a
different protein.
Secondary Structure: The conformation which the polypeptide chain assumes as a result of
hydrogen bonding is known as secondary structure. The two types of secondary structures are a-helix
and b-pleated sheet structure.
In a-helix structure, the polypeptide chain forms all the possible hydrogen bonds by twisting into a
right handed screw (helix) with the —NH groups of each amino acid residue hydrogen bonded to the
C==O groups of an adjacent turn of the helix. In b-pleated structure, all peptide chains are stretched
out nearly to maximum extension and then laid side by side which are held together by hydrogen
bonds.
18. (i) Bakelite is used for making combs, electrical switches, handles of various utensils and
phonograph records.
(ii) Nylon-6 is used for making tyre cords, ropes and fabrics.
19. a = 400 pm
a
For fcc, r =
2 2
400 400 2 400 2
\ r= = ´ = = 100 2
2 2 2 2 2 4
Þ r = 100 × 1.414 = 141.4 pm
20. (a) When t = 20 min, [A] = 0.289 mol L–1
Also, [A]0 = 0.400 mol L–1
For a first order reaction
2.303 [A] °
k= log
t [A]
2.303 0.400
\ k= log
20 0.289
2.303 4.00
Þ k= log
20 2.89
2.303
Þ k= [log 4.00 – log 2.89]
20
2.303
Þ k= [0.6021 – 0.4609]
20
2.303
Þ k= ´ 01412
.
20
Þ k = 2.303 × 0.00706 = 0.016259 min–1
Þ k = 1.6259 × 10–2 min–1
2.303 [A ]0
(b) t = log
k [A ]
Here, [A]0= 0.400 mol–1, t = 100 min, k = 1.626 × 10–2 min–1
2.303 0.400
\ 100 = -2
log
1.626 ´ 10 [A ]
100 ´ 1.626 ´ 10 -2 0.4
= log
2.303 [A ]
0.4
0.7060 = log
[A ]
0.4
Antilog (0.7060) =
[A ]
0.4
5.082 =
[A ]
0.4
Þ [A] = = 0.0787 M
5.082
(c) Initial rate, i.e., rate of reaction when t = 0
When, t = 0.00 min, [A] = 0.400 mol L–1
Also, k = 1.626 × 10–2 min–1
\ Initial rate = k [A] = 1.626 × 10–2 min–1 × 0.400 mol L–1
= 6.504 × 10–3 mol L–1 min–1.
21. (i) Production of Vacuum: Adsorption can be successfully applied to create conditions of high
vacuum. For this a bulb of charcoal cooled in liquid air, is connected to vessel which has
already been exhausted as far as possible by vacuum pump. The remaining traces of air inspite
of low pressure are adsorbed by the charcoal almost completely.
(ii) Heterogeneous Catalysis: There are many gaseous reactions of industrial importance
involving solid catalyst. Manufacture of ammonia using iron as a catalyst, manufacture of
H2SO4 by contact process using V2O5 catalyst and use of finely divided nickel in the
hydrogenation of vegetable oils are the excellent examples. The gaseous reactants are adsorbed
on the surface of the solid catalyst. As a result, the concentration of the reactants increases on
the surface of the catalyst and hence the rate of reaction increases.
(iii) Froth Floatation Process: In froth floatation process the powdered ore is mixed with water. It
is then mixed with pine oil (a frother). The oil particles are adsorbed on the surface of ore
particles. Now, a stream of air is blown through the mixture from below when froth is formed
at the water surface. The ore particles stick to the bubbles of the air rises to surface along with
the foam while the gangue particles which are wetted by water settle at the bottom. The foam is
separated out and is collected and in the course, the ore particles also settle down.
OR
(i) Micelles: There are some substances which at low concentration behave as normal strong
electrolytes but at higher concentration exhibit colloidal behaviour due to formation of
aggregated particles. The aggregated particles thus formed are called micelles. The formation
of micelles takes place only above a particular temperature called Kraft temperature and
above a particular concentration called critical micelle concentration (CMC). Surface active
agents such as soap and synthetic detergents belong to this class.
(ii) Peptization: The process of converting a precipitate into colloidal sol by shaking it with
dispersion medium in the presence of a small amount of suitable electrolyte is called
peptization. During peptization, the precipitate absorbs one of the ions of the electrolyte on its
surface. This causes development of positive or negative charge on precipitates, which
ultimately break up into particles of colloidal dimension.
(iii) Desorption: The process of removing an adsorbed substance from a surface on which it is
adsorbed is called desorption.
22. (i) Vapour phase refining of a metal: In this method, the metal is converted into its volatile
compound and collected elsewhere. It is then decomposed to give pure metal. For example,
refining of nickel by Mond process.
Ni + 4CO ¾330 ¾-¾ 350 K
¾® Ni(CO)4
450 – 470 K
Ni(CO)4 ¾¾¾¾ ¾® Ni + 4CO
(ii) Electrolytic refining of a metal: In this method, the impure metal is made to act as anode. A
strip of same metal in pure form is used as cathode. They are put in a suitable electrolytic bath
containing soluble salt of same metal. When electric current is passed the metal from the anode
goes into solution as ions due to oxidation while pure metal gets deposited at the cathode due to
reduction of metal ions. The voltage applied for electrolysis is such that impurities of more
electropositive metals remains in the solution as ions while impurities of the less electropositive
metals settle down under the anode as anode mud.
–
At anode: ¾® M n + + n e
M ¾
–
At cathode: Mn+ + n e ¾
¾® M
(iii) Recovery of silver after silver ore was leached with NaCN: During leaching Ag is
oxidised to Ag+ which then combines with CN– ions to form soluble complex, [Ag(CN)2]–.
Silver is then recovered from this complex by displacement method using more
electropositive zinc metal.
2[Ag(CN)2]–(aq) + Zn(s) ¾
¾® 2Ag(s) + [Zn(CN)4]2–(aq)
23. (i) MnO4– + 8H+ + 5e ¾® Mn2+ + 4H2O] × 2
¾
C2O42– ¾® 2CO2 + 2e ] × 5
¾
2MnO4– + 5C2O42– + 16H+ ¾® 2Mn2+ + 10CO2 + 8H2O

¾
(ii) 2KMnO4 ¾heat

¾® K2MnO4 + MnO2 + O2
¾
(iii) Cr2O7 + 14H+ + 6e ¾
2–
¾® 2Cr3+ + 7H2O
H2S ¾¾® 2H+ + S + 2e] × 3
Cr2O72– + 3H2S + 8H+ ¾
¾® 2Cr3+ + 3S + 7H2O
24.
Name of the Complex Hybridisation of metal Geometry of complex Magnetic behaviour
ion involved
Potassium hexacyano d2sp3 Octahedral Paramagnetic
manganate (II)
Pentaammine Chloridocobalt d2sp3 Octahedral Diamagnetic
(III) Chloride
Potassium tetra dsp2 Square planar Diamagnetic
cyanonikelate (II)
25. (i) Haloalkanes dissolve in organic solvents because the new intermolecular attractions between
haloalkanes and organic solvent molecules have much the same strength as ones being broken
in the separate haloalkanes and solvent molecules.
(ii) An equimolar mixture of a pair of enantiomers is called racemic mixture. For example,
butan-2-ol. A racemic mixture is optically inactive due to external compensation.
(iii) Of the two bromo derivatives, C6H5CH(CH3)Br and C6H5CH(C6H5)Br, the intermediate
obtained from C6H5CH (C6H5) Br is more stable than obtained from C6H5CH(CH3) Br because
it is stabilised by two phenyl groups due to resonance. Therefore, C6H5CH (C6H5)Br is more
reactive than C6H5(CH3) Br.
26. H H
+ +
(a) R — N + H R—N —H
H H
Due to electron releasing nature, the alkyl group (R) pushes electrons towards nitrogen in alkyl
amine and thus makes the unshared electron pair more available for sharing with the proton of
the acid. Therefore alkyl amine are more basic than ammonia.
+ – + –
NH2 N2Cl N2BF4 NO2
NaNO2/HCl HBF4 NaNO2

(b) (i) Cu, D
273-278 K
Aniline Nitro benzene
+ –
NH2 N2Cl I
NaNO2/HCl +KI
(ii)
273-278 K
Aniline Iodo benzene
27. (i) Detergents: Detergents are cleansing agents which have all the properties of soaps, but actually
do not contain any soap e.g., sodium dodecylbenzene sulphonate. These can be used both in
soft and hard water as they give foam even in hard water. Detergents are mainly classified into
three categories:
(i) Anionic detergents

(ii) Cationic detergents
(iii) Non-ionic detergents
time. Sodium benzoate, sodium metabisulphite are some common preservatives.
Preservatives prevent rancidity and kill or inhibit the growth of microorganism.
(iii) Antacids: These are the chemical substances which neutralize the excess acid and raise the pH
to an appropriate level in the stomach. Sodium hydrogen carbonate or a mixture of aluminium
and magnesium hydroxide are some common antacids.
28. (a) Molarity is the number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of solution whereas molality is
the number of moles of solute per kilogram of the solvent. Molarity decreases with increase in
temperature as volume increases with increase in temperature. Molality is independent of
temperature because mass does not depend on temperature.
i ´ K f ´ WB ´ 1000
(b) DTf =
M B ´ WA
i = 3, Kf = 1.86 K kg mol–1, WB = 10.5 g
MB = 184 g mol–1, WA = 200 g
Substituting these values in above equation, we get
3 ´ 1.86 K kg mol -1 ´ 10.5 g ´ 1000 g kg -1
DTf =
184 g mol -1 ´ 200 g
DTf = 1.59 K
Therefore, freezing of aqueous solution
= 273.15 K – 1.59 K
= 271.56 K
OR
(a) Osmosis: The spontaneous movement of the solvent molecules either from the pure solvent to
the solution or from a less concentrated solution to a more concentrated solution through a
semi-permeable membrane.
Osmotic Pressure: The minimum excess pressure that has to be applied on the solution to
prevent the passage of solvent molecules into it through semipermeable membrane is called
osmotic pressure.
Osmotic pressure is a colligative property as it depends on the number of moles of solute
particles and not on their identity.
i ´ K b ´ WB ´ 1000
(b) DTb =
M B ´ WA
i = 2, Kb = 0.512 K kg mol–1, WB= 15g
MB = 58.44 g mol–1, WA = 250 g
Substituting these values in the above equation, We get
2 ´ 0.512 K kg mol -1 ´ 15 g ´ 1000 g Kg -1

DTb = = 1.05 K
58.44 g mol -1 ´ 250 g
Therefore, boiling point of aqueous solution
= 373.15K + 1.05 K
= 374.20 K
29. (a) (i) Propanal and propanone
Tollen’s reagent test: Propanal being an aldehyde reduces Tollen’s reagent to silver mirror
but propanone being a ketone does not.
— –
CH3CH2CHO + 2[Ag(NH3)2]+ + 3OH ¾
¾® CH3 CH2 COO + 2Ag ¯ + 4NH3 + 2H2 O
Silver Mirror
Propanal
CH3COCH3 ¾Tollen's
¾ ¾® No silver mirror
reagent
(ii) Benzaldehyde and acetophenone

Iodoform test: Acetophenone being a methyl ketone on treatment with I2/NaOH
undergoes Iodoform reaction to give yellow ppt. of iodoform but benzaldehyde does not.
C 6 H5 COCH3 + 3NaOI ¾ ¾® C 6 H5 COONa + CHI 3 ¯ + 2NaOH
Acetophenone Iodoform
(Yellow ppt.)
OH
dil. NaOH D
(b) (i) CH3CHO CH3CH—CH2CHO CH3CH—CHCHO
Ethanal But-2-enal
(ii) CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2 OH ¾CrO

¾3¾ – H 2 SO4
¾ ¾® CH3 CH2 CH2 COOH
Butan – l – ol Butanoic acid
–+
CH2CH3 COOK COOH
KMnO4–KOH H3O+
(iii)
D
OR
(a) (i) Cannizzaro reaction: Aldehydes which do not have an a-hydrogen atom undergoes
disproportionation reactions on treatment with concentrated alkali to give a mixture of
carboxylic acid salt and alcohol.
+
2 HCHO ¾Conc.
¾ ¾NaOH
¾
¾® HCOO Na + CH3 - OH
Formaldehyde Sod.formate Methyl alcohol
(ii) Decarboxylation: Carboxylic acids lose carbon dioxide to form hydrocarbons when their
sodium salts are heated with sodalime.
– +
RCOO Na ¾NaOH
¾ ¾and¾CaO
¾® RH + Na 2 CO3
D
–+
CH2CH3 COOK
(b) (i) KMnO4
KOH, heat
Ethyl benzene Pot. benzoate
COOH COCl
(ii) SOCl2
COOH heat COCl

Phthalic acid Phthaloyl chloride
H O+
3¾®
(iii) C6H5CONH2 ¾¾ C6H5COOH + NH3
heat
Benzamide Benzoic acid
30. (a) (i) This is because bond dissociation energy of F2 is lower than Cl2 Moreover, fluorine forms
(ii) Because of low F—F bond dissociation enthalpy.
(b) (i) C + 2H2SO4 (conc.) ¾¾® CO2 + 2SO2 + 2H2O
(ii) P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2O ¾ ¾® PH3 + 3NaH2PO2
Phosphine
573 K
(iii) Cl 2 + 3F2 ¾ ¾¾® 2ClF3
(excess)
OR
(a) (i) As bond dissociation enthalpy of H—Cl bond is lower than H—S which is lower than
P—H. The acidic strength decreases because of decrease in polarity of E—H bond from
H—Cl to P—H which is due to decrease in electonegativity of E.
(ii) This is due to inert pair effect. The stability of +5 oxidation state decreases down the
group in group 15.
(b) (i) P4 + 10SO2Cl2 ¾¾® 4PCl5 + 10SO2
(ii) 2Xe F2 + 2H2O ¾ ¾® 2Xe + 4HF + O2
(iii) 2HNO3 (conc.) ¾ ¾® H2O + 2NO2 + (O)] × 5
I2 + 5(O) ¾¾® I2O5
I2 O5 + H2 O ¾¾® 2HIO3
I2 + 10HNO3(conc.) ¾
¾® 2HIO3 + 10NO2 + 4H2O
CBSE (Delhi) SET - II

1. Interstitial defect
3. The catalytic reaction that depends upon the pore structure of the catalyst and the size of the reactant
and product molecules is called shape-selective catalysis.
4. Total number of electron pairs in the valence shell of central

8+4 F F
Xe atom = =6
2
No. of bond pairs = 4 Xe
Therefore, the shape of molecule would be square planar. F F
O
||
9. (i) Peptide linkage: The amide linkage ( — C — NH —) formed between two a–amino acid
molecules with the loss of a water molecule in a polypeptide is called a peptide linkage.
(ii) Glycosidic linkage: The oxide linkage between two monosaccharides in oligosaccharides or
polysaccharides is called glycosidic linkage.
10. The bases present in RNA are adenine (A), guanine (G), cytosine (C) and uracil (U). Uracil is not
present in DNA.
22. (i) CO in the extraction of nickel: Impure nickel is heated in a stream of carbon monoxide when
volatile nickel tetracarbonyl is formed and the impurities are left behind in the solid state. The
vapour of nickel tetra carbonyl is taken to a decomposer chamber maintained at 450–470 K
where it decomposes to give pure nickel metal and carbon monoxide.
Ni + 4CO ¾330 ¾-¾ 350 K
¾¾® Ni(CO) 4 ¾450
¾ -¾470¾
¾K
® Ni + CO
Impure nickel Nickel tetracarbonyl Pure nickel
(ii) Zinc in the extraction of silver: Silver present in the ore is leached with dilute solution of
NaCN in the presence of air or oxygen to form a soluble complex.
4Ag(s) + 8CN–(aq) + 2H2O(l) + O2(g) ¾ ¾® 4 [Ag (CN)2]– + 4 OH–(aq)
Soluble Complex
Silver is then recovered from the complex by displacement method using complex using a more
electropositive zinc metal.
2[Ag(CN)2]– (aq) + Zn(s) ¾ ¾® 2Ag(s) + [Zn(CN)4]2–(aq)
(iii) Silica in the extraction of copper: During smelting and bessemerisation the impurity ferrous
sulphide oxidised to ferrous oxide which is then reacted with silica (flux) to form slag ferrous silicate.
FeO + SiO2 ¾ ¾® FeSiO3
Flux Ferrous silicate(slag)
24. (i) [Fe (en)2 Cl2]Cl

x + 0 × 2 + (–1) × 2 + (–1) × 1 = 0 x =3
Oxidation number of iron = 3
(ii) d2sp3 hybridization, Octahedral
(iii) Paramagnetic
(iv) Two
(v) Yes, cis-[Fe(en)2Cl2]
(vi) Bis–(ethane-1, 2-diamine)–dichlorido iron (III) chloride
27. (i) Artificial sweetening agents are chemical substances which are sweet in taste but do not add
calories to our body. For example, saccharin. Its use is of great value to diabetic persons as it is
excreted from the body through urine as such.
(ii) Enzymes: Enzymes are catalysts of biological origin which accelerate various cellular reactions
without themselves undergoing any apparent change during the course of action. Enzymes are
highly specific in their action on substrate. Almost all the enzymes are globular proteins.
(iii) Analgesics: Analgesics are chemical compounds which are used for relieving pain. Analgesics
relieves pain by acting on central nervous system or on peripheral pain mechanism, without
significantly affecting consciousness. There are two types of analgesics:
Narcotics — Morphine, cocaine, heroine
Non-narcotics — Aspirin, ibuprofen etc.
28. (a) (i) Henry’s law: It states that the partial pressure of the gas in vapour phase (p) is
proportional to the mole fraction of the gas (x) in the solution and is expressed as:
P = KH x
Where KH is Henry’s law constant
(ii) Raoult’s law: It states that for any solution the partial pressure of each volatile
component in the solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction.
W ´ R ´T
(b) MB = B
p´ V
Here, WB = 8.95 mg = 8.95 × 10–3g, R = 0.0821 L atm K–1 mol–1
0.335
T = (25 + 273 ) K = 298 K , p = atm
760
V = 35 × 10–3 L
Substituting these values in the above equation
8.95 ´ 10 -3 g ´ 0.0821 L atm K -1 mol –1 ´ 298 K
We get, MB =
0.335
atm ´ 35 ´ 10 -3 L
760
MB = 14193. 29 g mol–1
OR
(a) Molarity (M): It is defined as number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of solution.
Moles of solute
Molarity =
Volume of solution in litre
Unit of molarity is mol L–1 or M (molar). Molarity changes with change in temperature as
volume changes with change in temperature.
Molality (m): It is defined as the number of moles of the solute dissolved in one kilogram (kg)
of the solvent and is expressed as:
Moles of solute
Molality =
Mass of solvent (in kg)
Number of moles of solute
= ´ 1000
Mass of solvent (in grams)
Unit of molality is mol kg–1.
Molality is independent of temperature.
K ´ WB ´ 1000
(b) MB = b
DTb ´ WA
Here, Kb = 3.63K kg mol–1, WB = 6.21 g
DTb = 68.04°C – 61.7°C = 6.34°C, WA = 24.0 g

Substituting these values in the above equation, we get
3.63 K kg mol -1 ´ 6.21 g ´ 1000 g kg -1
MB =
6.34 K ´ 24.0 g
MB = 148.15 g mol–1
CBSE (Delhi) SET - III

1
2. k (conductivity) = ´ G (Cell constant) F
R (Resistance)
4. Total number of electron pairs in the valence shell of central
7 +3
Br atom = =5 Br F
2
Number of bond pairs = 3
Number of lone pairs = 2 F
Therefore, the shape of molecule would be that of slightly bent-T.
8. In nylon-6, 6 both the monomers hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid contain six carbon atoms
each.
9. Secondary cell.
At anode: Pb( s) + SO24- ( aq) ¾® PbSO4(s) + 2e
¾
–
At cathode: PbO2 ( s) + SO24- ( aq) + 4H+ ( aq) + 2 e ¾
¾® PbSO4 (s) + 2H2O (l)
Cell reaction : Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4 (aq) ¾® 2 PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)

¾
10. At anode: Sn2+ (aq) ¾¾® Sn4+ (aq) + 2e–] × 5

At cathode: MnO4– (aq) + 8H+ (aq) + 5e– ¾® Mn2+ (aq) + 4H2O (l)] × 2
¾
Cell reaction : 2MnO4–(aq) + 5Sn2+ (aq) + 16 H+ (aq) ¾

¾® 2Mn2+ (aq) + 5Sn4+(aq) + 8H2O(l)
o o o
E Cell = E cathode – E anode = 1.51 V – 0.15 V
= 1.36 V
As cell potential is positive therefore the reaction is product favoured.
13. (i) This is due to d-d transition. When visible (white) light falls on a transition metal compounds,
they absorb certain radiation of visible light and transmit the remaining ones. The colour
observed corresponds to complementary colour of the light absorbed.
(ii) As manganese has maximum number of unpaired electrons (5) in 3d subshell in addition to 2
electrons in the 4s subshell.
18. On the basis of magnitude of intermolecular forces polymers are classified into following four
sub-groups:
(i) Elastomers (ii) Fibers
(iii) Thermoplastic polymers (iv) Thermosetting polymers
Z´M Z´M
19. d =
3
Þ a3 = ...(i)
a ´ NA d ´ NA
For fcc unit cell, Z = 4
M = 207 g mol–1 NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol –1
d = 11.35 g cm–3
Substituting these values in equation (i), we get
4 ´ 207 g mol -1
a3 =
11.35g cm -3 ´ 6.02 ´ 10 23 mol -1
1/ 3
4 ´ 207 ´ 10 æ 8280 ö
a3 = 24
cm 3 Þ a = çç ÷÷ ´ 10 -8 cm
11.35 ´ 6.02 ´ 10 è 11.35 ´ 6.02 ø
1/ 3
æ 8280 ö
Let x = çç ÷÷
è 11.35 ´ 6.02 ø
1 1
log x = [ log 8280 – log11.35 – log 6.02] = [3.9180 - 1.0549 - 0.7796]
3 3
1
log x = [2.0835] = 0.6945
3
x = Antilog (0.6945) Þ x = 4.949
\ a = 4.949 × 10–8 cm Þ a = 494.9 pm
a
For fcc, r=
2 2
494.9 494.9 2 494.9 ´ 1.414
\ r= pm = pm = pm
2 2 4 4
\ r = 174.95 pm
26. (i) CH3CH2Cl ¾NaCN
¾¾® CH3CH2CN ¾Reduction ¾ ¾¾® CH3CH2CH2NH2
Ni / H 2
(ii) C6H5N2Cl + H3PO2 + H2O ¾¾® C6H6

O
||
(iii) R — C — NH2 ¾LiAlH
¾¾ ¾4
® R—CH2—NH2
H 2O
27. (i) Hard water contains calcium and magnesium salts. In hard water, soaps get precipitated as
calcium and magnesium soaps which being insoluble stick to the clothes as gummy mass.
(ii) Chloroxylenol and a-terpineol in a suitable solvent.
(iii) Antiseptics are chemical substances which prevent the growth of microorganisms and may
even kill them but are not harmful to human or animal tissues. Examples are dettol and savlon.
They are generally applied on wounds, ulcers, cuts and diseased skin surfaces. Furacin and
soframycin are well-known antiseptic creams.
Disinfectants are chemical substances which kill microorganisms but are not safe to be applied
to the living tissues. These are generally used to kill microorganisms present in the toilets, drains,
floors, etc. Some common examples of disinfectants are phenol (³1% solution) and chlorine (0.2
to 0.4 ppm).
ALL INDIA–2011

1. Define ‘order of a reaction’.
2. What is meant by ‘shape selective catalysis’?
3. Differentiate between a mineral and an ore.
4. What is meant by ‘lanthanoid contraction’?
CH2 = CHCH2Br
6. Draw the structure of 4-chloropentan-2-one.
7. How would you convert ethanol to ethene?
8. Rearrange the following in an increasing order of their basic strengths:
C6H5NH2, C6H5N(CH3)2, (C6H5)2 NH and CH3NH2
9. Explain how you can determine the atomic mass of an unknown metal if you know its mass density
and the dimensions of unit cell of its crystal.
10. Calculate the packing efficiency of a metal crystal for a simple cubic lattice.
11. State the following:
(i) Raoult’s law in its general form in reference to solutions.
(ii) Henry’s law about partial pressure of a gas in a mixture.
12. What do you understand by the rate law and rate constant of a reaction? Identify the order of a reaction
if the units of its rate constant are:
(i) L–1 mol s–1
(ii) L mol–1 s–1.
13. The thermal decomposition of HCO2H is a first order reaction with a rate constant of 2.4 × 10–3 s–1 at a
certain temperature. Calculate how long will it take for three-fourths of initial quantity of HCO2H to
decompose. (log 0.25 = – 0.6021)
14. Describe the principle controlling each of the following processes:

(i) Vapour phase refining of titanium metal.
(ii) Froth floatation method of concentration of a sulphide ore.
(i) Cr2+ is reducing in nature while with the same d-orbital configuration (d4) Mn3+ is an oxidising agent.
(ii) In a transition series of metals, the metal which exhibits the greatest number of oxidation
occurs in the middle of the series.
(i) MnO4–(aq) + S2O32–(aq) + H2O(l) ¾ ¾®
2– 2+ +
(ii) Cr2O7 (aq) + Fe (aq) + H (aq) ¾ ¾®
OR
State reasons for the following:
(i) Cu(I) ion is not stable in an aqueous solution.
(ii) Unlike Cr3+, Mn2+, Fe3+ and the subsequent other M2+ ions of the 3d series of elements, the 4d
and the 5d series metals generally do not form stable cationic species.
17. Explain what is meant by the following:
(i) peptide linkage
(ii) pyranose structure of glucose.
18. Write the main structural difference between DNA and RNA. Of the four bases, name those which are
common to both DNA and RNA.
19. A solution prepared by dissolving 8.95 mg of a gene fragment in 35.0 mL of water has an osmotic
pressure of 0.335 torr at 25°C. Assuming that the gene fragment is a non-electrolyte, calculate its
molar mass.
20. Classify colloids where the dispersion medium is water. State their characteristics and write an
example of each of these classes.
OR
Explain what is observed when
(a) an electric current is passed through a sol.
(b) a beam of light is passed through a sol.
(c) an electrolyte (say NaCl) is added to ferric hydroxide sol.
(i) H2S is more acidic than H2O.
(ii) The N—O bond in NO-2 is shorter than the N—O bond in NO-3 .
(iii) Both O2 and F2 stabilise high oxidation states but the ability of oxygen to stablise the higher
oxidation state exceeds that of fluorine.
22. Explain the following terms giving a suitable example in each case:
(i) Ambident ligand
(ii) Denticity of a ligand
(iii) Crystal field splitting in an octahedral field.
23. Rearrange the compounds of each of the following sets in order of reactivity towards SN2
displacement:
(i) 2-Bromo-2-methylbutane, 1-Bromopentane, 2-Bromopentane
(ii) 1-Bromo-3-methylbutane, 2-Bromo-2methylbutane,
3-Bromo-2-methylbutane
(iii) 1-Bromobutane, 1-Bromo-2, 2-dimethylpropane,
1-Bromo-2-methylbutane
24. How would you obtain the following:
(i) Benzoquinone from phenol
(ii) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol from methylmagnesium bromide
(iii) Propan-2-ol from propane
25. State reasons for the following:
(i) pKb value for aniline is more than that for methylamine.
(ii) Ethylamine is soluble in water whereas aniline is not soluble in water.
(iii) Primary amines have higher boiling points than tertiary amines.
26. Draw the structures of the monomers of the following polymers:
(i) Polythene
(ii) PVC
(iii) Teflon
27. What are the following substances? Give one example of each.
(i) Food preservatives
(ii) Synthetic detergents
(iii) Antacids
28. (a) What type of a battery is lead storage battery? Write the anode and cathode reactions and the
overall cell reaction occurring in the operation of a lead storage battery.
(b) Calculate the potential for half-cell containing
0.10M K2Cr2O7 (aq), 0.20Mcr3+ (aq) and 1.0×10–4MH+(aq) The half cell reaction is
Cr2O72–(aq) + 14H+(aq) + 6e– ¾ ¾® 2Cr3+(aq) + 7H2O(l)
and the standard electrode potential is given as E° =1.33V.
OR
(a) How many moles of mercury will be produced by electrolysing 1.0 M. Hg(NO3)2 solution with
a current of 2.00 A for 3 hours?
(b) A voltaic cell is set up at 25° C with the following half-cells Al3+ (0.001 M) and Ni2+ (0.50 M).
Write an equation for the reaction that occurs when the cell generates an electric current and
o o
(Given: E Ni 2+ = –0.25 V, EAl
/ Ni 3+
/Al
= –1.66 V)
29. (a) Draw the structures of the following molecules:

(i) (HPO3)3
(ii) BrF3
(b) Complete the following equations:

(i) HgCl2 + PH3 ¾¾®
(ii) SO3 + H2SO4 ¾ ¾®
(iii) XeF4 + H2O ¾ ¾®
OR
(a) What happens when
(i) chlorine gas is passed through a hot concentrated solution of NaOH?
(ii) sulphur dioxide gas is passed through an aqueous solution of a Fe (III) salt?
(b) Answer the following:
(i) What is the basicity of H3PO3 and why?
(ii) Why does fluorine not play the role of a central atom in interhalogen compounds?
(iii) Why do noble gases have very low boiling points?
30. (a) Illustrate the following name reactions:
(ii) Clemmensen reduction
(b) How would you obtain the following:
(i) But-2-enal from ethanal
(ii) Butanoic acid from butanol
(iii) Benzoic acid from ethylbenzene
OR
(a) Give chemical tests to distinguish between the following:
(i) Benzoic acid and ethyl benzoate
(ii) Benzaldehyde and acetophenone.
(b) Complete each synthesis by giving missing reagents or products in the following:
COOH
(i) ¾SOCl
¾¾2 ®
heat
COOH
(ii) C6H5CHO ¾H¾
2 NCONHNH 2
¾¾¾ ¾®
(iii) CH2 ¾ ¾
¾® CHO

Questions Uncommon to Set–I
2. What are lyophobic colloids? Give one example for them.
3. Why is it that only sulphide ores are concentrated by froth floatation process?

H CH3
H
H Br
H
6. Draw the structure of 2, 6-Dimethylphenol.
9. Define the following terms in relation to crystalline solids:
(i) Unit cell
(ii) Coordination number
Give one example in each case.
12. A reaction is of second order with respect to a reactant. How is the rate of reaction affected if the
concentration of the reactant is reduced to half? What is the unit of rate constant for such a reaction?
(i) Zone refining of metals.
(ii) Electrolytic refining of metals.
15. Explain giving a suitable reason for each of the following:
(i) Transition metals and their compounds are generally found to be good catalysts.
(ii) Metal-metal bonding is more frequent for the 4d and the 5d series of transition metals than that
for the 3d series.
19. What mass of NaCl must be dissolved in 65.0 g of water to lower the freezing point of water by
7.50°C? The freezing point depression constant (Kf) for water is 1.86 C/m. Assume van’t Hoff factor
for NaCl is 1.87. (Molar mass of NaCl = 58.5 g).
22. Write the structures and names of all the stereoisomers of the following compounds:
(i) [Co(en)3]Cl3
(ii) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]
(iii) [Fe(NH 3)4Cl2]Cl

Questions Uncommon to Set-I and Set-II
1. Define ‘activation energy’ of a reaction.
2. What is meant by ‘reverse osmosis’?
3. What type of ores can be concentrated by magnetic separation method?
11. Differentiate between molality and molality values for a solution. What is the effect of change in
temperature on molarity and molality values?
(i) Preparation of cast iron from pig iron.
(ii) Preparation of pure alumina (Al2O3) from bauxite ore.
15. Explain giving reasons:

(i) Transition metals and their compounds generally exhibit a paramagnetic behaviour.
(ii) The chemistry of actinoids is not as smooth as that of lanthanoids.
18. Write such reactions and facts about glucose which cannot be explained by open chain structure.
(i) NF3 is an exothermic compounds but NCl3 is not.
(ii) The acidic strength of compounds increases in the order:
PH3 < H2S < HCl
(iii) SF6 is kinetically inert.
22. Write the state of hybridization, the shape and the magnetic behaviour of the following complex
entities:
(i) [Cr(NH3)4 Cl2]Cl
(ii) [Co(en)3]Cl3
(iii) K2 [Ni (CN)4]
26. Write the names and structures of the monomers of the following polymers:
(i) Buna-S
(ii) Dacron
(iii) Neoprene
Solutions
1. Order of a reaction may be defined as the sum of the powers of the concentration terms of the
reactants in the rate law expression.
2. The catalysis in which the pore structure of the catalyst and the size of the reactant and product
molecules are comparable is called shape selective catalysis.
3. The naturally occurring chemical substances present in the earth’s crust which can be obtained by
mining are called minerals, while mineral from which metals can be extracted economically are called
ores.
4. The steady decrease in the atomic and ionic radii (having the same charge) with increase in atomic
number as we move across the series from lanthanum to lutetium is known as lanthanoid contraction.
5. 3-Bromoprop-l-ene
Cl O
| ||
6. CH3 — CH— CH2 — C — CH3
7. CH3CH2OH ¾conc.
¾¾ H 2 SO4
¾¾® CH2 = CH2 + H2O
443K
Ethanol Ethene
8. (C6H5)2 NH < C6H5NH2 < C6H5N(CH3)2 < CH3NH2

9. We can determine the atomic mass of an unknown metal by using the formula of density of its unit
cell.
Z (No. of atoms per unit cell) ´ M (atomic mass)
d (density) =
a 3 (cell edge) ´ NA (Avogadro number)
By knowing d, Z, a and NA, we can calculate M, the atomic mass of metal.
Z ´ volume of one atom
10. Packing efficiency = ´ 100
Volume of cubic unit cell
4
Z ´ pr 3
= 3 ´ 100
a3
For a simple cubic lattice, a = 2r and Z = 1
4
1´ pr 3
p
\ Packing efficiency = 3 3 ´ 100 = ´ 100
( 2r ) 6
= 52.36% = 52.4%
11. (i) Raoult’s law: It states that for any solution, the partial pressure of each volatile component in
the solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction.
(ii) Henry’s law: It states that the partial pressure of a gas in vapour phase (P) is proportional to its
mole fraction (x) in the solution.
12. An experimentally determined expression which relates the rate of reaction with the concentration of
reactants is called rate law while the rate of reaction when concentration of each reactant is unity in a
rate law expression is called rate constant.
(i) Comparing power of mole in L–1 mol s–1 and (mol L–1)1–n s–1,
We get
1=l–n Þ n = 0 i.e., zero order reaction
(ii) Again comparing power of mole in L mol s and (mol L–1) 1–n s–1, we get
–1 –1
–1 = 1 – n Þ n = 2, i.e., second order reaction

2.303 [A] o
t= log
k [A]
3 [A ]o
Here, k = 2.4 × 10–3 s–1, [A] = [A] o - [A] o = ,t=?
4 4
Substituting these values in the equation, we get
2.303 [A]o
t= -3 -1
log
2.4 ´ 10 s [A] O
4
2.303
t= log4
2.4 ´ 10 -3 s -1
2.303
= ´ 0.6021 s
2.4 ´ 10 -3
t = 577.7 s = 578 s
14. (i) In this method, the metal is converted into its volatile compound and collected elsewhere. It is
then decomposed to give pure metal.
Ti + 2 I 2 ¾500
¾¾ K
® Ti I 4
Impure
metal
Ti I 4 ¾1700
¾¾ K
® Ti + 2I 2
Pure metal
(ii) This method of concentration of ore is based upon the principle that the surface of sulphide
ores is preferentially wetted by oils while that a gangue is preferentially wetted by water.
15. (i) Cr2+ is reducing as its configuration changes from d4 to d3, a more stable half filled t2g
configuration while Mn3+ is oxidising as Mn3+ to Mn2+results a more stable half filled d5
configuration.
(ii) It is due to greater number of unpaired electrons in (n–1)d and ns orbitals at the middle of the
series.
16. (i) 8MnO4–(aq) + 3S2O32–(aq) + H2O (l) ¾
¾® 8MnO2(s) + 6SO42–(aq) + 2OH–(aq)
(ii) Cr2 O2– + 2+

¾® 2Cr 3+ ( aq) + 6Fe 3+ ( aq) + 7H2 O(l)
7 ( aq) + 14H ( aq) + 6Fe ( aq) ¾
OR
(i) This is because Cu(I) ion is unstable in aqueous solution and undergo disproportionation.
2Cu + ( aq) ¾
¾® Cu 2+ ( aq) + Cu( s)
(ii) This is because due to lanthanoid contraction the expected increase in size does not occur.
O
||
17. (i) Peptide linkage: The amide (— C— NH—) linkage between two a-amino acids formed with
the loss of a water molecule is called a peptide linkage.
(ii) The six membered cyclic structure of glucose is called pyranose structure ( a - or b -), in
analogy with heterocylic compound pyran.
CH2OH
H O H
H
OH H
HO OH
H OH
a – D – (+) – Glucopyranose
18. Structural difference between DNA and RNA

DNA RNA
1. The sugar present in DNA is 2-deoxy D-(–) ribose. 1. The sugar present in RNA is D-(–)-ribose.
2. DNA has double stranded a-helix structure. 2. RNA has single a-helix structure.
The common bases present in both DNA and RNA are adenine (A), guanine (G) and cytosine (C).
WB ´ R ´ T
19. MB = ....(i)
p´ V
Here, WB = 8.95 mg = 8.95 × 10–3g , R = 0.0821 L atm mol–1 K–1
0. 335
T = 25°C = (25 + 273) K = 298 K , p = 0.335 torr = atm
760
V = 35 mL = 35 × 10–3 L
Substituting these values in the equation (i), we get
8.95 ´ 10 -3 g ´ 0.0821 L atm mol -1 K -1 ´ 298K ´ 760
MB = = 14193. 3 g mol–1
0.335 atm ´ 35 ´ 10 -3 L
20. These are of two types
(i) Hydrophilic
Stability: More stable as the stability is due to charge and water envelope surrounding the sol
particles.
Nature: Reversible
Examples: Starch, gum, etc.
(ii) Hydrophobic
Stability: Less stable as the stability is due to charge only.
Nature: Irreversible
Examples: Metal hydroxide like Fe(OH)3 and metal sulphide like As2S3.
OR
(i) On passing electric current through a sol, colloidal particles start moving towards oppositely
charged electrode where they lose their charge and get coagulated (electrophoresis).
(ii) Scattering of light by the colloidal particles takes place and the path of light becomes visible
(Tyndall effect).
(iii) The positively charged colloidal particles of ferric hydroxide sol get coagulated by the
oppositely charged Cl– ions provided by NaCl.
21. (i) This is because bond dissociation enthalpy of H—S bond is lower than that of H—O bond.
(ii) This is because two bonds share a double bond in the resonance hybrid structure of NO–2 while
three bonds share a double bond in the resonance hybrid structure of NO–3 . This is because
NO–2 has bond order 1.5 while NO–3 has bond order 1.33.
(iii) This is due to tendency of oxygen to form multiple bonds with metal atom.
22. (i) Ambidentate ligand: A ligand which can coordinate to central metal atom through two different
atoms is called ambidentate ligand. For example NO–2 ion can coordinate either through
nitrogen or through oxygen to a central metal atom/ion.
(ii) Denticity: The number of coordinating groups present in ligand is called the denticity of ligand.
For example, bidentate ligand ethane-1, 2-diamine has two donor nitrogen atoms which can
link to central metal atom.
·· ··
H2 N— CH2 — CH2 — N H2
Ethane–1, 2–diamine
(iii) The spliting of the degenerated d-orbitals into three orbitals of lower energy, t2g set and two
orbitals of higher energy eg, set due to the presence of ligand in a octahedral crystal field is
known as crystal spliting in a octahedral field.
23. (i) 1-Bromopentane > 2-Bromopentane > 2-Bromo-2methyl butane.
(ii) 1-Bromo-2-methyl butane > 3-Bromo-2-methyl butane > 2-Bromo-2-methyl butane
(iii) 1-Bromobutane > 1-Bromo-2-methylbutane > 1-Bromo-2,2-dimethyl butane.
OH O
Na2Cr2O7/H2SO4
24. (i)
Phenol
O
Benzoquinone
O é OMgBr ù OH
|| ê | ú |
(ii) CH3 — C— CH3 + CH3 MgBr ¾¾® êCH3 — C— CH3 ú ¾H¾
2O
¾ ® CH3 — C— CH3
ê | ú |
Propanone Methyl magnesium ê ú
bromide êë CH3 úû CH3
2-Methyl propan -2-ol
H+
(iii) CH3 — CH = CH2 + H2 O ¾Markovnikov's
¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — C H— CH3
addition |
Propene
OH
Propan -2-ol
25. (i) In aniline, the lone pair of electrons on N-atom are delocalised over benzene ring due to
resonance. As a result, electron density on the nitrogen atom decreases. In contrast, in
–
methylamine, +I-effect of CH3 group increases electron density on the nitrogen atom.
Therefore, aniline is a weaker base than methylamine, hence its pKb value is more than that for
methylamine.
(ii) Ethylamine is soluble in water due to formation of inter-molecular hydrogen bonds with water
molecules. However, in aniline due to large hydrophobic part, i.e., hydrocarbon part, the extent
of hydrogen bonding decreases considerably and hence aniline is insoluble in water.
(iii) Due to the presence of two H-atoms on N-atom, primary amines undergo extensive
intermolecular hydrogen bonding whereas tertiary amines have no H-atoms on the nitrogen
atom, do not undergo H-bonding. As a result, primary amines have higher boiling points than
tertiary amines.
26. (i) Name of monomer Structure
Ethene CH2 = CH2
Vinyl chloride CH2 = CH–Cl
Tetrafluoroethene F2C = CF2
27. (i) Food Preservatives: These are the chemical substances which are added to the food materials
time. Sodium benzoate, sodium metabisulphite are some common preservatives.
Preservatives prevent rancidity and kill or inhibit the growth of microorganism.
(ii) Synthetic Detergents: Detergents are cleansing agents which have all the properties of soaps,
but actually do not contain any soap e.g., sodium dodecylbenzene sulphonate. These can be
used both in soft and hard water as they give foam even in hard water. Detergents are mainly
classified into three categories:
(i) Anionic detergents
(ii) Cationic detergents
(iii) Non-ionic detergents
(iii) Antacids: These are the chemical substances which neutralize the excess acid and raise the pH
28. (a) The lead storage battery is a secondary cell.
The cell reactions when the battery is in use are given below
At anode: Pb( s) + SO24- ( aq) ¾ ¾
¾® PbSO4 ( s) + 2e -
At cathode: PbO2 ( s) + SO24- ( aq) + 4H+ ( aq) + 2e - ¾ ¾® PbSO4 ( s) + 2H2 O(l)
Overall cell reaction: Pb( s) + PbO2 ( s) + 2H2 SO4 ( aq) ¾ ¾
¾® 2PbSO4 ( s) + 2H2 O(l)
(b) For half cell reaction
–
Cr2 O27- ( aq) + 14H+ ( aq) + 6 e ¾
¾® 2Cr 3+ ( aq) + 7H2 O (l)
o 0.0591 [Cr 3+ ] 2
Ecell = E cell - log
n [Cr2 O2–
7 ] [H ]
+ 14
Here, E oCell = 1.33 V, n = 6, [Cr3+] = 0.2 M

[Cr2 O2- +
7 ] = 0.1 M, [H ] = 1 × 10
–14
M
Substituting these values in the above given expression, we get
0.0591 ( 0.20) 2
Ecell = 1.33 V– log
6 . ) (10 -4 ) 14
( 01
0.0591
= 1.33 V – log (4 × 10–55)
6
0.0591
= 1.33 V– [log 4 + log 1055]
6
0.0591
= 1.33 V – [2 log 2 + 55 log 10]
6
0.0591
= 1.33 V – [2 × 0.3010 + 55] = 1.33 V – 0.548 V
6
Ecell = 0.782 V
OR
(a) Mass of mercury produced at the cathode,
M´I´ t
m=Z×I×t=
n´F
M g mol -1 ´ 2A ´ 3 ´ 60 ´ 60 s
m= = 0.119 × M g
2 ´ 96500 C mol -1
m = 0.119 × M g
0.119 ´ M g
No. of moles of mercury produced = = 0.119 mol
M g mol -1
(b) At anode: Al (s) ¾
¾® Al 3+ ( aq) + 3e – ] ´ 2
At cathode: Ni 2+ + 2 e – ¾
¾® Ni (s) ]×3
Cell reaction: 2Al(s) + 3Ni2+(aq) ¾

¾® 2Al3+(aq) + 3Ni(s)
Applying Nerst equation to the above cell reaction

0.0591 [Al 3+ ] 2
E cell = E ocell – log
n [Ni 2+ ] 3
Here, E ocell = E oNi 2+ / Ni - EAl
o
3+
/Al
= –0.25 V – (–1.66V) = 1.41V, n = 6
2+
\ [Al3+] = 1×10–3M, éNi - ù = 0.5 M
êë úû
0.0591 (10 -3 ) 2 0.0591
\ E cell = 1.41 V – log 3
= 1.41 V– log (8 ´ 10 -6 )
6 ( 0.5) 6
0.0591
= 1.41 V – (log 23 + log 10–6)
6
0.0591
= 1.41 V – [ 3 × log 2 + (– 67) log 10]
6
0.0591
= 1.41 V – [3 × 0.3010 – 6]
6
= 1.41 V + 0.050 V
E cell = 1.46 V
F
O O O
P P
HO OH
29. (a) (i) (ii) Br F
O O
P
O OH F
(HPO3)3
(b) (i) 3HgCl2 + 2PH3 ¾¾® Hg3P2 + 6HCl

(ii) SO3 + H2SO4 ¾® H2S2O7
¾
(iii) 6XeF4 + 12H2O ¾¾® 4Xe + 2XeO3 + 24HF + 3O2
OR
(a) (i) 3Cl2 + 6NaOH (conc.) ¾
¾® 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2O
(Hot)
(ii) 2Fe3+ + SO2 + 2H2O ¾

¾® 2Fe2+ + SO42– + 4H+
O
(b) (i) P
H OH
OH
Two, as the structure of H3PO4 has two P—OH bonds.
(ii) This is due to absence of d-orbitals in fluorine.
(iii) Noble gases being mono atomic gases have no interatomic forces except weak dispersion
forces, therefore they have low boiling points.
30 (a) (i) Cannizzaro reaction: Aldehydes which do not have an a-hydrogen atom undergoes
+
2 HCHO ¾Conc.
¾¾ NaOH
¾
(ii) Clemmensen reduction: The carbonyl group of aldehydes and ketones is reduced to CH2
group on treatment with zinc-amalgam and concentrated hydrochloric acid.
> C = O + 4(H) ¾Zn ¾– Hg
¾® > CH2 + H2 O
Aldehyde HCl (conc.)
or
Ketone
OH
dil. NaOH D
Ethanal But-2-enal
CrO3 – H 2 SO4
(ii) CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2 OH ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3 CH2 CH2 COOH
–+
CH2CH3 COOK COOH
KMnO4–KOH H3O+
(iii)
D
OR
(a) (i) Benzoic acid on warming with sodium hydrogen carbonate gives brisk effervescence of
CO2 gas while ethyl benzoate does not respond to this test
– +
C6H5COOH + NaHCO3 ¾
¾® C 6 H5– CO O Na + CO2 + H2 O
Benzoic acid Brisk
effervescence

C 6 H5 COCH3 + 3NaOI ¾ ¾® C 6 H5 COONa + CHI 3 ¯ + 2NaOH
(Yellow ppt.)
COOH COCl
SOCl2 +SO2+HCl
(b) (i)
COOH heat COCl
(ii) C6H5 —CHO ¾H¾

2 NCONHNH 2
¾¾¾ ¾® C6H5CH = NNHCONH2 + H2O
(i) B2H6,H2O2/OH
(iii) CH2 CHO
(ii) PCC
CBSE (All India) SET– II

2. Lyophobic sols are those sols in which the particles of the disperse phase have little affinity for the
particles of the dispersion medium, e.g., sols of metal and their sulphides and hydroxides.
3. This is because the sulphide ore particles are preferentially wetted by oil and gangue particles are
preferentially wetted by water.
5. 3-Bromo-2-methylpropene
OH
CH3 CH3
6.
9. (i) Unit cell: A unit cell is the smallest portion of a crystal lattice which, when repeated in
different direction, generates the entire lattice.
(ii) Coordination number: The number of nearest neighbours of any constituent particle in a
packing is called its coordination number. The coordination number of an atom in the bcc
structure is 8.
12. Consider the reaction nR ¾ ¾® Products
As the reaction is of second order
\ Rate, r = k [R]2 ...(i)
If the concentration of the reactant reduced to half, then
2
éRù
Rate, r ¢ = kê ú ...(ii)
ë2û
Dividing equation (ii) by (i), we get

r ¢ K [R] 2 1
= =
r 4K [R] 2 4
1 1
\ r¢ = r i.e., rate of reaction becomes th of the initial rate.
4 4
The unit of rate constant is mol–1 L s–1.
14. (i) Zone refining is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in the melt than in
the solid state of the metal.
–
M ¾
–
¾® M
15. (i) The catalytic activity of transition metals and their compounds is attributed to the following
reasons:
Because of their variable oxidation states transition metals form unstable intermediate
compounds and provide a new path with lower activation for the reaction.
In some cases, the transition metal provides a suitable large surface area with free valencies on
which reactants are adsorbed.
(ii) In general in the same group of d block elements, the 4d and 5d transition element has larger
size than that of 3d elements. Thus, the valence electrons are less lightly held and hence can
form metal-metal bond more frequently.
i ´ K f ´ WB ´ 1000
19. DTf =
M B ´ WA
Here, i = 1.87, WA = 65.0 g, DTf = 7.50 K
K f = 1.86 K kg mol–1, MB= 58.5 g mol–1
1.87 ´ 1.86 K kg mol -1 ´ WB ´ 1000 g kg -1
7.5 K =
58.5 g mol -1 ´ 65.0 g
7.5 ´ 58.5 ´ 65.0
WB = g = 8.199 g
187
. ´ 186
. ´ 1000
WB = 8.2 g
22. (i)
en en
en en
Co Co
en en
d-Tris-(ethane1,2-diamine) l-Tris-(ethane1,2-diamine)
cobalt (III) cobalt (III)
(ii) Cl NH3 Cl NH3
Pt Pt
Cl NH3 H3N Cl
cis-Diamminedichloro trans-Diamminedichloro
platinum (II) platinum (II)
(iii) NH3 + Cl +
H3N Cl H3N NH3
Fe Fe
H3N Cl H3N NH3

NH 3 Cl
cis-Tetraamminedichloro trans-Tetraamminedichloro
iron (III) iron (III)
CBSE (All India) SET– III

1. The energy required to form the intermediate called activated complex is known as activation energy.
Activation energy = Threshold energy – Average energy of the reactants
2. Reverse osmosis: If a pressure larger than the osmotic pressure is applied on the solution side, the
solvent starts to flow from the solution into the pure solvent through the semipermeable membrane.
This phenomenon is called reverse osmosis.
3. If either the ore or the gangue is capable of being attracted by magnetic field, then such separation are
carried out by magnetic separation.
11. Molarity is the number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of solution whereas molality is the
number of moles of solute per kilogram of the solvent. Molarity decreases with increase in
temperature as volume increases with increase in temperature. Molality is independent of temperature
because mass does not depend on temperature.
14. (i) Pig iron is melt with scrap iron and coke using hot air blast. Due to this, impurities such as C, S
and P present in the pig iron are removed as CO2, SO2 and P2O5 and carbon content reduced to
about 3%.
(ii) Bauxite is soluble in concentrated NaOH solution whereas impurities are not.
15. (i) This is due to presence of unpaired electrons in the (n–1) d orbitals of transition elements.
(ii) The chemistry of actinoids is not as smooth as lanthanoid because they are radioactive and
show greater number of oxidation states due comparable energies of 5f, 6d and 7s orbitals.
18. The following facts and reactions cannot be explained by open chain structure of glucose.
(i) Despite having the aldehyde group, glucose does not give 2, 4-DNP test, Shiff’s test and it does
not form the hydrogen sulphite addition product with NaHSO3.
(ii) The penta-acetate of glucose does not react with hydroxylamine indicating the absence of free
aldehydic group.
21. (i) This is because bond dissociation energy of F2 is lower than Cl2 Moreover, fluorine forms
(ii) The acidic strength of compounds increases because of increase in polarity of E—H bond from
P—H to H—Cl, which is due to increase in electronegativity of E.
(iii) In SF6, S atom is sterically protected by six F atoms and does not allow water molecules to
attack the S atom. Further, F does not have d-orbitals to accept the electrons denoted by H2O
molecules. Due to these reasons, SF6 is kinetically an inert substance.
22.
Complex ion Central metal Hybridisation of Geometry of the Magnetic

ion/atom metal ion involved complex behaviour
[Cr (NH3)4 Cl2]Cl Cr3+ d2sp3 Octahedral Paramagnetic
[Co(en)3]Cl3 Co3+ d2sp3 Octahedral Diamagnetic
[Ni (CO)4] Ni sp3 Tetrahedral Diamagnetic
CH CH2
26. —CH—CH—
(i) CH2— —CH and
2
Buta-1, 3-diene
Styrene
COOH
(ii) HO—CH2—CH2—OH and

Ethylene glycol
COOH
Terephthalic acid
(iii) CH2 — C — CH — CH2

|
Cl
2-chloro-1, 3-butadiene
FOREIGN–2011

1. What is meant by an ‘intrinsic semiconductor’?
2. State Henry’s law about partial pressure of a gas in a mixture.
3. What do you understand by ‘denticity of a ligand’?
4. Which will react faster in SN2 displacement, 1-bromopentane or 2-bromopentane, and why?
CH3 — C — C — CH2 OH
| |
CH3 Br
6. Write the structure of the following compound : 3-oxopentanal.
7. Why is an alkylamine more basic than ammonia?
8. What is meant by a ‘broad spectrum antibiotic’?
9. Differentiate between molarity and molality of a solution. Explain how molarity value of a solution
can be converted into its molality.
10. A 0.561 m solution of an unknown electrolyte depresses the freezing point of water by 2.93°C. What
is Van’t Hoff factor for this electrolyte? The freezing point depression constant (Kf) for water is
1.86°C kg mol–1.
11. Determine the values of equilibrium constant (Kc) and DG° for the following reaction:
Ni ( s) + 2Ag + ( aq) ¾ ¾® Ni 2+ ( aq) + 2Ag( s), E° = 1.05 V (F = 96500 C)
12. Define the following terms giving an example of each:
(i) Emulsion (ii) Hydrosol
13. Explain how to phenomenon of adsorption finds application in the following processes:
(i) Production of vacuum (ii) Heterogeneous catalysis
(i) The following order of increase in strength of acids:
PH3 < H2S < HCI
(ii) The oxidising power of oxoacids of chlorine follows the order:

HClO4 < HClO3 < HClO2 < HClO
15. Name the following coordination compounds and draw their structures:
(i) [CoCl2 (en)2]Cl
(ii) [Pt(NH3)2Cl(NO2)]
(At. no. Co = 27, Pt = 78)
16. Explain what is meant by the following:
(i) Peptide linkage
(ii) Pyranose structure of glucose
17. Name the products of hydrolysis of (i) sucrose and (ii) lactose.
OR
Mention three such properties of glucose which cannot be explained by its open chain structure.
18. State the reason in each of the following cases:
(i) Soaps do not work well in hard water.
(ii) Synthetic detergents are better than soaps.
19. Aluminium crystallises in a cubic close-packed structure. Radius of the atom in the metal is 125 pm.
(i) What is the length of the side of the unit cell?
(ii) How many unit cells are there in 1 cm3 of aluminium?
20. A voltaic cell is set up at 25°C with the following half-cells, Al3+ (0.001 M) and Ni2+ (0.50 M). Write
the cell reaction when the cell generates an electric current and determine the cell potential.
(Given : E oNi 2+ / Ni = -0.25 V, EAl
o
3+
/Al
= -1.66 V)
21. State the principle on which each of the following processes operates:
(i) Recovery of silver after the silver ore has been leached with NaCN.
(ii) Electrolytic refining of a metal.
(iii) Vapour phase refining of a metal.
(i) NaOH + Cl 2 ¾ ¾®
(hot and conc.)
(ii) XeF4 + O2F2 ¾143

¾¾ K
®
(iii) Br2 + F2 ¾¾®
(excess)
23. (a) Mention the optimum conditions for the industrial manufacture of ammonia by Haber’s process.
(b) Explain the following giving appropriate reasons:
(i) Sulphur vapour exhibits paramagnetic behaviour.
(ii) Red phosphorus is less reactive than white phosphorus.
OR
Draw the structures of the following molecules:
(i) NF3 (ii) H2S2O8 (iii) H3PO3

CH3
(i) + HI ¾
¾®
H
(ii) + HBr ¾
¾®
H H
(iii) CH3CH2CH — CH2 + HBr ¾
¾®
25. Illustrate the following reactions giving a chemical equation in each case:
(i) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis
(ii) A coupling reaction
(iii) Hoffmann’s bromamide reaction
(i) Benzoquinone from phenol?
(ii) Propan-2-ol from propene?
(iii) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol from methyl magnesium bromide?
27. Mention two important uses for each of the following polymers:
(i) Bakelite (ii) Nylon 6,6 (iii) PVC
28. (a) Express clearly what you understand by ‘rate expression’ and ‘rate constant’ of a reaction.
(b) Nitrogen pentoxide decomposes according to the equation
2N2 O5 ( g) ¾
¾® 4NO2 ( g) + O2 ( g)
This first order reaction was allowed to proceed at 40°C and the data given below were
collected:
[N2O5](M) Time (min)
0.400 0.00
0.289 20.00
0.209 40.00
0.151 60.00
0.109 80.00
(i) Calculate the rate constant for the reaction. Include units with your answer.
(ii) Calculate the initial rate of reaction.
(iii) After how many minutes will [N2O5] be equal to 0.350 M?
OR
(a) Define
(i) Order of a reaction.
(ii) Elementary step in a reaction
(b) A first order reaction has a rate constant value of 0.00510 min–1.
If we begin with 0.10 M concentration of the reactant, how much of the reactant will remain
after 3.0 hours?
29. (a) Complete the following reactions in an aqueous medium:

(i) MnO–4 + C 2 O24- + H+ ¾
¾®
(ii) Cr2 O27- + H2 S + H+ ¾
¾®
(i) Metal-metal bonding is more extensive in the 4d and 5d series of transition elements than
the 3d series.
(ii) Mn (III) undergoes disproportionation reaction easily.
(iii) Co (II) is easily oxidised in the presence of strong ligands.
OR
(i) Fe3+ + I– ¾ ¾®
(ii) CrO2-
4 +H
+
¾¾®
(b) Explain the following:
(i) Copper (I) ion is not stable in an aqueous solution.
(ii) With same (d4) configuration Cr (II) is reducing whereas Mn (III) is oxidising.
(iii) Transition metals in general act as good catalysts.
30. (a) Give simple chemical tests to distinguish between the following:
(i) Propanal and propanone
(b) How would you obtain
(i) But-2-enal from ethanal?
(ii) Butanoic acid from butanol?
(iii) Benzoic acid from ethylbenzene?
OR
(a) Describe the following reactions giving a chemical equation in each case:
(ii) Decarboxylation reaction
CH2CH3
(i) ¾KMnO
¾¾ ¾ 4
®
KOH, Heat
COOH
(ii) ¾SOCI
¾¾ 2
®
Heat
COOH
H O+
(iii) C6H5CONH2 3¾
¾¾ ¾®
heat

Questions uncommon to Set-I
1. “Crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature.” What does it mean?
2. State Henry’s law about partial pressure of a gas in a mixture.
3. Why is CO a stronger ligand than Cl–?
8. What are antiseptics? Give an example.
12. Write four distinguishing features operative between chemisorption and physisorption.
16. State what you understand by primary and secondary structures of proteins.
17. Draw the structures of isomers, if any, and write the names of the following complexes :
(i) [Cr (NH3)4 Cl2]+
(ii) [Co(en)3]3+
18. Explain the following terms giving an example of each:
(i) Antacids
(ii) Sweetening agents
21. Write the reactions involved in the following processes:
(i) Leachiing of bauxite ore to prepare pure alumina.
(ii) Refining of zirconium by van Arkel method.
(iii) Recovery of gold after gold ore has been leached with NaCN solution.
(i) P4 + SO2Cl2 ¾¾®
3+
(ii) Fe + SO2 + H2O ¾ ¾®
(iii) XeF6 + H2 O ¾
¾®
(excess )
27. (a) What does the designation ‘6,6’ in nylon 6, 6 polymer mean?
(b) Which polymer is obtained when free radical polymerisation of chloroprene occurs? Write the
structure of the polymer thus obtained.

Questions uncommon to Set-I and Set-II
1. How many atoms are there in one unit cell of a body centred cubic crystal?
2. State Raoult’s law in its general form with respect to solutions.
3. Name the following coordination compound:
K3[CrF6]
4. Which will react faster in SN1 displacement, 1-bromobutane or 2-bromobutane, and why?
12. Define the following terms:
(i) Aerosol
(ii) Coagulation of colloids
14. Explain giving a reason for each of the following situation:

(i) In aqueous medium, HCl is a stronger acid than HF.
(ii) White phosphorus is more reactive than red phosphorous.
15. Give the name, the stereochemistry and the magnetic behaviour of the following complexes:
(i) [Co (NH3 ) 5 Cl]Cl 2
(ii) K 2 [Ni (CN) 4 ]
19. Silver crystallises with face-centred cubic unit cell. Each side of this unit cell has a length of 409 pm.
What is the radius of silver atom? Assume the atoms just touch each other on the diagonal across the
face of the unit cell.
(i) C + H2SO4 (conc.) ¾¾®
(ii) P4 + NaOH + H2O ¾ ¾®
(iii) Cl 2 + F2 ¾¾®
(excess)

(i) Benzoquinone from phenol?
(ii) Propan-2-ol from propene?
(iii) 2- Methylpropan-2-ol from methyl magnesium bromide?
27. What are addition polymers? How are the two types of addition polymers different from each other?
Give one example of each type.
Solutions
1. Pure substances exhibiting conductivity similar to that of silicon and germanium are called intrinsic
semiconductors.
2. Henry’s law: It states that the partial pressure of a gas in vapour phase (P) is proportional to its mole
fraction (x) in the solution.
3. Denticity: The number of coordinating groups present in ligand is called the denticity of ligand. For
example, bidentate ligand ethane-1, 2-diamine has two donor nitrogen atoms which can link to central
metal atom.
·· ··
H2 N— CH2 — CH2 — N H2
Ethane–1, 2–diamine
4. 1–Bromopentane, as it is a primary alkyl halide.
5. 2–Bromo –3– methyl-but –2–en–1–ol.
O O
|| ||
6. CH3 — CH2 — C— CH2 — C — H
H H
| |
7. R ® N·· + H+ l R — N+ — H
| |
H H
Due to +I effect alkyl group pushes electron towards nitrogen and thus makes the lone pair of electrons
more available for sharing with the proton of the acid. Hence alkyl amine is more basic than ammonia.
8. The antibiotic which is effective against a wide range of microorganisms is known as broad spectrum
antibiotic. For example, chlorophenicol.
9. Molarity (M) is the number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of solution whereas molality (m)
is the number of moles of the solute per thousand grams of solvent.
If MB is the molar mass of solute, d is the density of solution then molarity (M) value of a solution can
be converted into its molality (m) by using the following for formula.
1000 ´ M
m=
1000 ´ d - M ´ M B
10. DTf = K f ´ m
Kf = 1.86°C kg mol–1, m = 0.561 mol kg–1
Substituting these values in the above equation,
We get,
DTf = 1.86 oC kg mol–1 × 0.561 mol kg–1 = 1.04oC
(DTf ) Calculated = 1.04 °C, (DTf) Observed = 2.93 °C
Observed colligative property ( DTf ) observed
i= =
Calculated colligative property ( DTf ) calculated
2.93 o C
i= = 2.82.
1.04 o C
11. Ni(s) + 2Ag+(aq) ¾¾® Ni2+ (aq) + 2Ag(s); E° = 1.05 V
Here, n = 2
n o
log Kc = E cell
0.059
2
log Kc = ´ 1.05 = 39.5932
0 . 059
Kc = antilog 39.5932 = 3.919 × 1039
Kc = 3.92 × 1039
DG o = – nFE cell
o
DG o = – 2 × 96500 × 1.05 = – 202650 J

DG o = – 202.65 kJ
12. (i) Emulsion: An emulsion is a colloidal system in which both the dispersed phase and the
dispersion medium are liquids (e.g., milk, Cod liver, oil, etc.)
(ii) Hydrosol: A sol in which solid is the dispersed phase and water in dispersion medium is called
hydrosol.
13. (i) Production of Vacuum: Adsorption can be successfully applied to create conditions of high
vacuum. For this a bulb of charcoal cooled in liquid air, is connected to vessel which has
already been exhausted as far as possible by vacuum pump. The remaining traces of air inspite
of low pressure are adsorbed by the charcoal almost completely.
(ii) Heterogeneous Catalysis: There are many gaseous reactions of industrial importance
involving solid catalyst. Manufacture of ammonia using iron as a catalyst, manufacture of
H2SO4 by contact process using V2O5 catalyst and use of finely divided nickel in the
hydrogenation of vegetable oils are the excellent examples. The gaseous reactants are adsorbed
on the surface of the solid catalyst. As a result, the concentration of the reactants increases on
the surface of the catalyst and hence the rate of reaction increases.
14. (i) Larger the difference in electronegativity greater will be polarity and hence greater will be
acidic character.
(ii) As HClO4 is most stable and tendency to give oxygen is least while HClO is least-stable and
gives oxygen most easily.
15. (i) Dichloridobis - (ethane–1, 2–diamine) cobalt (III) chloride
Cl + Cl +
Cl
en
Co en Co en
en Cl
Octahedral Octahedral
+
cis-[CoCl2 (en)2 ]
+ trans-[CoCl2 (en)2 ]
(ii) Diamminechloridonitrito- N platinum (II)

NH3
Pt
O2N NH3
Cl
Tetrahedral
O
||
16. (i) Peptide linkage: The amide (— C— NH—) linkage between two a-amino acids formed with
the loss of a water molecule is called a peptide linkage.
(ii) The six membered cyclic structure of glucose is called pyranose structure ( a - or b -), in
analogy with heterocylic compound pyran.
CH2OH
H O H
H
OH H
HO OH
H OH
a – D – (+) – Glucopyranose
+
17. H
(i) C12H22O11 + H2O ¾ ¾¾® C6H12O6 + C6H12O6
or invertase
+
H
(ii) C12H22O11 + H2O ¾ ¾¾® C6H12O6 + C6H12O6
or Lactase
Lactose Glucose Galactose
OR
The following facts and reactions cannot be explained by open chain structure of glucose.
(i) Despite having the aldehyde group, glucose does give 2, 4-DNP test, Shiff’s test and it does not
form the hydrogen sulphite addition product with NaHSO3.
(ii) The penta-acetate of glucose does not react with hydroxylamine indicating the absence of free
aldehydic group.
18. (i) Hard water contains calcium and magnesium salts. In hard water, soaps get precipitated as
calcium and magnesium soaps which being insoluble stick to the clothes as gummy mass.
(ii) As synthetic detergents can be used in hard water as well as acidic solutions.
19. (i) For fcc (or ccp), a = 2 2r = 2 × 1.414 × 125 pm
= 354 pm
(ii) a = 354 pm = 3.54 × 10–8 cm
Volume of one unit cell = a3 = (3.54× 10–8 cm)3 = 4.436 × 10–23cm3 = 4.44 cm3
Total volume
Number of unit cells =
Volume of one unit cell
1 cm 3
= -23 3
= 2.25 × 1022
4.44 ´ 10 cm
20. At anode: Al (s) ¾

¾® Al 3+ ( aq) + 3e – ] ´ 2
At cathode: Ni 2+ + 2 e – ¾
¾® Ni(s) ]×3
Cell reaction: 2Al(s) + 3Ni2+ (aq) ¾
¾® 2Al3+(aq) + 3Ni (s)
Applying Nerst equation to the above cell reaction
0.0591 [Al 3+ ] 2
n [Ni 2+ ] 3
Here, E ocell = E oNi 2+ / Ni - EAl
o
3+
/Al
= –0.25 V – (–1.66V) = 1.41V, n = 6
2+
\ [Al3+] = 1×10–3M, éNi - ù = 0.5 M
ëê ûú
0.0591 (10 -3 ) 2 0.0591

\ E cell = 1.41 V – log = 1.41 V– log (8 ´ 10 -6 )
6 ( 0.5) 3 6
0.0591
= 1.41 V – (log 23 + log 10–6)
6
0.0591
= 1.41 V – [ 3 × log 2 + (– 67) log 10]
6
0.0591
= 1.41 V – [3 × 0.3010 – 6]
6
= 1.41 V + 0.050 V
E cell = 1.46 V
21. (i) Recovery of silver after silver ore was leached with NaCN: During leaching Ag is oxidised
to Ag+ which then combines with CN– ions to form soluble complex, [Ag(CN)2]–. Silver is
then recovered from this complex by displacement method using more electropositive zinc
metal.
2[Ag(CN)2]–(aq) + Zn(s) ¾ ¾® 2Ag(s) + [Zn(CN)4]2–(aq)
–
M ¾
–
¾® M
(iii) Vapour phase refining of a metal: In this method, the metal is converted into its volatile
compound and collected elsewhere. It is then decomposed to give pure metal. For example,
refining of nickel by Mond process.
Ni + 4CO ¾330 ¾-¾¾350 K
® Ni(CO)4
450 – 470 K
Ni(CO)4 ¾¾¾¾ ¾® Ni + 4CO
22. (i) 6NaOH + 3Cl2 ¾
Hot and conc.
(ii) XeF4 + O2F2 ¾143

¾¾ K
® XeF6 + O2
(iii) Br2 + 5F2 ¾ ¾¾® 2 BrF5
(excess)
23. (a) Optimum conditions for the industrial manufacture of ammonia by Haber’s process.
Pressure: 200 bar
Temperature: 723–773 K
Catalyst: Finely divided iron and molybdenum as promoter.
(b) (i) In vapour state sulphur partly exists as S2 molecule which has two unpaired electrons in
the antibonding p* molecular orbitals like O2 and, hence exhibits paramagnetic behaviour.
(ii) White phosphorus is more reactive than red phosphorus due to its discrete tetrahedral
structure and angular strain. Red phosphorus is less reactive due its polymeric structure.
OR
(i) Total no. of electron pairs around
1
The central N atom = (5 + 3) = 4
2
N
No. of bond pairs = 3 F F
Therefore, according to VSEPR theory; NF3 should be pyramidal.
F
O O O
(ii) S S P
O O O O H OH
OH OH OH
Peroxodisulphuric acid Orthophosphorous acid
(H2S2O8) (H3PO3)
24. CH3 CH3

(i) + HI I
H
(ii) + HBr CH — CH3
H H
Br
(iii) CH3CH2CH — CH2 + HBr ¾

¾® CH3CH2CH—CH3
|
Br
25. (i) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis: This reaction is used for the preparation of aliphatic primary
amines. In this reaction, phthalimide is first of all treated with ethanolic KOH to form potassium
phthalimide. Potassium phthalimide on treatment with alkyl halide gives N-alkyl phthalimide,
which on hydrolysis with dilute hydrochloric acid gives a primary amine as the product.
O O
½½ ½½
¾C + KOH (alc.) ¾C -+
NH ¾¾¾¾¾® NK
¾C ¾C
½½ ½½
O O
+ R¾ X
O
½½
¾ COOH ¾C
H 2 O/ H +
+ R ¾ NH2 ¬¾¾¾¾¾ N¾ R
¾ COOH 1 ° amine ¾C
½½
Phthalic acid
O
(ii) Coupling reactions:
Diazonium salts react with aromatic amines in weakly acidic medium and phenols in weakly
alkaline medium to form coloured compounds called azo dyes by coupling at p-position of
amines or phenol. The mechanism is basically that of electrophilic aromatic substitutions where
the diazonium ion is electrophile.
+ - OH
¾ N º N Cl + H ¾ ¾ OH ¾¾¾¾¾®
(pH 9-10)
Phenol
¾ N = N¾ ¾ OH + Cl - + H2 O
p -Hydroxy -azobenzene
(orange dye)
+ - H+
¾ N º N Cl + H ¾ ¾ NH2 ¾¾¾¾¾®
(pH 4 -5)
Aniline
¾ N = N¾ ¾ NH2 + Cl - + H2 O
p -Amino azobenzene
(yellow dye)
(iii) Hoffman’s bromamide reaction:

When a primary acid amide is heated with an aqueous or ethanolic solution of NaOH or KOH
and bromine (i.e., NaOBr or KOBr), it gives a primary amine with one carbon atom less.
R ¾ CONH2 + Br2 + 4NaOH ¾® R ¾ NH2 + Na 2 CO3 + 2NaBr + 2H2 O
Acid amide 1 ° amine
CONH2 NH2
½ ½
+ Br2 + 4KOH ¾® + K 2 CO3 + 2KBr + 2H2 O
Benzamide Aniline
OH O
Na2Cr2O7/H2SO4
26. (i)
Phenol
O
Benzoquinone
H+
(ii) CH3 — CH = CH2 + H2 O ¾Markovnikov's
¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — C H— CH3
addition |
Propene
OH
Propan -2-ol
O é OMgBr ù OH
|| ê | ú |
(iii) CH3 — C— CH3 + CH3 MgBr ¾¾® êCH3 — C— CH3 ú ¾H¾
2O
¾ ® CH3 — C— CH3
ê | ú |
bromide êë CH3 úû CH3
2-methyl propan -2-ol
27. (i) It is used for making combs, fountain pen barrels, phonograph records.
It is used widely in making electrical goods such as switches, plugs, handles of various utensils.
(ii) It is used in making bristles for brushes, ropes.
It is used for making carpets and fabrics in textile industry.
(iii) It is used in the manufacture of rain coats, hand bags, water pipes, vinyl flooring.
It is used for insulating electric wires.
28. (a) An experimentally determined expression which relates the rate of reaction with the
concentration of reactants is called rate law while the rate of reaction when concentration of
each reactant is unity in a rate law expression is called rate constant.
(i) Comparing power of mole in L–1 mol s–1 and (mol L–1)1–n s–1,
We get
1=l–n Þ n = 0 i.e., zero order reaction
(ii) Again comparing power of mole in L mol–1s–1 and (mol L–1) 1–n s–1, we get
–1 = 1 – n Þ n = 2, i.e., second order reaction
–1
(b) (i) When t = 20 min, [A] = 0.289 mol L
Also, [A]0 = 0.400 mol L–1
For a first order reaction
2.303 [A] °
k= log
t [A]
2.303 0.400
\ k= log
20 0.289
2.303 4.00
Þ k= log
20 2.89
2.303
Þ k= [log 4.00 – log 2.89]
20
2.303
Þ k= [0.6021 – 0.4609]
20
2.303
Þ k= ´ 01412
.
20
Þ k = 2.303 × 0.00706 = 0.016259 min–1
Þ k = 1.6259 × 10–2 min–1
(ii) Initial rate, i.e., rate of reaction when t = 0

When, t = 0.00 min, [A] = 0.400 mol L–1
Also, k = 1.626 × 10–2 min–1
\ Initial rate = k [A] = 1.626 × 10–2 min–1 × 0.400 mol L–1
= 6.504 × 10–3 mol L–1 min–1.
2.303 [A] o
(iii) t = log
k [A]
Here, k = 1.6259 × 10–2 min–1, [A]o = 0.400 M, [A] = 0.350 M
2.303 0.400 2.303

t= –2
log = [log 40 - log 35]
1.6259 ´ 10 0.350 1.6259 ´ 10 -2
= 141.583 [1.6021 – 1.5441]
= 141.583 × 0.0580
= 141.583 × 0.0580 = 8.21 min.
OR
(a) (i) Order of a reaction may be defined as the sum of the powers of the concentration terms of
the reactants in the rate law expression.
(ii) Elementary step: Each step of a complex reaction is called an elementary step.
2.303 [A] o
(b) t= log
K [A]
Here, K = 5.10 × 10–3 min–1, t = 3 × 60 × 60 min= 10800 min
[A]o = 0.1 M
Substituting these values in the above equation,
We get
2.303 0.1
10800 min = -3 -1
log
5.1 ´ 10 min [A]
0.1 10800 ´ 51 . ´ 10 -3
log = = 23.9166
[A] 2.303
0.1
= Antilog 23.9166 = 8.255 × 1023
[A]
01
.
[A] = 23
= 1.21 × 10–25M
8.255 ´ 10
29. (a) (i) MnO4– + 8H+ + 5e ¾¾® Mn2+ + 4H2O] × 2
C2O42– ¾¾® 2CO2 + 2e ] × 5
2MnO4– + 5C2O42– + 16H+ ¾
¾® 2Mn2+ + 10CO2 + 8H2O
(ii) Cr2O72– + 14H+ + 6e ¾® 2Cr3+ + 7H2O
¾
H2S ¾® 2H+ + S + 2e–] × 3
¾
Cr2O72– + 3H2S + 8H+ ¾
¾® 2Cr3+ + 3S + 7H2O
(b) (i) The catalytic activity of transition metals and their compounds is attributed to the
following reasons:
In some cases, the transition metal provides a suitable large surface area with free
valencies on which reactants are adsorbed.
In general in the same group of d block elements, the 4d and 5d transition element has
larger size than that of 3d elements. Thus, the valence electrons are less lightly held and
hence can form metal-metal bond more frequently.
(ii) Mn3+ is less stable and changes to Mn2+ which is more stable due to half filled d-orbital
configuration. That is why, Mn3+ undergoes disproportionation reaction.
(iii) Co (III) has electric configuration 3d, 4s, i.e., it has three unpaired electron. In the
presence of strong ligands, two unpaired electrons in 3d subshell pair up and third
unpaired electron shift to higher energy subshell from where it can be easily lost and
hence oxidised to Co(III).
OR
3+ – 2+
(a) (i) 2Fe + 2I ¾ ¾® 2Fe + I2
(ii) 2CrO4 + 2H+ ¾
2–
¾® Cr2 O2– 7 + H2 O
(b) (i) In aqueous solution Cu+ undergoes disproportionation to form a more stable Cu2+ ion.
2 Cu+ (aq) ¾ ¾® 2 Cu2+(aq) + Cu(s)
The higher stability of Cu2+ in aqueous solution may be attributed to its greater negative
D hydH° than that of Cu+. It compensates the second ionization enthalpy of Cu involved in
the formation of Cu2+ ions.
(ii) Cr2+ is reducing as its configuration changes from d4 to d3, a more stable half filled t2g
configuration while Mn3+ is oxidising as Mn3+ to Mn2+results a more stable half filled d5
configuration.
(iii) The catalytic activity of transition metals and their compounds is attributed to the
following reasons:
In some cases, the transition metal provides a suitable large surface area with free
30. (a) (i) Propanal and propanone
Tollen’s reagent test: Propanal being an aldehyde reduces Tollen’s reagent to silver
mirror but propanone being a ketone does not.
— –
CH3CH2CHO + 2[Ag(NH3)2]+ + 3OH ¾
¾® CH3 CH2 COO + 2Ag ¯ + 4NH3 + 2H2 O
Silver Mirror
Propanal
CH3COCH3 ¾Tollen's
¾ ¾® No silver mirror
reagent

C 6 H5 COCH3 + 3NaOI ¾
¾® C 6 H5 COONa + CHI 3 ¯ + 2NaOH
(Yellow ppt.)
OH
dil. NaOH D
Ethanal But-2-enal
CrO3 – H 2 SO4
(ii) CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2 OH ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3 CH2 CH2 COOH
–+
CH2CH3 COOK COOH
KMnO4–KOH H3O+
(iii)
D
OR
(a) (i) Cannizzaro reaction: Aldehydes which do not have an a-hydrogen atom undergoes
+
2 HCHO ¾Conc.
¾¾ NaOH
¾
(ii) Decarboxylation: Carboxylic acids lose carbon dioxide to form hydrocarbons when their
sodium salts are heated with sodalime.
– –
RCOO Na ¾NaOH
¾ ¾and¾CaO
¾® RH + Na 2 CO3
D
–+
CH2CH3 COOK
(b) (i) KMnO4
KOH, heat
Ethyl benzene Pot. benzoate
COOH COCl
SOCl2
(ii)
COOH heat COCl
Phthalic acid Phthaloyl chloride
H O+
3¾®
(iii) C6H5CONH2 ¾¾ C6H5COOH + NH3
heat

1. Crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature means some of their physical properties like electrical
conductivity, refractive index, etc., are different in different directions.
2. Henry’s law : It states that “the partial pressure of the gas in vapour phase ( p) is proportional to the
mole fraction of the gas ( x ) in the solution” and is expressed as
p = KH x
where, KH is the Henry’s law constant.
Significance of KH. Higher the value of Henry’s law constant KH, the lower is the solubility of the gas
in the liquid.
3. Because CO has p bonds.
8. Chemical substances which prevent the growth of microorganisms or kill them but are not harmful to
living tissues are called antiseptics.
For example, Dettol, Savlon, etc.
12.
Chemisorption Physisorption
It arises due to chemical bond formation. It arises because of van der waals’ forces.
It is irreversible in nature. It is reversible.
It is highly specific in nature. It is not specific in nature.
It results into unimolecular layers on adsorbent It results into multimolecular layers on adsorbent
surface. surface under high pressure.
16. Primary structure refers to the sequence in which various amino acids are arranged in a protein while
secondary structure refers to the shape in which a long polypeptide chain can exist as a result of
O
||
regular folding of the backbone of the polypeptide chain due to hydrogen bonding between — C—
and —NH—groups of the peptide bond.
17. (i) Geometrical isomers of [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]+
Cl + Cl +
H3N Cl H3N NH3
Cr Cr
H3N NH 3 H3N NH3

NH 3 Cl
cis-Tetraamminedichlorido trans-Tetraamminedichlorido
chromium (III) ion chromium (III) ion
(ii) Optical isomers of [Co(en)3]3+

en en
en en
Co Co
en en
dextro-Tris-(ethane-1,2,-diamine) laevo-Tris-(ethane-1,2-diamine)
cobalt (III) ion cobalt (III) ion
18. (i) Antacids: These are the chemical substances which neutralize the excess acid and raise the pH
(ii) Detergents: Detergents are cleansing agents which have all the properties of soaps, but actually
do not contain any soap, e.g., sodium dodecylbenzene sulphonate. These can be used both in
soft and hard water as they give foam even in hard water. Detergents are mainly classified into
three categories:
(a) Anionic detergents
(b) Cationic detergents
(c) Non-ionic detergents
21. (i) Leaching of bauxite ore to prepare pure alumina:
Al2O3(s) + 2NaOH(aq) + 3H2O(l) ¾ ¾® 2Na[Al (OH)4] (aq)
2Na[Al(OH)4](aq) + CO2(g) ¾ ¾® Al2O3.xH2O(s) + 2NaHCO3 (aq)
1470K
Al2O3.xH2O(s) ¾ ¾¾® Al2O3(s) + xH2O(g)
(ii) Refining of zirconium by van Arkel method.
Zr(s) + 2I2(g) ¾870K
¾¾® ZrI4 (g)
(impure)
2075 K
ZrI4 (g) ¾Tungsten
¾¾¾ ¾¾® Zr(s) + 2I 2
filament
(Pure)
(iii) Extraction of gold:

–
4Au(s) + 8CN–(aq) + 2H2O(l) + O2(g) ¾
¾® 4[Au(CN)2]–(aq) + 4 O H (aq)
Gold is recovered from [Au (CN2)] Complex by displacement method using a more
eletropositive metal zinc.
2[Au (CN)2]– (aq) + Zn (s) ¾
¾®2 Au (s)+[Zn (CN4+)]2– (aq)
22. (i) P4 + 10SO2Cl2 ¾
¾® 4 PCl5 + 10SO2
(ii) 2Fe3+ + XeO3 + 6HFSO2 + 2H2O ¾
¾® 2Fe2+ + 4H+ + SO42–
(iii) XeF6 + 3H2O ¾
¾®
(excess)
27. (a) In nylon-6, 6 both the monomers hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid contain six carbon
atoms each.
(b) Neoprene is obtained by free radical polymerisation of chloroprene.
CH2 = C - CH = CH2 ¾O¾
2 peroxide
¾ ¾® —[CH2 - C = CH - CH2 —
]n
| or O2 |
Cl Cl
Chloroprene Neoprene

1. 2
2. Raoult’s law: It states that for any solution the partial pressure of each volatile component in the
solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction.
3. Potassium fluorido chromate (III).
4. 2-bromobutane as secondary carbocation formed is more stable as compared to the primary
carbocation in case of 1-bromobutane.
12. (i) Aerosols: These are the colloidal systems in which dispersion medium is gas and dispsed,
phase is either solid or liquid e.g., smoke, insecticide sprays.
(ii) Coagulation: The process of aggregating together the charged colloidal particles so as to
change them into large sized particle which ultimately settle as down under the force of gravity
as a precipitate is called coagulation.
14. (i) Because bond dissociation enthalpy of H—Cl is lower than H—F.
(ii) White phosphorus is more reactive than red phosphorus due to its discrete tetrahedral structure
and angular strain. Red phosphorus is less reactive due its polymeric structure.
15. (i) [Co(NH3)5Cll]Cl2: Pentaamminechlorido cobalt (III) chloride
Co(III): [Ar] 3d6 4so —d2sp3 hybridisation leads to octahedral shape.
Magnetic behaviour: Diamagnetic.
(ii) K2[Ni(CN)4]: Potassium tetracyano nickelate (II)
Ni(II): [Ar] 3d8 4s° —dsp2 hybridisation leads to square planar shape.
Magnetic behaviour: Diamagnetic.
19. As the atoms just touch each other on the diagonal across the face of unit cell, therefore
b2 = a2 + a2 = 2a2
b = 2a ....(i)
Also, b = r + 2r + r = 4r ....(ii)
r
From (i) and (ii), we get
2 b
4r = 2a Þ r = a
4 a
1.414 ´ 409 pm
r= = 144.58 pm
4
a
22. (i) C + 2H2SO4 (conc.) ¾
¾® CO2(g) + 2H2O (l) + 2SO2(g)
(ii) P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2O ¾ ¾® PH3 + 3NaH2 PO2
(iii) Cl2 + 3F2 ¾573K

¾¾®2ClF3
(excess)
OH O
Na2Cr2O7/H2SO4
26. (i)
Phenol
O
Benzoquinone
H+
(ii) CH3 — CH = CH2 + H2 O ¾Markovnikov's
¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — C H— CH3
addition |
Propene
OH
Propan -2-ol
O é OMgBr ù OH
|| ê | ú |
(iii) CH3 — C— CH3 + CH3 MgBr ¾¾® êCH3 — C— CH3 ú ¾H¾
2O
¾ ® CH3 — C— CH3
ê | ú |
bromide êë CH 3 úû CH3
2-mehtyl propan -2-ol
27. Polymers which are formed by the repeated addition of monomers molecules possessing double or
triple bonds are called the addition polymers.
The two types of addition polymers are:
(i) Homopolymers: The addition polymers formed by the polymerisation of a single monomeric
species are called homopolymers, e.g., polyethene.
n CH2 — CH2 ¾ ¾® —(CH2 — CH2 — )n
Ethene Polyethene
(ii) Copolymers: The polymers made by addition polymerisation from two different monomers are
known as copolymers. e.g., Buna-s.
CH CH2 (CH2—CH2—CH—CH2—CH—CH2)n
nCH2 CH—CH CH2 +

Buta-1,3-diene
Styrene Buna-S
DELHI–2012
Time allowed : 3 hours Maximum marks: 70

1. What is meant by ‘doping’ in a semiconductor?
2. What is the role of graphite in the electrometallurgy of aluminium?
3. Which one of PCl4+ and PCl4– is not likely to exist and why?
CH2—C—CH2Br
|
CH3
5. Draw the structural formula of 2-methylpropan-2-ol molecule.
6. Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their reactivity in nucleophilic addition
reactions: ethanal, propanal, propanone, butanone.
7. Arrange the following in decreasing order of their basic strength in aqueous solutions:
CH3NH2, (CH3)2NH, (CH3)3N and NH3
8. Define the term ‘homopolymerisation’ giving an example.
9. A 1.00 molal aqueous solution of trichloroacetic acid (CCl3COOH) is heated to its boiling point. The
solution has the boiling point of 100.18°C. Determine the van’t Hoff factor for trichloroacetic acid.
(Kb for water = 0.512 K kg mol–1)
OR
Define the following terms:
(i) Mole fraction
(ii) Isotonic solutions
(iii) Van’t Hoff factor
(iv) Ideal solution
10. What do you understand by the ‘order of a reaction’? Identify the reaction order from each of the
following units of reaction rate constant:
(i) L–1 mol s–1
(ii) L mol–1 s–1.
11. Name the two groups into which phenomenon of catalysis can be divided. Give an example of each
group with the chemical equation involved.
12. What is meant by coagulation of a colloidal solution? Describe briefly any three methods by which
coagulation of lyophobic sols can be carried out.
13. Describe the principle involved in each of the following processes.
(i) Mond process for refining of Nickel.
(ii) Column chromatography for purification of rare elements.
14. Explain the following giving an appropriate reason in each case.
(i) O2 and F2 both stabilise higher oxidation states of metals but O2 exceeds F2 in doing so.
(ii) Structures of Xenon fluorides cannot be explained by Valence Bond approach.
(i) Cr2O72– + H+ + I– ¾¾®
– – +
(ii) MnO4 + NO2 + H ¾ ¾®
16. What is meant by (i) peptide linkage (ii) biocatalysts?
17. Write any two reactions of glucose which cannot be explained by the open chain structure of glucose
molecules.
18. Draw the structure of the monomer for each of the following polymers:
(i) Nylon-6
(ii) Polypropene
19. Tungsten crystallises in body centred cubic unit cell. If the edge of the unit cell is 316.5 pm, what is
the radius of tungsten atom?
OR
Iron has a body centred cubic unit cell with a cell dimension of 286.65 pm. The density of iron is
7.874 g cm–3. Use this information to calculate Avogadro’s number. (At. mass of Fe = 55.845 u)
20. Calculate the amount of KCl which must be added to 1 kg of water so that the freezing point is
depressed by 2 K. (Kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol–1)
21. For the reaction
2NO(g) + Cl2(g) ¾ ¾® 2NOCl(g),
the following data were collected. All the measurements were taken at 263 K:
Experiment Initial [NO] (M) Initial [Cl2] (M) Initial rate of disappearance
No. of Cl2 (M/min)
1 0.15 0.15 0.60
2 0.15 0.30 1.20
3 0.30 0.15 2.40
4 0.25 0.25 ?
(a) Write the expression for rate law.

(b) Calculate the value of rate constant and specify its units.
(c) What is the initial rate of disappearance of Cl2 in experiment 4?

(i) Many of the transition elements are known to form interstitial compounds.
(ii) The metallic radii of the third (5d) series of transition metals are virtually the same as those of
the corresponding group members of the second (4d) series.
(iii) Lanthanoids form primarily +3 ions, while the actinoids usually have higher oxidation states in
their compounds, +4 or even +6 being typical.
23. Give the formula of each of the following coordination entities:
(i) Co3+ ion is bound to one Cl–, one NH3 molecule and two bidentate ethylene diamine (en)
molecules.
(ii) Ni2+ ion is bound to two water molecules and two oxalate ions.
Write the name and magnetic behaviour of each of the above coordination entities.
(At. nos. Co = 27, Ni = 28)
24. Although chlorine is an electron withdrawing group, yet it is ortho-, para-directing in electrophilic
aromatic substitution reactions. Explain why it is so?
25. Draw the structure and name the product formed if the following alcohols are oxidized. Assume that
an excess of oxidizing agent is used.
(i) CH3CH2CH2CH2OH
(ii) 2-butenol
(iii) 2-methyl-1-propanol
26. Write chemical equations for the following conversions:
(i) Nitrobenzene to benzoic acid
(ii) Benzyl chloride to 2-phenylethanamine
(iii) Aniline to benzyl alcohol
27. What are the following substances? Give one example of each one of them:
(i) Tranquillisers
(iii) Synthetic detergents
28. (a) What type of a battery is the lead storage battery? Write the anode and the cathode reactions
and the overall reaction occurring in a lead storage battery when current is drawn from it.
(b) In the button cell, widely used in watches, the following reaction takes place
Zn(s) + Ag2O(s) + H2O(l) ¾ ¾® Zn2+(aq) + 2Ag(s) + 2OH–(aq)
Determine Eo and DGo for the reaction.
o
(Given: EAg +
/Ag
= + 0.80 V, E oZn 2+ / Zn = – 0.76 V)
OR
(a) Define molar conductivity of a solution and explain how molar conductivity changes with
change in concentration of solution for a weak and a strong electrolyte.
(b) The resistance of a conductivity cell containing 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K is 1500 W. What
is the cell constant if the conductivity of 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K is 0.146 × 10–3 S cm–1?

(i) P4 + SO2Cl2 ¾ ¾®
(ii) XeF6 + H2O ¾ ¾®
(b) Predict the shape and the asked angle (90° or more or less) in each of the following cases:
( i) SO32– and the angle O—S—O
(ii) ClF3 and the angle F—Cl—F
(iii) XeF2 and the angle F—Xe—F
OR
(i) NaOH + Cl2 ¾ ¾®
(hot and conc.)
(ii) XeF4 + O2F2 ¾ ¾®
(b) Draw the structures of the following molecules:
(i) H3PO2
(ii) H2S2O7
(iii) XeOF4
30. (a) Illustrate the following name reactions giving suitable example in each case:
(i) Clemmensen reduction
(b) How are the following conversions carried out?
(i) Ethylcyanide to ethanoic acid
(ii) Butan-1-ol to butanoic acid
(iii) Benzoic acid to m-bromobenzoic acid
OR
(a) Illustrate the following reactions giving a suitable example for each:
(i) Cross aldol condensation
(b) Give simple tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds
(i) Pentan-2-one and Pentan-3-one

1. Write a point of distinction between a metallic solid and an ionic solid other than metallic lustre.
11. Describe a conspicuous change observed when
(i) a solution of NaCl is added to a sol of hydrated ferric oxide.
(ii) a beam of light is passed through a solution of NaCl and then through a sol.
13. Describe the following:

(i) The role of cryolite in electrometallurgy of aluminium.
(ii) The role of carbon monoxide in the refining of crude nickel.
18. Write the main structural difference between DNA and RNA. Of the two bases, thymine and uracil,
which one is present in DNA?
20. A solution of glycerol (C3H8O3) in water was prepared by dissolving some glycerol in 500 g of water.
This solution has a boiling point of 100.42 °C while pure water boils at 100 °C. What mass of glycerol
was dissolved to make the solution?
(Kb for water = 0.512 K kg mol–1)
22. State a reason for each of the following situations:
(i) Co2+ is easily oxidized to Co3+ in the presence of a strong ligand.
(ii) CO is a stronger complexing reagent than NH3.
(iii) The molecular shape of Ni(CO)4 is not the same as that of [Ni(CN)4]2–.
(i) With the same d-orbital configuration (d4) Cr2+ is a reducing agent while Mn3+ is an oxidizing
agent.
(ii) The actinoids exhibit a larger number of oxidation states than the corresponding members in
the lanthanoid series.
(iii) Most of the transition metal ions exhibit characteristic colours in aqueous solutions.
30. (a) Give a possible explanation for each one of the following:
(i) There are two —NH2 groups in semicarbazide. However, only one such group is involved
in the formation of semicarbazones.
(ii) Cyclohexanone forms cyanohydrin in good yield but 2, 4, 6-trimethylcyclohexanone does
not.
(b) An organic compound with molecular formula C9H10O forms 2, 4-DNP derivative, reduces
Tollen’s reagent and undergoes Cannizzaro’s reaction. On vigorous oxidation it gives
1,2-benzene-di-carboxylic acid. Identify the compound.
OR
(a) Give chemical tests to distinguish between
(i) Phenol and Benzoic acid
(ii) Benzophenone and Acetophenone
(b) Write the structures of the main products of following reactions:
(i) + C6H5COCl ¾AnhydrousAlCl

¾¾¾¾ ¾ 3
®
CS2
2+
(ii) H3C—Cº C—H ¾Hg
¾¾ , H 2 SO4
¾¾®
CH3
(iii) ¾1.¾
CrO2 Cl 2
¾¾ +
®
2. H 3O
NO2

5. Draw the structure of hex-1-en-3-ol compound.
20. 15.0 g of an unknown molecular material was dissolved in 450 g of water. The resulting solution was
found to freeze at – 0.34 °C. What is the molar mass of this material? (Kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol–1)
22. Explain the following observations giving an appropriate reason for each.
(i) The enthalpies of atomization of transition elements are quite high.
(ii) There occurs much more frequent metal-metal bonding in compounds of heavy transition metals
(i.e., 3rd series).
(iii) Mn2+ is much more resistant than Fe2+ towards oxidation.
23. Write the name, the structure and the magnetic behaviour of each one of the following complexes:
(i) [Pt(NH3)Cl(NO2)]
(ii) [Co(NH3)4Cl2]Cl
(iii) Ni(CO)4
(At. nos. Co = 27, Ni = 28, Pt = 78)
27. Explain the following terms giving one example of each type:
(i) Antacids
(ii) Disinfectants
(iii) Enzymes
30. (a) Draw the molecular structures of following compounds:
(i) XeF6
(ii) H2S2O8
(i) The molecules NH3 and NF3 have dipole moments which are of opposite directions.
(ii) All the bonds in PCl5 molecule are not equivalent.
(iii) Sulphur in vapour state exhibits paramagnetism.
OR
(i) XeF4 + SbF5 ¾ ¾®
(ii) Cl2 + F2(excess) ¾ ¾®
(b) Explain each of the following:
(i) Nitrogen is much less reactive than phosphorus.
(ii) The stability of +5 oxidation state decreases down group 15.
(iii) The bond angles (O—N—O) are not of the same value in NO2– and NO2+.
Solutions
1. The process of addition of an appropriate amount of suitable impurity to an intrinsic semiconductor to
enhance its conductivity is called doping.
2. Graphite is used as electrodes in the electrometallurgy of aluminium. The electrode reactions are:
Cathode: Al3+ (melt) + 3e– ¾ ¾® Al(l)
2–
Anode: C(s) + O (melt) ¾ ¾® CO(g) + 2e–;
C(s) + 2O2–(melt) ¾ ¾® CO2(g) + 4e–
3. PCl4–, as phosphorus has 10 electrons which can’t be accommodated in sp3 hybrid orbitals.
4. 3-Bromo-2-methylpropene
CH3
|
5. CH3 — C— CH3
|
OH
6. Butanone < Propanone < Propanal < Ethanal
7. (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2 > (CH3)3N > NH3
8. Homopolymerisation is a polymerisation reaction in which monomers of one kind are allowed to
polymerise and form a homopolymer.
—CH2 ¾Polymerization
n CH2— ¾ ¾ ¾¾® — ( CH2—CH2 —
) n
Ethene Polyethene (Homopolymer)
9. DTb = 100.18°C – 100°C = 0.18°C or 0.18 K; Kb = 0.512 K kg mol–1; m = 1 mol kg–1

DTb = i Kb m
0.18 K = i × 0.512 K kg mol–1 × 1 mol kg–1
0.18
i= = 0.35
0.512
OR
(i) Mole fraction of a component in a solution may be defined as the ratio of moles of that
component to the total number of moles of all the components present in the solution.
(ii) The solutions of the same osmotic pressure at a given temperature are called isotonic solutions.
(iii) van’t Hoff’s factor (i) may be defined as the ratio of normal molecular mass to observed
molecular mass or the ratio of observed colligative property to normal colligative property.
(iv) A solution which obeys Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentration is called an ideal solution.
10. The sum of powers of the concentration of the reactants in the rate law expression is called order of
reaction.
For a general reaction: aA + bB ¾ ¾® Products
If rate = k[A]m [B]n; order of reaction = m + n

(i) General unit of rate constant, k = (mol L–1)1–n s–1
\ L–1 mol s–1 = (mol L–1)1–n s–1
–1=–1+n Þ n = 0 or 1 = 1 – n Þ n = 0 \ Reaction order = 0
–1 –1 –1 1–n –1
(ii) L mol s = (mol L ) s
1=–1+n Þ n = 2 or – 1 = 1 – n Þ n = 2 \ Reaction order = 2
11. The two groups into which phenomenon of catalysis can be divided are:
(i) Homogeneous catalysis: When the reactants and the catalyst are in the same phase, the
catalysis is said to be homogeneous catalysis. For example, SO2 is oxidized to SO3 in the
presence of nitric oxide, NO as catalyst.
2SO2(g) + O2(g) ¾NO(
¾¾ g)
® 2SO3(g)
(ii) Heterogeneous catalysis: When the reactants are in a different phase than the catalyst, the
catalysis is said to be heterogeneous. For example, the combination of dinitrogen and
dihydrogen to form ammonia in the presence of finally divided iron as a catalyst.
N2(g) + 3H2(g) ¾Fe(
¾¾s)
® 2NH3(g)
12. The process of settling of colloidal particles through induced aggregation by the addition of some
suitable electrolyte is known as coagulation. Three methods by which coagulation of lyophobic sols
can be carried out are:
(i) Electrophoresis: During electrophoresis the colloidal particles move towards oppositely
charged electrodes, get discharged and coagulated.
(ii) Boiling: On boiling a sol, the adsorbed layer is disturbed due to increased collision with the
molecules of dispersion medium. This reduces the charge on the particles which ultimately
settle down in the form of a precipitate.
(iii) Addition of Electrolytes: When excess of an electrolyte is added to a colloidal solution, the
colloids interact with ions carrying charge opposite to that present on themselves. This causes
neutralisation leading to their coagulation.
13. (i) In Mond process, nickel is converted into its volatile complex, teracarbonyl nickel and gets
collected elsewhere. It is then decomposed to give pure nickel.
Ni + 4CO ¾330– ¾¾ 350 K
¾® Ni(CO)4; Ni(CO)4 ¾450– ¾¾ 470 K
¾® Ni + 4CO
Impure Tetracarbonyl Pure
nickel nickel (volatile) nickel
(ii) Column chromatography is based on the principle that different components of a mixture are
differently adsorbed on an adsorbent. In purification of rare earth elements ion-exchange is
used as an adsorbent.
14. (i) It is due to the ability of oxygen to form multiple bonds with metals.
(ii) This is because the energy required for the promotion of electrons in xenon is very high.
15. (i) Cr2O72– + 14H+ + 6e– ¾
¾® 2Cr3+ + 7H2O
2I– ¾
¾® I2 + 2e–]×3
Cr2O72– + 6I– + 14H+ ¾
¾® 2Cr3+ + 3I2 + 7H2O
(ii) MnO4– + 8H+ + 5e– ¾® Mn2+ + 4H2O]×2

¾
NO2– + H2O ¾® NO3– + 2H+ + 2e–]×5
¾
2MnO4– + 5NO2– + 6H+ ¾
¾® 2Mn2+ + 5NO3– + 3H2O
16. (i) Peptide linkage is an amide (—CONH2) linkage formed between —COOH group of one a-amino
acid and —NH2 group of other a-amino acid by the loss of a water molecule in a peptide.
(ii) A number of reactions that occur in the bodies of animals and plants to maintain the life process
are catalysed by enzymes. The enzymes are thus termed as biocatalysts. Almost all the enzymes
are globular proteins. An enzyme catalyses a biochemical reaction by providing alternate
lower activation path thereby increasing the rate of the biochemical reaction. For example,
activation energy for acid hydrolysis of sucrose is 6.22 kJ mol–1 while the activation energy is
only 2.15 kJ mol–1 when hydrolyzed in the presence of enzyme sucrose.
17. (i) The pentaacetate of glucose does not react with hydroxylamine indicating the absence of free
—CHO group.
(ii) D—(+)—glucose when heated with methly alcohol in the presence of dry HCl gas forms a
mixture containing methyl a-D-glucoside and methyl b-D-glucoside.
+
C6H12O6 + CH3—OH ¾H¾® (C6H11O5)OCH3 + H2O
D-glucose Methyl alcohol Methyl-a-and
b-D-glucosides
18. H
H2C N C—O
(i) H C —CH2
(ii) CH3—CH—
2 CH2
H2C CH2 Propene
Caprolactum
19. a = 316.5 pm
3
For bcc unit cell, r= a
4
3
\ r=× 316.5 pm = 137.04 pm
4
OR
a = 286.65 pm = 286.65 × 10 cm; M = 55.845 g mol–1; d = 7.874 g cm–3
–10
For bcc unit cell, z = 2

z´ M
Substituting the values in the expression, NA = , we get
a3 ´ d
2 ´ 55.845 g mol –1
NA =
( 286. 65 ´ 10 -10 cm) 3 ´ 7.874 g cm –3
NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol–1
20. i = 2, WA = 1 kg = 1000 g; DTf = 2K; Kf = 1.86 K kg mol–1; MB = 74.5 g mol–1

Substituting these values in the expression,
DTf ´ M B ´ WA
WB =
i ´ K f ´1000
2 K ´ 74.5 g mol –1 ´ 1000 g
WB = = 40.05 g
2 ´ 1.86 K kg mol –1 ´ 1000 g kg –1
21. Suppose order w.r.t. NO is m and order w.r.t. Cl2 is n. Then the rate will be
Rate = k[NO]m[Cl2]n
Substituting the values of experiment 1 to 3 in the rate expression, we get
0.60 = k(0.15)m (0.15)n ...(i)
m n
1.20 = k(0.15) (0.30) ...(ii)
m n
2.40 = k(0.30) (0.15) ...(iii)
Dividing equation (iii) by (i), we get
2. 40 k ( 0.30) m ( 015
. )n
=
0. 60 k ( 015. ) m ( 015
. )n
4 = 2m or 22 = 2 m or m=2
1. 20 k ( 0.15) m ( 0.30) n
=
0. 60 k ( 0.15) m ( 0.15) n
2 = 2n or n=1
(a) Rate law expression is, Rate = k[NO]2 [Cl2]
(b) 0.60 mol L–1 min–1 = k(0.15 mol L–1)2 (0.15 mol L–1)
\ k = 177.77 mol–2 L2 min–1
(c) Rate = 177.77 mol–2 L2 min–1 × (0.25 mol L–1)2 (0.25 mol L–1)
= 2.778 mol L–1 min–1
22. (i) Interstitial compounds are well known for many of the transition elements because the
transition elements are capable of entrapping small sized atoms such as H, C and N in the
interstitial sites in their crystal lattices. These trapped atoms get bonded to the atoms of
transition elements. TiC, Fe3H, Mn4N, etc. are some interstitial compounds
(ii) This is due to filling of 4f orbitals which have poor shielding effect.
(iii) This is due to very small energy gaps between 5f, 6d and 7s subshells in actinoids.
23. (i) [Co(NH3)Cl(en)2]2+ : Amminechloridobis (ethane-1, 2-diamine)-cobalt(III) ion
Magnetic behaviour : Diamagnetic
(ii) [Ni(H2O)2(OX)2]2– : Diaquadioxalatonickelate (II) ion
Magnetic behaviour : Paramagnetic
24. Chlorine withdraws electrons through negative inductive effect and releases electron through
resonance. Through negative inductive effect, chlorine destabilizes the intermediate carbocation
formed during the electrophilic substitution. Through resonance effect, chlorine tends to stabilize the
carbocation and the effect is more pronounced at ortho and para-positions
Cl Cl
H
E
+ E
Inductive effect destabilizes the
intermediate carbocation
Cl Cl
H
+ E (Attack at ortho-position)
+ E
Cl Cl
+ (Attack at para-position)
+ E
E H
Resonance effect stabilizes the
intermediate carbocation
The negative inductive effect is stronger than resonance effect and causes net electron withdrawal and
thus causes net deactivation. The resonance effect tends to oppose the inductive effect for the attack at
ortho and para positions and hence makes the deactivation less for ortho and para attack. Thus the
electrophilic substitution takes place at ortho and para positions..
25. (i) CH3—CH2—CH2—CH2—OH ¾ ¾(O)
¾¾® CH3—CH2—CH2—COOH
CrO3 – H 2 SO4
Butan-1-ol Butanoic acid
(ii) CH3—CH—
—CH—CH2—OH ¾ ¾(O)
¾¾® CH3—CH—
—CH—CHO
PCC
But-2-enol But-2-enal
CH3 CH3
| |
(iii) CH3—CH—CH2—OH ¾ ¾(O)
¾¾® CH3—CH—COOH
CrO3 – H 2 SO4
2-Methylpropan-1-ol 2-Methylpropanoic acid
26. + –
NO2 NH2 N2Cl CN COOH
+
Sn/HCl NaNO2/HCl CuCN/KCN H2O/H
(i)
273-278 K
Nitrobenzene Benzoic acid
CH2Cl CH2CN CH2—CH2—NH2

KCN(alc) Na(Hg)/C2H5OH
(ii)
Benzyl chloride 2-Phenylethanamine
+ –
NH2 N2Cl CN COOH CH2OH
+
NaNO2/HCl CuCN/KCN H2O/H LiAlH4
(iii)
273-278 K
Aniline Benzyl alcohol
Alternatively,
+ –
NH2 N2Cl CH3
NaNO2/HCl H3PO2/H2O CHCl3/
273-278 K anhyd. AlCl3
Aniline
Cl2/hn
CH2OH CH2—Cl
NaOH(aq)
Benzyl alchol Benzyl alchol
27. (i) Tranquilizers are a class of chemical compounds used for the treatment of stress, fatigue, and
mild or even severe mental diseases. These relieve anxiety, stress, irritability or excitement by
inducing a sense of well-being, e.g., iproniazid, chlordiazopoxide, equanil, luminal, etc.
(ii) Food preservatives are the chemical substances which are added to food materials to prevent
their spoilage due to microbial growth and to retain their nutritive value for long periods.
Preservatives prevent the rancidity of food and inhibit growth or kill the microorganisms. The
most-common preservatives used are sugar, vegetable oil, sodium benzoate, salts of ascorbic
acid and propanoic acid.
(iii) Synthetic detergents are cleansing agents, which have all the properties of soaps but actually do
not contain any soap. These can be used in both soft water and hard water as they produce foam
even in hard water. These are mainly classified into three categories:
l Anionic detergents, e.g., sodium dodecylbenzene sulphonate
l Cationic detergents, e.g., cetyltrimethyl ammonium bromide
l Non-ionic detergents, e.g., polyethylene glycol stearate
28. (a) Lead storage battery is a secondary battery. The reactions occurring in lead storage battery
when current is drawn from it are:
Anode: Pb(s) + SO42–(aq) ¾ ¾® PbSO4(s) + 2e–
Cathode: PbO2(s) + SO4 (aq) + 4H+(aq) + 2e– ¾
2–
¾® PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)
Overall reaction: Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) ¾ ¾® 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)
(b) Anode: Zn ¾ ¾® Zn2+ + 2e–
Cathode: Ag2O + H2O + 2e– ¾ ¾® 2Ag + 2OH–
Cell reaction: ¾® Zn2+ + 2Ag + 2OH–;

Zn + Ag2O + H2O ¾ n=2
E ocell = E ocathode – E oanode = o
EAg +
/Ag
– E oZn 2+ / Zn
= 0.80 V – (– 0.76 V)
E ocell = 1.56 V
DGo = – nF E ocell
\ DGo = – 2 × 96500 C mol–1 × 1.56 V = – 301080 J mol–1
DGo = – 301.08 kJ mol–1
OR
(a) Molar conductivity of a solution at a given concentration is the conductance of the volume V of
the solution containing one mole of electrolyte kept between two electrodes with area of cross
section A and distance of unit length.
k ´ 1000
Lm = k ´ V =
c
where k is the conductivity and V is the volume of solution containing one mole of the
electrolyte and c is the molar concentration.
Molar conductivity increases with decrease 400
in concentration or increase in dilution as the
Weak electrolyte (CH3COOH)
number of ions as well as the mobility of
Lm/(S cm2 mol–1)

ions increases with increase in dilution.
For strong electrolytes, the number of ions
does not increase appreciably on dilution and
200
only mobility of ions increases due to
decrease in interionic attractions. Therefore,
Strong electrolyte (KCl)
L m increases a little as shown in figure by a
straight line. For weak electrolytes, number
of ions as well as mobility of ions increases
on dilution which results in a very large
0 0.2 0.4
increase in molar conductivity, especially at c1/2/(mol/L)1/2
infinite dilution (i.e., concentration, c ® 0)
as shown by curve in figure.
(b) R = 1500 W; k = 0.146 × 10–3 S cm–1
Cell constant = k × R
Cell constant = 0.146 × 10–3 S cm–1 × 1500 W
= 0.219 cm–1
29. (a) (i) P4 + 10SO2Cl2 ¾ ¾® 4PCl5 + 10SO2
S
(ii) XeF6 + 3H2O ¾ ¾® XeO3 + 6HF
(b) (i) There are three bond pairs and one lone pair of electrons around S atoms O O–
in SO32–. Therefore according to VSEPR theory, SO32– should be O–
2–
pyramidal. The angle O—S—O is greater than 90°. SO3
F
Cl F
(ii) There are three bond pairs and two lone pairs of electrons around Cl F
atom in ClF3. Therefore according to VSEPR theory, ClF3 should be
bent T-shaped. The angle F—Cl—F is less than 90°. ClF3
(iii) There are two bond pairs and three lone pairs of electrons around F
Xe atoms in XeF2. Therefore according to VSEPR theory, XeF2
should be linear. The angle F—Xe—F is greater than 90°.
Xe
OR
F
(a) (i) 6NaOH + 3Cl2 ¾
¾® 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2O XeF2
(hot and conc)
(ii) XeF4 + O2F2 ¾
¾® XeF6 + O2
(b) (i) (ii) (iii)
O O O O
F F
P S S Xe
H OH O O O F F
H OH HO
H3PO2 H2S2O7 XeOF4
30. (a) (i) The carbonyl group of aldehydes and ketones is reduced to CH2 group on treatment with
zinc-amalgam and concentrated hydrochloric acid. The reaction is known as Clemmensen
reduction
Zn–Hg
C—O HCl
CH2 + H2O
Zn–Hg
CH3COCH3 + 4(H) HCl
CH3CH2CH3 + H2O
Acetone Propane
(ii) Carboxylic acids having an a-hydrogen are halogenated at the a-position on treatment
with chlorine or bromine in the presence of small amount of red phosphorus to give
a-halocarboxylic acids. This reaction is called Hell–Volhard–Zelinsky reaction.
a (i) X2/red P
R—CH2—COOH R—CH—COOH (X = Cl, Br)
(ii) H3O+
Carboxylic acid X
a-Halocarboxylic acid
(b) (i) CH3CH2CN H3O+ +NH3

CH3CH2COOH CH3CH2CONH2
D D
Ethyl cyanide
Br2/KOH
K2Cr2O7/H2SO4 HNO2
CH3COOH CH3CH2OH CH3CH2NH2
Ethanoic acid
(ii) CH3—CH2—CH2—CH2—OH ¾CrO

¾ 3¾- H 2 SO4
¾¾® CH3—CH2—CH2—COOH
(Jones reagent )
Butan-1-ol Butanoic acid
COOH COOH
Br2/FeBr3
(iii) Br
Benzoic acid m-Bromobenzoic acid
OR
(a) (i) When aldol condensation is carried out between two different aldehydes and/or ketones, it
is called cross aldol condensation.
O O – O
OH
C—H + C—CH3 293 K CH—CH—C—
Benzaldehyde Benzalacetophenone
(Major product)
(ii) Sodium salt of carboxylic acids on heating with soda lime lose carbon dioxide and form
hydrocarbons. This reaction is called decarboxylation.
– +
R — CO O Na ¾NaOH¾ ¾and
¾CaO
¾® R — H + Na 2 CO3
Sodium carboxylate D Hydrocarbon
(b) (i) Pentan-2-one when treated with NaOI (I2/NaOH) gives yellow precipitate of iodoform
but pentan-3-one does not give this test.
CH3—CH2—CH2—COCH3 + 3NaOI ¾ ¾® CH3CH2CH2COONa + CHI3 ¯ + 2NaOH
Pentan-2-one Sodium Iodoform
hypoiodite (Yellow ppt.)
(ii) Benzaldehyde being an aldehyde gives silver mirror with Tollen’s reagent but
acetophenone being a ketone does not give this test.
C6H6CHO + 2[Ag(NH3)2]+ + 3OH– ¾ ¾® C6H5COO– + 2Ag¯ + 4NH3 + 2H2O
Benzaldehyde Tollen’s reagent Silver mirror
(iii) Benzoic acid produces brisk effervescence with sodium bicarbonate solution while phenol
does not.
C6H5COOH + NaHCO3 ¾ ¾® C6H5COONa + CO2 + H2O
Benzoic acid Sodium
bicarbonate

1. Metallic solids conduct electricity in solid state while ionic solids are insulators in solid state.
11. (i) The positively charged colloidal particles of Fe(OH)3 get coagulated by negatively charged Cl–
ions provided by electrolyte sodium chloride.
(ii) The path of light is not visible when light is passed through NaCl solution but visible when
light is passed through a sol due to scattering of light by colloidal particles.
13. (i) The role of electrolyte is two-fold:
l It covers the melting point of the mixture to about 1250 K.
l It increases the electrical conductivity of the mixture.
(ii) When nickel is heated with carbon monoxide it forms a volatile compound tetracarbonyl nickel,
Ni(CO)4 which on further heating at higher temperature decomposes to give pure nickel.
Ni + 4CO ¾330 ¾–¾¾350 K
® Ni(CO)4; Ni(CO)4 ¾450¾–¾¾470 K
® Ni + 4CO
Impure nickel Pure nickel
18. Structural difference

DNA RNA
1. The sugar present in DNA is 1. The sugar present in RNA is D-(–)-ribose.
2-deoxy-D-(–)-ribose.
2. DNA has double stranded a-helix structure. 2. RNA has single stranded a-helix structure.
3. DNA contains cytosine and thymine as 3. RNA contains cytosine and uracil as pyrimidine
pyrimidine bases. bases.
4. DNA molecules are very large and their molecular 4. RNA molecules are much smaller and their
mass may vary from 6 × 106 – 16 × 106 u. molecular may vary from 20,000–40,000 u.
Thymine is present in DNA.
20. DTb = 100.42°C – 100.00°C = 0.42°C or 0.42 K; WA = 500 g
Kb = 0.52 K kg mol–1; MB = 92 g mol–1
DTb ´ M B ´ WA
WB = , we get
K b ´1000
0. 42 K ´ 92 g mol –1 ´ 500 g
WB = = 37.73 g
0.512 K kg mol –1 ´ 1000 g kg –1
22. (i) Because strong ligand causes spin pairing giving rise to diamagnetic octahedral complex which
are very stable and have very large crystal field stabilization energy. This splitting energy
overcomes the ionization enthalpy.
(ii) CO is capable of accepting an appreciable amount of electron density from a filled metal
d-orbital into vacant antibonding p*-orbital of its own.This type of p interaction increases the
value of crystal field stabilization energy. This explain why CO is a stronger complexing
reagent than NH3.
(iii) Ni in [Ni(CO)4] is sp3 hybridized. Hence, it is tetrahedral.
In [Ni(CN)4]2–, the Ni2+ is dsp2 hybridized. Hence, it has square planar geometry.
4s 4p
3d
Ni in [Ni(CO)4] Tetrahedral
geometry
CO CO CO CO
sp3 hybridization
Square planar
Ni in [Ni(CN)4]2– geometry
CN CN CN CN
sp2 hybridization
23. (i) Cr2+ is a reducing agent as its configuration changes from d4 to d3, the later having a half-filled
t2g level. On the other hand, the change from Mn3+ to Mn2+ results in the extra stable half-filled (d5)
configuration and hence Mn3+ is an oxidizing agent.
(ii) This is due to very small energy gaps between 5f, 6d and 7s subshells in actinoids.
(iii) In aqueous solutions, the transition metal ions which have partially filled d-orbitals undergo d-d
transition by absorbing light from visible region and radiate complementary colour.
30. (a) (i)

O O O
+ +
H2N — C — NH — NH2 H2N —
— C — NH — NH2 H2N — C —
— NH — NH2
Semicarbazide
Although semicarbazide has two —NH2 group but one which is directly attached to C—O
is involved in the resonance as shown above. Consequently, electron density on this
—NH2 group decreases and hence it does not act as a nucleophile. On the other hand, the
lone pair of electrons on the other —NH2 group is not involved in resonance and hence is
available for nucleophilic attack on the C—O group of aldehydes and ketones.
(ii) Due to presence of three methyl groups, the nucleophilic attack by CN– ion does not occur
due to steric hindrance in 2, 4, 6-trimethyl cylcohexanone. As there is no such steric
hindrance in cyclohexanone so nucleophilic attack by the CN– ion occurs readily and
hence cyclohexanone cyanohydrin is obtained in good yield.
CHO
(b) The compound is CH2CH3
2-ethyl benzaldehyde
The reactions involved in the question are:
NO2 NO2
CHO + N2NHN NO2 CH—NHN NO2
CH2CH3 CH2CH3
2-Ethylbenzaldehyde 2, 4-DNP 2, 4-DNP derivative
CHO + 2[Ag(NH3)2]+ + 3OH COO– + 2Ag¯ + 2H2O + 4NH3

CH2CH3 CH2CH3
Tollen’s reagent Silver mirror
–
OH
2 CHO COO– + CH2OH
CH2CH3 CH2CH3 CH2CH3
+
KMnO4/KOH H 3O
CHO COO– COOH
–
CH2CH3 COO COOH
2-Ethyl benzaldehyde 1, 2-Benzenedicarboxylic acid
OR
(a) (i) Phenol gives a violet colouration with neutral FeCl3 solution while benzoic acid gives buff
coloured precipitate of ferric benzoate.
6C6H5OH + FeCl3 ¾ ¾® [Fe(OC6H5)6]3– + 3H+ + 3HCl
Violet complex
3C6H5COOH + FeCl3 ¾
¾® (C6H5COO)3Fe + 3HCl
Benzoic acid Buff coloured ppt.
(ii) Acetophenone being a methyl ketone when treated with NaOI(I2/NaOH) gives yellow
precipitate of iodoform while benzophenone does not give this test.
C6H5COCH3 + 3NaOI ¾ ¾® C6H5COONa + CHI3 + 2NaOH
Acetophenone Sodium benzoate Iodoform
(Yellow ppt.)
O
CHO
C O
(b) (i) C6H5 (ii) CH3—C—CH3 (iii)
Bezophenone Acetone NO2

p-Nitro benzaldehyde
5. CH3—CH2—CH2—CH—CH—
—CH2
|
OH
20. DTf = 0°C – (– 0.34 °C) = 0.34 °C or 0.34 K
WB = 15.0 g; WA = 450 g; Kf = 1.86 K kg mol–1
K f ´ WB ´ 1000
MB = , we get
DTf ´ WA
1.86 K kg mol –1 ´ 15. 0 g ´ 1000 g kg –1

MB = = 182.35 g mol–1
0.34 K ´ 450 g
22. (i) Because of large number of unpaired electrons in their atoms, the transition metals have strong
interatomic interactions and hence stronger bonding between atoms, resulting in higher
enthalpies of atomization.
(ii) In the same group of d-block elements, the 4d and 5d transition elements are larger in size than
than those of 3d elements. Hence, the valence electrons are less tightly held and form
metal–metal bond more frequently.
(iii) Mn3+(d4) is less stable than Mn2+ (d5, half filled) while Fe3+ (d5, half filled) is more stable than
Fe2+ (d4). That is why Mn2+ is more resistance than Fe2+ towards oxidation.
23. (i) [Pt(NH3)2ClNO2]: Diamminechloridonitrito-N-platinum (II); Pt2+ = 5d8
6s 6p
5d
× × = Electron pair from the
×× ×× ×× ×× NH3, Cl– and NO2
dsp2 hybrid
Structure = Square planar; Magnetic behaviour : Diamagnetic

(ii) [CO(NH3)4Cl2]Cl: Tetraamminedichloridocobalt (III) chloride; Co3+ = 3d6

4s 4p
3d
× × = Electron pair from
×× ×× ×× ×× ×× ×× ligands NH3 and Cl–
d2sp3 hybrid
Structure = Octahedral; Magnetic behaviour : Diamagnetic

(iii) Ni(CO)4 : Tetracrabonyl nickel(o); Ni = 3d8 4s2
4s 4p
3d
×× ×× ×× ×× ligand CO
sp3 hybrid
Structure = Tetrahedral; Magnetic behaviour : Diamagnetic
27. (i) Antacids: Chemical substances which remove excess acid in the stomach and raise the pH to
appropriate level, e.g., sodium hydrogencarbonate, a mixture of aluminium and magnesium
hydroxide, ranitidine, etc.
(ii) Disinfectants: These are the chemical substances which kill microorganisms or stop their
growth but are harmful to human tissues, e.g., phenol (1%), chlorine in concentration of 0.2 to
0.4 pm in aqueous solution, SO2, etc.
(iii) Enzymes: Enzymes are globular proteins with high molecular mass ranging from 15,000 to
1,000,000 g mol–1, which form colloidal solution in water. A number of reactions that occur in
the body of animals and plants to maintain the life processes are catalyzed by enzymes,
therefore enzymes are termed as biochemical catalysts.
30. O O
(a) (i) F (ii)
F
F S S
Xe
F
O O O O
F F OH HO
Distorted octahedral
(H2S2O8)
XeF6
(b) (i) This is because in NH3 nitrogen is more electronegative than hydrogen while in NF3,
nitrogen is less electronegative than fluorine.
Cl
(ii) In gaseous and liquid phases PCl5 has a trigonal bipyramidal
Cl
240 pm
structure. The three equatorial P—Cl bonds are equivalent,

while the two axial bonds are longer then equitorial bonds.
This is due to the fact that the axial bond pairs suffer greater P 202 pm
repulsion as compared to equatorial bond pairs. Cl Cl
Cl
(iii) In vapour state sulphur partly exists as S2 molecule which has two unpaired electrons in
the antibonding p* orbitals like O2 and hence it exhibits paramagnetism.
OR
(a) (i) XeF4 + SbF5 ¾ ¾® [XeF3] [SbF6]–
+
(ii) Cl2 + 3F2(excess) ¾573 ¾¾ K

® 2ClF3
(b) (i) As N N triple bond (941.4 kJ mol–1) is much stronger than P—P single bond (213 k J mol–1),
therefore nitrogen is much less reactive than phosphorus.
(ii) Due to inert pair effect stability of +5 oxidation decreases down the group 15.
(iii) In NO2–, nitrogen has a lone pair of electrons. As lone pair-bond pair repulsion is greater
than bond pair-bond repulsion, thus O—N—O bond angle in NO2– is less than NO2+.
zzz
ALL INDIA–2012

1. How may the conductivity of an intrinsic semiconductor be increased?
2. Define ‘peptization’.
3. How is copper extracted from a low grade ore of it?
4. Which is a stronger reducing agent, SbH3 or BiH3, and why?
5. What happens when bromine attacks CH2—CH—CH2—C CH?
6. Write the IUPAC name of the following:
O
||
CH3—CH2—CH— — CH — C— H
7. Write the structure of the product obtained when glucose is oxidised with nitric acid.
8. Differentiate between disinfectants and antiseptics.
9. Express the relation among cell constant, resistance of the solution in the cell and conductivity of the
solution. How is molar conductivity of a solution related to its conductivity?
OR
The molar conductivity of a 1.5 M solution of an electrolyte is found to be 138.9 S cm2 mol–1.
Calculate the conductivity of this solution.
10. A reaction is of second order with respect to a reactant. How is its rate affected if the concentration of
the reactant is (i) doubled (ii) reduced to half?
11. Which methods are usually employed for purifying the following metals
(i) Nickel
(ii) Germanium
Mention the principle behind each of them.
12. Explain the following facts giving appropriate reason in each case:
(i) NF3 is an exothermic compound whereas NCl3 is not.
(ii) All the bonds in SF4 are not equivalent.

(i) Cr2 O2– –
7 +I + H ¾
+
¾®
(ii) MnO–4 + NO–2 + H+ ¾
¾®
14. Explain the mechanism of acid catalysed hydration of an alkene to form corresponding alcohol.
15. Explain the following behaviours:
(i) Alcohols are more soluble in water than the hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses.
(ii) Ortho-nitrophenol is more acidic than ortho-methoxyphenol.
16. Describe the following, giving the relevant chemical equation in each case:
(i) Carbylamine reaction
(ii) Hoffmann’s bromamide reaction
(i) C6H5N2Cl + H3PO2 + H2O ¾ ¾®
(ii) C6H5NH2 + Br2(aq) ¾ ¾®
18. What are food preservatives? Name two such substances.
19. Copper crystallises with face centred cubic unit cell. If the radius of copper atom is 127.8 pm,
calculate the density of copper metal.
(Atomic mass of Cu = 63.55 u and Avogadro’s number NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol–1)
OR
Iron has a body centred cubic unit cell with a cell dimension of 286.65 pm. The density of iron is
7.87 g cm–3. Use this information to calculate Avogadro’s number. (At. mass of Fe = 56.0 u)
20. The electrical resistance of a column of 0.05 M NaOH solution of diameter 1 cm and length 50 cm is
5.55 × 103 ohm. Calculate its resistivity, conductivity and molar conductivity.
21. The reaction, N2(g) + O2(g) l 2NO(g) contributes to air pollution whenever a fuel is burnt in air
at a high temperature. At 1500 K, equilibrium constant K for it is 1.0 × 10–5. Suppose in a case [N2]=
0.80 mol L–1 and [O2] = 0.20 mol L–1 before any reaction occurs. Calculate the equilibrium
concentrations of the reactants and the product after the mixture has been heated to 1500 K.
22. Explain the following terms giving a suitable example for each:
(i) Aerosol (ii) Emulsion
(iii) Micelle
(i) Among lanthanoids, Ln (III) compounds are predominant. However, occasionally in solutions
or in solid compounds, +2 and +4 ions are also obtained.
(ii) The E oM 2+ / M for copper is positive (0.34 V). Copper is the only metal in the first series of transition
elements showing this behaviour.
(iii) The metallic radii of the third (5d) series of transition metals are nearly the same as those of the
corresponding members of the second series.
24. Name the following coordination entities and draw the structures of their stereoisomers:
(i) [Co(en)2 Cl2]+ (en = ethan-1, 2-diamine)
(ii) [Cr(C2O4)3]3–
(iii) [Co(NH3)3 Cl3]

(Atomic numbers: Cr = 24, Co = 27)
25. Answer the following questions:
(i) What is meant by chirality of a compound? Give an example.
(ii) Which one of the following compounds is more easily hydrolysed by KOH and why?
CH3CHClCH2CH3 or CH3CH2CH2Cl
(iii) Which one undergoes SN2 substitution reaction faster and why?
I or Cl
26. What is essentially the difference between a-glucose and b-glucose? What is meant by pyranose
structure of glucose?
27. Differentiate between thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers. Give one example of each.
28. (a) Define the following terms:
(i) Mole fraction (ii) Ideal solution
(b) 15.0 g of an unknown molecular material is dissolved in 450 g of water. The resulting solution
freezes at – 0.34°C. What is the molar mass of the material? (Kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol–1)
OR
(a) Explain the following:
(i) Henry’s law about dissolution of a gas in a liquid.
(ii) Boiling point elevation constant for a solvent.
(b) A solution of glycerol (C3H8O3) in water was prepared by dissolving some glycerol in 500 g of
water. This solution has a boiling point of 100.42°C. What mass of glycerol was dissolved to
make this solution? (Kb for water = 0.512 K kg mol–1)
29. (a) Draw the molecular structures of the following compounds
(i) N2O5 (ii) XeOF4
( i) Sulphur has a greater tendency for catenation than oxygen.
(ii) ICl is more reactive than I2.
(iii) Despite lower value of its electron gain enthalpy with negative sign, fluorine (F2) is a
stronger oxidising agent than Cl2.
OR
(i) Cu + HNO3 (dilute) ¾ ¾®
(ii) XeF4 + O2F2 ¾ ¾®
(ii) Oxygen is a gas but sulphur a solid.
(iii) The halogens are coloured.
30. (a) Write a suitable chemical equation to complete each of the following transformations:
(i) Butan-1-ol to butanoic acid
(ii) 4-Methylacetophenone to benzene-1, 4-dicarboxlylic acid.
(b) An organic compound with molecular formula C9H10O forms 2,4-DNP derivative, reduces
Tollen’s reagent and undergoes Cannizzaro’s reaction. On vigorous oxidation it gives
1,2-benzenedicarboxylic acid. Identify the compound.
OR
(a) Give chemical tests to distinguish between
(i) Propanol and propanone
(b) Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their property as indicated:
(i) Acetaldehyde, Acetone, Methyl tert-butyl ketone (reactivity towards HCN)
(ii) Benzoic acid, 3,4-Dinitrobenzoic acid, 4-Methoxybenzoic acid (acid strength)
(iii) CH3CH2CH(Br)COOH, CH3CH(Br)CH2COOH, (CH3)2CHCOOH (acid strength)

1. Which stoichiometric defect increases the density of a solid?
3. What is the role of collectors in Froth Floatation process?
6. Write the IUPAC name of Ph—CH—CH—CHO.
17. Explain the cleaning action of soap. Why do soaps not work in hard water?
20. A voltaic cell is set up at 25°C with the following half cells:
Al/Al3+ (0.001 M) and Ni/Ni2+ (0.50 M)
Write an equation for the reaction that occurs when the cell generates an electric current and
o o
E Ni 2+
/ Ni
= – 0.25 V; EAl 3+
/Al
= – 1.66 V. (log 8 × 10–6 = – 0.54)

(i) Many of the transition elements are known to form interstitial compounds.
(ii) There is a general increase in density from titanium (Z = 22) to copper (Z = 29).
(iii) The members of the actinoid series exhibit a larger number of oxidation states than the
corresponding members of the lanthanoid series.
27. Explain the following terms giving a suitable example for each:
(i) Elastomers (ii) Condensation polymers
(iii) Addition polymers
(i) H3PO2 (ii) ClF3
(i) Nitrogen is much less reactive than phosphorus.
(ii) Despite having greater polarity, hydrogen fluoride boils at a lower temperature than water.
(iii) Sulphur has a greater tendency for catenation than oxygen in the same group.
OR
(a) Draw the structures of the following molecules:
(i) N2O5 (ii) HClO 4
(i) H2S is more acidic than H2O.
(ii) Fluorine does not exhibit any positive oxidation state.
(iii) Helium forms no real chemical compound.

Questions Uncommon to Set–I and II
1. What are n-type semiconductors?
4. What is the basicity of H3PO2 acid and why?
5. Write the IUPAC name of the following:
H CH3
H H
H Br
7. Write a reaction which shows that all the carbon atoms in glucose are linked in a straight chain.
8. What is the cause of a feeling of depression in human beings? Name a drug which can be useful in
treating this depression.
11. Explain the role of each of the following:
(i) NaCN in the extraction of silver.
(ii) SiO2 in the extraction of copper.
18. Differentiate between disinfectants and antiseptics. Give one example of each group.
22. Write three distinct features of chemisorptions which are not found in physisorptions.
23. Explain each of the following observations:
(i) With the same d-orbital configuration (d4), Cr2+ is a reducing agent while Mn3+ is an oxidising
agent.
(ii) Actinoids exhibit a much larger number of oxidation states than the lanthanoids.
(iii) There is hardly any increase in atomic size with increasing atomic numbers in a series of
transition metals.
24. Name the following coordination entities and describe their structures:
(i) [Fe(CN)6]4– (ii) [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]+
2–
(iii) [Ni(CN)4]
(Atomic Numbers Fe = 26, Cr = 24, Ni = 28)
26. Define the following as related to proteins:
(i) Peptide linkage
(ii) Primary structure
(iii) Denaturation
Solutions
1. The conductivity is increased by adding an appropriate amount of impurity which is electron rich or
election deficient as compared to intrinsic semiconductor.
2. The process of converting a precipitate into colloidal sol by shaking it with dispersion medium in the
presence of small amount of electrolyte is called peptisation .
3. Copper is extracted by hydrometallurgy from low grade copper ores. It is leached out using acid or
bacteria. The solution containing Cu2+ ion is treated with scrap iron or H2.
Cu2+(aq) + Fe(s) ¾ ¾® Fe2+(aq) + Cu(s)
OR
Cu2+ (aq) + H2(g) ¾ ¾® Cu(s) + 2H+(aq)
4. BiH3, as BiH3 has lower bond dissociation enthalpy than SbH3.
5. The reddish brown colour of bromine is discharged.
6. Pent-2-enal
7. CHO COOH
| HNO3
|
(CHOH)4 (CHOH)4
(O)
| |
CH2—OH COOH
Glucose Saccharic acid
8. Disinfectants are applied to non-living objects whereas antiseptics are applied to living tissues.
1
9. Conductivity (k) = × Cell constant
Resistance ( R)
Conductivity ( k) ´ 1000
Molar Conductivity ( L m ) =
Molarity ( M )
OR
k ´1000 L m ´ M
Lm = =
M 1000
138.95 cm 2 mol –1 ´ 1.5 mol L–1
k= = 0.208355 cm–1
1000 cm 3 L–1
10. Rate = k[R]2
(i) If [R] is doubled, Rate = k[2R]2 = 4k[R]2 = 4 times
2
[R ] éR ù 1 2 1
(ii) If [R] is reduced to , Rate = k ê ú = k [R ] = th
2 ë2û 4 4
11. (i) Nickel is purified by vapour phase refining. In this method nickel is heated in a stream of
carbon monoxide forming a volatile complex, nickel tetracarbonyl (Ni(CO)4), which on further
heating decomposes to give pure nickel.
Ni + 4CO ¾330– 350K

¾ ¾¾ ® Ni(CO)4;
Ni(CO)4 ¾450 ¾ –¾
470K
¾® Ni + 4CO
(ii) Germanium is purified by zone refining. This method is based on the principle that the
impurities are more soluble in molten state than in the solid state of the metal.
12. (i) This is due to lower bond dissociation enthalpy of fluorine than chlorine and small and strong
bond formed by fluorine with nitrogen.
(ii) SF4 has trigonal bipyramidal structure in which one of the equatorial positions is occupied by a
lone pair of electrons. The two equatorial S–F bonds are equivalent, while the two axial S–F
bonds are longer than equatorial bonds. This is because the axial bond pairs suffer more
repulsion as compared to equatorial bond pairs.
13. (i) Cr2O72– + 14H+ + 6e– ¾® 2Cr3+ + 7H2O
¾
2I– ¾¾® I2 + 2e–]×3
Cr2O72– + 6I– + 14H+ ¾® 2Cr3+ + 3I2 + 7H2O
¾
(ii) MnO4– + 8H+ + 5e– ¾

¾® Mn2+ + 4H2O]×2
NO2– + H2O ¾¾® NO3– + 2H+ + 2e–]×5
2MnO4– + 5NO2– + 6H+ ¾® 2Mn2+ + 5NO3– + 3H2O
¾
+
H
14. C—C + H2O C—C
H OH
The mechanism of the reaction involves the following three steps:
(i) Protonation of alkene to form carbocation by electrophilic attack of H3O+.
+ +
H2O + H H3O ;
H H
+ +
C—C + H—O —H —C—C + H2O
(ii) Nucleophilic attack of water on carbocation.

H H
+ +
(iii) Deprotonation to form an alcohol.

H H H OH
+ +
—C—C—O—H + H2O —C—C— + H3O
15. (i) This is due to their ability to form hydrogen bonds with water molecules.
(ii) Due to —R and —I effect of —NO2 group, the electron density in the O—H bond decreases in
ortho-nitrophenol and hence the release of H+ ion becomes easy. On the other hand, due to +R
effect of the —OCH3 group, the electron density in the O—H bond in ortho-methoxyphenol
increases, thereby making the release of H+ ion difficult.
16. (i) Carbylamine reaction: Aliphatic and aromatic primary amines when heated with chloroform and
ethanolic potassium hydroxide form carbylamines or isocyanides which are foul smelling
substances. Secondary and tertiary amines do not show this reaction.
D
R—NH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH (alc.) ¾¾ ® RNC + 3KCl + 3H2O
D
C6H5NH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH (alc.) ¾¾® C6H5NC + 3KCl + 3H2O
Aniline Phenyl
isocyanide
(ii) Hoffmann’s bromamide reaction: When a primary acid amide is heated with bromine in an
aqueous or ethanolic solution of NaOH, a primary amine is obtained. The amine so obtained
contains one carbon less than that present in the amide.
RCONH2 + Br2 + 4NaOH ¾ ¾® R—NH2 + Na2 CO3 + 2NaBr + 2H2O
Acid amide
C6H5CONH2 + Br2 + 4NaOH ¾
¾® C6H5NH2 + Na2CO3 + 2NaBr + 2H2O
Benzamide Aniline
17. (i) C6H5N2Cl + H3PO2 + H2O ¾

¾® C6H6 + N2 + H3PO3 + HCl
Benzene Benzene
diazonium chloride
NH2 NH2
Br Br
(ii) + 3Br2(aq) + 3HBr
Br
Aniline 2,4,6-Tribromoaniline
18. Food preservatives are the chemical substances which are added to food materials to prevent their
spoilage and to retain their nutritive value for long periods. Preservatives prevent the rancidity of food
and inhibit the growth of or kill the microorganisms. Two such substances are sodium benzoate and
salts of ascorbic acid.
19. For fcc, a = 2 2r
\ a = 2 2 × 127.8 pm = 361.4 pm = 361.4 × 10–10 cm
Here, z = 4; M = 63.55 g mol–1; a = 3.614 × 10–8 cm; NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol –1
z´ M
d= 3 , we get
a ´ NA
4 ´ 63.55 g mol –1
d= –8 3 23 –1
= 8.95 g cm–3
(3.614 ´ 10 cm) ´ 6.02 ´ 10 mol
OR
–1 –3
Here, z = 2, M = 56 g mol , d = 7.87 g cm
a = 286.65 pm = 286 .65 × 10–10cm = 2.8
z´ M
NA = , we get
a3 ´ d
2 ´ 56 g mol –1
NA =
( 286.65 ´ 10 -10 cm) 3 ´ 7.87 g cm –3
= 6.042 × 1023 mol–1
2
æ1 ö
20. A = pr 2 = 3.14 × ç cm ÷ = 0.785 cm2; l = 50 cm
è2 ø
R ´ A 5.55 ´ 10 3 ohm ´ 0.785cm 2
Resistivity = r = = = 87.135 ohm cm
l 50 cm
1 1
Conductivity = k = = = 0.01148 s cm–1
r 87.135 ohm cm
k ´ 1000 0.01148 s cm –1 ´ 1000 cm 3 L–1
Molar Conductivity = L m = =
M 0.05 mol L–1
= 229. 6 s cm2 mol–1
21 N2 + O2 ¾ ¾® 2NO
Initial conc. in mol L–1 0.8 0.2 0
Change in conc. in mol L–1 –x –x +2x
–1
Equilibrium conc. in mol L 0.8–x 0.2 – x 2x
2
[NO] ( 2x ) 2
KC = \ 1 × 10–5 =
[N2 ][O2 ] ( 0.8 - x ) ( 0.2 - x )
As x << 0.2, therefore 0.8 – x » 0.8 and 0.2 – x » 0.2
4x 2
\ 1 × 10–5 = Þ 4x2 = 16 × 10–7
016
.
x = 6.324 × 10–4 mol L–1,
2x = 2 × 6.324 × 10–4 = 12.648 × 10–4 mol L–1
Thus at equilibrium
[N2] = 0.8 mol L–1, [O2] = 0.2 mol L–1 and [NO] = 1.265 × 10–3 mol L–1
22. (i) A colloidal system in which dispersion medium is gas and dispersed phase is either solid or
liquid is called aerosol, e.g., smoke, fog, etc.
(ii) An emulsion is a colloidal system in which both the dispersed phase and the dispersion medium
are liquids, e.g., milk, cod liver oil, etc.
(iii) There are some substances such as soap which at low concentration behave as normal
electrolytes, but at higher concentration exhibit colloidal behaviour due to the formation of
aggregates. The aggregated particles thus formed are known as micelles or associated colloids.
23. (i) Lanthanoid metals show +2 and +4 oxidation states to attain extra stable f 0 and f 7 configurations.
(ii) The main reason for positive E°(0.34 V) value for copper is that the sum of enthalpies for
sublimation and ionisation is not balanced by hydration enthalpy.
(iii) This is due to lanthanoid contraction which arises due to filling of 4 f-orbitals which have poor
shielding effect.
24. (i) [CO(en)2Cl2]+ : Dichloride bis (ethane-1,2-diamine) cobalt (III) ion
Cl + Cl + Cl +
Cl Cl
en en
Co en Co Co en
en
Cl en
trans cis
Optical isomers
Geometrical isomers
(ii) [Cr(C2O4)3]3– : Trioxalato chromium (III) ion

3– 3–
OX OX
OX
Cr Cr
OX
OX OX
dextro mirror laevo
(iii) [CO(NH3)3Cl3] : Triammine trichloride cobalt (III)

NH 3 NH 3
Cl NH 3 NH 3 Cl
Co Co
Cl NH 3 Cl Cl
Cl NH 3
cis-or-fac-isomer trans-or mer-isomer
25. (i) Chiral molecules (or compounds) are those molecules which are non-superimposible on their
mirror images and this property is known as chirality. Butan-2-ol is an example of chiral molecule.
+
(ii) Due to +I effect of alkyl groups the 2° carbonium ion CH3—CH—CH2—CH3 derived from
+
sec. butyl chloride is more stable than the 1° carbonium ion CH3—CH2—CH2 derived from
n-propyl chloride. Therefore sec. butyl chloride gets hydrolyzed more easily than n-propyl
chloride under SN1 conditions.
(iii) I
As Iodine is a better leaving group due to its larger size, it will be released at a faster rate in the
presence of incoming nucleophile.
26. a-Glucose and b-Glucose differ only in the configuration of hydroxy group at C1 and are called
anomers and the C1 carbon is called anomeric carbon. The six membered cyclic structure of glucose is
called pyranose structural (a-or b-), in analogy with pyrane. The cyclic structure of glucose is more
correctly represented by Haworth structure as given below.
6 CH2OH 6 CH2OH
5
O 5
O
O H H H H H OH
4 1 4 1
OH H OH H
HO 3
OH HO 3
H
2 2
Pyran
H OH H OH
a-D-(+) Glucopyranose b-D-(+) Glucopyranose
27.
(i) These polymers are linear or slightly branched (i) These polymers are cross linked or heavily
chain molecules. branched molecules.
(ii) Soften on heating and harden on cooling and (ii) On heating undergo extensive cross linking in
can be remoulded. moulds and become infusible.
28. (a) (i) Mole fraction of a particular component in a solution may be defined as the ratio of
number of moles of that component to the sum of the moles of all the components present
in the solution. For a solution of two components A and B,
nA
Mole fraction of A, xA =
nA + nB
nB
Mole fraction of B, xB =
nA + nB
(ii) A solution which obeys Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentration and temperature,
and during the formation of which no change in enthalpy and volume takes place is called an
ideal solution. Thus for an ideal solution,
(i) Raoult’s law is obeyed, i.e., PA = PA° xA and PB = PB° xB
(ii) DHmix = 0
(iii) DVmix = 0
(b) WB = 15.0g; WA = 450g; D Kf = 1.86 K kg mol L–1
D Tf = 0°C – (– 0.34°C) = 0.34°C or 0.34 K

K f ´ WB ´ 1000
MB =
WA ´ DTf
1.86 K kg mol –1 ´ 15.0 g ´ 1000 g kg –1 –1
MB = = 182.35 g mol
450 g ´ 0.34 K
OR
(a) (i) Henry’s law states that the solubility of a gas in a liquid is directly proportional to the
pressure of the gas.
(ii) The boiling point elevation constant may be defined as the elevation in boiling point when
one mole of a non-volatile solute is dissolved in one thousand grams of solvent.
(b) WA = 500g; MB = 92g mol–1; Kb = 0.512 K kg mol–1
DTb = 100.42°C – 100 °C = 0.42°C or 0.42K
Substituting the values in the expression;
M ´ DTb ´ WA
WB = B
K b ´ 1000
92 g mol -1 ´ 0.42 K ´ 500 g
WB = = 37.73 g
0.512 K kg mol –1 ´ 1000
O O O O O O
( a) (i)
29. N N N N
O O O O
(N2O5)
O
F F
(ii)
Xe
F F
XeOF4
(b) (i) It is because S–S single bond is stronger than O–O single bond.
(ii) This is because the bond dissociation enthalpy of I–Cl bond is lower than that of I–I bond.
(iii) It is due to
l low enthalpy of dissociation of F–F bond
–
l high hydration enthalpy of F .
OR
(a) (i) 3Cu + 8HNO3 (dilute) ¾ ¾® 3Cu (NO3)2 + 2NO + 4H2O
(ii) XeF4 + O2F2 ¾ ¾® XeF6 + O2
(b) (i) It is because P–P single bond is stronger than N–N single bond.
(ii) Because of its small size, oxygen is capable of forming pp–pp bond and exist as diatomic
O2 molecule. The intermolecular forces in oxygen are weak van der Waals force, due to
which it is a gas at room temperature. On the other hand, sulphur, due to its larger size
prefers to form S–S single bond and exist as octaatomic S8 molecule having puckered ring
structure. Because of larger size the force of attraction holding the S8 molecules together
are much stronger. Hence sulphur is a solid at room temperature.
(iii) All halogens are coloured. This is due to absorption of radiation in visible region which
results in the excitation of outer electrons to higher energy level while the remaining light
is transmitted. The colour of the halogen is the colour of transmitted light.
CrO3 - H2 SO4
30. (a) (i) CH3CH2CH2CH2.OH ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾® CH3CH2CH2COOH
Butan-ol Butanoic acid
–+
COCH3 COOK COOH
(ii) KMnO4/KOH dil. H2SO4
D – K2SO4
–+
CH3 COOK COOH
4-Methyl Benzene-1,4-
acetophenone dicarboxylic acid
(b) The compound is 2-ethyl benzaldehyde and the reactions involved in the question are given
below:
–
COO CH2OH
CH2CH3 CH2CH3
+
–
OH
–
COO CHO COOH
CH2CH3 +– CH2CH3 COOH
[Ag(NH3)2] OH (O)
Ag +
Tollens’ reagent
Silver 2-Ethyl 2-ethyl benzaldehyde Benzene-1,2-
mirror benzoate dicarboxylic acid
NO2
H2NNH NO2 NO2
CH—NNH NO2
CH2CH3
+ H2O
2,4-DNP derivative
OR
(a) (i) Propanone on treatment with I2/NaOH (NaOI) undergoes iodoform reaction to give yellow
ppt of iodoform but propanol does not.
+
CH3COCH3 + 3NaOI ¾
¾® CH3COONa + CHI3¯ + 2NaOH
Propanone Iodoform
(ii) Benzaldehyde being an aldehyde reduces Tollens’ reagent to give silver mirror test but
acetophenone being a ketone does not give this test.
– Heat –
C6H5CHO + 2[Ag (NH3)2]+ + 3OH ¾ ¾¾® C6H5COO + 2H2O + 2Ag¯ + 4NH3
Benzaldehyde Tollen’s reagent Silver mirror
(b) (i) Methyl tert-butyl ketone < Acetone < Acetaldehyde

(ii) 4-Methoxy benzoic acid < Benzoic acid < 3,4-Dinitrobenzoic acid
(iii) (CH3)2CHCOOH < CH3CH(Br)CH2COOH < CH3CH2CH(Br)COOH

1. Interstitial defect
2. The catalytic reaction that depends upon the pore structure of the catalyst and the size of the reactant
and product molecule is known as shape-selective catalysis.
3. Collectors enhance non-wettability of the mineral particles.
6. 3-Phenyl prop-2-enol
17. The cleansing action of soap such as sodium stearate is due to the fact that soap molecules form
micelle around the oil droplet in such a way that hydrophobic part of the stearate ions is in the oil
droplet and hydrophilic part projects out of the grease droplet like the bristles. Since the polar groups
can interact with water, the oil droplet surrounded by stearate ions is now pulled in water and removed
from the dirty surface. Thus soap helps in emulsification and washing away of oils and fats.
(a) (b) (c)

Grease in cloth Stearate ions arranging Grease droplet surrounded
around the grease droplet by stearate ions (micelle formed)
Hard water contains calcium and magnesium salts. In hard water, soap gets precipitated as calcium
and magnesium soap which being insoluble stick to the clothes as gummy mass. Therefore soaps do
not work in hard water.
20. At anode: Al ¾¾® Al3+ + 3e– ]×2
At Cathode: Ni2+ + 2e– ¾ ¾® Ni]×3
2+
Cell reaction: 2Al + 3Ni ¾ ¾® 2Al3+ + 3Ni
E oCell = E Cathode – E anode = E oNi 2+ / Ni – EAl
o o o
3+
/Al
= – 0.25V – (– 1.66 V) = 1.41 V

[Al ] = 1×10–3M; [Ni2+] = 0.5 M; n = 6
3+
Substituting the values in the Nernst equation,

0.059 [Al 3+ ] 2
n [Ni 2+ ] 3
0.059 (10 -3 ) 2
E cell = 1.41 V – log
6 ( 0.5) 3
0.059
= 1.41 V – log 8 × 10–6
6
0.059
= 1.41 V – (– 0.54)
6
E cell = 1.41 V + 0.0053 V
= 1.4153 V
23. (i) Interstitial compounds are well known for many of the transition elements because the
transition elements are capable of entrapping small sized atoms such as H,C and N in the
interstitial sites in their crystal lattices. These trapped atoms get bonded to the atoms of
transition elements, for example, TiC, Fe3H and Mn4N, etc.
(ii) The decrease in metallic radius coupled with increase in atomic mass results in a general
increase in density from titanium to copper in the first series of transition elements.
(iii) This is due to very small energy gaps between 5f, 6d and 7s subshells in actinoids.
27. (i) Elastomers: These are the polymers having the weakest intermolecular forces of attraction
between the polymer chains. The weak forces permit the polymer to be stretched. A few ‘cross
links’ are introduced between the chains, which help the polymer to retract to its original
position after the force is released as in vulcanised rubber. Elastomers thus possess an elastic
character, e.g., buna-S, buna-N, neoprene, etc.
(ii) Condenstaion Polymers: The condensation polymers are formed by the repeated condensation
reaction between different bifunctional or trifunctional monomer units usually with elimination
of small molecules such as water, alcohol hydrogen chloride, etc. Nylon 6, 6, Nylon 6, terylene
are some examples.
(iii) Addition polymers: Addition polymers are formed by repeated addition of same or different
monomer molecules. The monomers used are unsaturated compounds, e.g., alkenes, alkadienes
and their derivatives. Polythene is an example of addition polymer.
—CH2 ¾350–570
n CH2— ¾¾¾ K, 1000– 2000 atm
¾ ¾ ¾¾® –(CH2 — CH2 )– n
traces of O2
Ethene Polyethene
30. O
(a) (i) P
H OH
H
H3PO2
(ii) No. of electron pairs around central atom Cl = 5 F

No. of bond pairs = 3
No of lone pairs = 2 Cl F
The shape would be slightly bent T.
F
ClF3
(b) (i) Nitrogen is much less reactive than phosphorus because of the high bond enthalpy of NºN
bond.
(ii) This is because in H2O hydrogen bond formed is three dimensional whereas in H–F it is
linear.
(iii) This is because S–S single bond is stronger than O–O single bond.
OR
H
O
O O O O O O
(a) (i) N N N N (ii) Cl
O O O O O
O
O
(N2O5)
Perchloric acid
(HClO4)
(b) (i) Due to smaller size of O as compared to S, the bond dissociation enthalpy of O–H bond is
higher than that of S–H bond. As a result, in aqueous solution, S–H bond can break more
easily form H+ ion than O–H bond. Hence H2S is more acidic than H2O.
(ii) This is because fluorine is the most electronegative element and it does not have d orbitals.
(iii) This is because the valence shell orbital of He is completely filled (1s2) and it has high
ionisation enthalpy and more positive electron gain enthalpy.

1. Silicon or germanium doped with group 15 elements like P or As are called n type of semiconductors.
4. H3PO2 is monobasic as it contains only one ionisable H-atom which is present as OH group.
O
H OH
H
H3PO2
CH3
5. H2C—C—CH2—Br
3-Bromo-2-methyl propone
7. On prolonged heating with HI, glucose gives n-hexane.

CHO
| HI
(CH.OH)4 ¾ ¾® CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3
| D n-Hexane
CH2OH
8. Human beings suffer from depression when they have low levels of noradrenaline. Noradrenaline is a
neurotransmiter that plays a role in mood changes. Low levels of noradrenaline lower the
signal-sending activity and make human beings suffer from depression. Tranquilizers such as
improniazid and phenelyzine are useful in treating this depression.
11. (i) In the extraction of silver, the metal is leached with dilute solution of NaCN. Dilute NaCN
solution forms a soluble complex with Ag while the impurities remain unaffected which are
then filtered off.
4Ag + 8NaCN + O2 + 2H2O ¾ ¾® 4Na[Ag(CN)2] + 4NaOH
Soluble complex
(ii) SiO2 acts as a flux in the extraction of copper. Sulphide ore of copper contains iron as impurity
which is removed as iron silicate (slag).
FeO + SiO2 ¾ ¾® FeSiO3
Flux Slag
18. Difference between antiseptics and disinfectants:

Antiseptics
z Antiseptics are chemical substances which prevent the growth of microorganisms and may even
kill them but are not harmful to living tissues.
z Antiseptics are generally applied to living tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers and diseased skin
surfaces.
z Dettol, furacine, soframicine are antiseptics.
Disinfectants
z Disinfectants are chemical substances which kill microorganisms or stop their growth but are
harmful to human tissues.
z Disinfectants are applied to inanimate objects such as floor, drainage system, instrument, etc.
z Chlorine in the concentration of 0.2 to 0.4 ppm in aqueous solution and SO in very low
2
concentration are disinfectants.
22. Three distinct features of chemisorptions which are not found in physisorptions:
(i) Enthalpy of adsorption: Enthalpy of adsorption is high (80-240 kJ mol–1) as it involves
chemical bond formation.
(ii) High specificity: Chemisorption is highly specific and it will only occur if there is some
possibility of chemical bonding between adsorbent and adsorbate. For example, hydrogen is
adsorbed by transition metals by virtue of hydride formation.
(iii) Irreversibility: Chemisorption is usually irreversible in nature as it involves compound
formation. It is very slow at low temperatures on account of high activation energy.
23. (i) Cr2+ is reducing agent as its configuration changes from d4 to d3, the later having a half-filled
trg level. On the other hand, the change from Mn2+ to Mn3+ results in the extra stable
half-filled, d5 configuration. Therefore Mn3+ is an oxidising agent.
(ii) This is due to small energy gap between 5f, 6d and 7s subshells in actinoids.
(iii) This is because with increase in atomic number in a series , the increased nuclear charge is
partly cancelled by the increased shielding effect of electrons in the d-orbitals of penultimate
shell.
24. (i) [Fe(CN)6]4– = Hexacyanoferrate(II) ion; Fe2+(3d6)

4s 4p
3d
×× ×× ×× ×× ×× ×× the CN– ion
d 2sp3 hybrid
d2sp3-hybridisation in [Fe(CN)6]4– leads to octahedral structure.

(ii) [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]+ = Tetraamminedichloridochromium (III) ion, Cr3+(3d3)
4s 4p
3d
× × = Electron pair from NH3
×× ×× ×× ×× ×× ×× molecule or Cl– ion
d 2sp3 hybrid
d2sp3 hybridisation in [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]+ leads to octahedral structure.

(iii) [Ni(CN)4]2– = Tetracyanonickelate(II)ion; Ni2+(II) (3d8)
4s 4p
3d
×× ×× ×× ×× CN– ion
dsp2 hybrid
dsp2 hybridisation in [Ni(CN)4]2– leads to square planar structure.

26. (i) A peptide linkage is an amide linkage —( CONH— ) formed between —COOH group of one
a-amino acid and —NH2 group of the other a-amino acid by the loss of a water molecule.
(ii) Primary structure of proteins: The sequence in which various amino acids are arranged in a
protein is called its primary structure. Any change in the sequence of amino acids creates
different protein which alters biological functions.
(iii) Denaturation of Proteins: When a protein in its native form is subjected to a change in
temperature or a change in pH, the hydrogen bonds are disturbed. Due to this, globules unfold
and helix gets uncoiled and protein loses its biological activity. This is called denaturation of
protein. During denaturation 2° and 3° structures are destroyed but 1° structures remain intact,
e.g., coagulation of egg white on boiling, curdling of milk, etc.
FOREIGN–2012

1. What is meant by the term ‘forbidden zone’ in reference to band theory of solids?
2. Why is the adsorption phenomenon always exothermic?
3. Write the reaction involved in the extraction of silver after the silver ore has been leached with NaCN.
4. Although the H-bonding in hydrogen fluoride is much stronger than that in water, yet water has a
much higher boiling point than hydrogen fluoride. Why?
H3C—CH—
—CH—CH—CH2—CH3
|
OH
6. Draw the molecular structure of the compound, 4-methylpent-3-en-2-one.
7. Write the full form of DNA and RNA.
8. What is meant by ‘narrow spectrum antibiotics’?
9. (a) Define any two of the following terms:
(i) van’t Hoff factor
(ii) Mole fraction
(iii) Ebullioscopic constant
(b) State Raoult’s law.
OR
The density of water of a lake is 1.25 g (mL) and one kg of this water contains 92 g of Na+ ions. what
–1
is the molarity of Na+ ions in the water of the lake? (Atomic mass of Na = 23.00 u)
11. Name one chief ore each of copper and aluminium. Name the method used for concentration of these
two ores.
(i) The chemical reactivity of nitrogen is much less than that of phosphorus.
(ii) SF6 is kinetically inert.
13. Draw the molecular structures of the following species:
(i) H3PO3
(ii) BrF3
14. What are ambident nucleophiles? Explain giving an example.
15. Explain as to why
(i) Alkyl halides, though polar, are immiscible with water.
(ii) Grignard’s reagents should be prepared under anhydrous conditions.
16. Describe the following giving the chemical equation in each case:
(i) Carbylamine reaction
(ii) Hofmann’s bromamide reaction
(i) C6H5N2Cl + H3PO2 + H2O ¾ ¾®
(ii) C6H5NH2 + Br2(aq) ¾ ¾®
18. State a reason for each of the following statements:
(i) Soaps do not work in hard water.
(ii) The use of the sweetner aspartame is limited to cold foods and drinks.
19. Iron has a body centred cubic (bcc) unit cell with a cell dimension of 286.65 pm. The density of iron is
7.874 g cm–3. Use this information to calculate Avogadro’s number. (Atomic mass of Fe = 55.845 u)
OR
Silver crystallises in face centred cubic (fcc) unit cell. If the radius of silver atom is 145 pm, what is
the length of each side of the unit cell?
20. At 25°C the saturated vapour pressure of water is 3.165 kPa (23.75 mm Hg). Find the saturated
vapour pressure of a 5% aqueous solution of urea (carbamide) at the same temperature.
(Molar mass of urea = 60.05 g mol–1)
21. Consider the reaction:
2A + B ¾ ¾® C + D
Following results were obtained in experiments designed to study the rate of reaction:
Experiment Initial concentration (mol L–1) Initial rate
No. of formation
[A] [B]
1 0.10 0.10 1.5 × 10–3
2 0.20 0.20 3.0 × 10–3
3 0.20 0.40 6.0 × 10–3

(a) Write the rate law for the reaction.

(b) Calculate the value of rate constant for the reaction.
(c) Which of the following possible reaction mechanism is consistent with the rate law found
in (a)?
I. A+B ¾ ¾® C + E (slow)
A+E ¾ ¾® D (fast)
II. B + C ¾ ¾® E (slow)
A+E ¾ ¾® F (fast)
A+F ¾ ¾® D (fast)
22. Define the following terms giving one suitable example for each:
(i) Electrophoresis
(ii) Micelles
(iii) Peptization
(i) NH4Cl(aq) + NaNO2(aq) ¾ ¾®
(ii) P4 + NaOH + H2O ¾ ¾®
(iii) Xe( g) + F2(g) ¾673
¾¾ K
®
(Xenon in excess) 1 Bar

(i) The p-complexes are known for transition elements only.
(ii) Nickel(II) does not form low spin octahedral complexes.
(iii) [Fe(CN)6]4– and [Fe(H2O)6]2+ are of different colours in dilute solutions.
25. State the products of the following reactions:
(i) CH3—CH2—CH2—O—CH3 + HBr ¾ ¾®
OC2H5
(ii) + HBr ¾
¾®
HI
(iii) (CH3)3C—OC2H5 ¾¾ ®
26. What is glycogen? How is it different from starch? How is starch structurally different from
cellulose?
27. Write the structure of the monomer of each of the following polymers:
(i) Nylon-6
(ii) Teflon
(iii) Neoprene
28. (a) What type of a battery is the lead storage battery? Write the anode and the cathode reactions
and the overall reaction occurring in a lead storage battery sending out an electric current.
(b) A voltaic cell is set up at 25°C with the half-cells
Ag+ (0.001 M) | Ag and Cu2+ (0.10M) | Cu
What should be its cell potential? (E ocell = 0.46 V, log 105 = 5)
OR
(a) Define the term molar conductivity and explain how molar conductivity changes with solution
concentration for weak and strong electrolytes.
(b) A strip of nickel metal is placed in a 1-molar solution of Ni(NO3)2 and a strip of silver metal is
placed in a 1-molar solution of AgNO3. An electrochemical cell is created when the two
solutions are connected by a salt bridge and the two strips are connected by wires to a
voltmeter.
(i) Write the balanced equation for the overall reaction occurring in the cell and calculate the
cell potential
(ii) Calculate the cell potential, E, at 25°C for the cell if the initial concentration of Ni(NO3)2
is 0.100 molar and the initial concentration of AgNO3 is 1.00 molar.
[E oNi 2+ / Ni = – 0.25 V; EAg
o
2+
/Ag
= 0.80 V, log 10–1 = – 1]?
29. (a) Complete the balance the following chemical equations:

(i) Cr2O72– + I – + H+ ¾ ¾®
– 2– +
(ii) MnO4 + SO3 + H ¾ ¾®
( i) Transition elements and their compounds are known to act as catalysts.
(ii) The higher oxidation states are usually exhibited by the members in the middle of a series
of transition elements.
(iii) The metal-metal bonding is more frequently found with the second and third series of
transition elements.
OR
(a) Calculate the number of unpaired electrons in the following gaseous state ions:
Mn2+, Cr3+, V3+ and Fe2+
Which one of these is the most stable in aqueous solutions?
(At. nos. V = 23, Cr = 24, Mn = 25, Fe = 26)
(i) The transition metal ions are usually coloured in aqueous solutions.
(ii) Cu(I) is not stable in an aqueous solution.
(iii) The highest oxidation state of a transition metal is exhibited in its oxide or fluoride.
30. (a) Describe the mechanism of the addition of Grignard reagent to the carbonyl group of a
compound to form an adduct which on hydrolysis yields an alcohol.
(b) Draw the structures of the following compounds:
(i) 3-Methylbutanal
(ii) Hexane-1,6-diotic acid
(iii) p-Nitropropiophenone
OR
(a) Illustrate the following reactions giving a suitable chemical equation for each:
(b) How would you bring about the following conversions? Write the complete equation in each
case.
(ii) Benzoic acid to m-nitrobenzyl alcohol
(iii) Benzaldehyde to benzophenone

1. How would you distinguish between a metallic solid and an ionic solid other than by metallic lustre?
4. Which is more acidic and why, H2O or H2S?
5. Of the two alcohols; (a) CH2=CH—CH2OH and (b) CH2=CH—CH2—CH2OH, which one will react
more easily with conc. HCl in the presence of ZnCl2?
8. Of the two bases named below, which one is present in RNA and which one is present in DNA?
Thymine, Uracil
13. Draw the molecular structures of the following species:
(i) H2S2O8
(ii) XeF2
18. What are biodegradable and non-biodegradable detergents? Give one example of each.
22. Differentiate among a homogeneous solution, a suspension and a colloidal solution, giving a suitable
example of each.
(i) HgCl2 + PH3 ¾ ¾®
(ii) NaOH + Cl2 ¾ ¾®
(hot & conc.)
(iii) XeF4 + O2F2 ¾143
¾¾ K
®
24. Name the following complexes and draw the structures of one possible isomer of each:
(i) [Cr(C2O4)3]3–
(ii) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]
(iii) [Co(en)2Cl2]+
26. Explain the meaning of the following terms:
(i) Invert sugar
(ii) Polypeptides
(iii) Enzymes

Questions Uncommon to Set–I and II
1. Define paramagnetism with an example.
3. What is the role of a depressant in Froth Floatation process for the concentration of a sulphide ore?
4. Which is a stronger acid in aqueous solution, HF or HCl, and why?
CH3—O—CH2—CH—CH3
|
CH3
6. Draw the molecular structure of 4-Hydroxy-4-methylpentan-2-one.
12. State a reason for each of the following statements:
(i) Fluorine never exhibits any positive oxidation state.
(ii) Helium does not form any real chemical compound.
14. Explain why
(i) the dipole moment of chlorobenzene is lower than that of cyclohexyl chloride.
(ii) haloalkanes are only slightly soluble in water but dissolve easily in organic solvents.
20. Calculate the freezing point depression expected for 0.0711 m aqueous solution of sodium sulphate. If
the solution actually freezes at – 0.320 °C, what is the actual value of van’t Hoff factor at this
temperature? (Kf for water = 1.86 K kg mol–1)
22. Present a classification of colloids where dispersion medium is water. State the characteristics and one
example of each of these classes.
(i) Sn + 2PCl5 ¾heating
¾¾®
3+
(ii) Fe + SO2 + H2O ¾ ¾®
(iii) XeF2(s) + H2O(l) ¾ ¾®
26. Write three such behaviours of glucose which cannot be explained by an open chain structure of
glucose molecule. What alternative structure has been proposed for the glucose molecule?
Solutions
SET–I
1. The energy gap between valance band and conduction is known as forbidden zone.
2. As the adsorption progresses, the residual forces at the surface decreases resulting in the decrease of
surface energy which appears as heat.
¾® [Zn(CN) 4 ] 2- ( aq) + 2Ag( s)]
3. 2[Ag(CN) 2 ]( aq) + Zn( s) ¾
4. This is because hydrogen bonding is multidimensional in water whereas in HF it is linear.
5. Hex-4-en-3-ol
CH3 O
| |
6. — CH — C— CH3
CH3 —C —
7. DNA: Deoxyribonucleic acid
RNA: Ribonucleic acid
8. Antibiotics which are mainly effective against gram-positive or Gram-negative bacteria are known as
narrow spectrum antibiotics, e.g., ampicillin G.
9. (a) Van’t Hoff factor:
(i) May be defined as the ratio of normal molecular mass to observed molecular mass or the
ratio of observed colligative property to calculated colligative property.
(ii) Mole fraction may be defined as the ratio of number of moles of one component to the
sum of moles all the components present in a solution.
(iii) Ebuthoscopic constant may be defined as the elevation in boiling point when one mole of
a non-volatile solute is added to 1000 grams of solvent.
(b) It states that for a solution of volatile liquids the partial vapour pressure of each component in
the solution is directly proportional to its mole faction.
OR
92g
Number of moles of solute, Na+ ions = = 4 mol
23g mol -1
Mass of solution 1000 g 800 mL
Volume of solution = = - 1
= 800 mL = = 0.8 L
Density of solution 1. 25 g mL 1000 mL L-1
Number of moles Na + ions 4 mol
Molarity = =
Volume of solution in liter 0.8 L
= 5 mol L–1 or 5 m.
10. (i) The sum of the powers of the concentration of the reactants in the rate law expression is called
the order of the reaction. For a general reaction
aA + bB ¾ ¾® products
Let rate = K[ A ] m [ B ] n
Order of the reaction = m + n
(ii) The minimum extra energy absorbed by the reactant molecular so that their energy becomes
equal threshold energy is called activation energy.
Activation energy = Threshold energy – Energy possessed by reactant molecular
11.
Metal Chief ore Method of concentration
Copper Copper pyrite (CuFeS2) Froth floatation
Aluminium Bauxite [AlOx (OH)3–2x] Leaching
where 0 < x < 1
12. (i) As N N triple bond (941.4 kJmol–1) is much stronger than p–p single bond (213 kJmol–1),
therefore nitrogen is much less reactive than phosphorus.
(ii) This is because in SF6, sulphur is sterically protected by six fluorine atoms.
13. (i) H3PO3 (ii) BrF3—Slightly bent T
F
O
P Br F
H OH OH
F
14. Nucleophiles which can attack through the different nucleophilic centres present in it are called
ambident nucleophiles. For example, cyanide group is resonance hybrid of the following two
contributing structures:
C N C N
It can attack through carbon to form cyanide and through N to form isocyanide.
15. (i) This is due to inability of alkyl halides to form intermolecular hydrogen bonds with water
molecules.
(ii) This is because Grignard reagent forms alkanes by reacting with moisture.
RMgX + H2 O ¾ ¾® RH + Mg(OH)X
16. (i) Carbylamine reaction: Aliphatic and aromatic primary amines when heated with chloroform and
ethanolic potassium hydroxide form carbylamines or isocyanides which are foul smelling
substances. Secondary and tertiary amines do not show this reaction.
D
R—NH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH (alc.) ¾¾ ® RNC + 3KCl + 3H2O
D
C6H5NH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH (alc.) ¾¾ ® C6H5NC + 3KCl + 3H2O
Aniline Phenyl
isocyanide
(ii) Hoffmann’s bromamide reaction: When a primary acid amide is heated with bromine in an
aqueous or ethanolic solution of NaOH, a primary amine is obtained. The amine so obtained
contains one carbon less than that present in the amide.
RCONH2 + Br2 + 4NaOH ¾

¾® R—NH2 + Na2 CO3 + 2NaBr + 2H2O
Acid amide
C6H5CONH2 + Br2 + 4NaOH ¾
¾® C6H5NH2 + Na2CO3 + 2NaBr + 2H2O
Benzamide Aniline
17. (i) C6H5N2Cl + H3PO2 + H2O ¾

¾® C6H6 + N2 + H3PO3 + HCl
Benzene Benzene
diazonium chloride
NH2 NH2
Br Br
(ii) + 3Br2(aq) + 3HBr
Br
Aniline 2,4,6-Tribromoaniline
18. (i) In hard water soaps get precipitated as calcium and magnesium soap which being insoluble in
water stick to the clothes as gummy mass.
(ii) This is because aspartame is unstable at cooking temperature.
19. Here, z = 2, M = 56 g mol–1, d = 7.87 g cm–3
a = 286.65 pm = 286 .65 × 10–10 cm = 2.8
z´ M
NA = 3 , we get
a ´d
2 ´ 56 g mol –1
NA =
( 286.65 ´ 10 -10 cm) 3 ´ 7.87 g cm –3
= 6.042 × 1023 mol–1
OR
For bcc unit cell, a = 2 2r
\ a = 2 2 × 145 pm
= 2 × 1.414 × 145 pm
a = 410.06 pm.
20. WB = 5 g, WA = 95 g, M B = 60.05 g mol–1,
MA = 18 g mol–1 P°A = 3.165 kPa
Substituting the values in the expression;
PAo - P WB ´ M A
= , we get
PAo M B ´ WA
-1
3.165 k Pa - P 5 g ´ 18 g mol
= = 0.015
3.165 k Pa 60.05 g mol -1 ´ 95g
P = 3.165 k Pa – 0.015 × 3.165 k Pa
P = 3.118 k Pa
21. (a) Let Rate = k[A]m [B]n

\ . ) m ( 01
1.5 × 10–3 mol L–1 min–1 = K( 01 . )n … (i)
-3 -1 –1 m n
3.0 ´ 10 mol L min = K( 0.2) ( 0.2) … (ii)
–3 -1 –1 m n
6.0 × 10 mol L min = K( 0.2) ( 0.4) …(iii)
Dividing equation (iii) by (ii), we get
6.0 ´ 10 -3 k( 0.2) m ( 0.4) n
=
3.0 ´ 10 -3 k( 0.2) m ( 0.2) n
2 = 2n Þ n = 1
3.0 ´ 10 -3 k( 0.2) m ( 0.2) n
=
1.5 ´ 10 -3 . ) m ( 01
k( 01 . )n
2 = 2m2n = 2m. 2
2m = 1 or 2m = 20 Þ m=0
1
\ Rate = K[ A ]° [ B ] or Rate = K[B]
Rate
(b) K =
[B ]
1× 5 ´ 10 -3 mol L–1 min -1
K= = 1.5 × 10–2 min–1
. mol L-1
01
(c) The reaction mechanism (II) is consistent with the rate law found in (a).
22. (i) The movement of colloidal particles towards oppositely charged electrodes in an electric field
is called electrophoresis.
(ii) There are some substances such as soap which at low concentration behave as normal
electrolytes, but at higher concentration exhibit colloidal behaviour due to the formation of
aggregates. The aggregated particles thus formed are known as micelles or associated colloids.
(iii) The process of converting a procipitate into colloidal solution by shaking it with dispersion
medium in the presence of small amount of electrolyte is called peptization.
23. (i) NH4 Cl( aq) + NaNO2 ( aq) ¾
¾® N2 ( g) + 2H2 O(l) + NaCl( aq)
(ii) P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2 O ¾
¾® PH3 + 3NaH2 PO2
(iii) Xe( g) + F2 ( g) ¾673K
¾¾® XeF2 ( s)
1bar
(Xenon in excess)
24. (i) This is because the transition metals have empty d-orbitals into which the electron pairs can be
denoted by ligands containing and electrons, e.g., C6H6, C2H4 etc.
(ii) As only one inner d-orbital is available in nickel for bonding in the presence of strong ligand,
e.g., CO., CN.
(iii) In both the complexes, Fe is in +2 oxide state with d6 configuration. As the ligands CN and
H2O possess different crystal field splitting energy (DO), they absorb different components of
visible light for d-d transition. Hence, the transmitted colours are different in dilute solutions.
25. (i) CH3—CH2—CH2—O—CH2—CH3—H—Br ¾
¾® CH3—CH2—Br—CH3—CH2—CH2—OH
OC2H5 OH
(ii) + HBr C2H5Br +
(iii) (CH3 ) 3 C — OC 2 H5 + HI ¾
¾® (CH3 ) 3 C — I + C 2 H5 — OH
26. Glycogen is a polymer of a - D -glucose. The carbohydrates are stored in animal body as glycogen.
Starch is also a polymer of a - D -glucose and consist of two components amylose and amylopectin.
Amylose is linear chain polymer of a - D –glucose. Both glycogen and amylopectin are branched
chain polymer of a - D - glucose but glycogen is more highly branched than amylopectin. Strarch is
the main storage polysaccharide of plants.
Starch is a polymer of a - D -glucose whereas cellulose is a polymer b–D–glucose.
27.
S.No. Polymer Monomer Structure of Monomer
(i) Nylon-6 Caprolactum H
H2C N C—O
H2C CH2
H2C CH2
Caprolactum
(ii) Teflon Tetrafluoro ethene CF2 — CF2
(iii) Neoprene Chloroprene

CH2 — C — CH — CH2
|
Cl
28. (a) Lead storage battery is a secondary battery. The reactions occurring in lead storage battery
when current is drawn from it are:
Anode: Pb(s) + SO42–(aq) ¾ ¾® PbSO4(s) + 2e–
Cathode: PbO2(s) + SO42–(aq) + 4H+(aq) + 2e– ¾ ¾®
PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)
Overall reaction: Pb(s) + PbO) 2+(s 2H2SO4(aq) ¾ ¾® 2PbSO 4(s) + 2H 2O(l)
(b) At Anode: Cu ¾ ¾® Cu2+ + 2e–
+ -
At Cathode: Ag + e ¾ ¾® Ag] ´ 2
Cell reaction: Cu + 2Ag+ ¾

¾® Cu2+ + 2Ag
o
E cell = 0.46 V; [Ag+] = 1 × 10–3 M, [Cu2+] = 0.1M : n = 2
Substituting the values in the equation:

o 0.059 [Cu 2+ ]
E cell = E cell – log , we get
n [Ag + ] 2
0.059 ( 01
.)
E cell = 0.46 V – log -3 2
2 (10 )
= 0.46 V – (0.0295 log 105) = 0.46V – 0.0295 × 5
= 0.3125 V
OR
(a) Molar conductivity of a solution at a given
concentration is the conductance of the 400
volume V of the solution containing one Weak electrolyte (CH3COOH)
mole of electrolyte kept between two
Lm/(S cm2 mol–1)

electrodes with area of cross section A and
distance of unit length.
k ´ 1000 200
Lm = k ´ V =
c
where k is the conductivity and V is the Strong electrolyte (KCl)
volume of solution containing one mole of
the electrolyte and c is the molar
concentration.
Molar conductivity increases with decrease 0 0.2 0.4
c1/2/(mol/L)1/2
in concentration or increase in dilution as the
number of ions as well as the mobility of ions increases with increase in dilution.
For strong electrolytes, the number of ions does not increase appreciably on dilution and only
mobility of ions increases due to decrease in interionic attractions. Therefore, L m increases a
little as shown in figure by a straight line. For weak electrolytes, number of ions as well as
mobility of ions increases on dilution which results in a very large increase in molar
conductivity, especially at infinite dilution (i.e., concentration, c ® 0) as shown by curve in
figure.
(b) (i) At Anode: Ni ¾ ¾® Ni 2++ 2 e–
At Cathode: Ag + + e - ¾¾® Ag] ´ 2
Cell reaction: Ni + 2Ag + ¾

¾® Ni2++ 2Ag
o
E cell = E°cathode – E°anode
o o
= EAg +
/Ag
- E Ni 2+
/ Ni
= 0.80 V – (– 0.25 V)
o
E cell = 1.05 V
0.059 [ Ni 2+ ]
(ii) Ecell = E ocell – log
n [ Ag + ] 2
o
Here, n = 2, E cell = 1.05 V, [Ni2+] = 0.1 M, [Ag+] = 1.0 M
o 0.059 ( 0.01)
\ E cell = 1.05V – log
2 (1) 2
Ecell = 1.05V – 0.0295 log 10–1 = 1.05 + 0.0295 V
Ecell = 1.0795 V
29. (a) (i) Cr2 O27- + 14H+ + 6e - ¾
¾® 2Cr 3+ + 7H2 O
2I– ¾® I2 + 2e–] × 3
¾
Cr2 O27- + 6I - + 14H+ ¾
¾® 2Cr 3+ + 3I 2 + 7H2 O
(ii) MnO-4 + 8H+ + 5e - ¾
¾® Mn 2+ + 4H2 O] ´ 2
SO23- + H2 O ¾® SO2-
¾ + -
4 + 2H + 2 e ] × 5
2MnO-4 + 5SO23- + 6H+ ¾

¾® 2Mn 2+ + 5SO24- + 3H2 O
(b) (i) The catalytic activity of transition metals and their compounds is attributed to the
following reasons:
Due to their tendency to show variable oxidation states transition metals form instable
intermediate compounds and provide a new path for the reaction with lower activation
energy.
In Some cases, the transition metals provide a suitable large surface area with free
(ii) This is due to presence of maximum number of unpaired electrons in a transition metal
which is present in the middle of a series.
(iii) In the same group of d-block elements, the 4d and 5d transition elements are larger in size
than than those of 3d elements. Hence, the valence electrons are less tightly held and form
metal–metal bond more frequently.
OR
(a)
Ion Electronic Number of
Configuration Unpaired electrons
Mn2+ [Ar] 3d54s0 5
Cr3+ [Ar] 3d34s0 3

3+ 2 0
V [Ar] 3d 4s 2
Fe2+ [Ar] 3d64s0 4
Mn2+ ion is most stable in aqueous solution.

(b) (i) Ni(CO)4 : Tetracrabonyl nickel(o); Ni = 3d8 4s2
4s 4p
3d
×× ×× ×× ×× ligand CO
sp3 hybrid
Structure = Tetrahedral; Magnetic behaviour : Diamagnetic
(ii) Cu2+ (aq) is much more stable than Cu(aq). This is because high negative enthalpy of
hydration of Cu2+(aq) easily compensates the high second ionisation enthalpy of copper.
Due to his Cu+(aq) undergo disproportionation as follows:
2Cu + ( aq) ¾
¾® Cu 2+ ( aq) + Cu( s)
(iii) This is due to high electronegativity oxygen and fluorine.
30. (a) Mechanism:
(i) Nucleophilic addition of Grignard reagent to carbonyl group to form an adduct.
+ – – +
d d d d – +
C O + R—Mg—X C—OMg—X
R
(ii) Hydrolysis of the adduct to alcohol.
– + H 2O
C—O—Mg—X C—O + Mg(OH)X
R R
(b) Name of compound Structure

(i) S–Methyl butanal CH3—CH—CH2—CHO
CH3
(ii) Hexane–1, 6–dioic acid HOOC—CH2—CH2—CH2—CH2—COOH
CO—CH2—CH3
(iii) P–Nitropropiophenone
NO2
OR
(a) (i) Cannizzaro reaction: Aldehydes which do not have an–a hydrogen atom, undergo
disproportionation reaction on treatment with concentrated alkali. In this reaction, one
molecule of the aldehyde is reduced to alcohol while another is oxidised to salt of
carboxylic acid.
–
2HCHO ¾conc.KOH
¾ ¾¾® CH3 OH + HCO O K +
Methyl alcohol Potassium formate
(ii) Hell-Volhard-Zelinsky reaction: Carbosylic acids having an a-hydrogen are halogenated

at the a-position on treatment with chlorine or bromine in the presence of small amount of
red phosphorus to give a-halocarboxylic acids.
(i) X2/Red P
R—CH2—COOH (ii) H2O R—CH—COOH (X = Cl, Br)
X
a-Halocarboxylic acid
CH3
|
(b) (i) CH3 CHO ¾dil
¾NaOH
¾¾® CH3 — CH — CH2 — CHO
Ethanol 3 - Hydroxybutanol
(ii) COOH COOH CONH2

HNO3 (conc.) +NH3
H2SO4(conc.) ; D D
NO2 NO2
Benzoic acid
LiAlH4
CH2OH CH2—NH2
HNO2
NO2 NO2
p-Nitro benzyl alcohol
O
CHO COOH COCl
+ C
K2Cr2O7/H2SO4 SOCl2
(iii) (O) AlCl3 (anhyd.)
Benzaldehyde Benzoic Benzophenone
acid
SET–II
1. Metallic solid conducts electricity in solid state but ionic solid conducts electricity only in solution or
in molten state.
2. The catalytic reaction which depends upon the pore structure of the catalyst and the size of the
reaction and product molecules is called shape selective catalysis.
4. H2S, due to low bond dissociation enthalpy of H–S bond.
5. CH2 = CH - CH2 OH
8. (i) Thymine is present in DNA.
(ii) Uracil is present in RNA.
13. (i) H2S2O8 (Peroxodisulphuric acid) (ii) XeF2
O O F
S S Xe
O O O O
OH HO F
22.
Property Homogeneous Colloidal solution Suspension

solution
1. Particle Size Less than 1nm Between 1 nm to 1000 nm more than 1000 nm
2. Separation by
l ordinary filtration Not possible Not possible Possible
l ultra filtration Not possible Possible Possible
3. Settling of particles Do not settle Settle only on configuration Settle under gravity
4. Appearance Transparent Translucent opaque
5. Example Glucose dissolved Smoke, milk, Gold sol Sand in water

in water
23. 3HgCl 2 + 2PH3 ¾

¾® Hg 3 P2 + 6HCl
6NaOH + 3Cl2 ¾
(Hot and conc.)
XeF4 + O2F2 ¾143K
¾¾® XeF6 + O2
24. (i) [Cr(C2O4)3]3–: Trioxialato chromate (III) ion
OX OX
OX
Cr Cr
OX
OX
OX
dextro mirror laevo
Optical isomers of [Cr(Ox) 3]3–

(ii) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2] ; Diamine dichlorido platinum (II)
Cl NH3 Cl NH3
Pt Pt
Cl NH3 H3N Cl
cis trans
Geometrical isomers of [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]

(iii) [CO(en)2Cl2]+ : Diechloridobis (ethane-1, 2-diamine) cobalt(III) ion
Cl + Cl + Cl +
Cl Cl
en en
Co en Co Co en
en
Cl dextro en
trans cis mirror laevo
Geometrical isomers
Optical isomers
26. (i) Sucrose is dextrorotatory, on hydrolysis in the presence of hydrochloric acid or enzyme
invertase, it gives a mixture of D-(+)-glucose and D-(–)-fructose which is laeorotatory called
invert sugar.
(ii) If more than find-amino acids are joined together by peptide bend (CONH) the polyamide thus
formed is called polypeptide.
(iii) Enzymes are biocatalyst. Almost all the enzymes are globular proteins. Enzymes are specific in
nature and efficiency in their action. They are required in small quantity and highly active
optimum temperature range (298–310 K) and pH values 5–7.
SET–III
1. The substances which are weakly attracted by external magnetic field are called paramagnetic
substances and the property. Thus exhibited is called paramagnetism. Paramagnetism is shown by
those substances whose atoms, ions or molecules contain unpaired electron contain unpaired
electrons, e.g., O2, Cu2+ Fe3+, Cr3+, etc.
3. Depressant is used to prevent the formation of froth from one of the two sulphide ores.
4. Since the bond dissociation enthalpy of the H–Cl bond is lower than H–F bond therefore H–Cl is
stronger acid than H– F in aqueous solution.
5. 1-methoxy-2-methyl propane.
6. OH O
CH3—C—CH2—C—CH3
CH3
12. (i) This is because fluorine is most electronegative element and does not have d-orbitals in its
valence shell.
(ii) Due to vary high ionisation enthalpy helium does not form any real chemical compound.
14. (i) Dipole moment is a product of charge and distance. Since chlorobenzene has lower magnitude
of negative charge on Cl atom and shorter C—Cl bond than cyclohexyl chloride due to
resonance therefore chlorobenzene has lower dipole moment than cyclohexyl chloride.
(ii) This is because the new intermolecular attractions between haloalkenes and organic solvent
molecules have almost the same strength ones being broken in the separate haloalkan and
solvent molecules.
20. DTf = Tf0 - Tf = 0°C – (– 0.320°C) = 0.320°C = 0 or 0.320 K
m = 0.0711 mol kg–1, Kf = 1.86 K Kg mol–1, DTf = 0.320K
Substituting these values in the expression, DTf = iK f m, we get
. K kg mol–1 × 0.0711 mol kg–1
0.320 K = i´186
0.320
i= = 2.42
0.132
22. When the dispersion medium is water colloids are classified as hydrophilic colloids and hydrophobic
colloids. Hydrophilic colloids are solvent (water) attracting, reversible and quite stable, e.g., gum,
starch, gelatin etc. Hydrophobic colloids are solvent (water repelling, irreversible and less stable, e.g.,
metal sulphides sol, metal hydroxide sol, etc.
23. (i) Sn + 2PCl5 ¾heating
¾¾® SnCl4 + 2PCl3
(ii) 2Fe3+ + SO2 + 2H2O ¾¾® 2Fe2+ + SO2-
4 + 4H
+
(iii) 2XeF2(s) + 2H2O(e) ¾

¾® 2Xe + 4HF + O2
26. The following reactions cannot be explained by the open chain structure of glucose.
(i) Despite having the aldehyde group, glucose does not give 2, 4– DNP test, Schiffs test and it
does not form the hydrogensulphite addition product with NaHSO3.
(ii) The penta acetate of glucose does not react with hydroxyl amine indicating the absence of free
—CHO group.
(iii) D–Glucose on treatment of methyl alcohol in the presence of dry HCl gas gives two isomeric
nonomethyl derivatives known as a-D-glucoside and methyl b– D–glucoside. These glucosides
do not reduce fehling solution and also do not react with hydrogen cyanide indicating the
absence of free —CHO group.
A ring structure called pyranose structure (a- or b-) is proposed for the glucose molecule.
CBSE Examination Papers
Delhi–2013
SET–I
1. How many atoms constitute one unit cell of a face-centered cubic crystal?
2. Name the method used for the refining of nickel metal.
3. What is the covalency of nitrogen in N2O5?
4. Write the IUPAC name of CH3—CH—CH2—CH—CH2 .
|
Cl
5. What happens when CH3—Br is treated with KCN?
6. Write the structure of 3–methyl butanal.
7. Arrange the following in increasing order of their basic strength in aqueous solution:
CH3.NH2, (CH3)3N, (CH3)2NH
8. What are three types of RNA molecules which perform different functions?
9. 18 g of glucose, C6H12O6 (Molar Mass = 180 g mol–1) is dissolved in 1 kg of water in a sauce pan. At
what temperature will this solution boil?
(Kb for water = 0.52 K kg mol–1, boiling point of pure water = 373.15 K)
10. The conductivity of 0.20 M solution of KCl at 298 K is 0.025 S cm–1. Calculate its molar
conductivity.
11. Write the dispersed phase and dispersion medium of the following colloidal systems:
(i) Smoke (ii) Milk
OR
What are lyophilic and lyophobic colloids? Which of these sols can be easily coagulated on the
addition of small amounts of electrolytes?
12. Write the differences between physisorption and chemisorption with respect to the following:
(i) Specificity ( ii) Temperature dependence
(iii) Reversibility and (iv) Enthalpy change
13. (a) Which solution is used for the leaching of silver metal in the presence of air in the metallurgy of
silver?
(b) Out of C and CO, which is a better reducing agent at the lower temperature range in the blast
furnace to extract iron from the oxide ore?
14. What happens when
(i) PCl5 is heated? (ii) H3PO3 is heated?
Write the reactions involved.
15. (a) Which metal in the first transition series (3d series) exhibits +1 oxidation state most frequently
and why?
(b) Which of the following cations are coloured in aqueous solutions and why?
Sc3+, V3+, Ti4+, Mn2+
(At. nos. Sc = 21, V = 23, Ti = 22, Mn = 25)
16. Chlorobenzene is extremely less reactive towards a nucleophilic substitution reaction. Give two
reasons for the same.
17. Explain the mechanism of the following reaction:
+ · ·
H
2CH3—CH2—OH ¾ ¾¾® CH3CH2 — O —CH2—CH3 + H2O
413 K · ·
18. How will you convert:

(i) Propene to Propan–2–ol?
(ii) Phenol to 2, 4, 6 – trinitrophenol?
19. (a) What type of semiconductor is obtained when silicon is doped with boron?
(b) What type of magnetism is shown in the following alignment of magnetic moments?
(c) What type of point defect is produced when AgCl is doped with CdCl2?
20. Determine the osmotic pressure of a solution prepared by dissolving 2.5 × 10–2 g of K2SO4 in 2 L of
water at 25oC, assuming that it is completely dissociated.
(R = 0.082 L atm K–1 mol–1, Molar mass of K2SO4 = 174 g mol–1).
21. Calculate the emf of the following cell at 298 K:
Fe (s) | Fe2+ (0.001 M) || H+ (1M) | H2 (g) (1 bar), Pt (s)
o
(Given E cell = + 0.44 V)
(i) Transition metals exhibit variable oxidation states.
(ii) Zr (Z = 40) and Hf (Z = 72) have almost identical radii.
(iii) Transition metals and their compounds act as catalyst.
OR
Complete the following chemical equations:
(i) Cr2 O72 – + 6Fe 2 + + 14H+ ¾ ¾
¾®
(ii) 2CrO24 – + 2H+ ¾ ¾
¾®
(iii) 2MnO–4 + 5C 2 O24 – + 16H+ ¾ ¾
¾®
23. Write the IUPAC names of the following coordination compounds:
(i) [Cr(NH3)3Cl3] (ii) K3[Fe (CN)6]
(iii) [CoBr2(en)2]+, (en = ethylenediamine)
24. Give the structures of A, B and C in the following reactions:
+
CuCN H O H NH 3
(i) C 6 H5 N+2 Cl – ¾ ¾ ¾¾® A ¾ ¾2¾ ¾¾® B ¾ ¾ ¾¾® C
D
+
Sn + HCl NaNO2 + HCl
H O H
(ii) C 6 H5 NO2 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® A ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® B ¾ ¾2¾ ¾¾® C
273 K D
(i) Buna–S (ii) Neoprene
(iii) Nylon–6, 6
26. After watching a programme on TV about the adverse effects of junk food and soft drinks on the
health of school children, Sonali, a student of Class XII, discussed the issue with the school principal.
Principal immediately instructed the canteen contractor to replace the fast food with the fibre and
vitamins rich food like sprouts, salad, fruits, etc. This decision was welcomed by the parents and the
students.
After reading the above passage, answer the following questions:
(a) What values are expressed by Sonali and the Principal of the school?
(b) Give two examples of water-soluble vitamins.
27. (a) Which one of the following is a food preservative?
Equanil, Morphine, Sodium benzoate
(b) Why is bithional added to soap?
(c) Which class of drugs is used in sleeping pills?
28. (a) A reaction is second order in A and first order in B.
(i) Write the differential rate equation.
(ii) How is the rate affected on increasing the concentration of A three times?
(iii) How is the rate affected when the concentrations of both A and B are doubled?
(b) A first order reaction takes 40 minutes for 30% decomposition. Calculate t1/2 for this reaction.
(Given log 1.428 = 0.1548)
OR
(a) For a first order reaction, show that time required for 99% completion is twice the time required
for the completion of 90% of reaction.
(b) Rate constant ‘k’ of a reaction varies with temperature ‘T’ according to the equation:
Ea æ 1 ö
log k = log A – ç ÷
2 . 303 R è T ø
1
Where Ea is the activation energy. When a graph is plotted for log k vs. , a straight line with a
T
slope of – 4250 K is obtained. Calculate ‘Ea’ for the reaction. (R = 8.314 JK–1 mol–1)
29. (a) Give reasons for the following:
(i) Bond enthalpy of F2 is lower than that of Cl2.
(ii) PH3 has lower boiling point than NH3.
(i) BrF3 (ii) (HPO3)3
(iii) XeF4
OR
(i) Helium is used in diving apparatus.
(ii) Fluorine does not exhibit positive oxidation state.
(iii) Oxygen shows catenation behaviour less than sulphur.
(i) XeF2 (ii) H2S2O8
30. (a) Although phenoxide ion has more number of resonating structures than carboxylate ion,
carboxylic acid is a stronger acid than phenol. Give two reasons.
(b) How will you bring about the following conversions?
(i) Propanone to propane
(ii) Benzoyl chloride to benzaldehyde
(iii) Ethanal to but-2-enal
OR
(a) Complete the following reactions:
conc. KOH
(i) 2H—C—H ¾ ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾®
||
O
Br2 P
(ii) CH3COOH ¾ ¾ ¾¾®
CHO
HNO3/H2SO4
(iii)
273–283 K
(b) Give simple chemical tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds:
(ii) Benzoic acid and Phenol
SET–II
(Questions Uncommon to Set–I)
1. What type of stoichiometric defect is shown by AgCl?
CH3
|
2. Write the IUPAC name of CH3CH—CH — C —CH3.
|
Br
4. What type of bonding helps in stabilising the a-helix structure of proteins?
6. What inspired N. Bartlett for carrying out reaction between Xe and PtF6?
7. What happens when ethyl chloride is treated with aqueous KOH?
8. Write the structure of 4–chloropentan–2–one.
9. How will you convert the following?
(i) Propan–2–ol to propanone. (ii) Phenol to 2, 4, 6–tribromophenol
11. What is the difference between oil/water (O/W) type and water/oil (W/O) type emulsions? Give an
example of each type.
17. (a) Which of the following ores can be concentrated by froth floatation method and why?
Fe2O3, ZnS, Al2O3.
(b) What is the role of silica in the metallurgy of copper?
18. (a) Why does p-dichlorobenzene have a higher m.p. than its o- and m- isomers?
(b) Why is (±) – Butan-2-ol is optically inactive?
(i) Polystyrene (ii) Dacron
(ii) Teflon
27. Write the types of isomerism exhibited by the following complexes:
(i) [Co(NH3)5Cl]SO4 (ii) [Co(en)3]3+
(ii) [Co(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6]
SET–III
(Questions Uncommon to Set-I and II)
1. What type of substances would make better permanent magnets, ferromagnetic or ferrimagnetic?
3. What is the composition of ‘Copper matte’?
5. What is a glycosidic linkage?
6. Write the IUPAC name of (CH3)2CH.CH (Cl)CH3.
7. Which compound in the following pair undergoes faster S N 1 reaction?
Cl Cl
and
8. Write the structure of p-Methylbenzaldehyde molecule.

each.
14. (a) Give an example of zone refining of metals.
(b) What is the role of cryolite in the metallurgy of aluminium?
17. Account for the following:
(i) The C—Cl bond length in chlorobenzene is shorter than that in CH3—Cl.
(ii) Chloroform is stored in closed dark brown bottles.
18. How will you convert:
(i) Propene to Propan-1-ol?
(ii) Ethanal to Propan-2-o1?
23. Give the structures of products A, B and C in the following reactions:
KCN 4 LiAlH2 HNO
(i) CH3 CH2 Br ¾ ¾ ¾¾® A ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® B ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ® C
0 °C
3 NH 2 NaOH + Br CHCl + alc. KOH

(ii) CH3 COOH ¾ ¾ ¾
¾ ® A ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ® B ¾ ¾ ¾ 3¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® C
D
(i) Bakelite (ii) Nylon-6
(iii) Polythene
zzz
Solutions
SET–I
1 1
1. (8 corner atoms) ´ + (6 face centre atoms) ´ = 1 + 3 = 4
8 2
2. Mond Process.
3. 4
4. 4-Chloropent-1-ene.
5. CH3 Br + KCN ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 C ºº N
Ethanenitrile
4 3 2 1
6. CH3 ¾ CH¾ CH2 ¾ C HO
½
CH3
7. (CH3 ) 3 N < CH3 NH2 < (CH3 ) 2 NH
8. There are three types of RNAs:
(i) Ribosomal RNA (rRNA)
(ii) Messenger RNA (mRNA)
(iii) Transfer RNA (tRNA)
9. Moles of glucose = 18 g / 180 g mol -1 = 0.1 mol
Mass of solvent = 1 kg
Hence, molality of glucose solution = 0.1 mol kg–1
For water, change in boiling point will be
DTb = K b ´ m
= 0.52 K kg mol–1 × 0.1 mol kg–1 = 0.052 K.
Since water boils at 373.15 K at 1.013 bar pressure, the boiling point of solution will be 373.15 +
0.052 = 373.202 K.
-1 3 –1
10. L m = k ´ 1000 = 0.025 S cm ´ 1000 cm L = 125 S cm 2 mol - 1
c 0.20 mol L- 1
11.
Type of Colloid Dispersed Phase Dispersion Medium
(i) Smoke Solid Gas
(ii) Milk Liquid Liquid
OR
Lyophilic sols are solvents attracting sols whereas lyophobic sols are solvent repelling sols.
Lyophobic sols can be easily coagulated.
12.
Physisorption Chemisorption
(i) Specificity It is not specific in nature. It is highly specific in nature.
(ii) Temperature Low temperature is favourable for High temperature is favourable for
dependence adsorption. It decreases with increase of adsorption. It increases with the
temperature. increase of temperature.
(iii) Reversibility It is reversible in nature. It is irreversible.
(iv) Enthalpy change Enthalpy of adsorption is low Enthalpy of adsorption is high
(20–40 kJ mol -1) in this case. (80-240 kJ mol -1) in this case.
13. (a) Dilute solution of NaCN.

(b) CO.
14. (i) When PCl5 is heated, the less stable axial bonds break to form PCl 3 .
Heat
PCl5 ¾¾¾
¾® PCl 3 + Cl 2 .
(ii) Orthophosphorous acid on heating disproportionates to give orthophosphoric acid and
phosphine.
Heat
4H3 PO3 ¾¾¾
¾® PH3 + 3H3 PO4
Orthophosphorous Phosphine Orthophosphoric
acid acid
15. (a) Cu has the electronic configuration 3d 10 4s 1 . It can easily lose 4s 1 electron to give the stable
3d 10 configuration. Hence, it shows +1 oxidation state.
(b) Mn 2 + and V 3 + are coloured in aqueous solutions because they have unpaired electrons.
16. (i) Due to resonance C—Cl bond acquires a partial double bond character which is difficult to
cleave.
sp2 hybridisation of C of C—Cl bond.
(ii) Due to
(iii) Due to
unstable phenyl cation.
(iv) Due torepulsion between nucleophile and electron-rich arenes.
H
·· ½·
17. (i) CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ O H + HÅ ¾® CH3CH2 ¾ O · ¾ H
·· Å
H
(ii) CH3—CH2—O + CH3—CH2—O CH3—CH2—O—CH2—CH3 + H2O
H
H H
+
(iii) CH3—CH2—O—CH2—CH3 CH3CH2—O—CH2—CH3 + H
H
18. (i) Propan-2-ol can be prepared from propene by hydration as shown below:
H O/ H+
— CH2 ¾ ¾2¾ ¾¾® CH3 — CH — CH3
CH3 — CH —
Propene ½
OH
OH OH OH
H2SO4 (conc.) SO3H HNO3 (conc.) O2N NO2
(ii)
Phenol
SO3H NO2
Phenol-2,4 2,4,6-Trinitrophenol
disulphonic acid
19. (a) p-type semiconductor.
(b) Ferromagnetism.
(c) Impurity defect/cation vacancy defect.
20. K 2 SO4 dissolved = 0.025 g
Volume of solution = 2 L, T = 25°C = 298 K
Molar mass of K 2 SO4 = 174 g mol -1
Since K 2 SO4 dissociates completely as K 2 SO4 ¾® 2K + + SO24 -
Total number of moles of particle after dissociation 3
i= = =3
Number of moles of particles before dissociation 1
Applying van’t Hoff equation,
i ´ WB ´ R ´ T
p=
MB ´ V
3 ´ 0 . 025 g ´ 0.0821 L atm K -1 mol -1 ´ 298 K
= = 5.27 × 10–3 atm
174 g mol -1 ´ 2 L
21. Cell reaction: Fe(s) + 2H + (aq) ¾ ¾
¾® Fe 2 + (aq) + H 2 (g)
o 0.0591 [Fe 2 + ]
Nernst equation: E cell = E cell - log
2 [H+ ] 2
0.0591 10 - 3
\ E cell = 0.44 - log
2 (1) 2
0.0591
= 0.44 - ´ ( - 3) = 0.44 + 0.0886 = 0.52856V
2
22. (i) Transition elements show variable oxidation states because electrons in ns and ( n - 1) d-orbitals
are available for bond formation as they have nearly same energy.
(ii) This is due to filling of 4f orbitals which have poor shielding effect (lanthanoid contraction).
(iii) This is because of their ability to adopt multiple oxidation states and to form complexes.
OR
(i) Cr2O 27 – + 6Fe 2 + + 14H+ ¾ ¾
¾® 2Cr3+ + 6Fe3+ + 7H2O
(ii) 2Cr2 O24 – + 2H+ ¾ ¾

¾® Cr2 O27 – + H2 O
(iii) 2MnO–4 + 5C2 O24 – + 16H+ ¾ ¾

¾® 2Mn2+ + 10CO2 + 8H2O
23. (i) Triamminetrichloridochromium(III)

(ii) Potassium hexacyanoferrate(III)
(iii) Dibromidobis-(ethane-1,2-diammine)cobalt(III) ion
24. (i) A = C6H5CN, B = C6H5COOH, C = C6H5CONH2
(ii) A = C6H5NH2, B = C6H5N2+Cl-, C = C6H5OH
25.
S. No. Polymers Monomer names Monomer structures
(i) Buna-S 1, 3-Butadiene, CH2—CH—CH—CH2

Styrene C6H5CH—CH2
Cl
½
(ii) Neoprene Chloroprene
CH2 — — CH2
— C — CH —
(iii) Nylon-6, 6 Hexamethylene diamine, NH2—(CH2)6—NH2

Adipic acid COOH—(CH2)4—COOH
26. (a) Values shown by Sonali: concern for the society, socially active and helpful to others.
Values shown by principal: caring, commanding and serious about the welfare of students.
(b) Vitamin B complex, Vitamin C.
27. (a) Sodium benzoate.
(b) Bithional acts as an antiseptic agent and reduces the odour produced by bacterial decomposition
of organic matter on the skin.
(c) Tranquilizers.
d[ R ]
28. (a) (i) Rate = - = k[ A ] 2 [ B ]
dt
(ii) When concentration of A is tripled
Rate = k [3A]2[B] = 9k [A]2[B]
i.e., Rate of reaction will become 9 times.
(ii) When concentration of both A and B is doubled
Rate = k [2A]2[2B] = 8k [A]2[B]
i.e., Rate of reaction will become 8 times.
(b) For a first order reaction
2.303 [R ]0
k= log
t [R ]
[R ]0 100 10
when t = 40 minutes, = =
[R ] 100 - 30 7
2.303 10 2.303
k= log = log 1.428
40 7 40
2.303
k= ´ 0.1548
40
k = 8.91 ´ 10 - 3
min - 1
0.693 0.693
t1/2 = =
k 8.91 ´ 10 -3
t1/2 = 77.78 min.
OR
2. 303 [R ]0
(a) As t = log
k [R ]
2. 303 100
log
t 99% 1 = log 100 = 2
\ = k
t 90% 2. 303 100 log 10
log
k 10
Hence t 99% = 2t 90%
Ea
(b) Slope = - = - 4250 K
2. 303 ´ R
Ea = - 4250 × 2.303 × 8.314
= 81375 J mol–1
= 81.375 kJ mol–1
29. (a) (i) Bond dissociation enthalpy decreases as the bond distance increases from F2 to I2 because
of the corresponding increase in the size of the atom as we move from F to I. The F—F bond
dissociation enthalpy is, however, smaller than that of Cl—Cl and even smaller than that of
Br—Br. This is because F atom is very small and hence the three lone pairs of electrons on
each F atom repel the bond pair holding the F-atoms in F2 molecule. Hence, the bond
dissociation enthalpy increases in the order: I 2 < F2 < Br2 < Cl 2 .
(ii) Unlike NH3 , PH3 molecules are not associated through hydrogen bonding in liquid state.
That is why the boiling point of PH3 is lower than NH3 .
(b) (i) BrF3 (ii) (HPO3)3
F O
O O
P P OH
Br F HO
O O
P
F O OH
Slightly bent “T”
(iii) XeF4
F F
Xe
F F
Square planar
OR
(a) (i) Helium is used as a diluent for oxygen in modern diving apparatus because of its very low
solubility in blood.
(ii) This is because fluorine is the most electronegative element.
(iii) Because O—O single bond is weaker than S—S single bond.
(b) (i) Refer to Q. 12(ii) of CBSE (All India) Paper 2013.
(ii) H2S2O8
O O
S S
O O O O
OH OH
(H2S2O8)
30. (a) (i) Resonating structures of carboxylate ion are more stable than phenoxide ion.
(ii) Negative charge is dispersing on two electronegative oxygens in carboxylate ion whereas it
is on one oxygen atom in phenoxide ion.
(b) (i) Propanone to Propane
O
||
Clemmensen reduction
CH3—C—CH3 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3CH2CH3
Zn(Hg) + HCl
Propanone Or Propane
NH 2 — NH 2 + KOH + glycol
(ii) Benzoyl chloride to benzaldehyde

H2/Pd-BaSO4
COCl CHO
boiling xylene
Benzaldehyde
Benzoyl chloride
(iii) Ethanal to but-2-enal

4 3 2 1
Dil. NaOH
2CH3 CHO ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 ¾ CHOH ¾ CH2 ¾ CHO
( Aldol condensation )
Ethanal 3 - Hydroxybutanal
+
H O / Heat
¾ 3¾ ¾¾® CH3 ¾ CH —
— CH ¾ CHO
- H 2O
But - 2 - enal
OR
(a) (i) conc. KOH O
2H—C—H H3C—OH + H—C
OK
O
Br
|
Br2 P
(ii) CH3COOH ¾ ¾ ¾¾® C H2 —COOH
CHO CHO
HNO3/H2SO4
(iii)
273–283 K
NO2
(b) (i) Ethanal (CH3CHO) and propanal (CH3CH2CHO): Ethanal responds to iodoform test
and gives a yellow precipitate on addition of NaOH and I2, while propanal does not.
(ii) Phenol and benzoic acid: Benzoic acid reacts with NaHCO3 giving CO2 gas with
effervescence, whereas phenol does not Phenol decolourises Br2 water giving white
precipitate, whereas benzoic acid does not.
SET–II
1. Frenkel defect.
2. 4-Bromo-4-methylpent-2-ene.
4. The a-helix structure of proteins is stabilised by intramolecular H-bonding between C—O of one
amino acid residue and the N—H of the fourth amino acid residue in the chain.
6. Neil Bartlett observed that PtF6 reacts with O2 to yield an ionic solid, O+2 PtF6-
¾® O+2 [PtF6 ] -
O2 ( g) + PtF6 ( g) ¾ ¾
Here, O2 gets oxidised to O+2 by PtF6 .
Since the first ionisation enthalpy of Xe (1170 kJ mol -1 ) is fairly close to that of O2 molecule
(1175 kJ mol -1 ), Bartlett thought that PtF6 should also oxidise Xe to Xe + . This inspired Bartlett to
carry out the reaction between Xe and PtF6 . When Xe and PtF6 were mixed, a rapid reaction occurred
and a red solid with the formula, Xe + [ PtF6 ] – was obtained.
278 K
Xe + PtF6 ¾ ¾ ¾¾® Xe + [PtF6 ] -
Hydrolysis
7. CH3 CH2 Cl + KOH ( aq) ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3 CH2 — OH + KCl + H2 O
D Ethyl alcohol
Ethyl chloride
O
||
8. CH3—CH—CH2—C—CH3
|
Cl
OH O
| K 2 Cr2 O7 + H 2 SO4 ||
9. (i) CH3—CH—CH3 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3—C—CH3
Propan-2-ol Propanone
OH OH OH
H2SO4 (conc.) SO3H HNO3 (conc.) O2N NO2
(ii)
Phenol
SO3H NO2
Phenol-2,4 2,4,6-trinitrophenol
disulphonic acid (Picric acid)
11. (i) Oil in water (o/w) type emulsions: In such emulsions oil is the dispersed phase and water is
the dispersion medium, e.g., milk, vanishing cream.
(ii) Water in oil (w/o) type emulsion: In such emulsions, water is the dispersed phase and oil is
the dispersion medium, e.g., butter, cod liver oil.
17. (a) ZnS. This is because the sulphide ore particles are preferentially wetted by oil and gangue
particles are preferentially wetted by water.
(b) Silica acts as a flux to remove iron oxide (FeO) as slag in the metallurgy of copper.
FeO + SiO2 ¾¾
¾® FeSiO3
Flux Slag
18. (a) It is due to symmetry of p-dichlorobenzene which fits in crystal lattice better than the o- and m-
isomers.
(b) (±)-Butan-2-ol exist in two eventiomeric forms which rotate the plane of polarised light in
opposite directions in equal amounts. Therefore, cancelling each other and becoming optically
inactive.
23.
Polymer Monomers and their structures
(i) Polystyrene CH—CH2
Styrene (Vinyl benzene)

(ii) Dacron OHCH2—CH2OH HOOC COOH
Ethyl glycol
Terephthalic acid
(ii) Teflon F F
C C
F F
Tetrafluoroethene
27. (i) [Co(NH3)5Cl]SO4 — Ionisation isomerism

(ii) [Co(en)3]3+ — Optical isomerism
(ii) [Co(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6] — Coordination isomerism
SET–III
(Questions Uncommon to Set-I and II)
1. Ferromagnetic.
3. Cu2S and FeS.
5. The linkage between two monosaccharide units through oxygen atom is called glycosidic linkage.
6. 2-Chloro-3-methylbutane.
7. Cl
8. H3C CHO
9. Multimolecular colloids: In this type of colloids, colloidal particles are aggregates of large atoms or
molecules each having size in the colloidal range, e.g., sulphur sol, gold sol. Multimolecular colloids
are generally lyophobic in nature.
Macromolecular colloids: These are the solution containing macromolecules in the colloidal range,
e.g., starch, proteins, polyethene, etc. Macromolecular colloids are generally lyophilic in nature.
14. (a) Zone refining is used for production of semiconductors and other metals of very high purity like
germanium, silicon, boron, gallium and indium.
(b) Cryolite lowers the melting point of the mixture./Acts as an electrolyte./Acts as solvent for
alumina. (Any one)
17. (i) Refer to Q.23(iii) of CBSE Examination Paper (All India) 2013.
(ii) Because chloroform is slowly oxidised by air in the presence of light to an extremely poisonous
gas phosgene.
Light
2CHCl3 + O2 ¾ ¾ ¾¾® 2COCl2 + 2HCl
Chloroform Phosgene
18. (i) Propene to Propan-1-ol

Peroxide KOH ( aq )
CH3CH—CH2 + HBr ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3CH2CH2Br ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3CH2CH2OH
D
Propene Propan-1-ol
(ii) Ethanal to Propan-2-o1

CH3 CH3MgI CH3 OMgI +
H , H2O CH3 OH
—
C—O C C
H H CH3 H CH3
Ethanal Propan-2-ol
23. (i) A = CH3CH2CN, B = CH3CH2CH2NH2, C = CH3CH2CH2OH

(ii) A = CH3CONH2, B = CH3NH2, C = CH3NC
27. OH
(i) Bakelite: , HCHO

Phenol Formaldehyde
H
N O
(ii) Nylon-6:
Caprolactum
(iii) Polythene: CH2—CH2

Ethene
zzz
All India–2013
SET–I
General Instructions: Same as CBSE Examination Paper, Delhi–2013.
1. Of physisorption or chemisorption, which has a higher enthalpy of adsorption?

2. Name the method used for refining of copper metal.
3. Name two poisonous gases which can be prepared from chlorine gas.
CH3
|
CH3— C — CH — CH3
| |
CH3 Cl
5. Rearrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their boiling points:
CH3—CHO, CH3—CH2—OH, CH3—CH2—CH3
6. Write the structure of n-methylethanamine.
8. Is –(CH2—CH )– n a homopolymer or a copolymer?
|
Cl
(i) Schottky defects lower the density of related solids.
(ii) Conductivity of silicon increases on doping it with phosphorus.
10. Aluminium crystallises in an fcc structure. Atomic radius of the metal is 125 pm. What is the length of
the side of the unit cell of the metal?
11. The standard electrode potential (E°) for Daniell cell is + 1.1 V. Calculate the DG° for the reaction
Zn( s) + Cu 2 + ( aq) ¾ ¾
¾® Zn 2 + ( aq) + Cu( s)
(1 F = 96500 C mol–1).
12. (a) For a reaction A + B ® P, the rate law is given by,
r = k[ A ]1 / 2 [ B ] 2 .
What is the order of this reaction?
(b) A first order reaction is found to have a rate constant k = 5.5 × 10–14 s–1. Find the half life of the
reaction.
13. (a) Name the method used for removing gangue from sulphide ores.
(b) How is wrought iron different from steel?
(i) XeOF4 (ii) H3PO3
15. How are interhalogen compounds formed? What general compositions can be assigned to them?
16. Explain the mechanism of the following reaction:
+
H
CH3—CH2—OH ¾ ¾¾® CH2—CH2 + H2O.
443 K
17. Write the equations involved in the following reactions:

(ii) Williamson’s ether synthesis
18. Define thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers. Give one example of each.
OR
What is a biodegradable polymer? Give an example of a biodegradable aliphatic polyester.
19. The rate of a reaction becomes four times when the temperature changes from 293 K to 313 K.
Calculate the energy of activation (Ea) of the reaction assuming that it does not change with
temperature.
[R = 8.314 JK–1 mol–1, log 4 = 0.6021]
20. What are the characteristics of the following colloids? Give one example of each:
(i) Multimolecular colloids
(ii) Lyophobic sols
(iii) Emulsions
21. Give reasons for the following:
(i) Where R is an alkyl group, R3P—O exists but R3N—O does not.
(ii) PbCl4 is more covalent than PbCl2
(iii) At room temperature, N2 is much less reactive.
22. For the complex [NiCl4]2–, write
(i) the IUPAC name.
(ii) the hybridisation type.
(iii) the shape of the complex.
(Atomic no. of Ni = 28)
OR
What is meant by crystal field splitting energy? On the basis of crystal field theory, write the
electronic configuration of d4 in terms of t2g and eg in an octahedral field when
(i) D0 > P (ii) D0 < P

(i) Ethyl iodide undergoes SN2 reaction faster than ethyl bromide.
(ii) (±) 2–Butanol is optically inactive.
(iii) C–X bond length in halobenzene is smaller than C–X bond length in CH3–X.
24. Complete the following reactions:
(i) CH3CH2NH2 + CHCl3 + alc. KOH ¾ ¾
¾®
H O
(ii) C6H5N+2 Cl – ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾2¾ ¾ ¾®
Room temperature
NH2
(iii) + HCl(aq)
25. (i) What class of drug is Ranitidine?

(ii) If water contains dissolved Ca2+ ions, out of soaps and synthetic detergents, which will you use
for cleaning clothes?
(iii) Which of the following is an antiseptic?
0.2% phenol, 1% phenol.
26. Calculate the emf of the following cell at 25oC:
Ag( s) Ag + (10 –3 M) | | Cu 2 + (10 –1 M) | Cu ( s)
o
Given E cell = + 0.46 V and log 10n = n.
27. Shanti, a domestic helper of Mrs. Anuradha, fainted while mopping the floor. Mrs. Anuradha
immediately took her to the nearby hospital where she was diagnosed to be severely ‘anaemic’. The
doctor prescribed an iron rich diet and multivitamins supplement to her. Mrs. Anuradha supported her
financially to get the medicines. After a month, Shanti was diagnosed to be normal.
(i) What values are displayed by Mrs. Anuradha?
(ii) Name the vitamin whose deficiency causes ‘pernicious anaemia’.
(iii) Give an example of a water soluble vitamin.
28. (a) State Raoult’s law for a solution containing volatile components.
How does Raoult’s law become a special case of Henry’s law?
(b) 1.00 g of a non-electrolyte solute dissolved in 50 g of benzene lowered the freezing point of
benzene by 0.40 K. Find the molar mass of the solute. (Kf for benzene = 5.12 kg mol–1)
OR
(a) Define the following terms:
(i) Ideal solution
(ii) Azeotrope
(iii) Osmotic pressure
(b) A solution of glucose (C6H12O6) in water is labelled as 10% by weight. What would be the
molality of the solution?
(Molar mass of glucose = 180 g mol–1)

(i) Mn3+ is a good oxidising agent
(ii) E o 2+ values are not regular for first row transition metals (3d series).
M /M
(iii) Although ‘F’ is more electronegative than ‘O’, the highest Mn fluoride is MnF4, whereas
the highest oxide is Mn2O7.
(b) Complete the following equations:

(i) 2CrO24 – + 2H+ ¾ ¾
¾®
heat
(ii) KMnO4 ¾ ¾ ¾®
OR
(a) Why do transition elements show variable oxidation states?
(i) Name the element showing maximum number of oxidation states among the first series of
transition metals from Sc (Z = 21) to Zn (Z = 30).
(ii) Name the element which shows only +3 oxidation state.
(b) What is lanthanoid contraction? Name an important alloy which contains some of the lanthanoid
metals.
30. (a) How will you convert the following:
(i) Propanone to Propan-2-ol
(ii) Ethanal to 2-hydroxy propanoic acid
(iii) Toluene to benzoic acid
(b) Give simple chemical test to distinguish between:
(i) Pentan-2-one and Pentan-3-one
(ii) Ethanal and Propanal
OR
(a) Write the products of the following reactions:
Zn – Hg
(i) CH3—C—CH3 ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ¾® ?
|| conc. HCl
O
Pd – BaSO4
(ii) CH3—C—Cl + H2 ¾ ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾® ?
||
O
COOH
Br2/FeBr3
(iii) ?
(b) Which acid of each pair shown here would you expect to be stronger?
(i) F—CH2—COOH or Cl—CH2—COOH
OH
(ii) or CH3COOH
SET–II
1. Write the structure of 2-aminotoluene.
2. Which aerosol depletes ozone layer?
4. Ethanol is soluble in water. Why?

CH3—CH—CH2 —CH—CH3
| |
Br Cl
7. Write the name of linkage joining two amino acids.

8. Give one example of a condensation polymer.
9. (a) Why does presence of excess of lithium makes LiCl crystals pink?
(b) A solid with cubic crystal is made of two elements P and Q. Atoms of Q are at the corners of the
cube and P at the body-centre. What is the formula of the compound?
(i) XeF6 (ii) H2S2O7
18. Outline the principles of refining of metals by the following methods:
(i) Zone refining (ii) Vapour phase refining
19. Define the following terms giving an example of each:
(i) Associated colloids (ii) Lyophilic sol
(iii) Adsorption
22. Write the main products of the following reactions:
H PO + H O
(i) C6H5N+2 Cl– ¾ ¾3¾ 2¾ ¾2¾
¾® ?
NH2
Br2(aq)
(ii) ?
Br2 + NaOH
(iii) CH3—C—NH2 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® ?
||
O
(i) Oxygen is a gas but sulphur is a solid.
(ii) O3 acts as a powerful oxidising agent.
(iii) BiH3 is the strongest reducing agent amongst all the hydrides of Group 15 elements.
SET–III
(Questions Uncommon to Set–I and II)
1. What is especially observed when a beam of light is passed through a colloidal solution?
2. What is the basicity of H3PO3 and why?
Cl
CH3
Cl
5. What are the products of hydrolysis of lactose?
6. Is (CH2—CH)n a homopolymer or a copolymer?
8. Write the structure of prop-2-en-1-amine.

(i) N2 O5 (ii) XeF2
13. (a) What change occurs when AgCl is doped with CdCl2?
(b) What type of semiconductor is produced when silicon is doped with boron?
18. Name the principal ore of aluminium. Explain the significance of leaching in the extraction of
aluminium.
19. Define the following terms with an example in each case:
(i) Macromolecular sol (ii) Peptisation
(iii) Emulsion
(i) Though nitrogen exhibits +5 oxidation state, it does not form pentahalide.
(ii) Electron gain enthalpy with negative sign of fluorine is less than that of chlorine.
(iii) The two oxygen-oxygen bond lengths in ozone molecule are identical.
27. Write the main products of the following reactions:
2 HNO
(i) CH3 CH2 NH2 ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ®?
0°C
O
(ii) S—Cl + H—N—C2H5 ?
O H
O
N—H CH3—C—Cl
(iii) H ?
Base
zzz
Solutions
SET–I
1. Chemisorption.
2. Electrolytic refining.
3. The poisonous gases which can be prepared from chlorine gas are phosgene gas (COCl2)/mustard gas
(ClCH 2 CH 2 SCH 2 CH 2 Cl)/chloropicrin or tear gas (CCl3NO2)/sulphur monochloride (S2Cl2) .
4. 2-Chloro-3,3-dimethylbutane or 3-Chloro-2,2-dimethylbutane.
5. CH3CH2CH3 < CH3CHO < CH3CH2OH.
6. CH3—NH—CH2CH3.
7. Sucrose on hydrolysis gives one molecule each of glucose and fructose.
8. Homopolymer.
9. (i) In Schottky defect as the number of ions are missing from their normal lattice sites, the mass
decreases whereas the volume remains the same. Due to this the density decreases.
(ii) This is due to availability of additional unpaired electrons on doping with phosphorous.
a
10. For an fcc unit cell, r =
2 2
a = 2 2r = 2 ´ 1. 414 ´ 125 = 353.5 pm.
11. D r G o = - nFE o (cell)
In the given equation, n= 2, F = 96500 C mol - 1 o

and E cell = 1.1 V
Therefore, D r G o = - 2 ´ 1.1 V ´ 96500 C mol - 1
= - 212300 J mol - 1 = – 212.3 kJ mol–1

1 5
12. (a) Order of reaction = + 2 =
2 2
(b) Radioactive decay follows first order kinetics.
0.693 0. 693
t1/ 2 = = s = 1.26 ´ 1013 s.
k 5 .5 ´ 10 - 14
13. (a) Froth floatation.
(b) Wrought iron is the purest form of iron whereas steel is an alloy of iron.
14. (i) XeOF4 (ii) H3PO3
O O
F F
P
Xe
H OH
OH
F F
15. Interhalogen compounds are prepared by direct combustion or by the action of halogen on lower
interhalogen compounds. They can be assigned general composition as XX¢, XX¢3, XX¢5 and XX¢7
where X is halogen of larger size and X¢ of smaller size and X is more electropositive than X¢.
16. The mechanism of dehydration of ethanol involves the following steps:
Step 1: Formation of protonated alcohol:
H H H H H
½ ½ ·· Fast ½ ½ ½
+ ¾¾¾®
H — C —C — O — H + H ¬¾¾¾ H — C — C — O+ — H
· · ··
½ ½ ½ ½
H H H H
Ethanol Ethyl oxonium ion
Step 2: Formation of carbocation: It is the slowest step and hence, the rate determining step of the
reaction.
H H H H H
½ ½ ½+ Slow ½ ½ ··
H — C —C — O — H ¾¾¾®
¬¾¾¾ H — C — C + + H2 O
·· ··
½ ½ ½ ½
H H H H
Step 3: Formation of ethane by elimination of a proton
H H
½ ½ H H
H — C — C + ¬¾¾¾ ¾¾¾® C— —C + H+
½ ½ H H
Ethene
H H
The acid used in step 1 is released in step 3. To drive the equilibrium to the right, ethene is removed as
it is formed.
17. (i) Reimer-Tiemann reaction:
OH ONa ONa OH
CHCl2 CHO CHO
CHCl3 (aq.) NaOH NaOH H 3O +
340 K
Phenol Salicylaldehyde
(2-Hydroxybenzaldehyde)
(ii) Williamson synthesis:

+
R¾ X + Na ¾ O ¾ R¢ ¾¾® R ¾ O ¾ R¢ + NaX
Alkyl halide Sodium alkoxide Ether
18. Thermoplastic polymers: These polymers are capable of repeatedly softening on heating and
hardening on cooling. Example, polythene, polystyrene, etc.
Thermosetting polymers: These polymers on heating undergo extensive cross linking in moulds and
again become infusible. These cannot be reused. Example, bakelite, urea-formaldehyde resins, etc.
OR
Polymers which disintegrate by themselves over a period of time due to environmental degradation by
microorganisms are called biodegradable polymers. Example, PHBV (Poly-b-hydroxybutyrate-co-b-
hydroxyvalerate).
19. If rate at 293 K is R, rate at 313 K will be 4R.
k2 Ea éT2 – T1 ù
log = ê ú
k1 2 .303R ë T1 ´ T2 û
4R Ea é313 – 293 ù
log = ê 293 ´ 313 ú
R 2 .303R ´ 8. 314 ë û
E a é 20 ù
log 4 =
19.1471 êë 91709 úû
0 . 6021 ´ 19.1471 ´ 91709
Ea =
20
= 52863.2177 J mol–1 or 52.863 kJ mol–1
20. (i) Multimolecular colloids are aggregates of atoms or molecules each having size less than 1 nm
held together by van der Waals forces. Example, sulphur sol, gold sol.
(ii) Lyophobic sols are those sols in which the particles of the disperse phase have little affinity for
the particles of the dispersion medium. Example, sols of metal and their sulphides and
hydroxides, As2S3 sol, Fe(OH)3 sol.
(iii) Emulsion is a colloidal solution in which both the dispersed phase and dispersion medium are
liquids. Example, milk, cod liver oil, etc.
21. (i) N due to the absence of d-orbitals, cannot form pp - dp multiple bonds. Thus, N cannot expand
its covalency beyond four but in R3N—O, N has a covalency of 5. So, the compound
R3N—O does not exist. On the other hand, P due to the presence of d-orbitals forms
pp - dp multiple bonds and hence can expand its covalency beyond 4. Therefore, P forms
R3P—O in which the covalency of P is 5.
(ii) Because Pb is in +4 oxidation state in PbCl4 and has high charge/size ratio than Pb2+, thus
polarising power of Pb4+ is greater than Pb2+, and hence it is more covalent.
(iii) N2 is less reactive at room temperature because of strong pp - pp overlap resulting into the
triple bond (N ºº N), consequently high bond dissociation enthalpy.
22. (i) Tetrachloridonickelate(II) ion.
(ii) sp3 hybridisation.
(iii) Tetrahedral.
OR
The difference of energy between two sets of degenerate orbitals as a result of crystal field splitting is
known as crystal field splitting energy.
(i) t 24g e g0
(ii) t 23g e1g
23. (i) Since I - ion is a better leaving group than Br - ion, hence, CH3 I reacts faster than CH3 Br in
SN2 reaction with OH– ion.
(ii) (±) 2-Butanol is a racemic mixture, i.e., there are two enantiomers in equal proportions. The
rotation by one enantiomer will be cancelled by the rotation due to the other isomer, making the
mixture optically inactive.
(iii) In CH3–X the carbon atom is sp2 hybridised while in halobenzene the carbon atom is sp3
hybridised. The sp2 hybridised carbon is more electronegative due to greater s-character and
holds the electron pair of C–X bond more tightly than sp3 hybridised carbon with less
s-character. Thus, C–X bond length in CH3–X is bigger than C–X in halobenzene.
24. (i) CH3CH2NH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH(alc.) ¾ ¾
¾® CH3CH2NC + 3KCl + 3H2O
H O
(ii) C6H5N+2 Cl – ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾2¾ ¾ ¾® C6H5OH + N2 + HCl
Room temperature
–
NH2 NH3Cl
(iii) + HCl(aq)
25. (i) Antacid/antihistamine.

(ii) Synthetic detergents
(iii) 0.2% phenol.
26. The given cell notation in the question is incorrect.
The correct cell formula is given below:
Cu2+(10–1 M) | Cu(s) | | Ag+ (10–3 M) | Ag(s)
According to Nernst equation
o 0. 0591 [ Cu 2 + ]
Ecell = E cell – log
2 [Ag + ] 2
o
Given: E cell = 0.46 V
0. 0591 [ 0 .1]
Ecell = 0.46 – log
2 [10 –3 ] 2
[ 0 .1]
= 0.46 – 0.02955 log
[10 –6 ]
= 0.46 – 0.02955 log 105
= 0.46 – 0.02955 ´ 5
= 0.46 – 0.148 = 0.314 V.
Or
o 0. 059 [Ag + ] 2
Ecell = E cell – log
2 [ Cu 2 + ]
0. 0591 [10 –3 ] 2
= 0.46 – log
2 [ 0 .1]
[10 –6 ]
= 0.46 – 0.02955 log
[ 0 .1]
= 0.46 + 0.0295 ´ 5
= 0.6075 V.
27. (i) Helpfulness, caring, generosity, kindness attitude towards poor.
(ii) Vitamin B12.
(iii) Vitamin C.
28. (a) For a solution of volatile liquids, Raoult’s law states that the partial vapour pressure of each
component of the solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction present in solution, i.e.,
p A µ x A , or p A = p Ao x A
According to Henry’s law, the partial pressure of a gas in vapour phase (p) is directly
proportional to mole fraction (x) of the gas in the solution.
p = KHx
On comparing it with Raoult’s law it can be seen that partial pressure of the volalite component
or gas is directly proportional to its mole fraction in solution.
p µx
only the proportionality constant KH differs from p Ao . Thus, it becomes a special case of Henry's
law in which KH = p Ao .
K f ´ WB ´ 1000
(b) Substituting the values of various terms involved in equation M B = , we get
DTf ´ WA
5.12 K kg mol -1 ´ 1. 00 g ´ 1000 g kg -1
MB = = 256 g mol -1
0. 40 K ´ 50 g
OR
(a) (i) Ideal solution: The solution which follows Raoult’s law at all concentrations and temperatures.
(ii) Azeotrope: A liquid mixture which distills at constant temperature without undergoing
any change in composition.
(iii) Osmotic pressure: The minimum excess pressure that has to be applied on the solution
side when the solution and solvent are separated by a semipermeable membrane to stop
osmosis.
(b) 10% w/w solution of glucose means 10 grams of glucose is present in 100 g of solution, i.e., 90 g
of water.
1000 ´ wt% 1000 ´ 10
m= = = 0.617 m
(100 - wt%) ´ Molecular weight of solute (100 - 10) ´ 180
29. (a) (i) Mn 3 + (3d4) is a good electron acceptor as the resulting species is more stable (3d5).
(ii) The E° (M 2 + / M) values are not regular which can be explained from the irregular
variation of ionisation enthalpies ( Di H1 + Di H 2 ) and also the sublimation enthalpies
which are relatively much less for manganese and vanadium.
(iii) Due to multiple bond formation ability of oxygen with Mn in Mn2O7.
(b) (i) 2CrO24 – + 2H+ ¾ ¾

¾® Cr2O72 – + H2O
Heat
(ii) 2KMnO4 ¾ ¾ ¾¾® K2MnO4 + MnO2 + O2
OR
(a) Transition elements show variable oxidation states because electrons in ns and ( n - 1) d-orbitals
(i) Manganese (ii) Scandium.
(b) The steady decrease in the atomic and ionic radii (having the same charge) with increase in
atomic number as we move across the series from lanthanum to lutetium is known as lanthanoid
contraction.
Misch metal.
O OH
|| |
LiAlH 4 or NaBH 4
30. (a) (i) CH3 — C— CH3 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾® CH3 — CH — CH3
Propanone Propan - 2 - ol
CN COOH
| + |
HCN H O/ H
(ii) CH3 — C— O ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 — C — OH ¾ ¾2¾ ¾¾® CH3 — CH — OH
| | 2 - hydroxy propanoic acid
H H
Ethanal
CH3 COOH
+
H /KMnO4
(iii)
Toluene Benzoic acid
(b) (i) Pentan-2-one and pentan-3-one: Pentan-2-one responds to iodoform test and gives yellow
coloured precipitate with I2 and NaOH, while pentan-3-one does not.
(ii) Ethanal and propanal: Ethanal responds to iodoform test and gives yellow coloured
precipitate with I2 and NaOH, while propanal does not.
OR
Zn – Hg
(a) (i) CH3—C—CH3 ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ¾® CH3—CH2—CH3 + H2O
|| conc. HCl
O
Pd – BaSO4
(ii) CH3—C—Cl + H2 ¾ ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾® CH3—CHO + HCl
||
O
COOH COOH
Br2/FeBr3
(iii) + HBr
Br
(b) (i) F—CH2—COOH > Cl—CH2—COOH, because of higher –ve I effect of F.
OH
(ii) CH3COOH > , because CH3COO– is a more stable conjugate base.

SET–II
CH3
1.
NH2
2. CCl2F2/Freon.
4. Alcohols can form H-bonds with water and break the H-bonds already existing between water
molecules. Hence, they are soluble in water.
5. 2-Bromo-4-chloropentane.
7. Peptide linkage.
8. Nylon-6,6/Dacron/Glyptal.
9. (a) Excess of lithium leads to metal excess defect. Lithium atoms lose electrons to form Li+ ions.
These electrons diffuse into the crystal and form F-centres. Therefore, LiCl crystals become pink.
(b) Number of P atoms per unit cell = 1 (at the body centre) ´ 1 = 1
1
Number of Q atoms per unit cell = 8 (at the corners) ´ = 1
8
Hence, the formula of the compound = PQ.
14. (i) XeF6 (ii) H2S2O7
F O O
F
F
Xe S S
F O O O
F OH OH
F
18. (i) Zone refining: Zone refining is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in
the melt than in the solid state of metal.
(ii) Vapour phase refining: In this, metal is converted into its volatile compound and collected
elsewhere. It is then decomposed to give pure metal.
19. (i) Associated colloids: There are certain substances which at low concentrations behave as
normal strong electrolytes, but at higher concentrations exhibit colloidal behaviour due to the
formation of aggregates. Such colloids are known as associated colloids or micelles, e.g., soaps
and detergents.
(ii) Lyophilic sol: Lyophilic sols are those sols in which the particles of dispersed phase have great
affinity for the dispersion medium, e.g., sols of gum, gelatin, starch, etc.
(iii) Adsorption: The accumulation of molecular species at the surface rather than in the bulk of a
solid or liquid is termed adsorption, e.g., water vapours on silica gel, poisonous gases on
charcoal.
H PO + H O
22. (i) C6H5N+2 Cl– ¾ ¾3¾ 2¾ ¾2¾
¾® C6H6 + N2 + H3PO3 + HCl
NH2 NH2
Br2(aq) Br Br
(ii)
Br
Br + 4NaOH
(iii) CH3—C—NH2 ¾ ¾ 2¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3—NH2 + Na2CO3 + 2NaBr + 2H2O
||
O
27. (i) Oxygen forms pp - pp multiple bonds. Due to small size and high electronegativity oxygen
exists as diatomic (O2 ) molecules. Whereas, sulphur because of its bigger size and lower
electronegativity, has a much greater tendency for catenation than oxygen and lower tendency
for pp - pp multiple bonds.
(ii) Due to the ease with which it liberates atoms of nascent oxygen, it acts as a powerful oxidising
agent.
(iii) This is because Bi—H bond is the weakest among the hydrides of group 15.
SET–III
1. Tyndall effect/Illumination of the path of light.
2. As two P—OH bonds are present in the molecule, therefore, its basicity is two.
3. 2, 5-Dichlorotoluene/1,4-Dichloro-2-methylbenzene.
5. Glucose and galactose.
6. Homopolymer.
8. H2C—HC—CH2
|
NH2
12. (i) N2 O5 (ii) XeF2

F
O O Xe
O
N N
O O F
Linear
13. (a) A cationic vacancy is generated.

(b) p-type semiconductor.
18. Bauxite (Al2O3.2H2O).
Leaching is significant as it helps in removing the impurities like SiO2 , Fe 2 O3 , TiO2 etc. from the
bauxite ore and thus alumina is obtained.
19. (i) Macromolecular sol: Macromolecules in suitable solvents form solutions in which the size of
the macromolecules may be in colloidal range, e.g.,starch, cellulose, nylon, etc.
(ii) Peptisation: The process of conversion of a freshly prepared precipitate into a colloidal
solution by shaking it with dispersion medium in the presence of a suitable electrolyte is called
peptisation. Example, freshly prepared precipitate of Fe(OH)3 is peptised by FeCl3.
(iii) Emulsion: These are the colloidal systems in which both the dispersion medium and the
dispersion phase are liquid, e.g., milk is an emulsion of fat in water.
21. (i) Nitrogen does not have d-orbitals in its valence shell to expand its covalence beyond four. That
is why it does not form pentahalide.
(ii) Lower value of bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 is due to the strong repulsion between the
non-bonding electrons of F atoms in the small sized F2 molecule.
(iii) Because of resonance.
27. 2 HNO
(i) CH3 CH2 NH2 ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ® CH3 CH2 OH
0°C
O O
(ii) S—Cl + H—N—C2H5 S—N—C2H5 + HCl
O H O H
O
O
N—H CH3—C—Cl
N—C—CH3
(iii) H Base H
zzz
Foreign–2013
SET–I
General Instructions: Same as CBSE Examination Paper, Delhi–2013.
1. Which group of solids is electrical conductors, as well as malleables and ductiles?

2. Measurement of which colligative property is preferred for determination of molar mass of biomolecules?
3. Name the method used for refining of germanium metal.
CH3— CH — CH—CH3
| |
CH3 Cl
5. Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their acid strengths:
4-nitrophenol, phenol, 2,4,6-trinitrophenol
6. Write the structure of 3-hydroxybutanal.
7. Why is methylamine more basic than aniline?
8. Write the names of monomers of the polymer
—[ NH - (CH2 ) 6 - NH - C- (CH2 ) 4 - C]-n
|| ||
O O
9. Henry’s law constant (kH) for the solution of methane in benzene at 298 K is 4.27 ×105 mm Hg.
Calculate the solubility of methane in benzene at 298 K under 760 mm Hg.
10. (i) Why is an increase in temperature observed on mixing chloroform and acetone?
(ii) Why does sodium chloride solution freeze at a lower temperature than water?
11. The rate constant for a first order reaction is 60 s–1. How much time will it take to reduce the initial
1
concentration of the reactant to th of its initial value?
10
12. (a) What happens when a freshly precipitated Fe(OH)3 is shaken with water containing a small
quantity of FeCl3?
(b) Why is a finely divided substance more effective as an adsorbent?
13. Write two differences between lyophobic and lyophilic sols. Give one example of each type of sol.
14. How can you separate alumina (Al2O3) from silica present in bauxite ore? Write the chemical
equations for the reactions involved.
OR
(a) What are the constituents of ‘copper matte’?
(b) What is the role of depressant in froth floatation process?
15. Arrange the following in the order of property indicated for each set:
(a) HF, HCl, HBr, Hl — increasing acid strength.
(b) NH3, PH3, AsH3, SbH3, BiH3 — increasing reducing power.
16. Write the reactions involved when D-glucose is treated with the following reagents:
(a) HCN (b) Br2-water
17. (a) What type of bonding helps in stabilising the a-helix structure of proteins?
(b) What is the structural difference between a nucleoside and a nucleotide?
18. Arrange the following polymers in increasing order of their intermolecular forces:
(a) Nylon-6,6, Buna-S, Polythene
(b) PVC, Nylon-6, Neoprene
19. An element with molar mass 27 g mol–1 forms a cubic unit cell with edge length 4.05 × 10–8 cm. If its
density is 2.7 g cm–3, what is the nature of the cubic unit cell?
20. For a chemical reaction R ® P, the variation in the concentration ln [R] vs. time t plot is given as
In [R]
t(s)
For this reaction
(i) what is the order of the reaction?
(ii) what is the slope of the curve?
(iii) what is the unit of rate constant ‘k’?
(i) N2O5 (ii) H3PO2
(iii) XeF6
(i) White phosphorus is more reactive than red phosphorus.
(ii) SnCl4 is more covalent than SnCl2.
(iii) O3 is a powerful oxidising agent.
OR
Complete the following equations:
(i) PC13 + H2O ¾ ¾
¾® (ii) XeF2 + PF5 ¾ ¾
¾®
heat
(iii) NaN3 ¾ ¾ ¾¾®
23. (a) Write the IUPAC name of the complex [CoBr2(en)2]+.

(b) What type of isomerism is shown by the complex [Co(NH3 ) 5 SO4 ]Br?
(c) Why is CO a stronger ligand than NH3 in complexes?
24. Consider the three types of replacement of group X by group Y as shown here.
C2H5 C2H5 C2H5
H Y H Y H
Y X Y
CH3 Y CH3 CH3
(B) (A) + (B) (A)
This can result in giving compound (A) or (B) or both. What is the process called if
(i) (A) is the only compound obtained?
(ii) (B) is the only compound obtained?
(iii) (A) and (B) are formed in equal proportions?
25. (a) Explain the mechanism of the following reaction:
+
H
2CH3CH2OH ¾ ¾¾® CH3CH2—O—CH2CH3 + H2O
413 K
(b) Name the reagent used in the oxidation of ethanol to ethanoic acid.
26. How will you convert the following:
(i) Aniline to chlorobenzene
(ii) Ethanoic acid to methanamine
(iii) Benzene diazonium chloride to phenol
27. Mr. Naresh works in a multi-national company. He is stressed due to his hectic schedule. Mr. Amit,
his friend, comes to know that he has started taking sleeping pills without consulting the doctor.
Mr. Amit requests Naresh to stop this practice and takes him to a Yoga centre. With regular Yoga
sessions, Mr. Naresh is now a happy and relaxed man.
(i) Write the values shown by Mr. Amit.
(ii) Which class of drugs is used in sleeping pills?
(iii) Why is it not advisable to take sleeping pills without consultation with the doctor?
28. (a) State Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions. Mention one application of
Kohlrausch’s law.
(b) The resistance of a conductivity cell containing 10–3 M KCl solution at 25ºC is 1500 W. What is
the cell constant if conductivity of 10–3 M KCl solution at 25°C is 1.5 × 10–4 S cm–1?
OR
Calculate emf and DG º for the following cell at 298 K:
Mg(s) | Mg2+(10–3 M) | | Cu2+(10–4 M) | Cu(s)
Given E o = – 2.36 V and E o = + 0.34 V
Mg 2+ Mg Cu 2+ Cu
(1 F = 96500 C mol–1)
29. Assign reasons for the following:

(i) In the series Sc (Z = 21) to Zn (Z = 30), the enthalpy of atomisation of Zn is the lowest.
(ii) Zr and Hf have almost identical radii.
(iii) Transition metals show variable oxidation states.
(iv) The Eº M 2+ / M value for copper is positive (+ 0.34 V).
(v) Cr2+ is a very good reducing agent.
OR
Describe the preparation of KMnO4 from pyrolusite ore (MnO2). How does the acidified
permanganate solution react with the following:
(i) Fe2+ ions
(ii) Oxalic acid (C2 O4 H2 )
Write the ionic equations for the reactions involved.
(i) Ethanal is more reactive than acetone towards nucleophilic addition reaction.
(ii) (CH3)3C—CHO does not undergo aldol condensation.
(iii) Carboxylic acids are higher boiling liquids than alcohols.
(b) Give a simple chemical test to distinguish between
(i) Acetophenone and Benzophenone
(ii) Benzaldehyde and Ethanal
OR
Write the structures of products of the following reactions:
O
C—Cl
(i) Pd/BaSO4
+ H2 ?
HCN
(ii) CH3— C— H ¾ ¾ ¾®?
¾
||
O
Conc. KOH
(iii) 2H— C— H ¾ ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾®?
||
O
O
(iv) H2NCONHNH2
– +
COO Na
NaOH, CaO
(v) ?
D
SET–II
1. Why is glass considered a supercooled liquid?
2. Ethylamine is soluble in water whereas aniline is almost insoluble. Why?
4. Write the structure of 4-methyl pent-3-en-2-one.

CH2 — CH — CH2 — CH — CH2 — Cl
|
CH3
7. On what principle is chromatography based?
8. Write the names of monomers of the following polymer:
—OCH
] 2—CH2—O—C— ]n
—C—
O O
9. What type of deviation is shown by a mixture of ethanol and acetone? What type of azeotrope is
formed by mixing ethanol and acetone?
14. Write the reactions involved when D-glucose is treated with the following reagents:
(i) HI (ii) H2N—OH
16. What is special about the following terms:
(i) Kraft Temperature (ii) Sorption
(i) PCl5 (ii) H4P2O7
(iii) ClF3
25. (a) Write the formulae for the following coordination compounds:
(i) Tetraammineaquachloridocobalt (III) chloride
(ii) Potassiumtetracyanonickelate (II)
(b) Write the hybridisation of the complex [NiCl4]2–. (Atomic number of Ni = 28)
27. How are the following conversions carried out:
(i) Aniline to fluorobenzene
(ii) Benzene diazonium chloride to benzene
(iii) Methyl chloride to ethylamine
SET–III
1. What is the two-dimensional coordination number of a molecule in a square close-packed layer?
Cl
NO2
NO2
3. Write the names of monomers of the following polymer:
—[ C— (CH2 ) 5 — N]-n
|| |
O H
4. Why are diazonium salts of aromatic amines more stable than those of aliphatic amines?
7. Write the structural formula of 2-phenyl ethanoic acid?

8. Name the method used for the refining of Titanium metal.
9. Out of two 0.1 molal solutions of glucose and of potassium chloride, which one will have a higher
boiling point and why?
14. Write the structural difference between DNA and RNA.
16. Write the dispersed phase and dispersion medium of the following colloids:
(i) Cheese (ii) Fog
21. (a) What type of isomerism is shown by each of the following complexes:
(i) [Pt(NH3 ) 2 Cl 2 ] (ii) [Co(NH3 ) 5 (NO2 )]Cl 2
(b) Give an example of the role of coordination compounds in biological systems.
23. Draw the structures of the following:
(i) Solid PCl5 (ii) H2S2O8
(iii) XeO3
26. How are the following conversions carried out:
(i) Aniline to iodobenzene
(ii) Ethyl nitrile to ethyl amide
(iii) Benzene diazonium chloride to benzonitrile
zzz
Solutions
1. Metallic solids.
2. Osmotic pressure.
3. Zone refining method.
4. 2-Chloro-3-methylbutane.
5. phenol < 4-nitrophenol < 2,4,6-trinitrophenol
OH O
½ ½½
6. H3 C ¾ C H ¾ CH2 ¾ C ¾ H
7. Methylamine is more basic than aniline due to resonance in aniline and lower stability of aniline ions.
8. Hexamethylenediamine [H2 N — (CH2 ) 6 — NH2 ] and adipic acid [HOOC — (CH2 ) 4 — COOH] .
9. Here, k H = 4.27 ´ 105 mm Hg
p = 760 mm Hg
According to Henry’s law, p = k H x CH 4
p 760 mm Hg
\ x CH 4 = = = 1.78 ´ 10 -3
kH 5
4. 27 ´ 10 mm Hg
Mole fraction of methane in benzene; x CH 4 = 1.78 × 10–3. 2
10. (i) The bonds between chloroform molecules and molecules of acetone are dipole–dipole
interactions but on mixing, the chloroform and acetone molecules, they start forming hydrogen
bonds which are stronger bonds resulting in the release of energy. This gives rise to an increase
in temperature.
(ii) When a non-volatile solute is dissolved in a solvent, the vapour pressure decreases. As a result,
the solvent freezes at a lower temperature.
2.303 [R ]0 [R ]0
11. t = log as [ R ] =
k [R ] 10
2. 303 [R ]0 2. 303 2. 303
\ t = log = ´ log 10 = ´ 1 = 3.838 ´ 10 - 2 s
k [R ]0 60 60
10
12. (a) It is converted into colloidal state.
Fe(OH)3 + FeCl3 ¾ ¾ ¾® [Fe(OH)3Fe]3+ + 3Cl–
(b) Powdered substances have greater surface area as compared to their crystalline forms. Greater
the surface area, greater is the adsorption.
13. (i) Lyophobic sols: Particles of dispersed phase have no affinity for dispersion medium, rather
they hate dispersion medium. They are not easily prepared and need stabilizing agents for their
preservation. They are irreversible. Examples: sols of gold, silver, Fe(OH) 3 , As 2 O3 etc. They
are also called extrinsic colloids.
(ii) Lyophilic sols: Particles of dispersed phase have great affinity for the dispersion medium.
They are self-stabilized because of strong attractive forces operating between the suspended
particles and the dispersion medium. They are reversible in nature. Examples: gums, gelatin,
starch, albumin, etc. They are also known as intrinsic colloids.
14. Leaching of aluminium from bauxite: Finely powdered bauxite ore is digested with an aqueous
solution of sodium hydroxide at 473–523 K and 35–36 bar pressure. Al2O3 is leached out as sodium
aluminate (and SiO2 too as sodium silicate) leaving impurities behind.
Al 2 O3 ( s) + 2NaOH( aq) + 3H2 O ¾ ¾
¾® 2Na[Al(OH) 4 ]( aq)
The aluminate in solution is neutralised by passing CO2 gas and hydrated Al2O3 is precipitated. At
this stage, the solution is seeded with freshly prepared samples of hydrated Al2O3 which induces the
precipitation.
2Na [Al(OH) 4 ]( aq) + CO2 ( g) ¾ ¾
¾® Al 2 O3 . xH2 O + 2NaHCO3 ( aq)
The sodium silicate remains in the solution and hydrated alumina is filtered, dried and heated to get
back pure Al2O3.
1470 K
Al 2 O3 . xH2 O( s) ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® Al 2 O3 ( s) + xH2 O( g)
OR
(a) Cu2S and FeS.
(b) In froth floatation process, the role of the depressant is to prevent certain type of particles from
forming the froth with the air bubbles.
15. (a) HF < HCl < HBr < HI.
(b) NH3 < PH3 < AsH3 < SbH3 < BiH3.
16. (a) HCN
CHO CN
CH
| | OH
HCN
(CHOH) 4 ¾ ¾ ¾¾® (CHOH) 4
| |
CH2 OH CH2 OH
D-Glucose Glucose cyanohydrin
(b) Br2-water
CHO COOH
| |
Br water
(CHOH) 4 ¾ ¾ 2¾ ¾¾® (CHOH) 4
| |
CH2 OH CH2 OH
D-Glucose Gluconic acid
17. (a) Hydrogen bonds (intermolecular) between the C—O of one amino acid residue and N—H of the
fourth amino acid residue in the chain give stability to the structure.
(b) A nucleoside is formed of pyrimidine or purine base connected to C-1 of sugar (ribose or
deoxyribose) by a b-linkage.
HO––H 2C 5' O Base

4'
H H1'
H 3' 2' H
OH OH
A nucleotide contains all the three basic components of nucleic acids, i.e., a phosphoric acid
group, a pentose sugar and a nitrogenous base.
O
–
O —P—O––H 2C 5' O Base
–
O 4'
H H1'
H 3' 2' H
OH OH
18. (a) Buna-S < Polythene < Nylon 6,6.
(b) Neoprene < PVC < Nylon-6.
19. Density, d = Z ´ M d ´ a3 ´ NA
or Z = ...(i)
a3 ´ NA M
Here, M = 27 g mol -1
a = 4.05 ´ 10 -8 cm
d = 2.7 g cm -3
NA = 6.022 ´ 10 23 mol -1
Substituting these values in expression (i), we get
2.7 g cm -3 ´ ( 4.05 ´ 10 -8 cm) 3 ´ 6.022 ´ 10 23 mol -1
Z =
27 g mol -1
Z = 3.99 = 4
Thus, there are 4 atoms of the element present per unit cell. Hence, the cubic unit cell must be
face-centred.
20. For this reaction
(i) First order
(ii) – k (rate constant)
(iii) time–1 (s–1)
21. (i) N2O5 (ii) H3PO2 (iii) XeF6
O F
O O O
N N F F
P
O O Xe
H OH
F F
H
F
22. (i) This is due to polymeric structure of red phosphorus or angular strain in P4 molecule of white
phosphorus where the angle is only 60°.
(ii) The oxidation states of central atom Sn in SnCl4 and SnCl2 are +4 and +2 respectively. +4 state
of Sn has higher polarising power which, inturn, increase the covalent character of bond
formed between the central atom and the other atoms.
(iii) Due to the ease with which it liberates atoms of nascent oxygen, it acts as a powerful oxidising
agent.
O3 ¾® O2 + O (nascent oxygen)
¾¾
OR
(i) PCl3 + 3H2O ¾ ¾
¾® H3PO3 + 3HCl
¾® [XeF] + [PF6 ] -
(ii) XeF2 + PF5 ¾ ¾
heat
(iii) 2NaN3 ¾ ¾ ¾¾® 2Na + 3N2
23. (a) Dibromobis (ethane-1, 2-diamine) cobalt
(b) Ionisation isomerism.
(c) Because in case of CO back bonding takes place in which the central metal uses its filled d orbital
with empty anti-bonding p* molecular orbital of CO.
24. (i) Retention
(ii) Inversion
(iii) Racemisation
H
Å
·· ½·
25. (a) CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ O H + H ¾® CH3 — CH2 ¾ O ·¾ H
·· Å
H
CH3—CH2—O + CH3—CH2—O CH3—CH2—O—CH2—CH3 + H2O
H
H H
+
CH3—CH2—O—CH2—CH3 CH3—CH2—O—CH2—CH3 + H
H
(b) Tollens’ reagent.
26. (i) Aniline to chlorobenzene

+ –
NH2 N2Cl Cl
NaNO2/HCl Cu2Cl2/HCl
273-278 K
Aniline Diazonium Chlorobenzene
salt
(ii) Ethanoic acid to methanamine

NH Br / KOH
CH3 COOH ¾ ¾ ¾
3
¾® CH3 CONH2 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ 2¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 NH2
D (Hoffmann bromamide
Ethanoic acid Ethanamide reaction) Methanamine
(iii) Benzene diazonium chloride to phenol

+ –
N2Cl OH
boil
+ H2O + HCl + N2
Diazonium Phenol
chloride
27. (i) Caring nature, helpful.

(ii) Tranquilizers.
(iii) Most of the drugs taken in doses higher than recommended may cause harmful effects and act
as poison. Therefore, a doctor should always be consulted before taking the medicine.
28. (a) Kohlrausch’s Law: It states that the limiting molar conductivity of an electrolyte can be
represented as the sum of the individual contributions of the anion and cation of the electrolyte.
In general, if an electrolyte on dissociation gives n + cations and n – anions then its limiting molar
conductivity is given by
Lom = n + lo+ + n – lo–
Here, lo+ and lo- are the limiting molar conductivities of cations and anions, respectively.
Applications of Kohlrausch’s Law:
Calculation of molar conductivities of weak electrolyte at infinite dilution: For example, molar
conductivity of acetic acid (weak acid) at infinite dilution can be obtained from the knowledge of
molar conductivities at infinite dilution of strong electrolytes like HCl, CH3COONa and NaCl as
illustrated below.
Lom ( CH = lo + lo
3 COOH) CH 3 COO- H+
= [ lo + lo ] + [ lo + l Cl – ] - [ lo + lo ]
CH 3 COO- Na + H+ Na + Cl –
i.e., Lom(CH = Lom(CH + Lom( HCl) - Lom(NaCl)

3 COOH) 3 COONa)
1
(b) Conductivity (k) = × Cell constant
Resistance ( R)
k = 1.5 ´ 10 -4 S cm -1 , R = 1500 ohm
1
1.5 ´ 10 -4 = ´ Cell constant
1500
\ Cell constant = 1.5 ´ 10 -4 ´ 1500 = 0.225 cm -1
OR
Cell reaction: Mg + Cu 2 + ¾ ¾
¾® Mg 2 + + Cu; n = 2
o 0.0591 [Mg 2 + ]
Nernst equation: E cell = E cell - log
2 [Cu 2 + ]
0.0591 10 - 3
\ E cell = 0.34 - ( - 2.36) - log
2 10 - 4
= 2.70 – 0.02655 = 2.67 V
o
DG ° = – nFE cell
DG ° = – 2 × 96500 × 2.71
= – 5.23 × 105 J mol–1
= – 5.23 × 102 kJ mol–1
29. (i) In the formation of metallic bonds, no electrons from 3d-orbitals are involved in case of zinc,
while in all other metals of the 3d series, electrons from the d-orbitals are always involved in
the formation of metallic bonds. That is why, the enthalpy of atomisation of zinc is the lowest
in the series.
(ii) This is due to filling of 4f orbitals which have poor shielding effect (lanthanoid contraction).
(iii) Transition elements show variable oxidation states because electrons in ns and ( n - 1) d-orbitals
(iv) This is because the sum of enthalpies of sublimation and ionisation is not balanced by
hydration enthalpy.
(v) Cr2+ is a stronger reducing agent because after the loss of one electron Cr2+ becomes Cr3+
which has more stable t 23g (half-filled) configuration in a medium like water.
OR
It is prepared by fusion of pyrolusite, MnO2, with KOH in the presence of an oxidising agent like
KNO3. This produces the dark green potassium manganate, K2MnO4 which disproportionates in a
neutral or acidic solution to give purple permanganate.
2MnO2 + 4KOH + O2 ¾ ¾
¾® K2MnO4 + 2H2O
3MnO42– + 4H+ ¾ ¾ ¾® 2MnO4– + MnO2 + 2H2O
Commercially, it is prepared by alkaline oxidative fusion of MnO2 followed by the electrolytic
oxidation of manganate (VI).
Fused with KOH
MnO2 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® MnO24 –
oxidised with air or KNO3 Manganate ion
Electrolytic oxidation
MnO24 – ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
¾® MnO–4
in alkaline solution Permanganate
In the laboratory, KMnO4 is prepared by oxidation of manganese (II) ion salt by peroxodisulphate.
2Mn2+ + 5S2O82– + 8H2O ¾ ¾
¾® 2MnO4– + 10SO42– + 16H+
Peroxodisulphate Permanganate
(i) MnO-4 + 8H+ + 5Fe 2 + ¾® Mn 2 + + 4H2 O + 5Fe 3 +

¾¾
–
COO
(ii) 2MnO-4 + 16H +
+5 ½ ¾® 2Mn 2 + + 8H2 O + 10CO2
¾¾
COO–
30. (a) (i) This is due to steric and electronic reasons. Sterically, the presence of two relatively large
substituents in ketones hinders the approach of nucleophile to carbonyl carbon than in
aldehydes having only one such substituent. Electronically two alkyl groups reduce the
positivity of the carbonyl carbon more effectively in ketones than in aldehydes.
(ii) This is because for aldol condensation to take place, at least one a-hydrogen (i.e., hydrogen
at carbon adjacent to carbonyl carbon) should be available, which is not present in
(CH3)3C—CHO.
(iii) This is due to more extensive association of carboxylic acid molecules through intermolecular
hydrogen bonding. The hydrogen bonds do not break completely even in the vapour phase.
(b) (i) Acetophenone and benzophenone:
Acetophenone responds to iodoform test and gives a yellow precipitate on addition of
NaOH and I2, but benzophenone does not.
COCH3 I2 /NaOH
COONa
+ 3NaOI + CHI3 ¯ + 2NaOH
Heat
Yellow ppt.
Sodium (Iodoform)
Benzoate
(ii) Benzaldehyde and Ethanal
Ethanal reacts with NaOI (I2/NaOH) to form yellow precipitate of iodoform while
benzaldehyde does not give this test.
– +
CH3CHO + 3I2 + 3NaOH ¾ ¾
¾® HCOO Na + CHI3 ¯ + 3NaI + 3H2O
Iodoform
(Yellow ppt.)
OR
O
C—Cl CHO
(i) Pd/BaSO4
+ H2
OH
½
HCN
(ii) CH3— C— H ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 — C — CN
|| ½
O H
Acetaldehyde cyanohydrin
Conc. KOH
(iii) 2H— C— H ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 OH + HCOOK
|| Methanol Potassium methanoate
O
O H2NCONHNH2
NNHCONH2
(iv) + H2O
– +
COO Na
NaOH, CaO
(v) + Na2CO3
D
SET–II
1. Glass is an amorphous solid and has a tendency to flow, though very slowly.
2. Due to hydrogen bonding ability of ethylamine.
— C H¾ C H3
4. C H3 ¾ C ¾ C H —
½½ ½
O CH3
6. 5-Chloro-4-methyl pent-1-ene.
7. Is is based on the principle that different components of a mixture are differently adsorbed on an
adsorbent.
8. Ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid
9. Positive deviation.
Minimum boiling azeotropes.
14. CHO
|
HI, D
(a) (CHOH) 4 ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3—CH2—CH2—CH2—CH2—CH3
|
n-Hexane
CH2 OH
CHO CH — N — OH
| |
NH 2 OH
(ii) (CHOH) 4 ¾¾¾¾
¾® (CHOH) 4
| |
CH2 OH CH2 OH
16. (i) Kraft temperature is the minimum temperature above which the formation of micelles takes
place.
(ii) Sorption is the process in which adsorption and absorption take place simultaneously, e.g.,
dyeing of cotton fibres by azo dyes.
22. (i) PCl5 (ii) H4P2O7 (iii) ClF3

Cl O O F
Cl
P P P F
Cl Cl
Cl HO O OH
Cl OH
OH F
25. (a) (i) [Co(NH3 ) 4 (H2 O)Cl]Cl 2
(ii) K 2 [Ni(CN) 4 ]
(b) sp3 hybridisation.
27. (i) Aniline to fluorobenzene
+ –
NH2 N2Cl F
NaNO2/HCl HBF4
0–5°C D + BF3 + NaCl + N2
(ii) Benzene diazonium chloride to benzene

+ –
N2Cl
+ H3PO2 + H2O + N2 + H3PO3 + HCl

Benzene diazonium Benzene
chloride
(iii) Methyl chloride to ethylamine

alc. KCN LiAlH 4
CH3—Cl ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3—CN ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3CH2NH2
SET–III
1. 4.
2. 1-chloro 2,4-dinitrobenzene.
3. Caprolactam.
4. The diazonium salts of aromatic amines are more stable than those of aliphatic amines due to dispersal
of the positive charge on the benzene ring.
OH
7. O
8. Vapour phase refining.
9. 0.1 M KCl solution will have higher boiling point as KCl dissociates in the solution.
14. Structural difference between DNA and RNA:
DNA RNA
1. The sugar present in DNA is 2-deoxy D-(–) ribose. 1. The sugar present in RNA is D-(–)-ribose.
2. DNA has double stranded a-helix structure. 2. RNA has single a-helix structure.
16.
Dispersed phase Dispersion medium
(i) Cheese Liquid Solid
(ii) Fog Liquid Gas
21. (a) (i) Geometrical isomerism

(ii) Linkage isomerism.
(b) Vitamin B12 (Cyanocobalamine), the antipernicious anaemia factor, is a complex of cobalt.
23. (i) Solid PCl5
In solid state PCl5 exist as [PCl4]+ [PCl6]– in which the cation, [PCl4]+ is tetrahedral and the
anion, [PCl6]– is octahedral.
+ –
Cl Cl
Cl Cl
P P
Cl Cl
Cl Cl
Cl Cl
(ii) H2S2O8 (iii) XeO3

O O
S S Xe
O O O O
OH HO O O
O
26. (i) Aniline to iodobenzene
+ –
NH2 N2Cl I
NaNO2/HCl +KI
273-278 K
Aniline Iodobenzene
(ii) Ethyl nitrile to ethyl amide

+
H2O/H NH3,
CH3—CN CH3—COOH D
CH3CONH2
(iii) Benzene diazonium chloride to benzonitrile

+ –
N2Cl CN
KCN,
CuCN
zzz
CBSE
Examination
Paper Delhi-2014
Time allowed : 3 hours Maximum marks : 70
SET–I
1. Give one example each of ‘oil in water’ and ‘water in oil’ emulsion.
2. Which reducing agent is employed to get copper from the leached low grade copper ore?
3. Which of the following is more stable complex and why? [Co(NH3)6]3+ and [Co(en)3]3+
4. Write the IUPAC name of compound.
CH3—CH—CH2—COOH
|
OH
5. Which of the following isomers is more volatile:
o-nitrophenol or p-nitrophenol?
6. What are isotonic solutions?
7. Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of solubility in water:
C6H5NH2, (C2H5)2NH, C2H5NH2
8. Which of the two components of starch is water soluble?
9. An element with density 11.2g cm–3 forms a f.c.c. lattice with edge length of 4 × 10–8 cm.
Calculate the atomic mass of the element.
(Given: NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol–1)
10. Examine the given defective crystal

A+ B– A+ B– A+
B– 0 B– A+ B–
+ – +
A B A 0 A+
B– A+ B– A+ B–
Answer the following questions:

(i) What type of stoichiometric defect is shown by the crystal?
(ii) How is the density of the crystal affected by this defect?
(iii) What type of ionic substances show such defect?
11. Calculate the mass of compound (molar mass = 256 g mol–1) to be dissolved in 75 g of benzene to
lower its freezing point by 0.48 K (Kf = 5.12 K kg mol–1).
12. Define an ideal solution and write one of its characteristics.
13. Write two differences between ‘order of reaction’ and ‘molecularity of reaction’.
14. Outline the principles behind the refining of metals by the following methods:
(i) Zone refining method
(ii) Chromatographic method
(i) Ca3P2 + H2O ¾ ¾
¾®
(ii) Cu + H2SO4 (conc.) ¾ ¾
¾®
OR
Arrange the following in the order of property indicated against each set:
(i) HF, HCl, HBr, HI — increasing bond dissociation enthalpy
(ii) H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te — increasing acidic character
16. Write the IUPAC name of the complex [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]+. What type of isomerism does it exhibit?
17. (i) Which alkyl halide from the following pair is chiral and undergoes faster SN2 reaction?
Br
Br
(a) (b)
(ii) Out of SN1 and SN2, which reaction occurs with
(a) Inversion of configuration (b) Racemisation
18. Draw the structure of major monohalo product in each of the following reactions:
(i) SOCl2
OH
(ii) CH2 CH = CH2 + HBr

Peroxide
19. (a) In reference to Freundlich adsorption isotherm write the expression for adsorption of gases on
solids in the form of an equation.
(b) Write an important characteristic of lyophilic sols.
(c) Based on type of particles of dispersed phase, give one example each of associated colloid and
multimolecular colloid.

(i) XeOF4
(ii) H2SO4
(b) Write the structural difference between white phosphorus and red phosphorus.
(i) PCl5 is more covalent than PCl3.
(ii) Iron on reaction with HCl forms FeCl2 and not FeCl3.
(iii) The two O—O bond lengths in the ozone molecule are equal.
22. The following data were obtained during the first order thermal decomposition of SO2Cl2 at a
constant volume:
SO2Cl2 ¾ ¾
¾® SO2(g) + Cl2(g)
Experiment Time/second–1 Total pressure/atm
1 0 0.4
2 100 0.7
Calculate the rate constant.

(Given: log 4 = 0.6021, log 2 = 0.3010)
23. (i) Give two examples of macromolecules that are chosen as drug targets.
(ii) What are antiseptics? Give an example.
(iii) Why is use of aspartame limited to cold foods and soft drinks?
24. (i) Deficiency of which vitamin causes night-blindness?
(ii) Name the base that is found in nucleotide of RNA only.
(iii) Glucose on reaction with HI gives n-hexane. What does it suggest about the structure of
glucose?
25. After the ban on plastic bags, students of one school decided to make the people aware of the
harmful effects of plastic bags on environment and Yamuna River. To make the awareness more
impactful, they organised rally by joining hands with other schools and distributed paper bags to
vegetable vendors, shopkeepers and departmental stores. All students pledged not to use polythene
bags in future to save Yamuna River.
(i) What values are shown by the students?
(ii) What are biodegradable polymers? Give one example.
(iii) Is polythene a condensation or an addition polymer?
26. (a) Write the mechanism of the following reaction:
HBr
CH3 CH2 OH ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 CH2 Br + H2 O
(b) Write the equations involved in Reimer-Tiemann reaction.
KCN 4 LiAlH 2 HNO
(i) CH3 Br ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® A ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾ ® B ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ® C
273 K
NH + KOH Br NaOH CHCl +
3
¾ ® A ¾ ¾ 2¾ ¾ ¾
¾® B ¾ ¾ ¾ 3¾ ¾ ¾¾® C
D
OR
How will you convert the following:
(i) Nitrobenzene into aniline
(ii) Ethanoic acid into methanamine
(iii) Aniline into N-phenylethanamide
(Write the chemical equations involved.)
(i) Limiting molar conductivity (ii) Fuel cell
(b) Resistance of a conductivity cell filled with 0.1 mol L–1 KCl solution is 100 W. If the resistance
of the same cell when filled with 0.02 mol L–1KCl solution is 520 W, calculate the conductivity
and molar conductivity of 0.02 mol L–1KCl solution. The conductivity of 0.1 mol L–1KCl
solution is 1.29 × 10–2 W–1 cm–1.
OR
(a) State Faraday’s first law of electrolysis. How much charge in terms of Faraday is required for the
reduction of 1 mol of Cu2+ to Cu?
(b) Calculate emf of the following cell at 298 K:
Mg(s) Mg 2 + (0.1M) Cu 2 + (0.01) Cu(s)
o
[Given E cell = +2.71 V, 1 F = 96500 C mol –1 ]
29. (a) How do you prepare:
(i) K 2 MnO4 from MnO2 ? (ii) Na 2 Cr2 O7 from Na 2 CrO4 ?
(b) Account for the following:
(i) Mn2+ is more stable than Fe2+ towards oxidation to +3 state.
(ii) The enthalpy of atomisation is lowest for Zn in 3d series of the transition elements.
(iii) Actinoid elements show wide range of oxidation states.
OR
(i) Name the element of 3d transition series which shows maximum number of oxidation states.
Why does it show so?
(ii) Which transition metal of 3d series has positive E o (M 2 + / M) value and why?
(iii) Out of Cr3+ and Mn3+, which is a stronger oxidising agent and why?
(iv) Name a member of the lanthanoid series which is well known to exhibit +2 oxidation state.
(v) Complete the following equation:
MnO-4 + 8H+ + 5e - ¾ ¾
¾®
30. (a) Write the products of the following reactions:
H+
(i) O + H2N — OH ¾ ¾¾®
(ii) 2C 6 H5 CHO + conc. NaOH ¾ ¾
¾®
Cl 2 / P
(iii) CH3 COOH ¾ ¾ ¾¾®
(i) Benzaldehyde and Benzoic acid
(ii) Propanal and Propanone
OR
(i) CH3CHO is more reactive than CH3COCH3 towards reaction with HCN.
(ii) Carboxylic acid is a stronger acid than phenol.
(b) Write the chemical equations to illustrate the following name reactions:
(i) Wolff-Kishner reduction
(ii) Aldol condensation
(iii) Cannizzaro reaction
SET–II (Questions Uncommon to Set–I)

1. Give one example each of sol and gel.
3. Write the IUPAC name of the compound.
CH3— CH — CH2
|
NH2
5. Some liquids on mixing form ‘azeotropes’. What are ‘azeotropes’?
6. Arrange the following in increasing order of basic strength.
C6H5NH2, C6H5NHCH3, C6H5CH2NH2
7. Which component of starch is a branched polymer of a-glucose and insoluble in water?
9. State Henry’s law. What is the effect of temperature on the solubility of a gas in a liquid?
(i) Pseudo first order reaction
(ii) Half life period of reaction (t1/2)
11. Write the principle behind the following methods of refining:
(i) Hydraulic washing
(ii) Vapour phase refining
(i) XeF2
(ii) BrF3
(i) Bi(V) is a stronger oxidising agent than Sb(V).
(ii) N – N single bond is weaker than P – P single bond.
(iii) Noble gases have very low boiling points.
25. (i) Name the sweetening agent used in the preparation of sweets for a diabetic patient.
(ii) What are antibiotics? Give an example.
(iii) Give two examples of macromolecules that are chosen as drug targets.
27. (i) Deficiency of which vitamin causes rickets?
(ii) Give an example for each of fibrous protein and globular protein.
(iii) Write the product formed on reaction of D-glucose with Br2 water.
SET–III (Questions Uncommon to Set-I and II)

1. Give one example each of lyophobic sol and lyophilic sol.
2. Write the IUPAC name of the compound.
CH3—CH—CH2— C — CH3
| ||
OH O
3. What type of intermolecular attractive interaction exists in the pair of methanol and acetone?
5. Arrange the following in increasing order of basic strength:
C6H5NH2, C6H5NHCH3,C6H5N(CH3)2
6. Name the products of hydrolysis of sucrose.
9. State Raoult’s law for the solution containing volatile components. What is the similarity between
Raoult’s law and Henry’s law?
10. Explain the following terms:
(i) Rate constant (k)
(ii) Half life period of a reaction (t1/2)
11. Write the principles of the following methods:
(i) Froth floatation method
(ii) Electrolytic refining
20. (a) Draw the structures of the following compounds:
(i) XeF4
(ii) N2O5
(i) Sulphur in vapour form exhibits paramagnetic behaviour.
(ii) SnCl4 is more covalent than SnCl2.
(iii) H3PO2 is a stronger reducing agent than H3PO3.
23. (i) What are disinfectants? Give an example.
(ii) Give two examples of macromolecules that are chosen as drug targets.
(iii) What are anionic detergents? Give an example.
24. (i) Deficiency of which vitamin causes scurvy?
(ii) What type of linkage is responsible for the formation of proteins?
(iii) Write the product formed when glucose is treated with HI.
zzz
Solutions
SET–I
1. Oil in water emulsion: milk, vanishing cream.
Water in oil emulsion: Butter, cold cream, cod liver oil.
2. Scrap iron, Cu 2 + ( aq) + Fe ( s) ¾ ¾
¾® Cu( s) + Fe 2 + ( aq)
or H2 gas, Cu 2 + ( aq) + H2 ( g) ¾ ¾
¾® Cu( s) + 2H+ ( aq)
3. In both of the given complexes, Co is in +3 oxidation state. As ethane-1, 2-diamine is bidentate
chelating ligand, it forms rings and hence [Co(en)3]3+ is more stable complex than [Co(NH3 ) 6 ] 3 + .
4. 3-hydroxybutanoic acid
5. o-nitrophenol, is more volatile as intermolecular hydrogen bonding causes association molecules in
p-nitrophenol.
O O O O
N H H O N O H O N O
O
p-nitrophenol
o-nitrophenol
Intramolecular hydrogen bonding Intermolecular hydrogen bonding
6. Two solutions which have the same osmotic pressure at a given temperature are called isotonic solutions.
7. The solubility increases in the order in which molecular mass decreases with increase in hydrogen
atoms on nitrogen atom which undergo hydrogen bonding, i.e.,
C 6 H5 NH2 < (C 2 H5 ) 2 NH < C 2 H5 NH2
8. Amylose is water soluble whereas amylopectin is water insoluble component.
9. For fcc lattice number of atoms per unit cell, z = 4
Here, d = 11.2 g cm–3, a = 4 ´ 10 -8 cm, NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol–1
d ´ a3 ´ NA
Atomic mass, M =
z
11.2 g cm -3 ´ ( 4 ´ 10 -8 cm) 3 ´ 6.022 ´ 10 23 mol -1
= = 107.9 g mol–1 or 107.9 u
4
10. (i) Schottky defect
(ii) Decreases
(iii) This type of defect is shown by ionic compounds which have high coordination number and
small difference in size of cations and anions e.g. NaCl, KCl etc.
11. Here, DTf = 0.48 K, MB = 256 g mol–1, WA = 75 g, Kf = 5.12 K kg mol–1.
DTf ´ M B ´ WA 0.48 K ´ 256 g mol -1 ´ 75 g
Mass of solute, WB = = = 1.8 g
K f ´ 1000 5.12 K kg mol –1 ´ 1000 g kg –1
12. A solution which obeys Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentration is called ideal solution.
The important characteristics of an ideal solution are
(i) The enthalpy of mixing of pure components to form the solution is zero i.e., D mix H = 0
(ii) The volume of mixing is zero i.e., D mix V = 0
13. Differences between order and molecularity of reaction.
Order Molecularity
(i) It is the sum of the powers of the concentration (i) It is the number of reacting species taking part
of the reactants in the rate law expression. in an elementary reaction, which must collide
simultaneously so as to result into a chemical
reaction.
(ii) It is determined experimentally. (ii) It is a theoretical concept.
(iii) It can be zero or a fraction. (iii) It cannot be zero or a fraction.
(iv) Order is applicable to elementary as well as (iv) Molecularity is applicable only for elementary
complex reactions. reactions. For complex reactions it has no
meaning.
(Any two)
14. (i) Zone refining method is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in the melt
than in the solid state of the metal.
(ii) Chromatographic method is based on the principle that different components of a mixture are
adsorbed to different extent on an adsorbent. The adsorbed components are removed by using
suitable solvents.
15. (i) Ca 3 P2 ( s) + 6H2 O(l) ¾¾® 2PH3 + 3Ca(OH) 2
(ii) Cu + 2H2SO4(conc.) ¾ ¾
¾® CuSO4 + SO2 + 2H2O
OR
(i) Shorter the bond length, higher is the bond dissociation enthalpy of hydrogen halide. As the
atomic size increases down the group the E–H (E = F, Cl, Br, I) bond length increases and
hence the bond dissociation enthalpy increases in the reverse order i.e.,
HI < HBr < HCl < HF
(ii) H2O < H2S < H2Se < H2Te
The increase in acidic character from H2 O to H2 Te is due to decrease in bond enthalpy for
dissociation of H - E (E = O, S, Se, Te) bond down the group.
16. [Cr(NH3 ) 4 Cl 2 ] + : Tetraamminedichloridochromium (III) ion.
Geometrical isomerism
Cl + Cl +
H3N Cl H3N NH3
Cr Cr
H3N NH 3 H3N NH3

NH 3 Cl
cis-Tetraamminedichlorido trans-Tetraamminedichlorido
chromium (III) ion chromium (III) ion
17. (i) , 2-bromobutane is a chiral molecule.

Br
Br , primary halides undergo faster S N 2 reactions than secondary halides due to less
steric hinderance.
(ii) (a) SN2 reaction occurs with inversion of configuration.
(b) SN1 reaction occurs with racemisation.
18. (i) —OH + SOCl2 —Cl + SO2 + HCl
Peroxide
(ii) CH2 CH CH2 + H Br CH2 CH2 CH2 Br
19. (a) Freundlich adsorption isotherm equation for adsorption of gases on solids:
x
= kp1 / n ( n > 1)
m
x 1
or log = log k + log p
m n
where x is the mass of the gas adsorbed on mass m of the adsorbent at pressure p, k and n are
constants which depends on the nature of the gas and adsorbent at a particular temperature.
(b) Important characteristics of lyophilic sols:
(i) They are reversible in nature, i.e., once the dispersed phase is separated from dispersion
medium the sol can be made again by simply remixing with dispersion medium.
(ii) They are quite stable and are not easily coagulated.
(c)
Type of Colloid Example
Associated colloid Surface active agents such as soap (CMC is 10–4 to

10–3 mol L–1) and synthetic detergents.
Multimolecular colloid Sulphur sol, gold sol
O O
20. (a) (i) (ii)
F F
Xe S
OH O
F F
OH
XeOF4 H2SO4
Square pyramidal Sulphuric acid
(b) White phosphorus consists of discrete tetrahedral P4 molecule with six P—P covalent bonds.
P
60°
P P
P
Red phosphorus has polymeric structure in which P4 tetrahedra are linked together through P—P
covalent bond to form chain.
P P P
—P P —P P—P P—
P P P
21. (i) The oxidation state of central atom phosphorus is +5 in PCl5 whereas it is +3 in PCl3. Higher the
positive oxidation of central atom, more will be its polarising power which, in turn, increases the
covalent character of bond formed between the central atom and the atoms surrounding it.
(ii) Iron reacts with HCl to form FeCl2 and H2.
Fe + 2HCl ¾ ¾ ¾® FeCl2 + H2
H2 thus produced prevents the oxidation of FeCl2 to FeCl3.
(iii) Ozone is a resonance hybrid of the following two main structures:
O O
O O O O
As a result of resonance, the two O—O bond lengths in O3 are equal.
2 .303 P0
22. k = log
t 2P0 - Pt
Here, P0 = 0 . 4 atm, t = 100 s, Pt = 0.7 atm
2 . 303 0. 4
\ k = log
100 2 ´ 0 . 4 - 0 .7
2 . 303 0 . 4 2 . 303 2 .303
= log = log 4 = ´ 0 . 6021
100 0 .1 100 100
k = 1.386 ´ 10 -2 s -1
23. (i) Biological macromolecules such as carbohydrates, proteins, lipids and nucleic acids are chosen
as drug targets.
(ii) Antiseptics are the chemical substances which prevent the growth of microorganism or may
even kill them but are not harmful to living human tissues, e.g., dettol, soframycin, boric acid,
hydrogen peroxide etc.
(iii) Use of aspartame is limited to cold foods and soft drink because it is unstable at cooking temperature.
24. (i) Vitamin A
(ii) Uracil
(iii) It suggests that all the six carbon atoms in glucose are linked in a straight chain.
25. (i) Concern towards water pollution, concern for environmental protection, team work, socially aware.
(ii) The polymers which can be broken into small segments by enzyme catalysed reactions or to
some extent by oxidation over a period of time are called biodegradable polymers. The required
enzymes are produced by microorganism e.g., poly-b-hydroxybutyrate-co-b-hydroxyvalerate
(PHBV), nylon-2-nylon-6 etc.
(iii) Polyethene is an addition polymer.
26. (a) SN2 Mechanism

–
(i) H–Br H + + Br
+
CH3–CH2 O H + H + CH3–CH2 O H2
Ethyl oxonium ion
(Protonated 1° alcohol)
CH3 –
CH3 +
– + d d
(ii) Br + CH2–OH2 Br…CH2…OH2 Br–CH2–CH3 + H2O
Transition state Ethyl bromide
–+ –+
OH ONa ONa OH
CHCl2 CHO CHO
CHCl3 + NaOH (aq) NaOH H+
(b)
Salicylaldehyde
Phenol
Intermediate
27. (i) KCN LiAlH4 HNO2

CH3Br CH3CN CH3CH2NH2 CH3CH2OH
273K
Bromomethane Ethanenitrile Ethanamine Ethanol
(A) (B) (C)
NH3 Br2+KOH CHCl3+NaOH
(ii) CH3COOH CH3CONH2 CH3NH2 CH3NC
Ethanoic acid Ethanamide Methanamine Methyl isocyanide
(A) (B) (C)
OR
NO2 NH2
Sn/HCl(conc)
(i) + 6(H) + 2H2O
Nitrobenzene Aniline
NH3 Br /NaOH
(ii) CH3COOH CH3CONH2 2 CH3NH2
D
Ethanoic acid Ethanamide Methanamine
O
NH2 O
NH—C—CH3
(iii) + CH3—C
O + CH3—COOH
Aniline CH3—C
N–phenylethanamide
O
Ethanoic anhydride
or
O
NH2 O NH—C—CH3
Pyridine
+ CH3—C—Cl + HCl
Aniline Ethanoyl chloride N–phenylethanamide

28. (a) (i) The molar conductivity when concentration approaches to zero is called limiting molar
conductivity.
(ii) A fuel cell is a device which converts energy produced during the combustion of fuels like
hydrogen, methane, methyl alcohol etc. directly into electrical energy. One such successful
fuel cell is hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell.
(b) For 0.1 mol L–1 KCl solution
Conductivity, k = 1.29 × 10–2 W–1 cm–1, Resistance, R = 100 W
Cell constant = Conductivity × resistance
= 1.29 × 10–2 W–1 cm–1 × 100 W = 1.29 cm–1
For 0.02 mol L–1 solution
Resistance = 520 W, Cell constant = 1.29 cm–1,
Cell constant
Conductivity, k =
Resistance
1.29 cm -1
= = 0.00248 W–1 cm–1
520 W
Conductivity ( k) ´ 1000 cm 3 L-1
Molar conductivity, L m =
Molarity
0.00248 W -1 cm -1 ´ 1000 cm 3 L-1
=
0.02 mol L-1
= 124 W -1 cm 2 mol -1
OR
(a) It states that the amount of chemical reaction which occurs at any electrode during electrolysis
by a current is proportional to the quantity of electricity passed through the electrolyte (solution
or melt).
Cu 2 + + 2e – ¾® Cu
Charge required for reduction of 1 mol of Cu2+ = 2F.
(b) At anode: Mg ¾® Mg 2 + + 2e –
At cathode: Cu 2 + + 2e – ¾® Cu
2+
Mg + Cu ¾® Mg 2 + + Cu
o 0.059 [Mg 2 + ]
Nernst equation: Ecell = E cell – log (at 298K)
n [Cu 2 + ]
o
Here, E cell = 2.71 V, [Mg2+] = 0.1 M, [Cu2+] = 0.01 M, n = 2
0.059 01
.
\ Ecell = 2.71 - log = 2.71 - 0.029 ´ 1
2 0.01
= 2.681 V
29. (a) (i) Pyrolusite is fused with KOH in the presence of atmospheric oxygen to give K 2 MnO4 .
Heat
2MnO2 + 4KOH + O2 ¾ ¾ ¾¾® 2K2MnO4 + 2H2O
Pyrolusite Potassium manganate
(ii) Na 2 CrO4 is extracted with water and acidified with H2 SO4 to give Na2Cr2O7.
2Na 2 CrO4 + H2 SO4 ¾ ¾
¾® Na 2 Cr2 O7 + Na 2 SO4 + H2 O
Sodium chromate Sodium dichromate
(b) (i) The electronic configuration of Mn 2 + is [Ar] 3d5 which is half-filled and hence stable. So
Mn 2 + cannot lose third electron easily. On the other hand, Fe 2 + has electronic
configuration [Ar] 3d6. It tends to lose one electron to acquire stable [Ar] 3d5 electronic
configuration. Hence Mn2+ is more stable than Fe2+ towards oxidation.
(ii) In the formation of metallic bonds, no electrons from 3d-orbitals are involved in case of
zinc, while in all other metals of the 3d series, electrons from the d-orbitals are always
involved in the formation of metallic bonds. That is why, the enthalpy of atomisation of
zinc is the lowest in the series.
(iii) This is due to comparable energies of 5f, 6d and 7s orbitals.
OR
(i) Manganese (3d 5 4s 2 ) shows maximum number of oxidation states as its atoms have 5 unpaired
electrons in 3d orbitals. It shows all the oxidation states from +2 to +7.
(ii) Copper has positive Eo (M2+/M) value, as high energy ( D a H + Di H ) to transform Cu(s) to
Cu2+(aq) is not balanced by hydration enthalpy.
(iii) Mn3+ is stronger oxidising agent as the charge from Mn3+ to Mn2+ results in half filled, d5
configuration which has extra stability.
(iv) Europium, Eu. Eu2+ is formed by losing the two s electrons and its (Xe) f 7 configuration accounts
its formation.
(v) MnO-4 + 8H+ + 5e - ¾ ¾
¾® Mn 2 + + 4H2 O
H+
30. (a) (i) O + H2N–OH N–OH + H2O
Cyclohexanone
oxime
– +
(ii) 2C6H5CHO + NaOH C6H5 – CH2 – OH + C6H5COO Na
(Conc.) Benzyl alcohol Sodium benzoate
Cl2/P
(iii) CH3COOH Cl – CH2 – COOH + HCl
2-chloro
ethanoic acid
(b) (i) Benzoic acid being an acid reacts with NaHCO3 solution to give brisk effervescence due
to evolution of CO2 while benzaldehyde does not response to this test.
COOH COONa
+ NaHCO3 + CO2 + H2O

CHO
No effervescence due to
+ NaHCO3 evolution of CO2 gas
(ii) Propanal being an aldehyde reduces Tollens reagent to silver mirror but propanone being a
ketone does not.
CH3CH2CHO + 2[Ag(NH3)2]+ + 3OH – CH3CH2COO– + 2Ag + 4NH3 + 2H2O
Propanal Silver
mirror
Tollens reagent
CH3COCH3 No silver mirror
Propanone
OR
(a) (i) The methyl group due to its +I effect reduce the magnitude of positive charge on carbonyl
carbon atom. Moreover it also hinders the approach of nucleophile CN- . Since in
acetaldehyde there is one methyl while in acetone there are two methyl groups attached to
carbonyl group therefore acetaldehyde is more reactive than acetone towards nucleophilic
addition with HCN.
(ii) Because the release of proton from carboxylic acid is much easier than from phenol as the
conjugate base carboxylate ion is much more resonance stabilised than conjugate base
phenoxide ion.
(b) (i) Wolff–Kishner reduction
NH NH KOH / Ethylene glycol

C— 2
— O ¾¾¾ 2
¾¾ ® C—
— NNH2 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® CH2 + N2
- H 2O D
Aldehyde Hydrazone Hydrocarbon
or ketone
CH3 CH3 KOH / Ethylene glycol
NH NH
C—
— O ¾¾¾
2
¾¾
2
® C—
— NNH2 ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾¾®
- H 2O D
CH3 CH3
Acetone
CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ CH3 + N2
Propane
(ii) Aldol condensation

O OH
½½ ½
r
dil. NaOH
CH3 ¾ C ¾ H + H ¾ CH2 ¾ CHO CH3 ¾ CH ¾ CH2 ¾ CHO
3 - hydroxybutanal
(Aldol)
D — CH ¾ CHO
¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 ¾ CH —
- H 2O
But - 2 - enal
O O OH O
½½ ½½ Ba (OH) 2 ½ ½½
CH3 ¾ C + H ¾ CH2 ¾ C ¾ CH3 r CH3 ¾ C ¾ CH2 ¾ C ¾ CH3
| Acetone ½
CH3 CH3
4 - Hydroxy - 4 - methyl
- pentan - 2 - one
(Ketol)
O
½½
D
¾ ¾ ¾¾® CH3 ¾ C —
— CH ¾ C ¾ CH3
- H 2O
½
CH3
4 - methylpent - 3 - ene - 2 - one

Conc. KOH
2HCHO ¾¾¾¾¾
¾® CH3 OH + HCOO- K +
– +
CHO CH2OH COO Na
Conc. NaOH
2 +
Benzaldehyde Benzyl alcohol Sodium benzoate
SET–II
1. Sol: Paints, cell fluids
Gel: Butter, cheese
3. 3-aminobutanal
5. Azeotropes are the binary mixtures of liquids having the same composition in liquid and vapour phase
and boil at a constant temperature e.g. a mixture of 68% nitric acid and 32% water by mass.
6. C 6 H5 NH2 < C 6 H5 NHCH3 < C 6 H5 CH2 NH2
7. Amylopectin
9. It states that “the partial pressure of the gas in vapour phase (p) is directly proportional to the mole
fraction of gas (x) in the solution”.
Mathematically, p = KHx
where KH is the Henry's law constant.
The solubility of a gas in liquid decreases with rise in temperature as dissolution of a gas in a liquid is
an exothermic process.
10. (i) A reaction which is not truely of first order but under certain conditions becomes a reaction of
first order is called pseudo first order reaction e.g. acid hydrolysis of ethyl acetate.
H+
CH3 COOC 2 H5 + H2 O ¾¾® CH3 COOH + C 2 H5 OH
Rate µ [CH3 COOC 2 H5 ] as H2 O is in excess.
(ii) The half life (t ½ ) of a reaction is the time in which the concentration of reactant is reduced to
one half of its initial concentration [R]o.
0.693
For a first order reaction t ½ = i.e., independent of [R]o.
k
[R] o
For a zero order reaction t ½ = i.e., t ½ µ [ R] o .
2k
11. (i) Hydraulic washing: It is based on the differences in the gravities of the ore and the gangue
particles.
(ii) Vapour phase refining: In this, metal is converted into its volatile compound and collected
elsewhere. It is then decomposed to give pure metal. So, the two requirements are:
(a) The metal should form a volatile compound with an available reagent.
(b) The volatile compound should be easily decomposable, so that the recovery is easy.
22. (a) (i) There are two bond pairs and three lone pairs of electrons around central Xe atom in XeF2.
Therefore according to VSEPR Theory XeF2 should be linear.
F
Xe
(ii) There are three bond pairs and two lone pairs of electrons around central Br atom in BrF3.
Therefore according to VSEPR theory BrF3 should be slightly bent “T”.
F
Br F
24. (i) Due to inert pair effect +3 oxidation state of Bi is more stable than its +5 oxidation state while
+5 oxidation state of Sb is more stable than its +3 oxidation state. Therefore, Bi (V) can more
easily accept a pair of electrons to form more stable Bi (III) than Sb (V) can accept a pair of
electrons and hence Bi (V) is stronger oxidising agent than Sb (V).
(ii) N–N single bond is weaker than P–P single bond due to large interelectronic repulsion between
the lone pairs of electrons present on the N atoms of N–N bond having small bond length.
(iii) Noble gases being monoatomic have no interatomic forces except weak London or dispersion
forces and therefore, they are liquefied at very low temperatures. Hence, they have very low
boiling points.
25. (i) Saccharin, sucrolose.
(ii) Antibiotics are the chemical substance produced wholly or partly by chemical synthesis, which in
low concentrations, either kill or inhibit the growth of microorganisms by intervening in their
metabolic processes. A few examples of antibiotics are chloramphenicol, ofloxacin, penicillin.
(iii) Biomolecules such as carbohydrates, proteins, lipids and nucleic acids are chosen as drug
targets.
27. (i) Vitamin D
(ii) Fibrous protein — keratin, myosin
Globular protein — insulin, albumins
(iii) CHO Br2 water
COOH
| |
(CHOH)4 (CHOH)4
| |
CH2OH CH2OH
D-Glucose Gluconic acid
SET–III
1. Lyophobic sol — Gold sol, As2S3 sol
Lyophilic sol — Sol of starch, sol of gum
2. 4-hydroxypentan-2-one
3. Hydrogen bonds
5. C6H5NH2 < C6H5NHCH3 < C6H5N (CH3)2
H+
6. C12 H22 O11 + H2 O ¾ ¾¾® C 6 H12 O6 + C 6 H12 O6
Sucrose D -(+) - Glucose D -(–) - Fructose
9. It states that for a solution of volatile liquids, the partial vapour pressure of each component in the
solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction. According to Raoults law, for a volatile
component, A of the solution
PA µ x A or PA = PAo x A , where PA0 is the vapour pressure of pure component A.
If one of the component is so volatile that it exist as a gas then according to Henry’s law
p = K H x , where KH is the Henry law constant i.e., the partial vapour pressure of the volatile
component (gas) is directly proportional to its mole fraction in the solution.
Thus the similarity between Raoult’s law and Henry’s law is that both state that the partial vapour
pressure of the volatile component or gas is directly proportional to its mole fraction in the solution.
10. (i) Rate constant, k may be defined as the rate of reaction when concentration of each reactant is
taken as unity.
(ii) Refer to Ans. 10 (ii) Set-II CBSE Delhi 2014.
11. (i) This method of concentration of ore is based on the principle that the surface of sulphide ores is
preferentially wetted by oils while that of gangue is preferentially wetted by water.
(ii) Electrolytic refining: In this method, impure metal is made to act as anode. A strip of same
metal in pure form is used as cathode. They are put in a electrolytic bath containing soluble salt
of same metal. On passing electric current, metal ions from the electrolyte solution are
deposited at the cathode in the form of pure metal while an equivalent amount of metal
dissolves from the anode and goes into the electrolyte solution as metal ions, i.e.,
At cathode: M n + ( aq) + ne – ¾ ¾ ¾® M( s)
At anode: ¾® M n + ( aq) + ne –
M( s) ¾ ¾
The voltage applied for the electrolysis is such that the impurities of more electropositive
metals remain in the solution as ions where impurities of less basic metals settle down under
the anode as anode mud. A large number of metals such as copper, gold, silver, zinc,
aluminium, etc., are refined by this method.
20. (a) (i) There are four bond pairs and two lone pairs of electrons around F F
central Xe atom in XeF4. Therefore according to VSEPR theory
XeF4 should be square planar. Xe
(ii) O O O F F
O O O
N N N N
O O (XeF4) Square planar
O O
(N2O5)
22. (i) In vapour form sulphur partly exists as S2 molecules which have two unpaired electrons in the
antibonding p * molecular orbitals like O2 molecule and hence, exhibits paramagnetism.
(ii) The oxidation of central atom Sn is +4 in SnCl4 while it is +2 in SnCl2. Higher the positive
oxidation of central atom, more will be its polarising power which, in turn increases the
covalent character of bond formation between the central atom and the atoms around it.
(iii) Acids which contains P—H bonds have reducing character. Since H3PO2 contains two P—H
bonds while H3PO3 contains only one P—H bond therefore H3PO2 is a stronger reducing agent
than H3PO3.
23. (i) Chemical substances which kill microorganisms or stop their growth but are not safe to be
applied to the living tissues are called disinfectants. For example, chlorine in concentrations of
0.2 to 0.4 ppm is used for sterilisation of water to make it fit for drinking.
(ii) Biomolecules such as carbohydrates, proteins, liquids and nucleic acids are chosen as drug targets.
(iii) Anionic detergents: These are so named because large part of their molecules are anions and it
is the anionic part of the molecule which is involved in the cleansing action. These are sodium
salt of sulphonated long chain alcohols or hydrocarbons. For example, sodium lauryl sulphate,
sodium dodecylbenzene sulphonate, etc. Anionic detergents are used in household work and in
toothpastes.
24. (i) Vitamin C
(ii) Peptide linkage
(iii) On prolonged heating with HI, glucose gives n-hexane.
CHO
| HI
(CHOH) 4 ¾ ¾¾® CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3
| D n - Hexane
CH2 OH
zzz
CBSE
Examination
Paper All India-2014
General Instructions: Same as CBSE Examination Paper Delhi-2014.
SET–I
1. What is the effect of temperature on chemisorption?
2. What is the role of zinc metal in the extraction of silver?
3. What is the basicity of H3PO3?
4. Identify the chiral molecule in the following pair:
Cl
Cl
5. Which of the following is a natural polymer?
Buna-S, Proteins, PVC
6. The conversion of primary aromatic amines into diazonium salts is known as __________ .
8. Write the structure of p-methylbenzaldehyde.
9. An element with density 2.8 g cm–3 forms a f.c.c. unit cell with edge length 4 × 10–8 cm. Calculate
the molar mass of the element.
(Given: NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol–1)
10. (i) What type of non-stoichiometric point defect is responsible for the pink colour of LiCl?
(ii) What type of stoichiometric defect is shown by NaCl?
OR
How will you distinguish between the following pairs of terms:
(i) Tetrahedral and octahedral voids
(ii) Crystal lattice and unit cell
11. State Kohlrausch law of independent migration of ions. Why does the conductivity of a solution
decrease with dilution?
12. For a chemical reaction R ® P, the variation in the concentration (R) vs. time (t) plot is given as
t
(i) Predict the order of the reaction.
(ii) What is the slope of the curve?
13. Explain the principle of the method of electrolytic refining of metals. Give one example.
14. Complete the following equations:
(i) P4 + H2O ¾¾
¾®
(ii) XeF4 + O2F2 ¾ ¾
¾®
(i) XeF2 (ii) BrF3
16. Write the equations involved in the following reactions:
17. Write the mechanism of the following reaction:
HBr
CH3CH2OH ¾ ¾ ¾® CH3CH2Br + H2O
¾
18. Write the name of monomers used for getting the following polymers:
(i) Bakelite (ii) Neoprene
19. (a) Calculate D r G o for the reaction
Mg(s) + Cu2+(aq) ¾¾
¾® Mg2+(aq) + Cu(s)
o
Given: E cell = +2.71 V, 1 F = 96500 C mol –1
(b) Name the type of cell which was used in Apollo space programme for providing electrical
power.
constant volume:
SO2Cl2 (g) ¾ ¾
¾® SO2(g) + Cl2(g)
Experiment Time/s–1 Total pressure/atm
1 0 0.4
2 100 0.7

(Given: log 4 = 0.6021, log 2 = 0.3010)
21. What are emulsions? What are their different types? Give one example of each type.

(i) (CH3)3 P—O exists but (CH3)3N—O does not.
(ii) Oxygen has less electron gain enthalpy with negative sign than sulphur.
23. (i) Write the IUPAC name of the complex [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]Cl.
(ii) What type of isomerism is exhibited by the complex [Co(en)3]3+?
(en = ethane-1,2-diamine)
(iii) Why is [NiCl4]2– paramagnetic but [Ni(CO)4] is diamagnetic?
(At nos.: Cr = 24, Co = 27, Ni = 28)
24. (a) Draw the structures of major monohalo products in each of the following reactions:
PCl5
(i) CH2OH
(ii) CH2— CH = CH2 + HBr
(b) Which halogen compound in each of the following pairs will react faster in SN2 reaction?
(i) CH3Br or CH3I
(ii) (CH3)3 C—C1 or CH3—C1
(i) Primary amines (R-NH2) have higher boiling point than tertiary amines (R3N).
(ii) Aniline does not undergo Friedel–Crafts reaction.
(iii) (CH3)2NH is more basic than (CH3)3N in an aqueous solution.
OR
Give the structures of A, B and C in the following reactions:
Sn + HCl NaNO2 + HCl H O
(i) C6H5NO2 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® A ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® B ¾ ¾2¾
¾® C
273K
H 2O / H + NH 3
Br +KOH
(ii) CH3CN ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® A ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® B ¾ ¾ 2¾ ¾ ¾
¾® C
D
26. Define the following terms as related to proteins:
(i) Peptide linkage
(ii) Primary structure
(iii) Denaturation
27. On the occasion of World Health Day, Dr. Satpal organised a ‘health camp’ for the poor farmers
living in a nearby village. After check-up, he was shocked to see that most of the farmers suffered
from cancer due to regular exposure to pesticides and many were diabetic. They distributed free
medicines to them. Dr. Satpal immediately reported the matter to the National Human Rights
Commission (NHRC). On the suggestions of NHRC, the government decided to provide medical
care, financial assistance, setting up of super-speciality hospitals for treatment and prevention of
the deadly disease in the affected villages all over India.
(i) Write the values shown by
(a) Dr. Satpal (b) NHRC
(ii) What type of analgesics are chiefly used for the relief of pains of terminal cancer?
(iii) Give an example of artificial sweetener that could have been recommended to diabetic
patients.

(i) Molarity
(ii) Molal elevation constant (Kb)
(b) A solution containing 15 g urea (molar mass = 60 g mol–1) per litre of solution in water has the
same osmotic pressure (isotonic) as a solution of glucose (molar mass = 180 g mol–l) in water.
Calculate the mass of glucose present in one litre of its solution.
OR
(a) What type of deviation is shown by a mixture of ethanol and acetone? Give reason.
(b) A solution of glucose (molar mass = 108 g mol–1) in water is labelled as 10% (by mass). What
would be the molality and molarity of the solution?
(Density of solution = 1.2 g mL–1)
29. (a) Complete the following equations:
(i) Cr2O72– + 2OH– ¾ ¾
¾®
(ii) MnO4– + 4H+ + 3e– ¾ ¾ ¾®
(i) Zn is not considered as a transition element.
(ii) Transition metals form a large number of complexes.
(iii) The E° value for the Mn3+/Mn2+ couple is much more positive than that for Cr3+/Cr2+ couple.
OR
(i) With reference to structural variability and chemical reactivity, write the differences between
lanthanoids and actinoids.
(ii) Name a member of the lanthanoid series which is well known to exhibit +4 oxidation state.
(iii) Complete the following equation:
MnO4– + 8H+ + 5e– ¾ ¾ ¾®
3+ 3+
(iv) Out of Mn and Cr , which is more paramagnetic and why?
(Atomic nos.: Mn = 25, Cr = 24)
30. (a) Write the products formed when CH3CHO reacts with the following reagents:
(i) HCN
(ii) H2N—OH
(iii) CH3CHO in the presence of dilute NaOH
(i) Benzoic acid and Phenol
(ii) Propanal and Propanone
OR
(i) Cl—CH2COOH is a stronger acid than CH3COOH.
(ii) Carboxylic acids do not give reactions of carbonyl group.
(b) Write the chemical equations to illustrate the following name reactions:
(i) Rosenmund reduction
(ii) Cannizzaro’s reaction
(c) Out of CH3CH2 —CO—CH2—CH3 and CH3CH2—CH2—CO—CH3, which gives iodoform
test?
SET–II (Questions Uncommon to SET–I)

1. Why is adsorption always exothermic?
2. Name the method that is used for refining of nickel.
3. Why does NO2 dimerise?
4. Based on molecular forces what type of polymer is neoprene?
5. What are the products of hydrolysis of maltose?
6. Write the structure of 4-chloropentan-2-one.
(i) Terylene
(ii) Nylon-6, 6
10. Describe the role of the following:
(i) SiO2 in the extraction of copper from copper matte
(ii) NaCN in froth floatation process
(i) Ag + PCl5 ¾¾
¾®
(ii) CaF2 + H2SO4 ¾¾
¾®
(i) XeF4
(ii) HClO4
13. (i) Write the type of magnetism observed when the magnetic moments are oppositively aligned
and cancel out each other.
(ii) Which stoichiometric defect does not change the density of the crystal?
(i) Fuel cell
(ii) Limiting molar conductivity (L°m )
(i) Glycosidic linkage
(ii) Invert sugar
(iii) Oligosaccharides
SET–III (Questions Uncommon to Set–I and II)

1. What are the dispersed phase and dispersion medium in milk?
2. Name the method used for refining of copper metal.
3. Why does NH3 act as a Lewis base?

5. Which of the following is a fibre?
Nylon, Neoprene, PVC
6. Write the products of hydrolysis of lactose.
8. Write the structure of 2-hydroxybenzoic acid.
(i) C + conc. H2SO4 ¾¾
¾®
(ii) XeF2 + H2O ¾¾
¾®
(i) XeO3
(ii) H2SO4
(i) Teflon
(ii) Buna-N
13. (i) Write the type of magnetism observed when the magnetic moments are aligned in parallel and
anti-parallel directions in unequal numbers.
(ii) Which stoichiometric defect decreases the density of the crystal?
(i) Molar conductivity (L m )
(ii) Secondary batteries
17. Write the principle behind the froth floatation process. What is the role of collectors in this process?
(i) Nucleotide
(ii) Anomers
(iii) Essential amino acids
zzz
Solutions
SET–I
1. Chemisorption initially increases then decreases with rise in temperature. The initial increase is due to
the fact that heat supplied acts as activation energy. The decrease afterwards is due to the exothermic
nature of adsorption equilibrium.
2. Zinc acts as reducing agent in the extraction of silver. It reduces Ag + to Ag and itself get oxidised to
Zn 2 + .
2Na[Ag(CN)2] + Zn ¾ ¾ ¾¾® Na2[Zn(CN)4] + 2Ag ¯
3. As H3PO3 contains two ionizable P–OH bonds. Therefore, it is dibasic.
O
P
O OH
OH
H3PO3
4.
Cl
5. Proteins
6. Diazotisation.
7. Sucrose on hydrolysis gives one molecule each of glucose and fructose.
H+
C12 H22 O11 + H2 O ¾ ¾¾® C 6 H12 O6 + C 6 H12 O6
8. O
C—H
CH3
p-methylbenzaldehyde
9. For f.c.c. unit cell number of atoms per unit cell, z = 4

d ´ NA ´ a3
M=
z
Here, d = 2.8 gcm–3, NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol–1, a = 4 × 10–8 cm
2.8 g cm -3 ´ 6.022 ´ 10 23 mol -1 ´ ( 4 ´ 10 -8 cm) 3
\ M=
4
M = 26.98 g mol–1
10. (i) Metal excess defect due to anionic vacancies.

(ii) Schottky defect.
OR
(i) A void surrounded by four spheres occupying the corners of tetrahedron is called a tetrahedral
void. It is much smaller than the size of spheres in the close packing. A void surrounded by six
spheres along the corners of an octahedral is called octahedral void. The size of the octahedral
void is smaller than that of the spheres in the close packing but larger than the octahedral void.
(ii) The regular three dimensional arrangement of identical points in the space which represent how
the constituent particles (atoms, ions, molecules) are arranged in a crystal is called a crystal
lattice.
A unit cell is the smallest portion of a crystal lattice, which when repeated over and again in
different directions produces the complete crystal lattice.
11. Kohlrausch law states that the limiting molar conductivity of an electrolyte can be represented as the
sum of the individual contributions of cation and anion of the electrolyte.
In general, if an electrolyte on dissociation gives n + cations and n - anions then its limiting molar
conductivity is given by
L°m = n + l°+ + n - l°-
where, l°+ and l°- are the limiting molar conductivities of cations and anions respectively.
Conductivity of a solution decreases with dilution. This is due to the fact that the number of ions per
unit volume that carry the current in a solution decreases with dilution.
12. (i) Order of the reaction is zero.
d[ R ]
(ii) Slope = = -k
dt
13. Electrolytic refining: In this method, impure metal is made to act as anode. A strip of same metal in
pure form is used as cathode. They are put in an electrolytic bath containing soluble salt of same
metal. On passing electric current, metal ions from the electrolyte solution are deposited at the
cathode in the form of pure metal while an equivalent amount of metal dissolves from the anode and
goes into the electrolyte solution as metal ions, i.e.,
At cathode: M n + ( aq) + ne – ¾ ¾
¾® M( s)
At anode: ¾® M n + ( aq) + ne –
M( s) ¾ ¾
The voltage applied for the electrolysis is such that the impurities of more electropositive metals
remain in the solution as ions whereas impurities of less basic metals settle down under the anode as
anode mud. A large number of metals such as copper, gold, silver, zinc, aluminium, etc., are refined
by this method.
14. (i) P4 + H2O ¾¾
¾® No reaction
(ii) XeF4 + O 2 F2 ¾¾
¾® XeF6 + O2 F
15. (i) There are two bond pairs and three lone pairs electrons around central Xe
atom in XeF2. Therefore according to VSEPR theory XeF2 should be
linear. Xe
F
XeF2
(ii) There are three bond pairs and two lone pairs of electrons around central Br atom in BrF3.
Therefore according to VSEPR theory BrF3 should be slightly bent “T”.
F
Br F
F
BrF3
16. (i) Reimer–Tiemann reaction:

–+ – +
OH ONa ONa OH
CHCl2 CHO CHO
CHCl3 + NaOH (aq) NaOH H3O+
340 K
Salicylaldehyde
Phenol
(2-hydroxybenzaldehyde)
(ii) Williamson synthesis:

+ –
R¾ X + Na ¾ O ¾ R¢ ¾¾® R ¾ O ¾ R¢ + NaX
Alkyl halide Sodium alkoxide Ether
+ –
CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ Br + Na ¾ O ¾ CH2 ¾ CH3 ¾® CH3 ¾ CH2 ¾ O ¾ CH2 ¾ CH3 + NaBr
Ethyl bromide Sodium ethoxide Diethyl ether
(Symmetrical ether)
17. Refer to Ans 26 (a) Set-I, CBSE Delhi 2014.

18. (i) Phenol and formaldehyde
(ii) Chloroprene
19. (a) Mg(s) + Cu2+(aq) ¾ ¾
¾® Mg2+(aq) + Cu(s)
D r G o = – nFE cell
o
Here, n = 2, F = 96500 C mol–1 and E cell

o
= 2.71 V
\ D r G o = – 2 × 96500 C mol–1 × 2.71 V
= – 523030 J mol–1
= – 523.03 kJ mol–1
(b) H2—O2 fuel cell
20. Refer to Ans. 22 Set-I, CBSE Delhi 2014.
21. Emulsions are the colloidal solutions in which both the dispersed phase and dispersion medium are
liquids. Emulsion can be classified into two types. These are:
(i) Oil in water (O/W) type emulsion: In this type of emulsions oil acts as disperse phase and
water acts as dispersion medium e.g., milk, vanishing cream.
(ii) Water in oil (W/O) type emulsion: In this type of emulsions water acts as disperse phase and
oil acts as dispersion medium e.g., butter, cod liver oil, cold cream.
22. (i) Phosphorus due to presence of d orbitals in its valence shell forms pp - dp multiple bonds. As
a result phosphorus can expand its covalency beyond four. Therefore, phosphorus form
R3P—O in which its covalency is 5. In contrast, nitrogen due to absence of d-orbitals, cannot
form pp - dp multiple bonds and hence cannot expand its covalency beyond 4. Therefore,
(CH3 ) 3 N—O does not exist.
(ii) The size of O atom is smaller as compared to S. Thus when an electron is added to isolated
gaseous O atom, the interelectronic repulsions encountered in the smaller 2p-orbitals of O are
larger than those encountered in the larger 3p-orbitals of S.
As a result less energy is released in case of O than in case of S. Hence oxygen has less electron
gain enthalpy with negative sign than sulphur.
(iii) Acids which contains P–H bonds have reducing character. Since H3PO2 contains two P–H
bonds while H3PO3 contains only one P–H bond therefore H3PO2 is a stronger reducing agent
than H3PO3.
23. (i) Tetraamminedichloridochromium (III) chloride.
(ii) Complex [Co(en)3]3+ shows optical isomerism.
3+ 3+
en en
en en
Co Co
en en
d-Tris-(ethane1,2-diamine) l-Tris-(ethane1,2-diamine)
cobalt (III) cobalt (III)
(iii) In complex [NiCl4]2–, Ni is in +2 oxidation state with the electronic configuration 3d8 4s0. As
Cl– is a weak ligand it cannot pair up the electrons in 3d orbitals therefore [NiCl4]2– is
paramagnetic. In [Ni(CO)4], Ni is in zero oxidation state with the electronic configuration
3d8 4s2. CO is a strong ligand it causes 4s electrons to shift to 3d and pair up 3d electrons.
Since there is no unpaired electron in the complex Ni(CO)4, therefore, it is diamagnetic.
PCl5
24. (a) (i) CH2OH CH2Cl + POCl3 + HCl
(ii) CH2— CH = CH2 + HBr CH2— CH — CH3

Br
(b) (i) CH3—I. As iodine is better leaving group due to its larger size, it will be released at a
faster rate in the presence of incoming nucleophile.
(ii) CH3 Cl. As three bulky methyl groups hinder the approach of nucleophile in (CH3)C—Cl.
25. (i) In primary amines, two hydrogen atoms are present on N-atom and they undergo extensive
intermolecular hydrogen bonding which results in association of molecules while in tertiary
amines, no hydrogen atom is present on N-atom. Hence there is no hydrogen bonding in
tertiary amines. As a result of this primary amines have higher boiling point than tertiary
amines.
(ii) Aniline being a Lewis base reacts with AlCl3 a Lewis acid and catalyst used in Friedel crafts
+ -
reaction to form salt C6H5NH2AlCl3. Due to presence of a +ve charge on N-atom in the salt, the
+
group NH2AlCl3 acts as a strong deactivating group. It reduces the electron density in the
benzene ring as a result of this aniline does not undergo Friedel-crafts reaction.
(iii) The basicity of amine in aqueous solution depends upon the stability of the substituted
ammonium cation. Here the combination of three factors, +ve I effect of CH3 groups, hydrogen
bonding and steric hindrance favour greater stability for ammonium cation of dimethyl amine
than ammonium cation of trimethyl amine. Hence dimethylamine is stronger base than
trimethyl amine.
OR
+ –
(i) NH2 N NCl OH
+ –
A = C6H5NH2 , B = C6H5N2Cl , C = C6H5OH
Aniline Benzene Phenol

diazoniumchloride
O O
|| ||
(ii) A = CH3 — C— OH , B = CH3 — C— NH2 , C = CH3 — NH2
Ethanoic acid Ethanamide Methanamine
O
||
26. (i) A peptide linkage is an amide (— C— NH —) linkage formed between —COOH group of one
a-amino acid and —NH2 group of other a-amino acid by loss of a water molecule.
(ii) The specific sequence in which various a-amino acids present in a protein are linked to one
another is called its primary structure. Any change in its primary structure creates a new
protein.
(iii) Denaturation of Proteins: When a protein in its native form is subjected to a change, such as
change in temperature or change in pH, the hydrogen bonds are disturbed. Due to this, globules
unfold and helix get uncoiled and protein loses its biological activity. This is called
denaturation of protein. During denaturation, 2° and 3° structures are destroyed but 1°
structures remain intact, e.g., coagulation of egg while on boiling, curdling of milk, etc.
27. (i) (a) The values shown by Dr. Satpal are concern for the health of others, dedicated towards
work, kind, compassionate.
(b) The values shown by NHRC are responsiveness, having understanding of public health in
rural area, dutiful, caring.
(ii) Narcotic analgesics such as morphine, heroin, codeine are used for the relief of pains of
terminal cancer.
(iii) Saccharin, Sucrolose.
28. (a) (i) Molarity may be defined as number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of solution.
Moles of solute
Molarity =
Volume of solution (in litre)
(ii) Molal elevation constant may be defined as the elevation in boiling point when one mole
of solute is dissolved in 1000 grams of the solvent.
WB ´ R ´ T
(b) Osmotic pressure, p =
MB ´ V
15 ´ R ´ T
Osmotic pressure of urea solution =
60 ´ 1
W ´R´T
Osmotic pressure of glucose solution = B
180 ´ 1
As, Osmotic pressure of urea solution = Osmotic pressure of glucose solution
15 ´ R ´ T WB ´ R ´ T
Therefore, =
60 ´ 1 180 ´ 1
15 ´ 180
Mass of glucose, WB = = 45 g
60
OR
(a) A mixture of ethanol and acetone shows positive deviation from Raoults law.
In pure ethanol hydrogen bond exist between the molecules. On adding acetone to ethanol,
acetone molecules get in between the molecules of ethanol thus breaking some of the hydrogen
bonds and weakening molecular interactions considerably. Weakening of molecular
interactions leads to increase in vapour pressure resulting in positive deviation from Raoults
law.
(b) Let the mass of solution = 100 g
\ Mass of glucose = 10 g
Mass of glucose
Number of moles of glucose =
Molar mass
10 g
= = 0.056 mol
180 g mol -1
Mass of solution
Volume of solution =
Density of solution
100 g
= = 83.3 mL
1.2 g mL-1
83.3
= L = 0.083 L
1000
Moles of solute
Molarity =
Volume of solution in litre
0.056 mol
= = 0.67 mol L–1
0.083 L
Mass of solvent, water = 100 g – 10 g = 90 g
90 g
= = 0.09 kg
1000 g kg -1
Moles of glucose
Molality =
Mass of water in kg
0.056 mol
= = 0.62 mol kg–1
0.09 kg
29. (a) (i) Cr2O72 – + 2OH– ¾ ¾

¾® 2CrO24 – + H2O
Heat
(ii) MnO–4 + 4H+ + 3e - ¾® MnO2 + 2H2O
¾¾¾
(b) (i) As zinc atom has completely filled d orbitals (3d 10 4s 2 ) in its ground state as well as in its
oxidised state, therefore zinc is not considered as transition element.
(ii) Transition metals form a large number of complexes due to following reasons:
= Small size and high charge of the ions of transition metals.
= Presence of vacant orbitals of appropriate energy which can accept lone pairs of
electrons donated by ligand.
(iii) Mn2+has the electronic configuration [Ar]3d5 which is half filled and hence very stable.
Due to this the third ionisation energy of Mn is very high. Thus the much large third
ionisation energy of Mn (where the required change is d5 to d4) is mainly responsible for
this.
OR
(i)
S.No. Lanthanoids Actinoids
(i) Atomic or ionic radii does not show much Atomic or ionic radii show much variation.
variation.
(ii) Besides +3 oxidation state, they show +2 and Besides +3 oxidation states, they show higher
+4 oxidation states in few cases. oxidation states of +4, +5, +6, +7 also.
(ii) Cerium, Ce ([Xe] 4f 2 5d0 6s2). Formation of Ce4+ is favoured by its noble gas configuration
([Xe] 4f 0 5d0 6s0).
(iii) MnO–4 + 8H+ + 5e - ¾¾
¾® Mn 2 + + 4H2O
(iv) Mn 3 + (3d4 4s0) has 4 unpaired electrons while Cr3+(3d3 4s0) has 3 unpaired electrons therefore
Mn3+ is more paramagnetic than Cr3+.
30. (a) (i) CH3 pH 9-10
CH3 OH
C—O + HCN C
H H CN
Ethanal Hydrogen cyanide Ethanal cyanohydrin
(ii) CH3 H
+ CH3
C—O + H2N—OH C—N—OH + H2O
H pH 3.5 H
Ethanal Ethanal oxime
O O O
|| | ||
l
dil NaOH
(iii) 2CH3 — C— H CH3 — CH— CH2 — C— H
Ethanal 3 - hydroxybutanal
(Aldol)
O
||
D
¾¾
¾® CH3 — CH = CH — C— H
- H 2O But - 2 - enal
(b) (i) Phenol gives a violet colour with neutral FeCl3 solution while benzoic acid gives buff
coloured precipitate of ferric benzoate.
¾® [Fe(OC6H5)6]3– + 3H+ + 3HCl
6C6H5OH + FeCl3 ¾ ¾
Violet coloured complex
3C6H5COOH + FeCl3 ¾ ¾
¾® (C6H5COO)3Fe + 3HCl
Benzoic acid Ferric benzoate
(Buff coloured ppt.)
(ii) Propanal being an aldehyde reduces Tollens’ reagent to produce silver mirror but
CH3 CH2 CHO + 2[Ag(NH3 ) 2 ] + + 3OH- ® CH3 CH2 COO- + 2Ag ¯ + 4NH3 + 2H2 O
Propanal Silver
mirror
Tollens' reagent
CH3 COCH3 ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® No silver mirror
Propanone
OR
(a) (i) Because of –I effect of Cl atom in ClCH2COOH and +I effect of CH3 group in CH3COOH
the electron density in the O—H bond in ClCH2COOH is much lower than CH3COOH.
As a result O—H bond in ClCH2COOH is much weaker than in CH3COOH therefore
loses a proton more easily than CH3COOH. Hence ClCH2COOH acid is stronger acid
than CH3COOH.
(ii) Carboxylic acids are resonance hybrid of the following structures:
é –
··
ù
ê · ú
·
ê O · O ú
·
·· ··
ê ú
êR ¾ C ¬® R¾ C ú
ê ·· + ú
ê O ¾H O ¾ Hú
·· ··
ê ú
ë I II û
Similarly, a carbonyl group of aldehydes and ketones may regarded as resonance hybrid of
following structures.
+ –
C O C—O
III IV
Because of contribution of structure (IV), the carbonyl carbon in aldehydes and ketones is
electrophilic. On the other hand electrophilic character of carboxyl carbon is reduced due
to contribution of structure (II). As carbonyl carbon of carboxyl group is less
electropositive than carbonyl carbon in aldehydes and ketones therefore carboxylic acids
do not give nucleophilic addition reactions of aldehydes and ketones.
(b) (i) Rosenmund reduction:

O O
½½ Pd - BaSO
½½
R ¾ C ¾ Cl + H2 ¾¾¾¾¾
¾®
4
R ¾ C ¾ H + HCl
Acyl chloride S Aldehyde
O O
C Cl C H
Pd-BaSO4
+ H2 S
+ HCl
(ii) Cannizzaro reaction:

conc. KOH
2HCHO ¾¾¾¾¾
¾® CH3 ¾ OH + HCOO- K +
–+
CHO CH2 OH COO Na
conc. NaOH
2 +
Benzaldehyde Benzyl alcohol Sodium benzoate
(c) CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — COCH3
SET–II
1. Adsorption occurs with decrease in entropy i.e., DS is –ve. As DG = DH - TDS and for a process to
be spontaneous DG must be –ve. This can be possible only when DH is –ve for the process i.e.,
adsorption is exothermic.
2. Mond process (Vapour phase refining)
3. NO2 is an odd electron molecule in which N has seven electrons in its valence shell and hence is less
stable. To become more stable by acquiring noble gas configuration having 8 electrons in the valence
shell of N, it undergoes dimerisation to form N2O4.
4. Elastomer
5. Maltose on hydrolysis gives two molecules of glucose.
H+
C12 H22 O11 + H2 O ¾ ¾¾® C 6 H12 O6 + C 6 H12 O6
Maltose D -(+) - Glucose D -(+) - Glucose
Cl O
| ||
6. CH3 — CH— CH2 — C— CH3
4 - chloropentan-2-one
9. (i) Ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid

(ii) Hexamethylenediamine and adipic acid
10. (i) Copper matte chiefly consists of Cu2S and some FeS. Silica acts as a flux in the extraction of
copper from copper matte to remove ferrous oxide as ferrous silicate slag.
2FeS + 3O2 ¾ ¾ ¾® 2FeO + 2SO2
FeO + SiO2 ¾¾
¾® FeSiO3
Flux Slag
(ii) NaCN is used as depressant in froth floatation process. The role of a depressant is to prevent
one type of sulphide particle from forming the froth with air bubble. For example to separate
lead sulphide (PbS) ore from ZnS, NaCN is used as a depressant as it forms zinc complex,
Na2[Zn(CN)4] on the surface of ZnS thereby preventing it from forming froth. Under these
conditions, only PbS forms froth and hence is separated from ZnS.
4NaCN + ZnS ¾¾
¾® Na 2 [Zn(CN) 4 ] + Na 2 S
Sodium tetracynozincate (II)
11. (i) 2Ag + PCl5 ¾¾

¾® 2AgCl + PCl 3
(ii) CaF2 + H2 SO4 ¾¾
¾® 2HF + CaSO4
12. (i) As there are 4 bond pairs and two lone pairs of electrons around central Xe atom in XeF4
therefore according to VSEPR theory XeF4 should be square planar.
F F
Xe
F F
(XeF4) Square planar
(ii) Perchloric acid
H
Cl
O O
O
HClO4
13. (i) Antiferromagnetism

(ii) Frenkel defect
14. (i) A fuel cell is a device which converts the energy produced during the combustion of fuels like
hydrogen, methanol, methane etc. directly into electrical energy. One of the most successful
fuel cell is H2—O2 fuel cell.
(ii) When concentration approaches zero, the molar conductivity is known as limiting molar
conductivity. It is represented by L°m .
L°m = ( L m ) when c ® 0
19. (i) The linkage between two monosaccharides through oxygen atom in an oligosaccharide or a
polysaccharide is known as glycosidic linkage.
(ii) Sucrose is dextrorotatory (+ 66.5°) but after hydrolysis it gives an equimolar mixture of
D-(+)-glucose and D-(–)-fructose, which is laevorotatory. This change of specific rotation from
dextrorotation to laevorotation is called inversion of sugar and the mixture obtained is called
invert sugar.
(iii) Carbohydrates which on hydrolysis give two to ten molecules of monosaccharides are called
oligosaccharides e.g., sucrose.
SET–III
1. In milk liquid fat acts as dispersed phase and water acts as dispersion medium.
2. Electrolytic refining
3. N atom in NH3 has one lone pair of electrons which is available for donation. Therefore it acts as a
Lewis base.
5. Nylon
H+
6. C12 H22 O11 + H2 O ¾ ¾¾® C 6 H12 O6 + C 6 H12 O6
Lactose Glucose Galactose
8. COOH
OH
2-hydroxy-benzoic acid
9. (i) C + 2H2SO4(conc.) ¾ ¾
¾® CO2 + 2SO2 + 2H2O
(ii) 2XeF2(s) + 2H2O(l) ¾ ¾
¾® 2Xe(g) + 4HF(aq) + O2(g)
10. (i) (ii) O
S
Xe
OH O
O OH
O
O
H2SO4
Pyramidal
XeO3
11. (i) Tetrafluoroethene
(ii) 1, 3–butadiene and acrylonitrile
13. (i) Ferrimagnetism
(ii) Schottky defect
14. (i) Molar conductivity, L m of a solution at a dilution V is defined as the conductance of all the
ions produced from one gram mole of the electrolyte dissolved in V cm3 of the solution when
the electrodes are one centimetre apart and the area of the electrodes is so large that the whole
of the solution is contained between them.
k ´ 1000
L m = k ´ V or Lm =
Molarity
where k is the conductivity and V is the volume of the solution containing 1 mole of the
electrolyte.
(ii) Secondary batteries are those batteries which can be recharged by passing electric current
through them and hence can be used over again e.g. lead storage battery.
17.
This method of concentration of ore is based upon the principle that the surface of sulphide ore is
preferentially wetted by oils while that of gangue is preferentially wetted by water. Collectors
enhance the non-wettability of the ore particles in the froth floatation process e.g. pine oil.
23. (i) A nucleotide contains all the three basic components of nucleic acid i.e., a pentose sugar, a
nitrogeneous base and a phosphoric acid. When nucleoside is linked to phosphoric acid at 5’
position of sugar moiety, we get a nucleotide.
O
5' 5'
–
HO— H2C O Base O — P— O— H2C O Base
–
4' 1' O 4' 1'
H H H H
3' 2' H 3' 2' H
H H
OH OH OH OH
(ii) A pair of stereoisomers such as a-D(+) glucose and b-D-(+) glucose which differ in
configuration only around C1 are called anomers.
(iii) The amino acids which cannot be synthesised in our body and must be obtained through diet
are known as essential amino acids e.g., valine, lysine, histidine.
zzz
CBSE
Examination
Paper Foreign-2014
General Instructions: Same as CBSE Examination Paper Delhi-2014.
SET–I
1. What is the function of collectors in the froth floatation process for the concentration of ores?
2. What type of forces are responsible for the occurrence of physisorption?
3. Why is the single N—N bond weaker than the single P—P bond?
4. What type of isomerism is shown by the following complex:
[Co(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6]
5. Express the relationship between atomic radius (r) and the edge length (a) in the b.c.c. unit cell.
OH
CHO
7. Which of the two is more basic and why?
NH2
CH3NH2 or
8. Name the two components of a-glucose which constitute starch.
9. A solution of Ni(NO3)2 is electrolysed between platinum electrodes using a current of 5.0 ampere for
20 minutes. What mass of nickel will be deposited at the cathode?
(Given: At. Mass of Ni = 58.7 g mol–1, 1 F = 96500 C mol–1)
10. Define half-life of a reaction. Write the expression of half-life for
(i) zero order reaction and
(ii) first order reaction.
11. Write the chemical reactions involved in the extraction of silver from silver ore.
12. Name the two most important allotropes of sulphur. Which one of the two is stable at room
temperature? What happens when the stable form is heated above 370 K?
OR
(i) Write the conditions to maximise the yield of H2 SO4 by contact process.
(ii) Why is K a2 << K a1 for H2 SO4 in water?
(i) 2MnO-4 + 5S 2 - + 16H+ ¾ ¾
¾®
(ii) Cr2 O72 - + 2OH- ¾ ¾
¾®
14. Write the state of hybridisation, shape and IUPAC name of the complex [CoF6 ] 3 - .
(Atomic no. of Co = 27)
15. Write chemical equations when
(i) ethyl chloride is treated with aqueous KOH.
(ii) chlorobenzene is treated with CH3 COCl in presence of anhydrous AlCl 3 .
16. (a) Which alkyl halide from the following pairs would you expect to react more rapidly by S N 2
mechanism and why?
CH3 — CH2 — CH— CH3 CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — Br
|
Br
(b) Racemisation occurs in SN1 reactions. Why?
17. Write the mechanism of the following reaction:
HBr
CH3 CH2 OH ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® CH3 CH2 Br + H2 O
18. Name the reagents used in the following reactions:
(i) Bromination of phenol to 2, 4, 6-tribromophenol
(ii) Butan-2-one to Butan-2-ol
(iii) Friedel–Crafts alkylation of anisole
(iv) Oxidation of primary alcohol to carboxylic acid
19. (i) What type of stoichiometric defect is shown by KCl and why?
(ii) What type of semiconductor is formed when silicon is doped with As?
(iii) Which one of the following is an example of molecular solid:
CO2 or SiO2
(iv) What type of substances would make better magnets, ferromagnetic or ferrimagnetic?
20. (i) Write two advantages of H2 – O2 fuel cell over ordinary cell.
(ii) Equilibrium constant (Kc) for the given cell reaction is 10. Calculate E °cell .
A(s) + B2+(aq) A2+(aq) + B(s)
constant volume:
SO2Cl2(g) ¾ ¾
¾® SO2(g) + Cl2(g)
Experiment Time/s–1 Total pressure/atm
1 0 0.4
2 100 0.7

(Given: log 4 = 0.6021, log 2 = 0.3010)
22. (a) Write the expression for the Freundlich adsorption isotherm for the adsorption of gases on
solids, in the form of an equation.
(b) What are the dispersed phase and dispersion medium of butter?
(c) A delta is formed at the meeting place of sea and river water. Why?
23. (a) What are the different oxidation states exhibited by the lanthanoids?
(b) Write two characteristics of the transition elements.
(c) Which of the 3d-block elements may not be regarded as the transition elements and why?
OR
Assign suitable reasons for the following:
(a) The Mn2+ compounds are more stable than Fe2+ towards oxidation to their +3 state.
(b) In the 3d series from Sc (Z = 21) to Zn (Z = 30), the enthalpy of atomization of Zn is the
lowest.
(c) Sc3+ is colourless in aqueous solution whereas Ti3+ is coloured.
KCN LiAlH 4 HNO2
(i) CH3 Br ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® A ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® B ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ®C
273 K
NH 3 Br + KOH CHCl + NaOH
¾® A ¾ ¾ 2¾ ¾ ¾
¾® B ¾ ¾ ¾ 3¾ ¾ ¾¾® C
D

(a) Anomers
(b) Denaturation of proteins
(c) Essential amino acids
26. (i) Define Antihistamine with an example.
(ii) Which one of the following drugs is an antibiotic:
Morphine, Equanil, Chloramphenicol, Aspirin
(iii) Why is use of aspartame limited to cold food and drink?
27. After the ban on plastic bags, students of one school decided to create awareness among the people
about the harmful effects of plastic bags on the environment and the Yamuna river. To make it
more impactful, they organised a rally by joining hands with other schools and distributed paper
bags to vegetable vendors, shopkeepers and departmental stores. All students pledged not to use
polythene bags in future to save the Yamuna river.
(i) What values are shown by the students?
(ii) What are biodegradable polymers? Give one example.
(iii) Is polythene a homopolymer or copolymer?
28. (a) State Raoult’s law for a solution containing volatile components. Name the solution which
follows Raoult’s law at all concentrations and temperatures.
(b) Calculate the boiling point elevation for a solution prepared by adding 10 g of CaCl2 to 200 g
of water. (Kb for water = 0.512 K kg mol–1, Molar mass of CaCl2 = 111 g mol–1)
OR
(a) Define the following terms:
(i) Azeotrope
(ii) Osmotic pressure
(iii) Colligative properties
(b) Calculate the molarity of 9.8% (w/w) solution of H2 SO4 if the density of the solution is 1.02 g mL–1.
(Molar mass of H2SO4 = 98 g mol–1)
29. (a) Account for the following:
(i) Bi is a strong oxidizing agent in the +5 state.
(ii) PCl5 is known but NCl5 is not known.
(iii) Iron dissolves in HCl to form FeCl2 and not FeCl3.
(b) Draw the structures of the following:
(i) XeOF4
(ii) HClO4
OR
(i) H2S2O8
(ii) Red P4
(i) Sulphur in vapour state exhibits paramagnetism.
(ii) Unlike xenon, no distinct chemical compound of helium is known.
30. (a) Write the products formed when ethanol reacts with the following reagents:
(i) CH3MgBr and then H3O+
(ii) Zn-Hg/conc.HCl
(iii) C6H5CHO in the presence of dilute NaOH
(i) Benzoic acid and Ethyl benzoate
(ii) Propanal and Butan-2-one
OR
(i) CH3CHO is more reactive than CH3COCH3 towards reaction with HCN.
(ii) There are two –NH2 groups in semicarbazide (H2NNHCONH2). However, only one is
involved in the formation of semicarbazone.
(b) Write the chemical equation to illustrate each of the following name reactions:
(i) Rosenmund reduction
SET–II (Questions Uncommon to SET–I)

1. On what principle is the method of zone refining of metals based?
2. Name the temperature above which the formation of micelles takes place.
3. Arrange the following in the increasing order of their basic character:
NH3 , PH3 , AsH3 , SbH3 , BiH3
4. What type of isomerism is exhibited by the following complex:
[Co(NH3 ) 5 SO4 ]Cl
5. Express the relationship between atomic radius (r) and the edge length (a) of the f.c.c. unit cell.
CH3NH2 or NH3
7. Name the compound which on polymerisation gives neoprene.
9. Write the role of the following:
(i) CO in the purification of nickel.
(ii) Graphite rod in the electrometallurgy of aluminium.
(i) 2MnO4– + 5NO2– + 6H+ ¾ ¾
¾®
(ii) Cr2O72– + 14H+ + 6e– ¾ ¾
¾®
11. Write the state of hybridisation, shape and IUPAC name of the complex [Ni(CN)4]2–.
(Atomic no. of Ni = 28)
(i) methyl chloride is treated with AgNO2.
(ii) bromobenzene is treated with CH3Cl in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3.
13. Name the reagents used in the following reactions:
(i) Nitration of phenol to 2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol
(ii) Butanal to Butanol
(iii) Friedel-Crafts acetylation of anisole
(iv) Oxidation of primary alcohol to aldehyde
(i) Polysaccharides
(ii) Amino acids
(iii) Enzymes
SET–III (Questions Uncommon to Set–I and II)

1. Name the depressant which is used to separate ZnS and PbS ores in froth floatation process.
2. Based on the type of dispersed phase, what type of colloid is micelles?
4. What type of isomerism is exhibited by the complex [Co(NH3)5NO2]2+?
5. Write IUPAC name of the following compound:
HO — CH2 — CH— CH2 — OH
|
OH

NH2 NH2
or
CH3
7. What are biocatalysts? Give an example.

9. Write the role of the following:
(i) Iodine in the refining of zirconium.
(ii) Silica in the extraction of copper from copper matte.
11 Complete the following equations:
(i) 2MnO-4 + 5SO23 – + 6H+ ¾ ¾
¾®
(ii) 2CrO24 - + 2H+ ¾ ¾
¾®
12. Write the state of hybridization, shape and IUPAC name of the complex [Co(NH3)6]3+.
(Atomic no. of Co = 27)
(i) ethyl chloride is treated with alcoholic KOH.
(ii) chlorobenzene is treated with CH3Cl in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3.
15. Name the different reagents needed to perform the following reactions:
(i) Phenol to benzene
(ii) Dehydration of propan-2-ol to propene
(iv) Dehydrogenation of ethanol to ethanal
(a) Invert sugar
(b) Vitamins
(c) Nucleoside
zzz
Solutions
SET–I
1. Collectors (e.g., pine oil, xanthates etc.) enhance non-wettability of the ore particles.
2. Van der Waals forces.
3. N—N bond is weaker than P—P bond because of large interelectronic repulsions between lone pairs
of electrons present on the N atom of N—N bond having small bond length.
4. Co-ordination isomerism
3
5. r (atomic radius) = a (edge length of unit cell)
4
6. 2-hydroxybenzaldehyde
7. In CH3 NH2 , the +I effect of —CH3 group makes lone pair of electrons on N-atom more available for
donation. On the other hand in C6H5NH2, the resonance effect causes delocalisation of lone pair of
electrons over benzene ring and makes it less available for donation. Hence, CH3NH2 is more basic
than C6H5NH2.
8. The two component of starch are amylose and amylopectin.
9. Q = I ´ t = 5 A × 20 × 60 s = 6000 C
Ni 2 + + 2e - ¾ ¾
¾® Ni
2 × 96500 C deposit Ni = 58.7 g
58.7 g mol -1
\ 6000 C will deposit Ni = ´ 6000 C = 1.825 g
2 ´ 96500 C mol -1
10. The half life (t ½ )of a reaction is the time in which the concentration of a reactant is reduced to one
half of its initial concentration.
[R ]0
(i) t ½ for a zero order reaction = where [R]0 = initial concentration, k = rate constant
2k
0.693
(ii) t ½ for a first order reaction =
k
11. The chemical reaction involved in the extraction of silver from silver ore are
4Ag( s) + 8NaCN( aq) +2H2 O(l) + O2 ( g) ¾ ¾
¾® 4Na [Ag(CN) 2 ]( aq) + 4NaOH( aq)
Sodium dicyanoargentate (I)
(Soluble complex)
2Na [Ag(CN) 2 ]( aq) + Zn( s) ¾ ¾

¾® Na 2 [Zn(CN) 4 ]( aq) + 2Ag( s) ¯
12. Two most important allotropes of sulphur are rhombic sulphur and monoclinic sulphur. The stable
form at room temperature is rhombic sulphur. When rhombic sulphur is heated above 370 K it gets
converted into monoclinic sulphur.
OR
(i) The key step in the manufacture of H2 SO4 by contact process is
2SO2 ( g) + O2 ( g) l 2SO3 ( g) D r H ° = -196.6 kJ mol–1
The forward reaction is exothermic and proceed with decrease in number of moles. Therefore,
low temperature (optimum temperature 720 K), high pressure (in practice 2 bar) and use of
catalyst V2O5 to increase the rate of reaction at low temperature are the favourable conditions
for maximum yield of H2 SO4 .
(ii) H2SO4 is a dibasic acid, it ionizes in two steps and has two dissociation constants.
H2 SO4 ( aq) + H2 O (l) r H3 O+ ( aq) + HSO-4 ( aq); K a > 10
HSO-4 ( aq) + H2 O (l) r H3 O+ ( aq) + SO24 - ( aq) ; K a = 1.2 × 10–2
2
K a2 << K a , because the negatively charged HSO-4 ion has much less tendency to donate a
proton to H2 O as compared to neutral H2SO4.
13. (i) MnO-4 + 8H+ + 5e - ¾ ¾
¾® Mn 2 + + 4H2 O] × 2
S2 - ¾ ¾
¾® S + 2e - ] ´ 5
2MnO4 - + 5S 2 - + 16H+ ¾ ¾
¾® 2Mn 2 + + 5S + 8H2 O
(ii) Cr2 O72 - + 2OH- ¾ ¾

¾® 2CrO24 - + H2 O
14. [ CoF6 ] 3 - : Hexafluoridocobaltate (III) ion; Co 3 + = [Ar]3d 6
3d 4s 4p 4d
XX XX XX XX XX XX
XX = Electron pair from ligand F –

3 2
Hybridisation = sp d , Shape = Octahedral
15. (i) CH3—CH2—Cl + KOH(aq) CH3—CH2—OH + KCl
Ethyl chloride Ethyl alcohol
(ii) Cl Cl O Cl
O
Anhyd.AlCl3 —C—CH3
+ CH3—C—Cl +
Chlorobenzene Acetyl o-chloro
chloride acetophenone
C—CH3
(Minor)
O
p-chloro
acetophenone
(Major)
16. (a) CH3—CH2—CH2—CH2—Br. Being primary alkyl halide, there would be less steric hinderance.
(b) This is due to the fact that carbocations are the intermediates in S N 1 reactions. Carbocations
being sp2 hybridised are planar species, therefore, the attack of the nucleophile on it occurs from
both the faces (front and rear) with almost equal ease resulting in the formation of 50 : 50 mixture
of two enantiomers i.e., racemic mixture.
17. Refer to Ans. 26 (a) Set-I CBSE Delhi 2014.
18. (i) Aqueous bromine (Br2/H2O)
(ii) Lithium aluminium hydride (LiAlH4 ) or sodium borohydride (NaBH4 ).
(iii) Anhydrous aluminium chloride (anhyd. AlCl3)
(iv) Acidified potassium dichromate solution (K2Cr2O7/H2SO4) or alkaline potassium permanganate

solution (KMnO4/OH–) followed by hydrolysis with dil. H2SO4.
19. (i) KCl shows schottky defect as the cation, K+ and anion, Cl– are of almost similar sizes.
(ii) n-type semiconductor.
(iii) CO2
(iv) Ferromagnetic
20. (i) The two main advantages of H2–O2 fuel cell over ordinary cell are as follows:
l It has high efficiency of 60%–70%.
l It does not cause any pollution.
(ii) A ( s) + B 2 + ( aq) l A 2 + ( aq) + B ( s)

Here, n = 2, K = 10
o 0.059
E cell = ´ log K c
n
o 0.059 0.059
E cell = × log 10 = ´ 1 = 0.0295 V
2 2
21. Refer to Ans. 22, Set-I CBSE Delhi 2014.
22. (a) Freundlich adsorption isotherm equation for adsorption of gases on solids:
x
= kp1 / n ( n > 1).
m
x 1
or log = log k + log p
m n
where x is the mass of the gas adsorbed on mass m of the adsorbent at pressure p, k and n are
constants which depends on the nature of the gas and adsorbent at a particular temperature.
(b) In butter, water acts as disperse phase and oil acts as dispersion medium.
(c) River water is a colloidal solution of clay. Sea water contains a variety of electrolytes.
When river water meets the sea water, the electrolytes present in sea water coagulate the
colloidal solution of clay resulting in its deposition with the formation of delta.
23. (a) The common oxidation state of lanthanoid is +3. Besides this some of the lanthanoid also exhibit
+2 and +4 oxidation states.
(b) The important characteristics of the transition elements are:
(i) All transition elements are metallic in nature.
(ii) Transition elements exhibit variable oxidation states.
(iii) Most of the transition elements form coloured compounds.
(iv) A number of transition elements and their compounds show catalytic properties.
(c) In 3d transition series zinc is not regarded as transition element as Zn atom has completely filled
d orbitals (3d10) in its ground state as well as in its oxidised state.
OR
(a) The electronic configuration of Mn 2 + is [Ar] 3d5 which is half filled and hence stable. So Mn 2 +
cannot lose third electron easily. On the other hand, Fe 2 + has electronic configuration [Ar] 3d6.
It tends to lose one electron to acquire stable [Ar] 3d5 electronic configuration. Hence Mn2+ is
more stable than Fe2+ towards oxidation.
(b) In the formation of metallic bonds, no electrons from 3d-orbitals are involved in case of zinc,
while in all other metals of the 3d series, electrons from the d-orbitals are always involved in the
formation of metallic bonds. That is why, the enthalpy of atomisation of zinc is the lowest in the
series.
(c) Ti3+ has one electron in d-orbitals (3d1) which can absorb light in visible region for d–d
transition. Hence, it is coloured in aqueous solution. Sc3+ has no d electron (3d 0), therefore, no
light is absorbed for d–d transition. Hence, it is colourless in aqueous solution.
24. Refer to Ans 27 Set-I CBSE Delhi 2014.
25. (a) The carbohydrates which differ in configuration at the glycosidic carbon (i.e., C1 in aldoses and
C2 in ketoses) are called anomers e.g., a–D-(+)-glucose and b–D-(+)-glucose.
(b) Denaturation of Proteins: When a protein in its native form is subjected to a change, such as
change in temperature or change in pH, the hydrogen bonds are disturbed. Due to this, globules
unfold and helix get uncoiled and protein loses its biological activity. This is called denaturation
of protein. During denaturation, 2° and 3° structures are destroyed but 1° structures remain intact,
e.g., coagulation of egg while on boiling, curdling of milk, etc.
(c) The amino acids which cannot be synthesised in our body and must be obtained through diet are
known as essential amino acids e.g. valine, lysine, histidine.
26. (i) The drugs which interfere with the natural action of histamine by competing with histamine for
binding of receptor where histamine exerts its effect are called anti histamine e.g., brompheniramine,
terfenadine, cetrizine etc.
(ii) Chloramphenicol
(iii) Use of aspartame is limited to cold foods because it is unstable at cooking temperature.
27. (i) Concern towards water pollution, concern for environmental protection, team work, socially
aware.
(ii) The polymers which can be broken into small segments by enzyme catalysed reactions or to
some extent by oxidation over a period of time are called biodegradable polymers. The required
enzymes are produced by microorganism e.g., poly-b-hydroxybutyrate-co-b-hydroxyvalerate
(PHBV), nylon-2-nylon-6 etc.
(iii) Polyethene is an addition polymer.
28. (a) It states that for a solution of volatile liquids, the partial vapour pressure of each component in
the solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction. Thus, for a solution of volatile liquids
A and B, PA µ xA and PB µ xB or PA = PAo x A and PB = PBo x B where PA and PB are partial
vapour pressures, xA and xB are mole fractions, PAo and PBo are vapour pressure of pure
components A and B respectively.
Ideal solution.
(b) The given quantities are:
WB = 10 g, WA = 200 g, K b = 0 .512 K Kg mol–1,
M B = 111 g mol–1
¾® Ca 2 + + 2Cl -
CaCl 2 ¾ ¾
3
On assuming complete dissociating of CaCl2, i = =3
1
i ´ K b ´ WB ´ 1000
Substituting these values in the formula, DTb = , we get
M B ´ WA
3 ´ 0 .512K Kg mol -1 ´ 10 g ´ 1000 g kg –1

DTb =
111 g mol -1 ´ 200 g
DTb = 0.692K
OR
(a) (i) The binary mixtures of liquids having same composition in liquid and vapour phase and
boil at a constant temperature are called azeotropes.
(ii) The excess of pressure which must be applied to the solution side to prevent the passage
of solvent into it through a semipermeable membrane is called osmotic pressure.
(iii) The properties of solutions which depend only on the number of solute particles in the
solution but independent of their nature are called colligative properties.
(b) Let the mass of solution = 100 g
\ Mass of H2 SO4 = 9.8 g
Mass of H2 SO4
Number of mole of H2 SO4 =
Molar mass
9.8 g
= = 0.1 mol
98 g mol -1
Mass of solution
Volume of solution =
Density of solution
100 g 100
= = mL
-1 1.02
1.02 g mL
100 1
= mL ´
1.02 1000 mL L-1
1
= L
10.2
Moles of solute, H2 SO4
Molarity =
Volume of solution (in L)
0 .1 mol
=
1L
10. 2
= 1.02 mol L–1 or 1.02 M
29. (a) (i) Due to inert pair effect Bi in +3 state is much more stable than in +5 state. Therefore, Bi in
+5 state accepts two electrons and get reduced to more stable +3 state. Hence Bi is strong
oxidising in +5 state.
(ii) Nitrogen with n = 2, has s and p orbitals only. It does not have d orbitals to expand its
covalency beyond four. Hence, NCl 5 is not known. PCl5 is known as P has vacant
3d orbital to which 3s electrons can be excited to make available five half filled orbitals
needed for the formation of five P—Cl bonds.
(iii) Iron reacts with HCl to form FeCl2 and H2.
Fe + 2HCl ¾ ¾ ¾® FeCl2 + H2
H2 thus produced prevents the oxidation of FeCl2 to FeCl3.
(b) (i) H
(ii)
O
O
F F
Xe
F F
Cl
Square pyramidal O O
O
Perchloric acid
OR
(a) (i) (ii) P P P
O O
S S
O O O —P P — P P — P P —
O
OH HO
P P P
(b) (i) In vapour form sulphur partly exists as S2 molecules which have two unpaired electrons in
the antibonding p * molecular orbitals like O2 molecule and hence, exhibits paramagnetism.
(ii) This is due to the following reasons:
He does not have d-orbitals in the valence shell and hence electron cannot be excited to
higher energy levels like in Xe to form bonds.
Ionisation enthalpy of He is sufficiently higher than those of oxygen and fluorine.
(iii) Acids which contains P—H bonds have reducing character. Since H3PO2 contains two
P—H bonds while H3PO3 contains only one P–H bond therefore H3PO2 is a stronger
reducing agent than H3PO3.
30. (a) (i) O OMgBr OH
CH3MgBr H 3O +
CH3—C—H CH3—C—H CH3—CH—CH3
Ethanal CH3 Propan-2-ol
Zn - Hg
(ii) CH3 CHO + 4 [H] ¾ ¾ ¾¾ ¾® CH3 — CH3 + H2 O
Acetaldehyde conc. HCl Ethane
(iii) O OH O
C H CH CH2 C H CH CH CHO
O
dil. NaOH – H2O
+ CH3 C H
Benzaldehyde Ethanal Aldol 3-phenylprop-2-enal
(b) (i) Benzoic acid being an acid reacts with NaHCO3 solution to produce brisk effervescence
due to evolution of CO2 while ethyl benzoate does not give this test.
– +
COOH COONa
+ NaHCO3 + CO2 + H2O

Benzoic acid Sod. benzoate
COOC2H5
NaHCO3 soln.
No effervescence due to evolution of CO2
Ethyl benzoate
(ii) Propanal being an aldehyde reduces Tollens’ reagent to silver mirror but butan-2-one
being a ketone does not.
CH3CH2CHO + 2[Ag(NH3)2]+ + 3OH - ® CH3–CH2–COO - + 2Ag ¯ + 2H2O + 4NH3
Propanal Tollens’ reagent Silver mirror
Tollens' reagent
CH3CH2COCH3 No silver mirror
Butan-2-one
OR
(a) (i) The methyl group due to its +I effect reduce the magnitude of positive charge on carbonyl
carbon atom. Moreover it also hinder the approach of nucleophile CN- . Since in
acetaldehyde there is one methyl while in acetone there are two methyl groups attached to
carbonyl group therefore acetaldehyde is more reactive than acetone towards nucleophilic
addition with HCN.
– –
(ii) O O O
+ +
H2N – C – NHNH2 H2N = C – NH–NH2 H2N–C = NH – NH2
Semicarbazide has two –NH2 groups but one of them (i.e., directly attached to C = O) is
involved in resonance as shown above. Thus, electron density on this NH2 group
decreases hence it does not act as a nucleophile. In contrast, the lone pair of electrons on
the other NH2 group (i.e., attached to —NH) is not involved in resonance and hence is
available for nucleophilic attack on the C = O group of aldehydes and ketones.
(b) (i) Rosenmund reduction:
O O
½½ Pd - BaSO
½½
R ¾ C ¾ Cl + H2 ¾¾¾¾¾
¾
4
® R ¾ C ¾ H + HCl
Acyl chloride S Aldehyde
O O
C Cl C H
Pd-BaSO4
+ H2 S
+ HCl
a
( i ) X 2 / Red P
(ii) R ¾ C H2 ¾ COOH ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾¾® R ¾ CH ¾ COOH ( X = Cl or Br)
Carboxylic acid ( ii ) H 2 O ½
X
a - Halocarboxylic acid
( i ) Cl 2 / Red P
CH3 ¾ COOH ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® Cl ¾ CH2 ¾ COOH
Carboxylic acid ( ii ) H 2 O Chloroacetic acid
(iii) Cannizzaro reaction:

conc. KOH
2HCHO ¾¾¾¾¾
¾® CH3 ¾ OH + HCOO- K +
SET–II
1. Zone refining is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in melt than in the solid
state of metal.
2. Kraft temperature
3. Order of basic character
BiH3 < SbH3 < AsH3 < PH3 < NH3
4. Ionisation isomerism
Edge length ( a)
5. Atomic radius (r) =
2 2
6. CH3NH2 is more basic than NH3. CH3 group due to its +ve I effect pushes electron towards nitrogen
··
in CH3 NH2 and this makes the unshared electron pair more available for sharing with the proton of
the acid.
Cl
|
7. Chloroprene (CH2 = C - CH = CH2 )
9. (i) Impure nickel when heated in a current of CO forms volatile complex nickel tetracarbonyl,
Ni(CO)4 leaving behind impurities.
330 - 350K
Ni + 4CO ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾
¾® Ni(CO) 4
The nickel tetracarbonyl complex thus obtained is then heated to a higher temperature so that it
is decomposed to give pure metal.
450 – 470 K
Ni(CO)4 ¾ ¾ ¾¾¾ ¾® Ni + 4CO
(ii) Graphite rod acts as anode and graphite lined iron acts as cathode in the electrometallurgy of
aluminium.
Carbon reacts with oxygen liberated at anode producing CO and CO2 otherwise oxygen
liberated at the anode may oxidise some of the liberated aluminium back to Al2O3.
At Anode: C( s) + O2 - ( melt) ¾ ¾
¾® CO( g) + 2e -
C( s) + 2O2 - ( melt) ¾ ¾
¾® CO2 ( g) + 4e -
At Cathode : Al 3 + (melt) + 3e - ¾ ¾
¾® Al (l)
10. (i) 2MnO4– + 5NO2– + 6H+ ¾ ¾
¾® 2Mn2+ + 5NO3– + 3H2O
(ii) Cr2O72– + 14H+ + 6e– ¾ ¾
¾® 2Cr3+ + 7H2O
11. [Ni(CN)4]2–: Tetracyanonickelate (II) ion, Ni2+ (3d8)
3d 4s 4p
XX XX XX XX XX = Electron pair from CN– ion
dsp2 hybrid
dsp hybridisation in [Ni (CN)4]2– leads to square planar shape.
2
12. (i) CH3 - Cl + AgNO2 ¾ ¾

¾® CH3 NO2 + AgCl
Methylchloride Nitromethane
(Major product)
(ii) Br Br Br
Anhyd. AlCl3 CH3
+ CH3—Cl +
o-bromo toluene CH3
(Minor)
p-bromo toluene
(Major)
13. (i) Conc. HNO3/conc. H2SO4

(ii) Lithium aluminium hydride (LiAlH4) or sodium borohydride (NaBH4)
(iii) Acetyl chloride (CH3COCl) in the presence of catalyst anhydrous AlCl3.
+ -
(iv) Pyridinium chlorochromate, PCC (C5 H5 N HCrO3 C l in CH2 Cl 2 ).
20. (i) Carbohydrates that yield a large number of monosaccharide units on hydrolysis are called
polysaccharides e.g., starch, cellulose, gums etc.
(ii) Amino acids are the compounds, whose molecule contains both the carboxylic acid (–COOH)
group and the amino (–NH2) group of the various amino acids, the a-amino acids are most
important because they are the building blocks of proteins.
(iii) Enzyme: Enzymes are complex nitrogenous organic compounds produced in living cells of
plants and animals. Chemically, enzymes are globular proteins with high molar mass ranging
from 15,000 to 1,000,000 g mol–1.
SET–III
1. Sodium cyanide (NaCN)
2. Associated colloids
4. Linkage isomerism
5. Propane–1, 2, 3-triol
NH2 NH2
6. is stronger base than as CH3 group is electron releasing by +I effect and hyperconjugation
effect.
CH3
7. Enzymes are termed as biocatalysts as they catalyse numerous reactions that occur in the bodies of
animals and plants to maintain life process e.g., invertase, pepsin, urease.
9. (i) When crude zirconium is heated in an evacuated vessel with iodine, volatile ZrI 4 is formed
which vapourises leaving behind impurities. It is then decomposed by heating over a tungsten
filament at 2075K to give pure zirconium.
870 K 2075 K
Zr( s) + 2I 2 ( g) ¾ ¾ ¾¾® ZrI 4 ( g) ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾ ¾® Zr( s) + 2I 2 ( g)
Impure Zirconium Tungsten filament Pure
zirconium tetraiodide zirconium
(ii) Copper matte chiefly consist of Cu2S and FeS. In the converter FeS gets converted into FeO.
Silica (SiO2) acts as a flux to remove FeO impurity as FeSiO3 slag.
2FeS + 3O2 ¾¾
¾® 2FeO + 2SO2
FeO + SiO2 ¾¾
¾® FeSiO3
Impurity Flux Slag
11 ¾® 2Mn2+ + 5SO42– + 3H2O

(i) 2MnO-4 + 5SO23 – + 6H+ ¾ ¾
¾® Cr2O72– + H2O
(ii) 2CrO24 - + 2H+ ¾ ¾
12. [Co(NH3)6]3+ : Hexaamminecobalt (III), Co3+ (3d6)
3d 4s 4p
3+
Atomic orbitals of Co ion
3+
3d 4s 4p
[Co(NH3)6]
XX XX XX XX XX XX XX = Electron pair
(Inner orbital complex) from NH3
d 2sp 3 hybrid
d2sp3 hybridisation in [Co(NH3)6]3+ leads to octahedral shape.
13. (i) CH3CH2Cl + alc. KOH ¾ ¾ — CH2 + KCl + H2O

¾® CH2 —
Ethyl chloride Ethene
Cl Cl Cl
CH3
Anhyd. AlCl3
(ii) + CH3Cl +
Chlorobenzene 1-chloro-2-methylbenzene
(Minor) CH3
1-chloro-4-methylbenzene
(Major)
15. (i) Zinc dust
(ii) 85% H2SO4 at 440 K
(iv) Heat copper at 573 K (Cu/573 K)
24. (a) Sucrose is dextrorotatory (+66.5°) but after hydrolysis it gives an equimolar mixture of
D-(+)-glucose and D-(–)-fructose, which is laevorotatory. This change of specific rotation from
dextrorotation to laevorotation is called inversion of sugar and the mixture obtained is called
invert sugar.
(b) Vitamins are generally regarded as organic compounds required in the diet in small amounts to
perform specific biological functions for normal maintenance of optimum growth and health of
the organism.
(c) Nucleoside is a unit formed by the combination of nitrogen containing heterocyclic base and
pentose sugar.
HO––H 2C 5' O Base
4'
H H1'
H 3' 2' H
OH OH
zzz

Examination Paper of CBSE CLass XII

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Examination Paper of CBSE CLass XII

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Examination Paper of CBSE CLass XII

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the content of the document?

What is the content of the document?

What years do the examination papers cover?

What years do the examination papers cover?

CHEMISTRY

CBSE (Delhi) SET–I

CH2 CH3 KMnO4

(b) Describe the following reactions:

CBSE (Delhi) SET–II

CBSE (Delhi) SET–III

Perfect crystal n-type p-type

20. Mass of glucose (WB ) = 54 g

(iii) 2F2 (g) + 2H2 O (l) ¾¾® 4H (aq) + 4F - (aq) + O2 (g)

Structure: Square planar.

(ii) Neoprene Chloroprene H2 C = C ¾ CH = CH2

28. c = 0.00241 M, K = 7.896 ´ 10 -5 S cm -1 , l¥m = 390.5 S cm 2 mol - 1

(iv) This is because half filled d-subshell (3d 5 ) in Mn 2+ is more stable.

30. (a) (i)

(ii) BH3 / THF, H2 O2 / OH– ,

Benzaldehyde Acetophenone Benzal acetophenone

CBSE (Delhi) SET–II

Benzoic acid Benzoyl chloride Benzaldehyde

Sodium benzoate Benzene

CBSE (Delhi) SET–III

Alignment of magnetic moments in ferromagnetic substance.

CBSE (All India) SET–I

17. Write the structures of the monomers of the following polymers :

(ii) [Co (NH3 ) 5 Cl] 2+

CBSE (All India) SET–II

CBSE (All India) SET–III

Benzyl chloride Benzyl alcohol

17. Polymer Monomer Structure of the monomer

Alignment of magnetic moments in ferromagnetic substance.

25. (i) [Cr(H2 O) 2 (C 2 O4 ) 2 ] -

(iii) XeF2 b.p. = 2

(a) (i) Ca 3 P2 + 6H2 O ¾¾® PH3 + 3 Ca (OH) 2

Benzaldehyde Benzoyl chloride Benzophenone

CBSE (All India) SET–II

Substituting the values

· Ag + ions in cathodic half cell.

Ion Configuration Unpaired electrons Magnetic moment (m )

Mn 2+ 3d5 4s0 5 5 (5 + 2) = 5.92 B.M.

Cu 2+ 3d 9 4s0 1 1 (1 + 2) = 1.73 B.M.

CBSE (Delhi) SET–I

(ii) I - ( aq ) + H2 O( l ) + O3( g ) ¾¾®

(i) —CH2Cl or —Cl

15. Complete the following reaction equations: 2

(i) —OH + SOCl2

16. Explain what is meant by 2

23. Account for the following: 3

(b) Give an explanation for each of the following observations:

CBSE (Delhi) SET–II

(ii) Cr2 O72–

(b) Explain the following observations:

CBSE (Delhi) SET–III

(ii) MnO -4 (aq) + Fe2+(aq) + H + (aq) ¾¾®

(Given: E o = - 0 × 40V, Eo = - 0 × 44V)

CBSE (Delhi) SET–I

The shape would be square planar.

15. (i) OH + SOCl 2 ¾